@

teach
yourself

nepali
michaelhutt
ano
abhisubedi

For over 60 years, more Ìhan

40 millionpeoplôhaveleamtover
750 $bjects Ìhe tê€ch yourselÍ
\ /qí witì impressive
resufts.

be whereyouwantto be
withteach youFelt
 o
ü

o
ForUKoÍdoronquirlos:
gI1! 4SB:I0lophon8:
ploass coniact Booleoint Ltd,130MiltonPaÍk,Aiingdon.
{44 (011 Pz|nrj. Fax.+tA(0)12354üX54,Linìsareopen
oxon. 5
09.üF17,00, Monday to Satuíday, wiüìa 24-houÍ m6asag6 answErino s€Íì,/ice.
Dú s t
úoui ourütlssandhowt0orderareavallabls
ForUSAoÍdãr6nquiÍi€s:
Blacldlch
0H43004{t15,USA.
ploas€
TslsDhono:
atwü,wl€actwursslÍ.co.uk
conüctMccaw-Hill Customcr
1-8fl}722-4726.
SsÍüc€s. P0Box545.
Foc161+755-5645. o
toÍ Canada ordoronquiri€s:
Wìiby.onhrio,tl N986,Canada
pleas€ conbclMccnw-Hill
Ì€l€phone: 905,1Í10
Bysrson Ld. 300WaterS!
5íi00.Far9054305@0.
lnfoducüon 1
5
LongronowÍEd astheaulÌìorihtivo sourcrl0r solí-guld€d loaÍning - ryiüÌmoreúìan50
l||. ilapallrcriptandsoundsy3hm 6
+
millioncopies

gtídsh
soldwoÍldwide
fieldsofhngua06s,
LibnryCabloguing
íromúìoBritish Library.
- üo brrh yoü||olls6Íiosincludes
cnb, hobbies, büsinsss,
inPublicalion
computino
DatuaúAaguerecord
over500üü0slnüìe
and€ducatlon.
fortìis titl6isa\aihble
0l .|r youBlndu?
I íE'eüngiE btts
isandâ,?inNêpâli; fiÍstp€ílonpionouns
20
o
UW oíCwtêssAhloghtd Nunberoffile. (1 tro);secondperson ()or4;
Fonoun
tlrstpublished inUKI 909byHodd6r Education, 338EuíonBoad. London, NWl3BH. I an,)ouaÍe,t{€aÍewilhho;noüns;
tirstpublished inUS1999byÌhoÌilcGnw.Hill Companiss, Inc.
asking andansrvering quesüom
Thisodiüon Dublished 2003.
'Tïebachyoüsrllname isa rooistorcdtndenaÍkoÍHoddoÍ Hoadline 2 anMng attlv dlege
CopyÍightO 1999, 20mMlcha6l HuttandAbhiSüb€di üìiÍdpcrson pDnouns (rê,sre,lher;
/n UÍ Allrighhresorved. Apartíromanypeflnitod useundor UKcopyÍigtìt law,nopart lìeis,sâô,s,í i6,fieyârewiü ho;
0l thispublicaüon maybereproduc€d or lransmitbd in aÍryÍoÍmoÍ W anymoans,
electmnlc0rmochanical, including phobcopy, recording, oÍ aÍìyInÍoÍÍnaúion, stonoeand f,is,&af,ôhsse andfiose âdjedives
retÍloval
System, wi[ìoutpeÍmlssion inwÍilingÍÍomllìepubllsÌ€r or under licrnceíÍom 02 howfárb lt to KeqmaÍdu,brothor? g
theCopydght Licenslno Agency Limited. FuÍtÌÌ€r details otsuchlicencss (ÍoÍreprogÍaphtc
reproduction)mayb€obbined Íromüe CopyÍight Licsnsino Aoency Limlbd,ofSaffron SavietúKalmandu
House, 6-10 KÍtv StÍeet, London, ECINfiS.
pronouns wilhche;all qüiÍ€anddherai
/nUSAllrightsreseryed. Except aspsrmitod uMertìe unitodSht€sCoDVÍiSht Ac1ol
1976, nopartoÍhis bookmayborsproduc€d oÍdistibubdinanyÍoÍÍnorWanymmns, veÍy,írár]1queslioning Ìvods(irìtoÌrogalivss);
or sloredin a databaso or rstÍieralsystem, wihod thgpÍiorwÍiüenpeÍmission 0Í
thêDublisher üs simpls sentence
Types€t byTÍanset ümited, CowntÍy, Enohnd. 1rcatandhl
PrintedinGr8at BÍihinhÍ Hodder Educatlon, a diúsion0Í HoddsÍ Hôadtins, 338Euston
Road, London, NWlsBH,byCox& Vvyrmn Ltd,Readlno, B€Íkhko. po6ho6ilions:{nã,-b4a,dekhi;
Thopublishsr lìasus€dtb b€st0ndsavouís toensure llìat$s URLS forexternal vJ€bsfteg usingrslalionshiptermsto addÍess people
Íeforcdb in$is bookaÍecoÍÍoct andactive attìe timeoígoingio press. Howe\aí ihs
publisherandüìoauhorhav€no responsibillty íoÍ tlìe wDbsites andcanmalcno 03 howmaM 17
ouaraflhlhata sitowillremain liveoÍ thaÌüe coflterÌt willrsmaln r€l6vaÍt, d€c€nt or 5 studentsatfu lawuqe *hool
appr0pÍiato.
Hoddor Headlineb poliryis b usepapers tìat arcnatural, renewable andÍocyclaDls úìeNopali numêrals; numbers ofpeople
products and madsfrom woodgrownin sustainable Íorests.Ìï0 loggingand
manulactuÍlng pÍoc6sses areexMedt0coÍìform tolheenvironmenbl r€guhtions 0íthe 6sewWttpeanr@n
couftyofoÍioin.
lmpr8sslonnumbêr 10I I7 6 5
Yoar 2009200820072006
 0l glvem€25Ìupee6
howmaú
ofthings;
numbeÍs
13hiringa i*"shaw
andAnit
7Karnal
theimperatives;thepostposition
lái
ofportable
possession using
items;
asobjêctmaÍksr; present
thehabitual tense:
numbers withoutdassmers
negative
altemative foíns;thepostposition
whose is it? paíicìêna;
-tiÍatowards;thenegative
I Jyoti'shatses hav?sandhuncha:
laJabut,lathough,
owneÍship: ândnames;
.ko,'ki,'kãwilhnouns
youknovelc OK,a dght
wordsfoÍand:ra,ani:t know,
07 thebest
usingthehã
14towtsaN villages
I Batan'sndücat
comparatúês likesand
andsuperlatives;
using'ko,'ki, 'kãwithunchanged
ov{nership
dislikesusing man parnu; kinawhY,
case')pronouns;
('direct nry'your'dtt
klnabhane ôecause
one3olvnremphasizing ownershipusing
08 I cameyesteÍday
ãphno;asking questions: theusgofki
15Sandhya üopsby
l0 whose boú tstlí!s? pastforms
thesimple pasttense;üe simple
ownershipusing'ko,-ki -kãÚthchanged
oÍhunütobe;thiyoandbhayo;
case')pÍonoüns;
('oblique inteÍrogaìives:
locationandmovement soneone and
kaskowhose, keko oíwhaf, kahãko
so/nefhinú[ theusesof kehiandkohi
oflfrcnwhere?
16a visitttotnShanka,'/.asad
05 whatdoYoudo? verbs;transitive
andintransitive
transitive
11flÊ 6ú andthePot
verbsandthesuffix-le;further of'le;
uses
ÍormofveÍis:thehabitual
thedictionary
paÍtsofthebody
presenttênse;usingthehabitual present
09 l'llgowhenl'veeat9.n
tense;dhoraiiasousualy,nâÍaionly'
kahile 17a dayofrwork
panialso,too,evenkahlle?when?,
modes of twoveÍbswiththesamesubjectthe€ra
kahilyal
kãhlsomel,imes, paninevel
participle;
thereportedspeech-malkeÍ re
newpostpositions:
tÍanôport 'pachiafieÍ'
18a chance inDatieeling
encountet
.samma uPto,unÍtt'ko lãgifor
thecontinuous tênsesindai chaì
12wonenìnthevíllages
which one?thisone!theusesofcãhii
present
thehabitual tense: foÍms;
feminine
otherformsoÍthemnjunctive partìciple;
ofdaydaysoftheweeK
tìmes
expressions ofage;further terms
relationship
fÍequency:
PaÌak
't0 inthemaÍtet 14 t! l'll go neÍ y3ar 193
19outshowing 25goinghomefü Dasain
needed alldavailabletúhinu andpãinu; theprobable
fuluretense;theinÍiniüve
+
Íoodvocabulary; using.lãiinstead of lâgnu:t hat doesit costto...?howbng
-ko lãgi doesit taketo...? wotdsfoí apprcxinâW
11 it seemsfineto me 148 t! whatshouldI do? 202
n a pbceto stayinf\ahnandu â aïivingat Tibhuvanlnternational
Aitpott
feelings: theuseofnouns withlãgnu; must,should,don'thaveto, nust,hadto,
howdoyoulìkeNepal? usingadjectives theverbsmilnuandmilãunu
úth làgnu; more passive veós;srim,i'aÍ
Ío 17 you'rcnotallowedin 211
iasto; makingadjectives into adverbs 27Anedcansat Pashupati
tenpte
12 rirhero hashegone? í58 is íta ight to...?usingiheiníinitivê
with
21a latestaft huncha/hiidaina;
theydon'tallowyouto...i
themmpleted present tense; the
stating bhaeÍabe,'i?g
andbhaen pani despitebeing,
timeoÍdayusing bajyo Íeligion
in Nepal
2 whicllcounües haveyouvisited? í8 I canleamNepali 219
themmpleted pasttense; speech
reporting fr hownany knguagescanyouspeak?
usingbhanêra; because it i8,becauseít was: to beableto...:toget to,nanageto,
theako participle with-le;using the-eko describing a verb;to /eâmto, feac,fo;
participle asanadjective; ordinalnumbers lo !ÍanlÍo...;verbsmeaning to believe
13 dearRaiu.., 173 í9 at thedocto/s 227
B anexchange of lefteÉ I Wani vtsilske doctor
using the€ko participle âsa verb; expressingpurpose;
beginning
to dosomelhing;
howlongisit sínce...?:seeing orhearing afierdoingsomelhing;
re Ìembering
and
another person'sactions; the-ekopâÍticiple foÍgelting;beforedoingsomething:
uiithhoorhoina; thoughts andintentions postpositionsbeginningwith-bhandã
usingbheneÍa andbhaneko: whatdoes 20 the mapot llepal 238
ÍhrbwordÍnear?theNepali year & 0v napof Nepal
14 if it rains... í83 usingpamüwithlocaüons; above,belov
24outtrcknng ôeyond morepostposiüons beginning
with
rêalconditional sentences; usingholãto .bhandã;theuseoÍbhanne lo meanramed
meanperhaps, niüt be;the-neparticiple theuseofbhannê lo meanItEÍ
asanadjective; using the-neparticiple 21 I usodtosmoke 2Ii
totalkabout
futureaclionsi
theverb 31badhabits
p[gnutoaffive,suffice thehabitual
pastlênse;finishing,
stopping,
 quitüngiwhiledoing,
willhaveto,usedtohaveb'
afretdoiv
inmediately
wishing'
Í-f
tl
hoping anddeciding II
12 shallI maketea?
=
P can@ingtte teaPanY
may,?verbsinthesubjuncüve;doing +
13
somelhing peÍson:
foÍanottìer
withdinq tyingândseeking
if he'dtâkenlhêmedicine
colnpoundverDs

o
-
g a deahíntheneighboulnod
CL
aheadY done: @nloundverbsúh saknu;
Welcometo TeachYourselÍNepali tr
o
unreal conditional theshort
sentences;
Nopali is a member of the Indo-Aryan group of laÍÌguagesthat
completed present Íealizatìon:
tense;
Includesmost of the languagesof üe northem half of the Indian
attheendoÍsenlences;
usingrahecha
theveíi clnnufoknow,tore@gnize
aub-continent.Theselânguagesarc derivedfrom Sanshit in rnuch
tho eameway that úe EuropeanRomancelanguagesarc derived
t
o
II
U iÍ thafshowit i8... ftom Latin, and eachhas developedits own distinctive chamcter
34twoPofteÊ anda to @ng ovcr thecourseof manycenturies.Nepali is úe lingua ftancaof the
compound verbswithhãlnu;continuous ccntsalândeastemHimalaya,and the nationallanguageof NepâI.
Íl is alsorecognizedby the Indian Constituúonasa major language =
tenses usinglahanu;shoÍtreâlconditional
of India becauseof its dominancein Sikkim and úe Darjeeling
senGnces

1
district of West BengâI. Bhutan promotes the use of its own
appendices national language, Dzongkh4 but therc too Nepali is widely
cardinalnumbers spokenandunderstood.
teÍÍns
kinship Nepalis oneofthe world's mostlingústically variegatedcountries;
keyio êxercises 2U morethan40 differentlanguaçs havebeenrecorded.Justoverhalf
Nèpali+ngllshglossary 302 the populationhasNepali as its mothertongue:the mother-tongue
glossary 322 Nepali-speakersare prirnarily the higher caste and poüúcally
EnglisH'lepali
dominantBúuns (Brahmins)and Cheais. Most of the rest of the
populationspeakseither Indo-Aryan languagessuch as Maithili,
Bhojpuri, Awadhi andHindi, or Tibeto-Burmanlanguagessuchas
Tibetan,Tamang,NewaÍi, Gurüng,MâgaÌ,Rai andLimbu. The use
of theselanguageswas discourageduntil 1990,when a democracy
movementsucceeded in grantingsomeÍights to Nepal's linguistic
minorities.However,the level of bilingualism with Nepali is now
very high in mostpartsof úe kingdom.
This book is designedto enableúose with no previousknowledge
of Nepali to pÍogÍess to a point wherc they câÍl communicate
 canats-o^:L *lll ha ol'jroot help to you in developingaccumtepronunciationat
effectively in Nepali on a rangeof everydaytoryü TÌ9 af,türly itllgc.
Nepali has a range oÌ
ani write úe language.Like every language'
Ïiif".* ttvi", úels of sophisúcation' A hillfarmer who has a You muychoosehow to âpProacheachunit: you might wish to leârn
itb;;;-Bú*
"íO
hnguage as his motheÍ tongue nìây use the same thÉ dlll;guc and its meaningÍiÍst by hearing ând Íepeatingit, and
u"O for ai genders'numbers and levels of poüteness' thln woik through the translation and úe gramrnar section to
"nOin* N"paliis a workadaylinÌ-languâgethatenables.him
u".""t. t"tï. und6ritandwhy it meanswhat it does;âltemâtively,you might prefer
to communicatewith peopìe who have other
languagesas rneu lo work ihroughthe grammarsectionfiIst and then tum back to úe
ão,frer,ongu". ln contrast.an educated urbanite will use various- dloktgucto seethe grammarin action,asit were.Whicheverway you
*r""n dependnot only upon the number andSenderof tppÍoach€achunit, it is importarìtnot to move on unúl you have:
"*u'ã"dìïít the verbs' but âlso on now
úe subiectsperformingúe actionsof a mortcrcdúe dialogue;
Meanwhite' inside the royal
pijrã tã. .i"".* to L aboutúem' (not
a fully digested the grammaÍ section and the examples it
ancl honorific vocabulary
nalacea cornpletelynew set of verbs conteinsi
coveredhere!) comesinto PlaY' l68medall nelv vocabulary;
Bv andlaÍse,úe Nepú in this book is úat which
Nepalispeâkers completedthe exercisesandcheckedthem againstthe key;
;J.;t;lf;;;*i"tstv in tle vaÍious situations úat arc introduced' rcpeatedthe exercisesif úey were not correctthe fiÍst time'
err towards moÍe jaÍgon-
Where choices arise, however, we -the Itc grammaticalexplanationsarc intendedto be asclearand
some Nepali speakers
srdmmaticallvcorrect. While acceptingúat frcc ó possible,althoughit is not possibleto explainúe structuÍesof
"would we tâKe
not makethe samechoicesin everydayconveÍsatron' r languagewiúout using somegrarnmaticalterminology' The book
i i, Uetterto leam rules before leaming the exceptions
,ft" cennõtclui- to cover every featureof Nepali, but it doescontainâlÌ
only a
"i"í,ft"
io-,nor. *f"t. Similarly,the languageof úis book admits of the most commonverb constructionsand a basic vocabularyof
many Nepall-sPeaxers
handful of English words' although rome 1600words.It will equip you with what you needto speakând
vocabulary
ipJ*r.ìy in tíe capitatl do make free use of English n:ad, and if you conünuewith Nepali after you have masteredthis
in their conversation. book your vocúulary and your familiarity with more complex
consEuctionswill gmw very qúckly. As well as helping you to
masiertheNepú language,the dialoguesarealsointendedto provide
How to use the book you wiú an insight into Nepali cultureanddâily life'
ftom one to The authorsof úis book wish you all the very bestin your efforts to
The book is divided into 24 units' Eâch unit contains
a dialogue'thereis an
OtL G"fl Aial"gt"s (in Unit 13, insteadof leamüe Nepali language.
fouÍ units
;;.-;;;;;i ú*õ in unit 20 a prosepassase)'In the fiÍst
(the scnpr m wmc.n
a[ of úe Nepâli aPPeaÍsin boú Devanagari
Each dialoguers
Nenati is wdtten)-and Roman translieraüon' FuÉherreading
i;ìi;;iy ;;"; tbe new vocabularyit contains'and a
Oúer begirmers'coursesin Nepali includeTika B. Karki andChij K
;;;;;úJ *"tlation. Eachdialogu"T p^:"c: it .to1!:"ill^1
"ontaining
Shresúais Basic Course in Spoken Nepali (Kathmandu, various
rncludtng
sectionoi mor. detaiJedgrammaticalexplanation l*": editions)andDavitl Matthews'sÁ Coursem NepaÌi(London,School
The key to each exercise is glvenat tneenq
examplesandexercises' of Oriental and African Studies,1984).The filst of thesehas been
ni,tt" b*k' follo*ed by a completeend vocabulary' used for many years to teach Nepâli to PeaceCorps volunteers
the DevanagaÍiscript
You shouldbegin by leamingthe charmtersof without introducingúe Devanagariscript.The secondadoptsa more
Although the book can be usedon its own' academicapproachand also intÍoducesmore complex grammatical
be
-ï,it"ípi.ti*i"íon-
Ë ã;ú;;; of the sounã of each character can onlv structures.
book
,fte câssettethat is availableto accompanythe
"pp-ïÀãï" -O
Onceyou havecompletedTeachYounelÍ Nepaúi,you might wish to Abbrevlations& symbols
moveon to the later units of the Matthewscourseto supplementyour
understandingof Nepali grammar.You will also find the following M nritldlc(case) Dr doctoÍ
textbooks useful: M.K. Verma and T.N. Sharma's InteÍnediate L hrw (cuse) Er. elder
Nepali StructuÍeandInteÍrnediateNePaIiÀeader,both publishedby ll high(case) Yr. younger
Manohar Publishersin New Delhi in 1979; and Michael Hutt's Q quc$tion Mat. matemal
A unswer Pat. patemal
Modem LitÊÍary Nepali: an IntÍoductory Reader, pubüshed by
Ë rtutement bro brother
Oxford University Pressin New Delhi in 1997.
l . masculine sis sister
The best Nepali-Engüshdictionary currently on úe market is Á f, lbminine D daughter
Pracücal Dictionary of Modem Nepali, produced by an editorial rJ,Ítlc. conjunctivepa.rticiple S son
board headedby Ruth Laila-Schmidtandpublishedby RatnaSâgar
Pubüshersin New Delhi in 1993.Ralph Turner's celebratedNepali Cl llags thosepassagesthat you can listen to on the recoÌding that
dictionary, first publishedin 1930,was rePrintedin India ir 1981; rccompanies thisbook.
this is a work of immenseinteÍest,but is perhapsa little forbidding
Vmrbulary boxes follow each dialogue. Use these to make sure
for a beginnerin the language. you'vcunderstood
thedialogue.
Pradyumna P. Karan and Hiroshi Ishii's Nepal: a Himalayan
Tho exercises,throughoutúe book, give you plenty of opportunity
Kingdom in fÍansirion (United Nations UniYersityPress'1996)is a
aoprsctisethe Nepali languagepoints as you leam.
good introductionto all aspectsof the country, while Jan Salterand
Harka Gurung's beautifully illustrated book FacesofNepal Qlirnal Tho grammar sectiongives a clear explanationof the grammatical
Books, Kaúmandu, 1996) describesthe cultures of Nepal's many lrrucsexploredin thatchapter.
ethnic gÌoups.
For English translationsftom modemNepali üÍerature,seeMichael
Hnlt's Himalayan Voices: an IntÍoduction to Modem Nepali
LitentuÍe (University of Califomia Press,1991); for a desÍiptive
accountof tÌìe history of Nepú üterature,seeAbhi Subedi'sNepali
Literaütre: Backgoand and Hisrory (SajhaPublishers,Kathmandu,
1978).

Acknowledgements
The authorswish to thank GovindaGiri Prerana,Bindu Subediand
Jobn Whelpton for their invaluable commentsand suggesúonson
vaÍious sections and drafts of úe book, and the Researchand
Publications Committee of the School of Oriental and African
Studiesfor facilitating this collaboraúon.We are âlso gÍateful to
SubhasRai for providing us úth úe drawings that illustrate a
numberof the dialogues.
tã-l
tl
like úe 'a' in aga but like the ,o, in por whenit
follows a labial consonant(a consonant
tIr pÍonouncedon the lips)
J ITT ã Ìike the 'a' in faúer
o rl
fr
like the 'ee' in fee4 rarely like the ,i' in fui

z
o
Eu
6ti
like the 'ee' in feeÍ
like úe 'oo' in f@ raÍely like tlhe'u' in püÍ
tike tJrc,oo' in food
Fy üke úe 'ri' n nip, ripple (only occursin words
Ï' bonowedftom Sanshit)
qt $e like the fint paÍt of the vowel soundin raade
El wft* you have read through this section, listen to the q. al like the 'oy' soundin ôoy or the 'i, soundin qurre
- lÍÌ
recording,so úat you can hear úe vowels and consonantsof úe o like úe first paÍt of the vowel soundin áole
o
-a
Devanagariscript. cÌ au like the 'ow' soundin cow
o Nepali is written in the Devanãgari (or 'Nagari') script, which is
âlso used for Hindi, Sanslcit and Marathi, with only minor
Brch Devanagaricharacteris followed by a Roman transüteration
which consistsof the consonantfollowed by the letter a. This is
!t-1+
-l modificationsbeing madeto accommodatethe specialfeaturcsof
úe Nepali sound system.Devanagariis a phonetic script, which
bccause,in the úsence of any other vowel sign, eachconsonantis
hold to contain úe inheÍent q a vowel. BecauseeachDevanasari
means that âlmost every word is pronouncedexacdy as it is
consonantúeÍefore comesto rcpresenta syllúle, somescholarsiall
0, written: leaming a charactermeans also leaming a sound. The
system is comprised of three kinds of characters:vowels,
thc Devanagarisystem a 'syllabary' rather than an .alphabef. In
ã words that end in a consonant,the inheÍent a of úe final letter is
consonants,andconjunctchancters.Thereâre ío capitâlletters.
CL rcmetimespronounced,but is more often silent. This final a will
appearin transüterationonly whenit is to be pronounced.
o Vowels Two impoÍant contraststlÌat exist in Nepali, but not in,English,
o The Devanagariscripthas 11 vowels.Every vowel except3{â has should be pointed out. The fiÌst is between aspiÍatàd aÍld-non_
tr two symbols.The first symbolis the full form of the vowel, called
the vowel character.This is usedwhenúe vowel is the f[st letter of
,rpfaÍed consonants,the secoâd betwen deital
consonants. ^nd
,ï)rloflex
5 a word or syllable,and whenit follows anoúer vowel. The second . AspiÍatedconsonantsare pronouncedwith a strongexpulsion
CL s'.rnbofis the vowel sign,wllich is usedaftera consonant,i.e. when of breath,while non-aspiÍatedconsonantsarepronouncedwith
o úe vowel is üìe secondlenerof a syllable.The alphabetbeginswith
the vowels,andthe vowel charactersarc shownopposite.
only minimal breath being expelled. The amount of breâth
expelledduring the pronunciationof an Engüshconsonantis

a
1+ Consonants
usually somewherebetweeDúese two extremes.so discinline
is required to leam the Nepü way: less breath than normal

o The Devanagari scÍipt has 33 consonants. The traditional Indian

while uttering a non-aspiÍatedconsonant,much more breath
than normal while utteÍing an aspiratedone. Hold a minor in

3 system very helpfully orders consonants according to the way they

are pronounced, and they are listed heÍe in alphabetical order. Each
of the first five groups of consonants has as its final member a
front of your face as you practise,and comparethe extent to
which it cloudsup in eachinstance!Or put a hand in front of

nasal consonant (a consonant pronounced through the nose).

 your mouth to feel the difference.Take care âlso to utter each Ëdtsllü oonlonant8 (pronouncsdwith the tongue curled
aspirateconsonântasa singlesound:althoughthe secondletter baok lo louoh tho Palato)
of'úe Rom"n tt"nsliteration of DevanagaÍiaspiratesis 'h" this likc the 't' in sÍop,but with the tonguecuÍled up
lr
is thereto indicatethe expulsionof breath,not to suggestmat to touchthe roof of úe mouth
theÍe âÍe two sePaÍâtesounds. I usÍt but with â strongrcleaseof breath
. To pÍonounceNepali words correctly, it is also importânt to llu
f {r whenthe first letet of a syllable:asürc 'd' n dug
difÍ:erentiate between dental consonânts and retroflex but with thetonguecuÍled up to touchthe roof of
consonants,and most paÍticularly betweendental ta and Íla úe moutì
and retroflex fa and Ça For dental consonantsúe tongue in themiddle or at the end of a word: as lhe
should touch the back of úe upper front teeth' for retroflex 'r' in rug, but with úe tonguecurledup to
consonantsit shoulclbe curledback up againstthe roof of the touch the roof of the mouth
moutlt. For the English 'f and 'd' the tongue is held I dhs asda but with a strongreleaseof breath
somewherebetweenthesetwo positions,which soundslike a 0l like úe 'n' in and, but wiú the tonguecurled up
to 0a
retroflex to a Nepú-speâker's eâr' LearnerstherefoÍeneed to touchthe roof of the mouth
work harder to pronounce dental consonants thân they
do to pronounceretroflex ones,thoughthey often imaginethe
opposite. (pronounced withthe tonguetouchingor
Oantllconsonants
oloa. to th6 upperfÍont teeth)
VelaroÍ guttural consonants(pronouncedin ths throat) ta like the 't' in úp, with the tip of the tongueagâinst
rõ kâ asthe 'k' in sldÍ the back of úe uPPerfÍont teeth
q kha aska but v/ith â strongreleaseof breath rt tha asta but wiú a strongÍeleaseof breath
rT gâ asthe 'g' in go rí da asúe 'd' in dtp
q Cha âsga but wiú a strongreleâse
of breath u dha asda but with â strongreleaseof breath
s.n asthe 'n' in sixg iÍ na asthe 'n' in mp

Palatal consonants (pÍonouncêd at the palate or the Leblalconsonants(pronouncèd on the liPs)

uppêr gum-line) q pa asthe 'p' in PoÍ
S phâ aspa but with â strongreleaseof breath;often
q ca like the 'ch' in cheese,but with lessreleaseof
like úe 'f in faráer
breathandpronouncedúth the tip of the
E ba asúe 'b' in bud
tonguetouchingthe loweÍ ftont teeth q bha asba but with a strongÍeleaseof breath;
E cha somewherebetweenthe 'ch' in cáeeseandthe 'ts'
sometirneslike a breaúy 'v' asin driver
in Ísar,pronouncedwith a strongreleaseof breath
ma asthe 'm' in mud
q ja asthe I' in jug
q Í," asja but with a strongreleaseof breath
5T ia âsúe 'n' in i;nJurY
 Semi-vowels qa
1k + kâ
4 ya asúe 'y' in yes ìkg + 3TIã 6t kã
{ ra like úe 'r' in Ìu, but pronouncedwith a trill of tt' ka + al ki
the tongue,not on th€ lips { ko
|Fk!
€i fr la-
FT la like the 'l' in ,ot, but pronouncedwiú the tongue + 3u rF ku
further forward {i ka + sü s kü
aÍ va prcnouncedeitherasthe 'b' in budor asthe 'w' {ka ãl :[ kg
rn tvoÍse ska + ge à ke
ri ka q,ar { kai
tF ka + ' O ko
Sibilant ('hissing')consonants ci kâ + rtìau kâu
ïT ía asthe 'sh' in sÌrun,but alsofrequendypronounced's'
tI ça asthe 'sh' in sÌrun,but alsofrequenúypronounced's'
{ sa asthe's'in sun
A vowel sign is generally attached to úe stem or downstroke of a
consonant - to the foot of úe downstroke in the case of g u. ü ü. and
Aspirateconsonant f f, to the head of the downstroke in the case of g e and È ai. as an
0dditionaldownsrroke attâchedby a loop to úe head of the stem in
Ë ha as the 'h' in àug the cases of Ë i and Ê i, and as an additional downstroke with or
without exta elements in the casesof i{T ã, * o, and aÌ au. + ka is a
tingle-stemmed consonant, but some consonants have two
Script exercise 1 Make a flash card for eachcharacter,with úe
downstrokes, and in such cases the vowel sign must be attached to
Devanagariletter on úe front and the Romântransliterationon úe
the right-hand member of the pair. The consonant rI ga is an example:
back.Use theseto help you memorizeeachcharacter.
ITITÏfiT.fr { { TìÌ.ÈqÌ
Script exercise 2 Write out the following Nepali words in
ga gã gr gi gu gü gf
gai gò ge gau
DevanasaÍi:
'Ihe consonant{ ra is an excepúonto thesegeneral
jhan saral thap bhavan kanal had mles when it takesthe
chad bâkhat jarú yas qar vowel signs _ -u and -ü. Instead of attaching these to the foot of the
lhaC - allow
rara ga+a íahar dÂíak nabh vas downsaoke,you shÕdd {hem to nestlehigher up in úe crook of úe
calan ma ghar phat rath chamcter:
!a!h
dhaval dhab lay pa4lìa çalh khatam ï + 3 = dru
r .r q = Srü
A consonant can only suppoÍ one vowel at a time. In words in which
Constructingsyllables one vowel follows directly after another, the second vowel must
Every vowel except 3Ta has a vowel sign which is added to a nlways appear as a full vowel character. Thus, to wÌite the word dú
consonântto form â syllable. The EÌ a vowel is iúerent in the (two) yon musl write du tollowed by á i in ils tull form:
{ {t.
consonantitself. When a vowel other than 3I a is âdded to a Similarly, nole úe spellings Ur: khãu. rrÉ gm, and Íïg lie.
consonant,it automaticâllyreplacesúe 3l â vowel. Vowel signs are
attachedto the consonant{ k in the following ways:
Script exercise 3 lvrite out the following Nepali words in
D Scrlpf exercise4 write out the ÍbuowingNepaliwordsin
Devanagari:
l)o vnnagari:
lutapit bemausam aghãunu ghmã anau$ro
hü cnaya naya gãü úga
ausadhi bhautik risãunu ainã deü
Iã0chu ãinã diinã tapãi Jaqarna
khicadi dobâ[o Cu4h hariyo ukusamukus
pIc âülo gaÉ sãsãr aKna
itaÍinu janatã yúi nakhãú chotaka.ri
8ururìg chãrìgã mãnãri ang
oCar bJhat phüladaru gurúo Sadr
sãital jhilimili taipani bhailo viqã
óili yãtãyãt ãmâ thego iSãn
4a"l eghãra ülar
Conjunctcharacters
Thc spellings of many Nepali words involve the combination or
clusteringof two or moreconsonants;thesecombinationsareknown
Nasalization gBconjuncts.By joining two consonantsin this way, you cancelout
thc inherentq a betweenúem.
Every vowel can be nasalized.To pronouncea nasalizedvowel,
direct as much as you can of the breath that is involved in its Ccrtain combinationsproduce what are in effect new chaÍacters
pronunciation towards the nasal cavity. In Nepali, nasalizationis rather than recognizable combinations of their constituent
indicatedby a sign culledqqf+< candrabindu (literally, moon dor), consonants.Thesespecia,lconjunctsaÍe listed below:
whose namedescribesits appeanncewell: -. ln RomanÍans-
literation, nasalization is representedby a ülde over the vowel Special conjunct characters
(e.g.ã). trka + q$a = cTk$a(oÍfuÍìpronounced ,che,)
qJa + ïia = tjÍa (pronounced .rya')
The qqid< candrâbindu is written either over the nasalizedvowel
IIóa+{Ìa=sTSIa
itseli e.g. õ'-{fkahã, or abovethe consonantto ühich the vowel is
iÍta+(ta=(tta
attached,e.g.rfË garõ, { nn. If any part of úe vowel is written above
iTta + (ra = ïba
theheadstroke,úe qqt{< candrabindu is reducedto its Ï{< bindu
<ds+rlya=qdya
or 'dot', e.g.Ëô chÍdi, qì garõ.
In someNepali words it is customâryto repÍesentnasalizationnot
wiú the qqfu< cândrabindu but with a conjunctof which the lrst Half characters
member is one of the nasal consonants.The two most common
More than half of all the conjunctsareformed simply by dropping a
combinationsare: downstrokefrom the frst memberand thenjoining what remainsto
g n+ {ka=$ika úe full form of úe secondmember.For instance,to produce the
.5.n + rI gâ = q. iga conjunctSta, consistingof úe consonantsrTga andq ya, removethe
gcconddownstrokeof rI ga to producer and addúis to the full form
Thus, certainwords can be spelledin two different ways: ÚÈtfoo
or ËìSÌ ftflftge; r5rr gurúg or TE guruirg. The conjunctstend to be of q ya to produceúe conjunctrq.
usedin wordsthaÍarefelt to be uniqueto thelanguage,whib q<tcE The following table shows all the half chaÍacters.followed bv
candrabindu is used in words úat Neoali shares with Hhdi. cxamplesof ways in which they arecombinedwith full charactersto
Sanskrit,etc. form coniuncts.
 Fu[l chaÍacor Half charactcrExamples
lda+ sdâ w CCa
Els+ Eda
1k ï ffi kka, rÍcÍkkha, € kts {{ tda
q c e{kçm& F{kfya 6lha+ IT mâ {q thna
kta
q kha c q khya, q khna" c6 khúa ãta+ ína Ftra
rI ga r r{I g:ya,Iq gla, r{ gva
gha E EEghcha,ETghna,q ghya Oonlunctscontainingthe consonant( ra
q ca ? q9 CCna. Dq Cya
'q CCa. Whcn( ra is the first memberof a conjunctcombinaüon,it takesa
q ja o vq Jya, vq JYa
""r IJa. hrm known as ìn rcph, which is a hook ( " ) written above the
jha Ê g jhys, FJhda, Eï ihnâ
hâ^rdStrokeof the secondmemberof the conjunct combination,e.g.
õ + ?q ncg, àí IUa lúglrchâ, tf gaÌnâ. If a vowel sign follows the consonantto which
!T + ú !-ãúa, !-ó+Èa, qt{ +ya
Ì n is beingjoined, úe Èt' reph sign^mustmove-to the righ-Í,i.e. to
o tr a êÌ tma, itl tya, R tsa thocnd of the syllable it precedes:rr<Ìgardã, Tfr bhorti, qì garne.
( tts ï iq ftva
rT rha s qthya Whcn t ra is the fust memberof a conjunct of which úe second
ÈI dha Ë sE dhcha,sìI dhya, t;{ dhva mcrnberis c ya, it is written insteadas a curved dash:rì garyo,
qrn paryo.
ï nâ ; (ïnt&<ndra,€nhâ
q pa t q pÍha, q ppa, c{ psa Whcn < ra is the secondmember of a codunct it is written as â
16 pha q rFÍ phna dhgonal slashdown ftom the left of úe lower part of the downstroke
q ba - qbja"<bda"qbba of the fust rnemberof the conjun* {r* râmm, g{ ugra. If the fust
ìT bha + çT bhya momberof the conjunct has two stems,the diagonal slashwill be
nta r EÍ !nnA,rq ÌnFa"IË mha rddedto theriúÈhand stem.If úe first membeÍof the conjunctis an
ya r, qwa oval or round consonant,a slightly differcnt form is tlsed:g Cra, q
lâ € ffi'lks" ?<lda, íõí lla ftr. Note also the forms g sra, Q;hra, T Sra.
E va õ aI vya
It 5s s {tÌ 6ya,qnT6|lÈ,r* Svg Other special cases
q G q çÍha,wr Sna,çI çya
ta
TT sa ( F'ska, €sta,<Ístâ If the secondmemberof a conjund is q ya andthe fiÍst memberis a
ruboflex consonant,the zIya takesa specialform (V):
4tê+rÌya=ãiltya
cd+qya=sq{ya
The halarú
Conjunctsúat consistof two identical retroflex consonantsmay be
If úe diagonal stroke called {sd halant is placed at the foot of a
Fpresentedwith the charactersarrangedvertically, e.g.
consonant,it rcmovesits inheÍent3Ia" {ilRl halant is usedregularly
in verbs,but very rarely in oúer words.It is also usedto show that a fâ+ tz =l Ïta
conjunct exists betweentwo consonantswhosejoining cannot be The consonants< da andq ha fonn the following specialconjuncts:
representedin any other way. The round or oval characterse, õ, s, d, qdr + rTga = Fdga
E cannotdÍop a downstrokeândremainrecognizable.For this reason, Qha + (ra = ëhra
qdã + <da = qdda + ïva = ã hva
if they are the first memberof a conjunct they will keep their full {ha
qds + qdhi = d ddha + iÍ la = õhla
form and thejunction will be effectedby the ËqriÍ hâhnt e.g. {ha
qda + rTbha = I dbha (ha .r qma = ghma
(dr + ïva = ddva Ëhâ + ïna = ã lìna
 1'hc nasalizedform of a vowel alwaysprecedesits unnasalizedform
El S".ipt exercise 5 write out úe followingNepaliwordsin In the dictionary order: úus, words beginning with f wi come
Devanagari: bcforc words beginning with {, words beginning wiú t before
kakfã jían natra Snmãn hlasã vidyã wordsbeginningwith T, etc.
divya múattã laksya hãni garchin Sãnti
subbã sakdaina 6abda bhãgya haptã thatlã
pakkã a44ã jhyãl ãphrÌo pnyaKnu Íamro Stressand accent
kfÍ.ìa dríya pradhãn padúati bharyan viSva
In Sanskit, the language fiom which Nepali originally developed,
bhaffjyãúg paícâyat garthyo khelcha kãlyo garyo consonants are always pronounced with theft inherent 3í a unless
kãthmâdaüpadhyo vrendra bujhnu mvat kvã úqrT helant is there to cancel it out. In Nepali, however, this is no
dhvani ãgreji kvãppa prakhyãt icchã acyüt krnger the rule. The {d< halant is used only to mark the absenceof
ujjval trak a+4ã utqqta taüva ãtmã 0 lìnal 3f a at the end of certain verb endings where without it some
drava dvarã arambh rãstra svasthya hissi smbiguity of meaning could arise, or to mark úe absence of úe
inherent 3Í a between two consonânts that cannot be conjoined to
form a conjunct in any other way. Otherwise, some words that end in
Visarga A consonant but no vowel sign are pronounced v,/ith a final 3í -â,
Visarga is a sign like a colon (but with its dots further apart) that whereasothers are not. Alúough the best way to leârn pronunciation
occurs at the end or in the middle of certain words. It is pronounced h by hearing Nepali words spoken, certain rules can be discemed
as ha and is Íransliterated as l.l. The ody word in this book úat hcre.
requiÍes visarga is €:q dubkha. The following categories of words should usually be pronounced as
they are wdtten (i.e. with úe inherent q a unless this is cancelled out
Numerals with the Ëd<I halant):

The Nepali numeralsare asfollows: t verb forms, where úe ËFi halânt is used whenevernecessaryto
cancel úe inherent q a: í<qt aiera. Tn gara. rfti( garchan. va-o1
tlt8 l,({u tt.
pa{hchan:
2 most adverbs and postpositions: l( târa, qrfl{( bãhira, erM ãja, fu{
-tim;
words:(çÌitìï sâlalala;
3 repetitiveonomatopoeic
Dictionaryorder 4 wordsofonesyllable: rTmâ,dta:
q a frkâõ qba 5 wordswhosefinal syllableis a conjunct:6f karma, $rfi bhakta;
fha
rll d Í{ khâ s {a ìI bha 6 mostwords endingin a semi-vowel:rf{ maha, ÊfE íiva.
{gaõ qma
I dha An iúerent -a is usuallynot pronounced:*
i S gha úl qya
4a
u sa||aí ta ïÌa I at the endof postpositionsof two or moresflables that aÍe vr'ritten
s ú qcâq tha ql a as sepaÍatewords (i.e. that are not joined to úe noun or pronoun
ã 6 cha da qva they follow): sÈa samet,qÈfi bãhek;
T
c e Ej a ÈI dhâ sIS a 2 in words (oúer thanverbs)consistingof Cv-Ca:È+ din, or V-Ca:
q ai qjhaï na ssa qïq ad;
qÌ o q ía tT pa {sa 3 in words (other than vertrs)consistingof Cv-Cv-Ca:ìc|ïí nepã|,
rrì au eF5 pha Qha fr+'nrnftes,f+arskitãU
4 in wordsconsistingof Cv-Ca-Cv-Ca,whereboth medial andfinal Scriptexercise
3
q a aÍ€ dropped: FFiÍqõTkinrnel, r{€{í khâJbal, iÍG|l-t tarvãr.
!z+a àqÌ{q .{qlcï Tn
{ìÌFkIlatpaü
{ffir qÌiil{ ftqreq cïr È$
* Qv = syllableconsisüngof consonant+ anyvowel (includingrÌ a).
Ca = syllableconsistingof consonant+ 3Ta.
Íirqq ffi
qq-{r
116 Ëm çt{tT{
ItÍfq ïGnìã
cÌür{ "ô {rfl-r
mrrd
Í{d Tqqrfr s+ì
Punctuation fufufufu àqA *È â"n
Devanagarinow employs all of úe punctuation symbols used in
hnfr qttrcÌÌÍ 3lrqr m E { l l .l
üc qrrp sc'.
English,with the exceptionof the full stop.This consistsinsteadof a
single downstroke:l
Scriptexercise4
It ErqÌ {cÌ lrrõ È.r
Samplesof Nepalihandwriting tnfg q|{Ì H ffir{ qÌàc
clq ffi .È {rrr< qÌqr
ffr ,,-*& g-Tìa;aaÍ &{ 3ll -"rer Íqr Ersr qmq qF'
-*rt*
s-rÊ&. AÌ4 6çq",rEõ4âql
Scriptexercise5
,fr{n 6rqr È{r
orÈ ânr .rnc< 'rent aalt {ftn üï rr{ aÊr+lú r;t È"r Tõr qpr .@
Er Ìr l snfu
qET a-{È{ sr< rïÌrq €Kr 5ËÍ
:fà gp lh .a1i-ta.e {iia Ldo-JÈ rnqi fit sd Ì{à u r IFFFT qrcì wE
{ST FTTõT {r*
Ttlr $c !üFr c-dfr- q-qrq tff{
Srrq1tr c-í1rç1 .Írfr rrc-ì .r+
dd
-nr.*
61v w+È,6ãk6*â 61 rqqr€ï rdà
r{fr dÌfr
frÌ{ s< I{râ *n
*|Fq F@TII srqki
EffiiìT ir siTq dr"{ 3ifaqÌ
rq t|{r fi(rtï {t1 Ftrp:rl @
Key to script exercises
ScriDtexercise2
g{ (a{ qq flt{
6< {rki {a q{
l( rrq srfl ({F[ .t{I
snrr ìE
qit{ -6q rfõ qõ TKFT
 E I Meetingthe bus

-.q'
q.
.-ì,
-..{
&l/
1l
úJÌl Cita and Bindu, two young women from Hetauda, have iust arrived
õ
õrl ln Kathmandu ro take up their college courses. BimJ KumaÌ, a
'* flcnior male student, has been sent to meet them.
trqdrsR

o
rqÈ r
lllmal Kumãr namâste!
Hello!

c rfrn
(;IrÃ
{g{ ?
hajur?
Pardon?

E
II
fff.ïTqR ;sQrffirfi-616ir
lllmal Kumãr nâmaste!timi Gitã hau?
Hello! Are you Gita?
In this unit you will loarn
ã . how to identiryyourselfand tiìrr $,rflor{ rrrÈ r
(;Itô
CL others
. how to ask and ânswer
simplequgstions
ho, ma Gitii hú. namaste.
Ye$ I am Gita. Helio.

C . how to èxchangegreetings
. how to addr€ssp€ople
l.rwfrqR +Ê<ft.frÊ5qìr
lllmsl Kumãr âni timì Bindu hâu?
.ü politely And areyou Bindu?
. how to apply adjectivesto
nouns

I
 qg{,.rÊEÈ
| Orammar
Bindu hqiur, ma Bindu hú.
Yes,I an Bindu. I íc and are in Nepali
q, ïÈ rqtdFqTqr{È | ln lirrglish you say that someüing or someone.rs large, or is a
Bimal Kumãr la, rãmro. ma Birnal Kumâr hú. l|llliccnìan, or is in Kathmandu. But in Nepali a distinction is made
PJght,good. I am Bimal Kumar. hclwccntwo different kinds ofis, and in the plural betweentwo kinds
fiÈ f{r< Tqrcft dqr€<;i 696;o t rÍ' ln'. Thesetwo forms are:
Bindu namash Bimal Kumãrji! tapãi sancai E 'l'hc * ho form which normally defines the thing or person you arc
hunuhuncha? tnlking about with a noun:
HelIo Bimal Kumarji! Are you well?
|n*t* 1 - ü prahan ho. He is a policeman.
râ rft-fi-es1ì
t rlrT,rãqTçì
Éf I yo kãlhmâdaú ho. This is Kathmandu.
Bimal Kumãr sancâi.timrhârú ni? h Thc g cha form which describes with an adjective, or locates a
I am well. How aboutyou? lhing or person:
íÈfl *jr q ! c9 t5 t{ r ë 1 ï
É.tÉ.t9 l .'ì tyo lhúlo cha. Tharis bíg (describing).
Girã sancai! tapãi 6ikçak hunuhuncha? 1,
t; qirõqrírqr
--ì E | ú kãÍhmãdaúmâ cha. He ,s JIÌ(_mã)
We are well. Are you a teacher?
Kathmandu (locaring).
f*qqSqR fq, t Ê++nff { rÍàfi-6sqA ffi qÌ,È-lt r ll you wish to say that someúing is large you must use 6 cha for rs.
Binal Kumãr hoina, ma üdyãrtlü hú. tim!-hârú pani vidyãúhi hccuuseyou aÌe describing it; if you wish to say thar someoneis in
hau, hoina? Klthmandu, you must again use o cha for is, because vou are
No, I am a stüdent. You aÍe studentstoo. aren't vou? locutingúem:-but if you wish to statethar someoneis u poii.".-
qg{,qr{Ì-{FqÍìffiÊÌ r y-oumust use $ ho for is, because you are defining him. ã cha and
sinàu hajur.hãmiharüpaniúdyãíhi hâú. tì ho have different forms, depending on whià of úe Nepali
Yes, we aÍe students too. pronouns (the words for l. we, you. he. she.ìt and úeyt is úeir
iuhject. These forms are intÍoduced in úe pagesúat follú.
€!namaste! tleJlol t{T{Tqr.úÌ Bimal KumãÌji -ji is
(Hindu gÌeeüng,alsousedfor addedto his namefor politeness* 2 Firstpersonpronounslr,tye)
goodbye) t=ì sancai well, in good health Thefirst personpronounsareq ma land 6rfr hami we.ffi hami we
Ëqt1hajur? yes?pardon? (qÍq...ÉÍ{õ ? tapãi hunuhuncha ir sometimes usedro meanIin placeof ÌÌ ma. thoughnot with the
frtfr...ti hau? yoü are... oÍ are you afe...ot aÍeyoü...? pomposityof theEngliú 'royalwe'. Whenit is necessary to makeit
you...'l lal úí2 whatabout...? uhsolutelyclearthatÉTfrhâmr-is intendedto meanwejn úe plurat.
ò ho yes (literally, is) ffid€ timftarú you (plural) thc pronounis pluralizedto become6ffi6s 1ãmr-hârú.
q...ãma...hú 1an... ÊrFr Sikqakteacrer
qf< au and üfi hoina ro (litemlly, r'srot)
qÊ pad Íoo, also
3 SecondpeÍsonpronoungou)
€{ hajur yes
E la theÍe!oÍ that'sit! ffi üdyãúhi shtdent,students When speakingto a person,you must addressthat personusing a
{r* Ìiimro good pronoun (a word for you) that reflects whether you are senioi to
Èí{ ? hoina? is that not so?
him/her,or vice versa,andto ìvhatdegree.This kind of senioritycan
ËÌn{€...dhãDihaÌii-, haú we.. are
* Some Nepali-speakers add the suffi]( -"{ dcpend,amongother things,on agedifference,family relationjips,
-jyü to names instead. The genderor social class.
sufnx fr -ji is common to both Hindi and Nepali.
 The threelevels of politeness,working upward,are:
LOW (intimate or contemptuous) lìurrl
il{ì d hãmi hâú we are(oc.casionalyf am)
MIDDLE (familiar)
HIGH (polite and super-polite) I l{Ì14 61 hãÍúharú haú we arÍe
Rr{ìrrú timiharú hâu you (Middle) are
LOfV: the in!in'I: oÌ contemptuousI tii (J,/ou flÍ{rF(-f{;rt tapãftrÌú hunuhuncha you (High) are
or úou) is used to
u.to:ia inferior(a junior seryant.one'so\4.Írsmalt
lf:t child, an
to expresscontemptor anger(one driver to anoúer
Tr-". "j:.1,
aÌrera co lsronbetweentheiÌ cars.perhaps!), or to address someone
is intimat".-F-.ign .p.*; of N;;;;
:l11 :-Tï use
y-. l:u"r "r.':.t:larionship
this pronoun.lt can only be used to address
an
individual, andthereforehasno plural form. rmr|/j,ative negative
t hú ran {tt noina I amúot
*:.r* iarffi rimir roughlyequivalenr to rheFrenchtu) n"r weaÍe noinaú rveüe not
Y??l*, [Ì ffi
rs usedto_addresspersonssignif,rcantly youngeror of lower social you (Low) you (I-o$)
ÈC ho6 àËc{ noinas
standingthan oneself(servants,chilúen, etc.ior arc not
to uaa."., f.i"nO" aÍe
with whom an establishedinformal relationshipe*ists. you (Middle) Uoinau you(Middle)
T;;;;; t'-Ì nau ffi
plural, you add the pìuralizing suffix _ËF aÍe not
-harii. aÍe
HIGH: thepoliteavr{ tap6l1touttt1,equivalenrro hunuhuncha you (High) fl{fr hunuhunna you (High)
rheFrenchyousl Efí.6
rsusecto addÍessmostequalsandall superiors exceptthoseto whom aÍe arc not
dtf*:""".]s due'(Foreignspeaiersof Nepái i"""ir;ú;;;;
:tf:'-l usingrhis word for you morecomÍnonlyúan any
ï":::,:,.r Lther.
In lact. theywill probablyfeel morecomfoÍableusing 5 Nouns
it to ãdd."r,
people,suchas servanlsor poÍers. whom
Nepalisi""fU
aúoÍessas r?Iqftin -.) To form the plural. you add "ìì-a
the plurâtizing Nearly all Nepali nounshave masculinegender.The only feminine
sufEx -{s -harú. nounsaÍe úose that are female ând human.Many feminine nouns
Th€ super-politeÊgï hajur is sometimesused to endin -i. Here are someexamplesof feminine nouns:
expressespecial
deference_when addressing someone.Ittake.tt",uÌrl" u"rU_fo , *
theotherHigh pronouns.It mightbeusedby a lowergrade àâ keg' girl q|{qr€ ãímifr woman
emplovee
his employer,for example.or by a new bridero
aãdress
3fTcÍ ãmã mother 6Ìft choÍi daughteÍ
:o T*:rt
also.usedas a polite word of assenl(trq7! hqiur! f{â didi elder sister qÈfr bahini J,/oungersisf€r
T^t
res.,,Lo:oTo .rt.:r {rfr sãti wife's younger
or to rndtcatethat one has not heardor understJod(# ffi óÍimâti Mfe
r srsÍer
llajar? Pardonmel.

4 I am, you ane,we are with à âo

There is no definite article dre in Nepali. nor is úere an indefinite
Singular
qÈ article a. Thereforea sentencesuchass ÊiÍ?ÌTfrÈ ú vidyãíhi ho can
ma hú Iam be Fanslatedas s/heis a studentoÍ as {Irc is the student,depending
Èd\ a.iihos you (lnw) are on the context.
ffiËì timi hau you (Middle) arc
avrs6ç5o tapãi hunuhurcha you (Htgh) are
All nouns,and most pronouns,aÍe pluralized simply by addingthe
suffix -{s -harú:
 Plural Q ôsr6,ql€ÈÈ.' yokãthmãdaúho? Is thisKathmandu?
I *,+eqr$Èt ã, kãthmãdaú ho. Yes,üs is Kahnafru.
|rÈ^ mãrúe perso, I rr;à6- nancnenarl peopie
ffi nepaf Nepati rcpãliharü Nepatìs ot
| ffi.F
ícÍ€ tapãi you I avri6. r"fan*t youpeopte I *{, fret { t úã" pokharã ho. No, thisis Pokhara.
(Htch) | Crieti However,when answeringa questionit is more commonto respond
ftrfr fimi you I fcrt6s rimarr youpeopte with the afiirrnative or negative form of the verb with which the
Middle) | Mddle) ouestionended:
a àmtqql<*È ? yo kãfhnã{aú ho? Is thisKathmarìdu?
However,it is not necessaryto attach-Ë€ -harú to a nounwhensome a È, sTEflddÌ | ho, kãfhmã{aú ho. Yes.thisis Katlnnandu.
other word in the sentencemakesit clear that the noun is plural. In
úe following sentences,úe word that takesthe plural suÍirx is the oÍ
one that the speakerwishesto emphasize: A Èçt, àtqaà | hoina, yo pokharã ho.No, this ìs Pokhara.
qrfr'{s ftRffi d r hiimihara 6ikçak hai. V9 aÍe teacheÍs. €{ hqiur is often usedfor yes:
Thereis no needto add-{s -harü to lqrsffi 6ikçak as well asto qrfr Q d.csr ò ? ryo lÌame6ho? Is that Ramesh?
hlmi. qrfr hãmi is emphasized. A {, {ÈT È t hqiur, Rameóho. Yes,that's Ramesh.
fcfi-Es fq-fl"f Èì r timr-harii üdyãrthi hau. &! aÍe súuderÍs. Often, È ho is andftt hoina is ror are also usedto meanyes and
There is no needto add -õiF-harü to ffi no regardlessof úe verb in the question:
riOyertni as well as to
lïÍqÌ timl-.ÌõqÌ ümi is emDhasized. OdqÉ{f
qrfr frrq-dE€(f, r , hunuhuncha?
hãrni 6ikçakharú haú. We are teachers.
,1,fr, r <Ìvr { t ho, ma Rame6hú. Yes,I aÍi Rallr,esh.
fqerfi 3ikçak is emphasized.
or
frfr fe-sl"fE€ Aì r fimi ürlyãrthihani \a.t.. you are students.
l, È*c,q*qã t hoina,ma Orn hÍr- No,I am Qm.
ffi viayert}i is emphasized.

6 Asking and answering questions D2 Arrivingat the college

In everydayspokenNepali, the only differencebetweenâ statement Gita and Bindu reachthe collese üth Bimal Kumar.
and a questionis the intonation. To put it simply: the tone of youÌ íÈdr *r.qqr.{rtrsnqÈr
voice goesup ât the endof a quesúon,while at the endof a statement Giui yo Mahendra mahãüdyâlay ho?
it goesdown: Is thisMalrcndraCollege?
fr nrc.q6 qi I yo kãthmãdâú ho. Thisis Kathmandu. fffq{qr< fr rfrr'5<rqrf*qfd{AÌr
@ ho pronouncedin a low tone.) Bimal Kumãr ho, yo Mahendra nahãüdyâlay ho.
Yes. This is MahendraColleee.
à õr.6qrd ô , yo kãfhmãCaü ho? k this Kathmatdu?
rq.1 -Â, lír.teQs--\
(|r -----:- - -í
Íìr€.1
@ ho pronouncedin a rising tone.) Bindu ti- mõncheharú ko hun?
Nepali doespossesswords for yes and ,no:theseare iíã and {{ ahã Who üe thosepeople?
respectively.
 f,qqq +qR Êcfi-q€
ffi g1rà Ffi-{ È, eÌ qrrsrÈ, { fr--fi.{F Grammar
qrfl( qfqfirg4 |
Bimat KumãÌ tiniharii yidyaúhi hun yo SaÌ-tho, tyo Ga4eí hq 7 ThiÍd person pnonouns(fie, she, theyl
ra tiniharü Mãyã ra Ambikã hun. lf you arespeakingabouta person,thepronounyou choosemustÍeflect
They are studen*. This is Salil, that is Ganesh,and ÌryhetherthatpeÍsonis seniororjunioÍ to you in age,socialclass,etc.,
thoseare Maya andAmbika. ondmustalsoindicatewhetherúrc is in theproximity or not whenyou
íÈfi qÈçàqFÈftrerõÈr speakThe samethreelevelsof poütenessexist herethat apply !o úe
Gitii ani tyo mãnche íikçak ho? secondpeÌsonpronouns,althoughthey aÌe not exact eqúvalentsin
And is thatpersona teacher? lermsof their usage:
t*qq m{R qgr I rqÌ err< tìar crcl
Ë{Ë;E |írì-FFt(cFs( qtqr ! LOW (simplereference)
Bimal Kumâr hajur. vahã CâkÍâr Rameí Thâpã hunuhuncha. MIDDI-E (polite reference)
namaskãr Cãktar Thãpã ! HIGH (honorific reference)
Yes.He is Dr RameshThapa.Hello, Dr Thapa! LOW third personpronounsare:
<ìsreÌTcr ïrrwrifd{dS{r.fi r+EQs+Ì66or 6 ír hdshe
RameshThãpã namasklr Bimal Kumãrfi" vahãúLarúko q I vo rr- trus
hunuhuncha? aqÍ tyo it, that
Hello, Bimal Kumarji. Who are they?
õ ú ÌìelsÌleis usedto refer to a personin his/her úsence whenthere
Ê{Fq3flÌ rfq€fi-drq-€-drrÊEffig5gu rqqÌffiEs r is no needto talk aboutthat personwith deferenceor politeness.qü
Bimal Kumãr vahãhârü Gitli Khadká'-ra Bindu Sàrmã caÍmotbe usedasa pronounto refer to things or objects,andis used
hunuhuncha. nayã üdyãúhiharú. only to refer to humânbeings.
TheyarcGitaKhdka andBinduSharìa Newstudents.
Wh e d yo andd tyo both meanir, the düferencebetweenthem is
tìsrqrqr ï{È,ffiR I that fryo refers to somethingnear to the speaker('this') whíe çÈ
RÀn€shThãpã namaste,namaste, tyo refersto somelhingawayfrom úe speaker('that';. È yo andeÌ
Hello, hello. tyo haveúe pluralformsfr yt andâ ti respecúvely: thehrst of these
,ftmrt*€ ruÈq{r is often pronouncedwithoutits initial Í i.e. r:
Gitii ra Bhdu namastehajur. ò yo andefr tyo can also sometimesbe usedto meanúe oÍ sle, but
Hello, sir this can soundimpolite and it is better to use only q ü to refer to
peopleat this level of poüteness.
1qlrqÊ".* Mahendra mahâvidy-alay Mahendra College MIDDLE pronouns vfr urü, fufr yini and fufÌ tini are in their
{Ì ti Í}tose qf€(
Cãktar doctor singularforms generallya featureof culturedor literary Nepali rather
n;àe- nÉncheharü peop,íe rqqp namaskãr àello or
+Ì ko wtro? than of colloquial speech.When they are usedin speech,they refer
goodáye (more formal
g1 hun are mostcommonlyto women.They areusedto refer to personswho aÍe
than cqâ nâmast€)
<ra and rqÌ navã new felt to deservea modicum of honorific reference,but not the full-
blown honorific grade(oneexamplemight be a man speúing about
his wife).
EXERCISE í Answer the following questionsaboutyourself:
cÍr ulr ano r.rír IlIÌ naveolslanlÍeleÍence,wrulerqir ytlll relersto
t dcÉ1=dIr(tãs|{È€;l'? tapdBimal Kumãr hunuhuncha? a person who is physically close to the speaker.The plural forms
1 dcÉt{qndilTúà'ì tâpdvidylmtrl--hunuhuncha? JrllEÈ pnrneru, lqrlÉâ yrÌInaÌu and lcl.llËÈ llll||lâru aÍ€ useo mucn
t dcr{ìcrôffi{-6 ? tapãi nepãli hunuhuncha?
more coÍnmonlyin speechthan the singularfonns, md herc úey are
simply pronounstlat refer, politely but not exceptionallypolitely, ro Negadvcs
personsin the plural.gfi-{t rrniharú is in mostcontextsthe word you Bachaffumativeform of {ho hasa negativeform:
shoulduseto Íefer to peopleas Ílìey. afrtmative I oegative
HIGH pronounsz16Íyúã and*{ vahã and their plural forms r$'{s IJOWSINGULAR
ho j" hoina r'snoÍ
yahãhsÍii and s-{'€€ vahãharü aÍe used to refer to personsvery tÌ | òfl
politely in theiÍ presenceândabsencerespectively.Inevitably,you will LOW PLI,JRAL& MIDDLE SINGTJLAR
be morcplite abouta personwho canhearwhatyou aresaying,so+{ ff hun ardis làr<l hoinan aÌe Dot/bnot
vahã is generallyusedorúy for personsdeservingesçrecialdeference HTGHSINGTJLAR& PLI,JRAL
andrespect:one'sparents,teacher,etc. +d vatã is often pronounced 65go hunuhuncha Vare lüfÈ-ï huDu- arenot/is oü
andsometimeswritten asçduhã. huDna

8 He is, st e is, it is, they are with È ho ïo be (using È ho to define people's nationúties). Here are some
examples:
Singutar aflfumative
LOW w fie { t ma õgrej hú. I am Engüsh.
v, Ql üho Mre (distant,Low) is arfr q,ìc d t hã|ni jarman llaú. We aÍe GeÍman.
qìÈr yo ho iÍlfÌtis (nearby,Low) is fffi qr(ff-{ tì | timi bhãrabia hau. You M) areIndian.
çqr Ql Bo ho iúáa, (distant,Low) is dcri ffi tapd nepõli hunuhuncìa. Íou (H) areNqpú.
6{il6 |
MIDDI.E oqìfut"rà r ú amerikanho. S/he(L) is
J'I I Eí uni hun úe (dist nt, Middle) is American.
firâ rr yin- hun Mre (nearby,Middle) r's s.ft crffi Srhe(M) is
€ï t utri pãkistãDihun.
r(|'|| Éí tim- hun s/he(distant,Middle) is Pakisani.
HIGH +{ÈFrnÌ 6g6o t vauãciniyãnunuhunctaS/heQI)is
q-dg$'E yshã hunuhuncha úe (nearby,High) is Chirese.
yahã hunuhuncha s/re (distant,High) is
neSaave
Plurâl q EÌï Èg-{ | ma jarman hoina. I am not Gennan.
LOW
yr-hun .they(reaÍby,l-Ãw)arc
{rfrdÌ's ÈEqï t hãrni ãgrej hoinaú. Weue nothglish.*
ffi qìfrfi àïn+ | fimi amerikan hoinau, You (M) arc not
<l| 6.1 fi hun t rel (distant,Low) arc AmeÍican.
MIDDLE dqr€ÈFrqÌ ËT{q r tapd ciniyãhunuhunna,You(Íí) ae
sr rQeÉÍ unihaÌú huD Íiìel (distant,Middle) are rct Chinese.
rqÌ Ec Q1 yiniharú hun úey (nearby,Middle) are sÈ€R|-frÈí{ r ú hindustãnihoina" S/he(t-) is
r(|írQ6 É.r tiniharn hun úey (distant,Middle) are not Inüan.
HIGH sfr ffi È{;rt t uni nepãIihoinan. Sfte (M) js
qQrEÊ yúãharü hunuhurcht they (teaúy,High) are
Ë1Erte not Nepali.
afqFü€E vúãhaú hunuhuncàa fáey (disrant,High) are +dvrfu<rfr g56q lvanãpaHsteni S/he(m is not
hunuhunna. Pakistani.
 *Note: "fhe 1sÍms sÍÌfrfi am€rikan Amertcan and dÌ-E
ãgrej ÈÈ fr-dw seto kitiib whio book
English are often used to ÍefeÍ generally to foreigners or white *ír f{ff{Ë€ setã kitãbharii white books
people. wffÈâ sãm-keF small girl
iTtii, the l,ow word for you, would not be usedin sentencessuchâs ff{ràâ-{€ sãnã keftarú smalLgirls
the above.An exampleof its usewould be:
b Invariable adjeúives
Ètdds, tã rnürkh hm, YouI-\ arcn idiot Il.ft{fr's|n garib kisãn poor fanner
rl(lq l Ì* ! lilQ- gaÍib kisãnharü çnor farmets
9 Tlris, íhat, these and t rose gsrfr6r saphã kofhã cleanrcom
fr yo and eò tyo and their plural forms fr yi and fi fi are most qsrÈ6|{€ saphã kofhãharü cleanrooms
comrnonlyusedas adjectivesto mean this, ütat, theseal;]ldthose: trfr qr.à dhâni mãnche rich man/ lnrson
õò cFÈ ìqrff eÌ | tyo mãnche nepãU}lo, ThatpeÍsonis u-fiqrÈ€ dhrni mãncheharrl rich men/ people
í4T fr-{rT nayã tatan new vnn
âèaMÈl yokefãvidyã,thlh".
il::#yt, ïqÌfrffi{€ nâyã kalemharú new Irens
sfrident. "
EXERCISE 2 Complete the following sentenceswiú úe
fr qFÈ€ 3iÌ'q Èfi{ th-mãncheharü ãgrej Thoseçnople are
appÍopriateform of $ ho to form an afF[mative statement.Work in
hoinan. not Engüsh. transliterationfiÍst, úìen wdte the sentencesout in Devanagari:
ftsÈfi-{<fi-drr yi bahin-harú citã ra Theseyoung girls
1 q 3iÌE... mâ ãgrej...
rqrq 6n I Bindu hun. arcGitâandBindu. 2 {Ifrffi... hãrni vidyãútú...
10 Adiectivês 3 ftfrl@. tinr- hindustãni..,
4 ffi{sfu{|-í... timiharú kisãn"..
Adjectivesare of two types: 5 ilÉ fs|effi... tapãi 6ik|ak...
6 s fsrFr... ü Sikçâtr...
a inflectingadjectiveswhich endin thevowel $ -o,
7 rfr Êrfrql"È... uni dhani mãnche...
b invaiable adjectivesendingin someothervowel,or in a consonant 8 frqFò6c-{fl'... h-mãncheharú prahari...
The endings of adjectives of type (â) must change (,inflect') 9 Tdìcffi... vahã nepã|i...
accordingto the numberand genderof the noun they describe.The 19q-6ftrwcfi-+... yahãharü bhãratrjâ...
endingsare:
EXERCISE 3 Convert the affirmative statementsinto negative
-* -o in the masculinesingular, statementsby changingúe forms of the verbs.
-ï -i in the feminine singular,
EXEACISE 4 Translateinto Nepali, giving both the script andthe
-qT-ã in the masculineand feminine plural.
transliterationforms, taking care to give the adjectivesthe correct
â Innecting âüectiv€s endinEs:
çôrrw fhúlo râjã gÍeat king I good farmer 6 rich farmers
thülã rãjãharü gÍeat kings 2 big book 7 good books
{STts
{TqÌ ifdr rãmro kefã good boy 3 rich girl 8 small girls
u*rèz16 rãmrã ket5harú good boys 4 newboy 9 poor boys
5 good king 10 rich kings
 Dg a view of Kathmandu
Two villagers have reacheda hilltop overlooking the Kathmandu
Vulley. From therc they can see Kathmanduand the villages that
sunoundit. They discussthe view.

3
,q ct Ir
J
l-l

ot
o g) o
r+ +
--14
{t - ^
al., Ir
frl Ir J
J .ò q€{ sr6-{ì=Ì È, ÈÉï 1

3 g)
{tq
ô]
-ì
€l
JìI
-ì
o g) -{ì
Rãme

u?I
tyo Saharkãfhmã{aú ho' hoina?
That town is Kath{nandu,isn't it?
È, ç-àsr6 {r6,flcÌ d t
ÁÍì{ Dhane ho, tyo Saharkãfbmâ{aü ho.
rì)
5 II Yes,that town is Kathnandu.

CLo
- -
{rÌ oroqr<Ìãô8,òí{r
Rârne kãthmâdaü thülo cha, hoiua?

tr
u
II
.rF
Dhâne
Kathmanduis Ug, isn't it?
{.Èìqìo r
ho, dherai fhúlo cha.
In üris unit you will leam Yes,it's very big.
Írf
o
. how to dEscÍibêand ask
aboú things and peoplê {TIÍ çra-qrd{ôstïfret
. how to discuss distancesând Rãme kâçhmãdaúkasto cha? rãmro cha?
locations Whatis Kathmanrlulike? Is it nice?
. how to use Íelationshiptêrms
to addFss pêople
rFT
Dhane
{Tr5l
rãmrai cha,
Grammar
It's quitenice. 11 Pronounswith 6 ct a
{È *ft<frT.crnÉ{r You must use the S ho form of the verb to berf yon are defining
Rãme ani tyo kun gãü ho? someúing or someonewith a noun, but if you are locating the thing
And which village is that? or personyou aretalking aboutor describingit with an adjectiveyou
qì eàrrÈfrfl,qm$rrq<frr must use the 6 cha form. The High forms WffE hunuhuncha
(affirmative) and W{q hunuhunna (negative), which were
Dhane tyo gãú hoina, bhaktapur Saharho.
Thatis not a village, that is BhaÍÍapurtown. introducedin Unit I, are the sameregardlessof wheúer they are
defining, describingor locating.The other forms are asfollows:
{È q riàsrflffìo,òí{r
Rãme e. Qro6ahar sãnocha, hoina?
Yerbform Pronoun(s)
Oh. That town is small, isn't it?
q chu qma
èrì È,qfusrìo rÈìçôà ra<qm-r-<Èt5rìvq{fr
r d chaú Ufr nernianOArfiqs hãmiharú
Dhane ho, ali sãno cha. dherai fhülo chaina. tara bhaktâpur 6€ chas õ tii
dherai puÌãno sâhar ho. oì' chau fafr uni anofafi-a-stimtaro
Yes,it is quite small It is not very big. But Bhaktapuris a 6 cha gú fr voeÈtvo
very old town. 6;l chatr fi uni fiffi yfui andfTfi fini
fryiandfrU
EE{Sahâr roÌr,n nó gãí viltage sfi-{€ uniharü,fufi-{€ yiniharú ând
t(. 6t rt|utraru
àt dh€rai very rm1< bhaktapur Bhakapur
ocha is qe Oú
nd kasto.ü&ewhat?how? +È ali qurÍe
ïi rãmrai quite nice fi târa but Negatives
3n kun wÍlbá ? g<rì purãno o1d EachafÍrmative form of Ehas a negativeform:
Affirmaüve I Negative
q úu 0 am -lI Èq
r'{ chaina am not
oì chaú (we) are I àiì' chainaú íre not
D gXgnCSg S Answerthe following questionsin Nepali about Eq chas íyou) are G) | àd{ chainas are not
Dialogue 3. If your answerto 1 is in the affirmative, wdte the NeDâli
oì chau (youl
dr are (M) | õcÌ
(you) arc rhì chainau írxenot
tor Yel Kathmanduls brg: if your answeris negative.write úe
fr cha is (L) lËí chaina is not
Nepali for Nq Kathmanduis not big, jf rs sma11, ând so on. q úan is (M)/ are G) | ÈqT is/aÍe not
thainaa
r. +raqreìado r kãfhmâ{aú fhúlo cha?
1. ïmg< rrg È? bhaktapur gâú ho?
r. +raqrdiïqÌ or kãthmãdaü Íãmro châ? Fêminine Íorms oÍ E cha
v 6|aqrdeô qrcrÈ I kãthmã{aú fhüo 6ahar ho? If you aretalking úoa particularwomanor giÍl andaddressingher as
!. r<q{g{|ì ol bhaktapur purano cha? Ètã or Êcfr timr-you canchooseto usethe following feminine forms
a. qr5 a-+ÍvE( Sr bhaktapur nayã Saharho? of E cha:
 íq tã ches you (Í-rn) arc üt dherai very hasa secondmeaning,which is many.It meansrery
frfr Eaì' Íirni chyau you (Middle) are whenit comesbeforean adjective,but if it comesbeforea noun, or
If you are talking aboura particularwornanor girl and intend to use on its own, it meals many:
the Low pronounfor sáe (s ú), you can chooseto use the feminine Q ìqrqqr àt sE{{€ q ?nepãlmã dherai ,\e ttutenany F,wns
form of 6 châ, which is È che: óaharharúchan? inNepal?
$È ú che sáe(Low) r's I a{.ÈïËa1 t ahã, dherai úainan. No, thereaÍe
not manv.
If you are talking abouúa paÍticular Ìa,omanor girl andare using one
of the Middle words for úe or úe (çfr uni, ffi p'a1, q ffi 6a1, But if you want to ask are ihetenmy üg awns in Nepal?you have
you can chooseto use the feminine form of ET úan, which is @ the problem that Èt qrr rr{€F. dherai thülã óaharharü could be
chln: takento meanllqry hig citiesinsteadof manv big cities.You get over
çfr@ this problemby moving the position of Èf dherai in the sentence:
uúúin sáe(distant,Middle) is
fufr@ yini chin súe(nearby,Middle) is Q ìcrqqr qn {!€q€ Èt nepãlmã thülã Ate theremmy big
fd-frk üni-chin sáe(distant,Middle) is q? óaharharú dherai townsin Nepal?
chan? ('âÍe big towns
Thesefeminine fonns are not used very consistentlyin everyday
manyin Nepal?')
spokenNepali, but úey are often usedby men to refer politely to
.l cÈ,ÈtÈqt ahã, dherai chainan. No, there are
theiÌ wives and oúer female relatives, and they should always be
nor many.
usedin the written language.There are no feminine negaúveforrns
of s úa. Oneothercomnrorúyor"6 *o.6 is qft6'fr siil{,lti a small quntity oí
which shouldonly be usedto qualify nouns:
12 qfr afi quite and,Ìt dherai very, many +ffi1}Ì dikati dúdh a üttle mik
qffi fi{â atikafi cini a üttle sugar
Nepali adjectivescan quúfied or emphâsizedby putting the
-be qFrdfr qrfr alikâti pi|nr-- a litÍle wateÍ
words srfr aü gurreor Èt dherai very in froìt of then. -

"tt$q
r üalidubtochâ. He is quitethin. 13 Questioningwords (interrogatives)
<ÍqÈìÈà{ r Rõm dherai mofo chaitrf.- Ramis notvery fat
In Nepali, many questioningwords (calledinÍerrogaaves)begin úth
e-frstfuffifu1 t uni alt hoci chin. Sheis nther short.
qÈiqrôq a ï k- ândbelongto a groupoÌ wordsúat follows a setpattem.Those
I ma rlherai aglo úL I am very tall.
beginningwith tI y- are 'this-words',thosebeginningwiú g W- or s
A secondway to quali! or emphasizean adjecúveis to changeits u- are 'that-words',andthosebeginningúth ç k- are wordsthat ask
endingto -q -ai if ir endsin a vowel or to add-È -si to úe end of the a questron.
word if it endsin a consonant:
'this-word' 'thaïword' interrogatives
dublo thin dublai quite thin s i he/she +ì Bo who?
qrel moto fat qre moÍâi quite fat ã yo iíthis d tyo iÍltha.t à he what?
Qr9| hoco shoÍ in stâtuÌe Qtr hocai ÍatheÍshoÍt àyo it/this iò tyo iÍ/that Sï ktm which?
in statuÍe qfr yati this much <=qft tyati that mach fid k^ti how much?
*Ì tall qÊ fabty ta
TTcÌ "go
q<Ì yasto lr?e rftrs gd tyasto ,rte túzt qã k'F,to tikc what?
râmno good, nice ïÌ "d-
famrai nice enough qd yanã nere q{ qú
tya\á thcre kstnãwhere?
{IfrTÌ s5no small qFÌ sãnai Íathersmall
(tFI saphã cieaa qÈ saphai cleanenough
 sfr uti and3€ò usto are altemativeforms ïor that much and.likethat I lnless there is some good reason for it not to, a Nepali sentencewill
rcspectively. ulwaysbegin with a subjectand end wiú a verb: everythingelse will
Becauseg{ 1ga meanswhich?,an enquiry that involves t}e use of come in between. If a change is made to this word order it has an
{ï kun may useeiúer úe verb $ ho or tlÌe verb !t cha: cftect on the meaning of a sentence; it may emphasize something, oí
cxpresshesitationor doubt:
S. S, È:
Ìqï<s[ïq|qü yo kun de3ho? Wich countryis this?
| yo desnepãlho. ïcFi'f Ë c I nepãli hú ma. I'm a Nepali. I am!
Thiscouniy is Nepat.
ffiü{úo aqr{ r vidyãrthi AÍe you a student,
qttsqr
T-{ flT{ pasalmã kun sâbun In the shop which hunuhuncha tapãi? úen?

mia-mfu gr {tr kãfhmãCaümãkun In Kathmandu,which

Becausefc(ì kasto meanslike wlraÍ?,a questionin which it is used

Cl4 Nearandfar
usuallyasksfor a 'describing'reply.So.an enquiryúat involvesthe Salil hasjust arrived in town andhe needsto visit the bank andthe
useof trlÌ ;€s1gusuallyusesúe verb6 cha: postoffìce.He asksa passer-by for directions.

yo deókastocha? cfrq g trrq,{TR t +Ei 6<r+ w<o r

ÌÌ"frTÌ"r Whatisüs camaylike?
qÌEsr{ITf| yo deSrãmro cha. Salil ebbã! mnr*! yahãhulãkÈtlarúa?
Thiscountryis good-
Oh (ltounger)brother,hello! Is therea post office here?
d crft FRÌ ot yo pãnr-kasto cha? Whatis thiswaterüke?
qTq]-{T$FfE I yopâm saphã cha. Táis wateÍis clean. {{
Rane cha dãi.
However,it is also possibleto ask what kind of counw is this?.in Yes,(elder)brother.
whichcaseyou are askingfor a ,defining'shrementani callingfor
Fô-{ qÉ l qt4 É Ê l tcnÌi (. ênt( dt6t t r
theuseof ãÌ ho:
Salil yÀabajç" n tfaL ghar kâti tãChã cha?
fr *à Èvrfl yo kasto deí ho? What kind of country How far is thepost offrce[rom here?
is this? _è_-.
FT a( 4t6t ú.t-. q.n t, qt5 |
à Èf trfr ìlr È I yo dlrcmidlwri &Átn This.isa very
Rane dherai Íâdhãúâinâ, Iqiil€i clta dãi,
nch counfry.
It's notvay far, it's quiE neal (e|&r) brother.
à 6RÌ sffr È? yo kasto ptuú ho? Whatkind of wateÍ
stimqÈot
t|"1lol
is this?
àÈrr'ftfr r yo maito pãni ho. SaEl tyâhã bâik pani cha?
Thisis üÍty water.
Is therea bank theÍe too?
14 The simple sentênce o,*+vÈo rqàor
You haveno doubt realizedby now that Nepali has a different word Rane cha, baik pani cha. thüai cha.
order from English.In Nepali, the naturalplacefor the verb is at the Yes,there'sa banktoo. h's quitebig.
end_of a sentence.Sirnply, an English speakersaysI am English, (ô-{ 6qr+q<Èfui+ Èì arers t
while a Nepali speakersays: Salil hrilãkghaÌddüi baik dheÍaiEütâ dta?
qìcrôõ t ma nepãli hú. .I Nepali Is the bnk very far fÍom thepost office?
am,.
ilqrà t€FtÌ ËTË;6r tapãi üdyãúhi ,you studen!
aÍe..
hunuhuncha.
 ({ +{, d vfr lÈà o r*r <6cmw a-qi<e ìcrrfi nepãlmã in Nepal
efõI6Tl on the table
Íebulmã
Rane ahã, úyo pani najikai cha. baik ra hutãk ghar yatãtep -*E* baikmã at the bank
lã{hã chcina.
No, that's quitc neaÍtoo. The bankand üre postoffice arc not Two other postpositionsthat are usedin Dialogue 4 are -"Irã -bâlâ
fu ftom here. l?omand-Èfu -dekhi -&om,srnce.Boú of úese meânÊom, but only
.àfu -dekhi can alsobe usedwith expressionsof time:
vfi-{ qrq È+ r Ëqr+ qcsr fre 6 ?
Salil {ia baik ra hulãk gharmã bhi{ cha? frrõ.qTcfiflz kãthmã4aübãÍâ from Kathmandu
Are thebankand ihe postoffice cïowdedtoday? {!-€qàfu la+{andekhl [rom London
crqèfu ãJadekhi ftom todây
rh<r<rwcà+<qcr+T{{<q tqMrr.{rfrÈ<rE I l Qql qr€l hiiodekhi sinceyesterday
Rane chaina dãi. {ia baik ra hulãk ghar banda chan.
{ia If you need to âsk how far away someúing is, you will use the
sârkâri bidã cha.
No, (elder) brother. Toilay the bank and the wst ofrìce adjective è-rdrlãdhâ úsÍanÍ with one or other of these two
are closed.There'sa govemmenthoüday today. postpositions.When stating or discussingdistances,the word eldÍ
{ã{hã must usually be rctained,even when you also mention some
tn bhãi_(younger)brother units or measuresof distance.
+{ baik ban&
<tVa$ 49ry gcr+r'àtuhutãkghantekhi rìR$-dfd fi.6qÌ-d {f{ bhaktâpurbâta How üstant is
E{IFT' hulãk qhÍr po$ omce ftom thepostiffice ãtõTE ? kãfhmã{aú katt Kathmmdu from
<Rdü (elderl brother tw aja today p{hãcha? Bhaktapur?
{Ëkrãyahãbãtâ firomúere fe bÍiC c;wd rìR-Taffcfif6.cÈí 3í|6 bhaktspurbãta Katlmanduis eight
qfu kati how much? u, gfrai house,home, buildinp qÍí{ ef6r
éÍéttã4hã far, distant *< banda súut c,losed p{hâcha, BhaktapuÍ-
rÈànqiikai gutrenear {.Tr+ sar.kãrÍ goyernmerfal
sdtyahã ÍáeÍe la-{rbidã úoüdãy If you wish to say úat somethinghas been the casefor a certain
period of time, and still is the case,you shoulduse-ìfu -dekhi with
the presenttenseof the verb:
r @àfu ìvrcmEr maüijodekhi I un in Nepal shrce
Grammar nepãlmã chu. yesteÍday.
rqàfu q ìqr{Tr sr abadekhi ma Ftom now on I ant
15 Postpositions:-qr-I|tã, qra-bãla, -àfu-dekhi nepãlmã chu. in Nepal.
In English thereis a categoryof words called prepositions:to, a4 ü, Units oÍ distance
tor, etc. Theseare called prepositionsbecauseúey come in Nepalis thiú in tenns of both miles and kilometres, úough the
\o-,
fronf ofthe noun or pronounthey are acringqlon: to theman, at the metric systemis graduallybecomingprevalent:
house,from London, etc. The Nepali equivalentsof thesewords are
3rl-õqErr ãth mãil eight miles
calledpostpositionsbecausetley comeaãer úe nounthey are acting qÌffifuã( naü kilomitâr nine kilometÍes
upon: the man to, the houseal London from- ln wnting they musi
alwaysbejoined to the end of úe noun or pronoun. In the hills of Nepal,a üaditionâlmeasuÌeof distanceis the frq ko6,
which is usuallyinterpretedto Íìean fivo niles, or sometimesúalfaÍl
The postposition-rfi rnã meansrn, aÍ or on..
hour's walk Foreignerswalking in Nepal often 1n6 ths fre km an
elusiveconcep! peúaps becauseit measuresdistânceparüy in teÍns
of tlrc time takento travel it, and becauseNepalisaxenaturallymuch
at
Tore-adept n:gotiating úe steepups and downsof theiÍ landscape
írfr nãti grandson
thanforeign visitors. 'l I t(l.t I nãtini granddaughter
ïrfr-ilffi nãti-nãtini grandchiJdren
16 Using relationshipterms to address people *When referring to a known indiüdual, úe foreign speaker
shouldusethe Èonorific termsfrm1Én-nan and-ffi irimati.
It is commonpracticein Nepali for peopleto addressothers,wheúer qFiTlogne andRfFÍÌ svãsni aÍe usedto refer to husbandsand
they aÍe strangers,friends, oÍ acquaintânces,by using a relationship wivesmore Ín rural areas,somepeople-u-se
the words
term. Obviously,you needto judge which term is appropriatefor the ^generally.
vfi joi or 1aÌ bü{hi ('old woman'1for wrfe and{ÌÈ poi or {6r
personyou are addressing,but it is perfectly acceptableto address bü{hã ('old man') for áusband
a
maleyoungerthanyourself asrÌf{ bhâi yo ungerbrother,or a Íemale
who is older úan you asÈâ didi eldersisrer-Elderlypeoplemay be
addressedasETbã fafáer or qlqÌ õmã moúe4 no stigmaìs attached EXERCISE 6 Translate úe following sentencesinto Nepali,
to age in Nepal. These terÍns are often also added to oeoole,s referring to úe box abovefor the correct levels of politenesswhen
personalnamesin conversation:3Ìfu{r ffi Amiúã diOr-.iqÌq'lIrs choosingwhich form of the verb to use.
Salil bhãi- A chart ofkinship terminologyis given in the Áppendices 1 Youngerbroúer is at school.
at úe back of úis book. 2 Elder brotheris in Darjeeling.
3 Elder sisteris at MahendraMúãvidyãlay.
ffi cR-{R nepãtipariyãÌ A Nepali tam y 4 Tomorrow motherandfaúer are at home.
1 To be addresseilandÍefeíred to with High pronouns 5 Thereare many brothersand sistersin the family.
S{r,qr buvã orbã father EXERCISE 7 Convertthe affirmaüve Nepali sentencesyou hâve
ficï, {Ì ãmã or mã mother completedfor Exercise6 into negaúvestatements,by changingthe
FT-firIT,;lT-fiqÌ buvã-ãmâ or bã-ãmã nnther and forms of the veús.
father
flT{r, {rÈ . hqiurbà or bqie granüather E)(ERCISE I Overleafúere is a simplemap of the part of Nepal
Ë{-e{Íqr,d-çE hqiuãmã or bqiyai grandmother in which you âre stâying,showing:
2 be
.To addressedwith High pmnounsand usuallyreferrcd to
wth High (male)or Middle (female)pronouas I qrqfl qfi{{ sarasVãü-mândir Saraswatitemple
sIFTÌ,-,'ïtq{t svãsni or S1imati * wife {fl. bCiq marketplace
qÌt"Í, ? _
',ÌÌqq logne or órimãnn husband 3 Tffi{o pasalharii shops
T{<l' didi eldeÍ sistaÍ 4 õrfi baft bank
<r{, <rx, il!ï dãi or deiyü or dãju elder brother
q- hul?kch_gt _ posroffice
t6 ry
rË'frTr prahaÌi thânã police station
3 adúessed with Middle pronounsand usuallyrefened.ro 7
.To-be 6ÍTi hotel hotel
wth Low (male)andMiddle (female)ponouns S gt^ÈTs CãirneUj Danphet-odge
bhãt youngeÍ 9 €rÌ qÌ{r seti-kholã Seti K}rola (a river)
brother 10 trsr sadak road
q.lÉrI bahrl youngeÍ ster
6r{T chorã son
bÌfr choú' daughtcr
ffiô chorSchori sonsand
daughors
 Refening to úe
nap, and
assumingúat
you arc staying
in the lodge,
answerthe
following
questionsin
Nepú:

I r6tcr.rrfu+ar prahan- lqãnã nqiik chÀ?

ì ËqrFERãrdT6 ?
{1 Ir
hulãk ghar lãdhâ cha?
âl/ J
1 rwqre e-dRãfr eraTg r

I
e-qrafiàìor
r6frw+r+-qÌor
qÊ<t{Efa{rarfr arcrs r
rr<erfr
l4ihâts bqiãr kati Íãdhn cha?
bajãnnã ke ke cha?
pranan- tìãnã kahã cha?
sarasvaf mrndir bqiãÌ'bãtâ
'\)
o
kâti Fdhã cha? É

3
qt
=

rü

In this unit you will learn

. how to count and enumerate
p€ople,things ând units
. horìfto talk âbout poÍtâblè
possê6sions
 Cls Studentsatthe languageschool Grammar
The MinisteÍ for Fducation is visiting a school and is asking the
teacherhow many studentsaÍe studyingeachlanguage.
t7 The Nepali numerals
The Nepú numeralsare very similar to the Hindi numerals,wiú
{á ffirorqrfriff{rffigcs-t r only a few exceptions.The systemis complex,andit is necessaryto
nepãli kakçãmã katiianã vidyãrtbiharü chan?
leameachnumberfrom one to 100asa sepaÍateitem of vocâbulary,
How many studentsare therein the Nepali ctass?
though each group of ten has its olvn intemal logic and it is
fsÍrrr Ecq+r Ê*erf 6{ rqÍq-{íÌ àa r qtqqqr àâ r occasionallypossibleto guesslThe fust ten numbersaÍe giv€n here,
Silqak dasjanã üdyãrthi chan. pãcjanâ kef5 ra pãcjanã kef. both on úeir own and wiú the classifier suffrxesthey often needto
Thercarc ten students.Five boysandfrve girls. take (as explainedbelow). You are advisedto leam the numbersin
q r3lfr qÌS {ffqï tfd-fir ffiq€ q r setsof ten (seethe âppendices).
mantÌi e. ani ãgrejt kakçãmã kaúijanã vidyãrthihârü chan?
umbêrs and numeÍal classiÍieÌs: summary
Oh.And how many stuibn$ üe thercin tfu Eagüshclass?
frrs-fi r+Ìnm *fu^qfro rqÌfir ì-dr1<es{rffi Ealqqr namber + humüclassifrer + non-human
classifret
eqregq-.ri
ffirs o-rrr qrs{r ekjanã
I r s{ek ç+a eufã
óil$ak $o kalqã ali fhúlo cha. nauj.nã k€Íã ra dasjenã keti g€dur g€-r{r.luiianã gr=rduitÀ
2 t
chan, jammii pnnõisjanõ üdyãrthiharü ch^n. 3 r fi-{fin frff{rtinjanã fiT|TëT 6nvatã
That classis quitc big. Thereare nine boys andten girls. 4 I qR câr qrrq{r cãrjanÀ qr.qa cãrvalâ
All togethertheÍeâre 19 students. 5 r lti pic qi?ídÌ úcjanã ciï{ãï pãcvalã
ìcrfr{friqrÊèn-{€qÈq I 6 r s cha oqír chajanã sldr úavalã
mantri nepãli kakçãmõ üdesiharú natrai chan? 7 ,t srdsãt fffitïr sãljanõ {r(r.r.Isãtvafã
8. qrõâth qro-wrãthjanã qr5{ãrãÍbvatã
Ate thereo y foreigoersin the Nepati ciass?
9 r cÌ nau ïÌs{r naúanã ïÌ{ër nauvatã
f{T{ È<fi-{F JÌì E{ q-dq rfi-{s{r ÈÊrqÌ, qtq-t+r dÌ.q, r 10 r. <s das <s-fir dasjanã <r+ardasvafã
€FErÍÌ"mr6 |
6ilqak videóiharü mãtrai úan mantnjyü. tibjanã cintyã,
pãcjanã ãgrej, ra duüanã jarman chan. í8 Numbers of people
Therc are only foreigners,Minister. Tfuee Chinese.five
Bngüshand two GeÍmans. Whenyou areusingnumbersto enumeratehumannouns- i.e. words
that representpeople- you shouldaddthe classifier-tFÍIianã to the
rfá mantú miruster end of the oumber.I1 is incorrect to say ('F n;È ek mãncbe one
qrÈ e\ianã manche. If the
sríÍ kakçâ class gtls Tnnon: úe coÍrect form is çiõEFÍT
TÌ mã rn qqr jamnâ all togetheÍ, in nurnberis plural, thereis no needto add úe plural suffix -{5 -harü
nfus{r kaEianã how many? total to the noun, bebausethe numberalreadytells you that thereis more
({q{r d-sjanâ Íen rqr{sq{r nnnãisjanã 19 than one personând therefoÍe-{€ -harú is superfluous:
qfïr{ràaT pãcjìne kep t?ve t{àn€F vide3iharü foreigterc qfq-{r qFò onetrErson
e\ianã manc}€
boys ttl mâtrai ody duiianã logne-mãnche two men (liuÍally ,
$-q-{r ffi-ql;È
Cfqrtràâ pãcjanã kef lÍve ráq mantriiyú formof husban&person)
giÍls address
for a ministÊr frfií-{r grá-qrfr{ &ianã svdsni-mãnis threewomen
dru-+rìzrnaujanã kelã nrne (litera y,
boys wife-Derson)
 The words qrè mãnche and qrF{s nãnis are inúerchangeabte, Íìï ô+o r+-cqr +rre{r vÍì &+ e1t
though úe first is used more commonly. Both mean persãn,but Rsmesh Íhr-kcha. kalam ra kãgathaú pani fht-lt chan?
unlessqualified by the addition of qr* svãsú (womaríwife) útey OK. Are thepens andpapeÍsOK too?
can usually be takento rcpresenta male,
fÌc"T qtd€dqr \rscr+lrc <6FKn€( |
Cf exencse 9 Answer
úe following questionsin Nepali on Poehan harek febulmã eufã kalam ra kãgat cha hajur.
Dialogue5: On eachtablethereis a pen andpaper,sir.
ffifttrqr: nepãJikâlqãmã:
r. ;nfrqrr Ê+qnfEsw r katiianâ vidyãúhiharü chan? rÈarkofhã room qdarko oÍ,er, next
r rkq+r dì-qs rr{ r kat[ianã ãgrejharü chan? rt€ër kâtivâlã how many? S-sr(€ròi<ãvf fio o|furÇ'aÈy/)
r t[TCr-rÌT qq{{F E( ? kaQianâ jarmanharü chan? èT{ lebul Íáb1e €rathik fine, conect
qq! ï"HFIT: w{dr dâsvâtã Íen {irq kâlam pen
ãgreji kalqãmã;
s. 6fr-s{r f{flrfE€ E( ? ka(ianã üdyãúhiharii chan? Ès Ìnec cüât ãFì( kãgat paper
k. rRÍs{r {-drë€E( e q'5q?]ãthvalã eight È{ hâr€k each,every
l(aúiianã kelãharü chan?
E. +ft-q-nàâts el r qli mâtrai only qs.Í euÍã oneor a
katijanã kefharii chen?

CfO Setting up the exam room

Poshan,a junior teacher,is setting up a room for an examination. Grammar
Ramesh,úe principal, comesto checkthat all is well.
19 NumbersoÍ things
üsr fr +ìorqr frft-{crìE-ií 6{ r
lVhen you are using numbersto enumeratenon-humannouns- i,e.
Ramesh yo kofhãmã kativalã lebul chãn?
animalsand inanirnateobjects- you must always add the classifier
How many tablesare thercin thisroom?
-iÍãrvatã to theendof úe number.It is inconectto saygI' fõõlìÍ cãÍ
Èsur rsìrarol{çR I kitãb four boots: the correct forn is sTa{ãI cãrvatã kiüib. Again,
Poshan dasyaÍã chan hajur. -{€ -hârú is superfluouswhen the numberis plural.
ThereaÍe ten, siÍ.
The classifier-.tãI vatã is not pronouncedasit is spelled:the correct
€rr *È+ft-+aÈo1r pronunciationis 'autã'. It is addedto the numbersin a raúer less
Ramesh ani kativafã mec chan? regularway úarÌ the classifier-q;TTjanã.When it is addedto gfi ek
And how many chain are there? onq the combination producesqgãI eulã, pronouncedand often
Ès"r qra+aqrìs{ r spelled tÌa yaufã, and when it is added to (â dut rwo the
Poshan ãthvalã mãtrai chan. combinaúonproduces({a duilã, pronounced'dwitã'. For obvious
Thereare only eight. practical reasons,these two are used very commonly in everyday
<Èsr gr+rrrrcev-+rffiq, spokenNepali.
È{-{?
Ramesh e. kakçãmã dâsjanã üdyãrün* chan, hoina? eufã ('yautã') kitâb one book
Oh. Thereare ten studentsin the class,aren't there? ç{árÌq duitã ('dwitã') nec two chails
qg<,<cu-rro1rwff+Ì6r{r S€-qrc{aÈ 6{ | PerhapsbecauseNepali doesnot have an indefinite article a çgèT
S* eutã is often usedwiú humannouns,e.g.\ríeT1TI;òeutã mãnche
Poshan hqiur, daqianâchnn-arko koÍhãnú dúdrvalÀ mecfharÌ
Yes,theÍeare ten-Thereare a few chain in the next oneman oÍ a manío refer to a personúout whom úe speakerfeels
room- no needto be especia[y polite.
 ã) How many? Íqq qrqffiiiÌr È{r E r
When you are askingthe questionhow many? you mustadd one of Kamal qia timisãga paisã châ?
the classifiersto the interrogative+fr tati, ttre choice of classifier Do you haveany money on you nday?
depen.linguponwhetheryou are askingaboutpeopleor oüer things. {rd qiiïr qfimÍào rç+ Èa< rÍràs t
Because-$ïT janã can only be usedto enumeratepeople and _+a Amrit masãga?alikati cha, ek nohar mâtrai cha.
valã can only be used to enumerate things and animals, úe On me?I havea little. I havejust onehalf-rupee.
combinationof a numberplus a classifiercanalsobe usedon its own:
qlqr 6fufir qrÈEa ?gharmã katijanã
rqìT àfr rh rqrt qfu(et {frqÍ6 |
How manypople are Ksmal kehi chainâ. {ia masita d-e rupiyã cha.
mãnche chan? in thehouse? It doesn'tmatteLI've got En Íupeestoday.
(awTI E{ I dâsjqnã ghan- TheÍeare tàn.
Ì({T {fçrdr ã$164 ? gharmã kativafã {!( qÈ,rcÈ{rsrl+e6 rdcrtiiïTfraE ?
How manyroomsarc
kothã chan? Amrit masãgana paisã cha na cumf cha. tapãisãgacurol châ?
thercin the house?
fi-i-{ërq I ünvaÍã chan. I haveneithermoneynoÍ cigâÍetÍes.Do you havea
Thereare thrce.
cigaÍette?
However, when the question concemsunits of measurement,sfr
kati can be usedwithout â classifier suffix (seeGrarnmar 22). trg E, Tfrr Sr {ÈTcrd TÌd E I
Kamal cha, masãgaek baftã yãk cürof cha.
Yes,I have a packet of Yak cigarcttes.
D7 KamalandAmrit qTd qr{r,qr+1Ìc<rÈ s r
Kamal bumps into ArnÍit on tlìe street. Kamal, an office worker, Amrit ãhã, yãk curot Ìãmro cha!
alwayshasmoneyto spare,while Amrit, a young student,is always Oh, Yak cigaÍetlÊsaregood!
penniless. rrrqqÍí<Rr{E I
6qq Èí{, ffifl-ì+dT(Ì
6qq {È{Tdrrr{! Ksmal hoina, timi sãno ketâ hau. dhümrapãn khaÍãb cha.
Kamal aho Amgt bhãi! No,you are a small boy. Smokingis bad.
Oh, it's AmÍit!
qrd ;Ft€fiR frtìI <fË ! r$ aho (an exclamationof {M ãja today
AmÌit namaskãr Kamal dãi! pleasureor su4)rise) ^ {frd masita wiú me
HeL|o,Katnal! qf{ì ahile nov <vfnÌ das rupiyã tenrutrEes
IFIIiT rqwR!qRìfdrfu{?
ar ka'tã where,in which 1Ìe curof clgareffe
direction rT...
ï...nâ...na neither...not.
Kâmd namaskãr! úile kaüitira? ffi tira Íorvards s-ã{Ërek baflã onepacket
Hello! Where areyou off to now? q<ta<ghaúira towaÍdshome +r5rãhã (anotherexclamation
.r.{d qqfr<r Ërqqfl hâlkhabar news of pleasureor surprise)
AmÌit ghaúira. tÍfrÈrr timisãga viú yorl qçqÌï dhümrapãn smoking(a
Home. trr paisã money ratherhighflown Sanskrit
qd,n masãga? wiú me? term)
Fqr- sÍÈ {|{q{rã'dE r ç+ È6< ek mohar one mohar l{{|E kharãb lrad
Kamd ani hÃlkhabsr kâsto çtrar (a halÍ-npee)
And how are things? à$a kehi chaina it doesn't
qF ÌnaneÍ
tàs r
Amlit râmrai cha.
Fine.
 Grammar plural suffix -{€ -harú. NoÍ is it coÍect to use the plwal form of a
verü whenits subjectis a plural numericalquantity.
21 Possessionof portable items
Nepali doesnot have â verb that is the equivalentof the English Ío
haveor to own, brotestúlishes owneÍshipândtrnssession in different
ways. The first way is usedin relation to things that someonecan
carDr around on hiíher person. Often, úese aÍe things that arc
disposableor acquiredtemporarily:money, for instance,comesand
goes,anditems suchaspensgenerallyrun out of inï andhaveto be
discarded.
Possession is indicatedby using either one of two postpositionsthat
both have exactly úe samemeaning: with. T\e two words are -d-rt
sãga (someúmesspelt {f, saiga) and -fuí sita. These are added
directly on to nouns,namesandpronouns: Currency
ì"q The Nepú {tnï rupiyã rupeeconsistsof 100Ètr paisã. There are
keFsãga or ffia kpsita with the boy
also specialwords for a quaÌter-rupe€($iF,Isükã) and a half-rupee
t'fr-€rr Kumãrsãgâ or Tcr'fud Kumersita with Kimar
qürr (fr6 mohar or ÈÈ< mohor), though these tenns are gradually
masãga or ,+kd m?sjltawith me
falling into disuse,partly asa result of inflation. The abbreviationfor
Having addedoneor oúer of thesewords to the possesser, all that is Íupeeis Rs. in Romanscript, and a. ru. in DevanâgaÌi.The Nepali
left to createa simple statementof possessionis to stâtethe thing rupeeis sometimesreferredto as úe ì. ç. ne. ru- (short for ìrrfr
possessed andendwith úe verb,which is always6 cha (becauseyou tfirnï nepal rupryã), to distinguish it fiom the ïr. {. bhâ. ru.
are locating the possessionon the personof úe possessor): (ìÌR-fr{ ïfi[qÌ bhãrati?a rupiyã) or Indian rupee.
afrqrlNrr€{frqÍÌt I tyo mãnchesãga Thatman hastwo hices andsumsof moneycan be expressedin threedifferent ways:
dú rupiyã cha. rapeesrcn his . by usingnumberswith thetermsqÈ sãdheprusonehal4 {r4Tsavã
person). plus one quarteÍ and IIì-ì paune minus one guarter. There are
ãgrTKçãT+õrqA I ..
iisõga€uF kalam úta. HehasaTnn specialwordsfor oneaml a half and.two anda half:
(on his person).
çd {ÍÌqÍ ek ruptyã {" t Rs.l
If the statement or question is úout someonenoú possessing *fiq{qfrqÌ savãek rup_iyã {. t.1t(I{s.1.25
someúing, usethe negativeform of 6 cha. È6rfirqÌ {e{h rupiyã . _ ì. !.k. Ils.1.50
q|(í
.-G,,-:-
qqt l-g;1 .| cfrìËâ{ÊqÌ pauneour_ruprya ï. r.rr. Rs.1.75
masita paisã chaina. I don't haveany qÊ{nRÌ òrirupM a. 1 Rs.2
money (on my +{r<€{fiHi savõdü ruBiyã ï. ì.Rt(Rs.2.25
person). qõÉ"õfr{i a{hãi rupiyã ì. i.r.. Rs.2.50
rÈerÈrr
flT{ Êq r Gitiisãgasãbunchaina,Gita doesnot have
by expressingsmall sumsin tenns of *({ mobar and$iFr sukii:
arynq(wiúlur). t r.rr. Rs.1.25
ç+ ffiqÌ {.lfi,r ek rupiyã sukã
fi-{ ì-f{ tin mohar q. t.t . Rs.l .50
22 Using numbers without classifiers fr-ott s+I fu mohar sukã {. ?.ukRs.1.75
When you arc talking aboutsumsof money,weights and measures, crsqr6{ nic mohar {. ì.k" Rs.2.50
units of time, distânces,or any otherkind of measureor unit, úere is
qtsìà{str põcmoharsukã {" ì.úr Rs.2.75
no need to add a classifier to the numerâlsinvolved. or to use the o by exprcssingsumsin termsof {frrlï rupiyã andÈqï paisã:
 \r45ãfc{i Fáq È{Ir ek rupiyã paccis paisâ T. t.RriRs.| .25 J Thereare ten men, threewotnenandfive boys in the post offtce.
ST fl{ c-^l- T{rr ek rupiyã pacãspaisã r" r.v" Rs.l.50 4 How much moneydo you havewiú you?
gEãFwr qËT[Ít.rw dú rupiyã paciÍs paisã ã. q.re Rs.2.25 5 That Indian rnanhasno money,but the Nepali boy hasten rupees.
(g õÏcdf {qr{ Eqr dui rupiyã pacãspaisã õ. ?.v" Rs.2.50 6 The rich farmer has ten pãthis of rice and ten kilogrammesof
Weights and capacities pomtoes.
Therca.retwo systemsofmeasuringweightsandquantitiescurrentin 7 Therearetwo cupsof tea on eachtable.
Nepal. One is úe metric Europeansystem of kilogrammes(ffi ll The teacherhasno books andthe studentshaveno pens.
kilo), the other is a more complicatedtraditional systembâsedon EXEBCISE í1 Write six Nepali sentencesthat define eachof the
capacity, which is particúarly súted to measuringquantities of peoplein the left-handcolumnasteachers,usingan appropriateform
gain: of the verb úobefrom úe righrhand column.Thendo úe sameúing
fu cauthãi onequrter of a mãnâ for eachonceagain,but this time locating them ât home.
3ÌTurqFn âdhã mãnã half ã mdnã rT|{ bhãi F{f;6 hunuhuncha
çfr qì;Ir ek manã orp rnãnã(=0.7 üuesor 20ounces) kâ didi Ql ho
q{ gE^Er ek kuruvã (= two mãnâs) ì{r{{€ bhãiharú q
f{TeÍr silqak chan
qd crqf ek pãthi (= eight mãnãs) q?+rl
cr"ï oalyu gharmã fl hun
çd58 ek muIi (= 20 pâthis) qTfi ãmã cha
Neither kind of unit requiresthe useof classifiersor plural suffixes: gmâ It9.1 chin
ã hú
çdfifô3il{ ek kilo âlu onekilo of potatoes
crq E chu
a{ qr;Ír ff{ dú mãnâ cãmal Íwo rnânãs of rrce D exenctsete Translate
intoNepati:
I one week
Note úat words suchas cup andpoÍ are also treâtedâs measuresof 2 two men
quantityin phmsessuchas úe following, and thereforeúe numbers 3 threebooks
do not take a classifrer: 4 four boys
5 five rupees
gÊ*Eqr dúkapciyã two cupsof tea 6 six chairs
Çfi qfa rqqr ek pãÍ ciyã onepot of tea 7 sevenwomen
UnÍts of time 8 eight classes
ç{ È{ìre ek seka4{ onesecond 9 nine kilos
t<Ì lt9.r eK cll|n o,le momenl l0 ten foreigners
II two kilos
$ frÍ{c dui minel two minutes
ft'c slrdr tin gha4Íã three hours 12 sevenand a half kilos
l3 tbreepãtluis
crS 14 two anda half mânãs
Ìt qÈ{r cha mahinã six months l5 th-ree paisã
rupeesandseventy-five
_ _ -J
.flq qq sât varça sevenyeaÍs 16 nineanda half rupees.
EXERCISE 10 Translate the following sentencesinto Nepali:
I I have ten rupees ând a packet of cigarettes.
2 lVe have been in Nepal for three weeks.
 EB Jyoti'shouses
Anil ândBüay âre compaÍingnoteson Jyoú, â new acquaintânce.
qtr{ dfu+rtfc+aqqsq ravrãwtvrqo r
Antl Jyotikãkativatàgharharüctant tapalaitnamcnaf
How many housesdoeslyui have?Do you btow?
Èqq sr{r s rËÈfrfiTg5eTq<61: \rõãr srì { wa qò t
B{lay thãhã cha" Jyotikã duiÍ5 ghar chan: euF sãno Ìa
eutã thülo.
I know. Iyoti hastwo houses:one big andone small.
qÊ-d grdffivrìwrgot
Anil e. Jyotlko sãnoghar kahã úa?
I see.Whercis lyoti's small house?
ft-qc dffiqfà T{{Errqrs rsdÍ dfrr+ì *qr+ìqserrec vft r t
Bliay Jyotiko sãno ghar bajãnnã cha, tyahã Jyoúiko büvãko
eufã pasal pani cha.
{J
Iyoti's fatherhasa
Iyoti's small houseis in the markery,Lace.
{J shoptheretoo.
:f É
qifi qfrçfrffiqfre<frt
e' J-r Anil ani Jyotiko fhúlo ghar ni?
.\)
o
o
And what aboutlyoti's big house?
Èqc çòffia-ôq<frqtrcre3Ê+Ìe araro r
Biiay Jyotif,othüloghârPokhâÌãbâta
dui f,oct{fhã cha.

o cf{d
Anil
Iyoti's big houseis twokx away from Pokhara.
frq1f,ffi6fr6t .
tyo ghar nikkai lhülo cha?
II Is that housevery large?

a t{Ec
II
.r+
'ì)
In thls unit you will leam
. how to talk aboú ownsíship
. how to exDÍêssand ask
about knowledgè
. how to ask furthêÍ quèsüons
Büây
f,,ffiçôo 1ç4q1q1qq-{ãr
fr6r E1 r
ho, nlkkai thElo cha. tyo gbarnõ da,svatãkofhã chan
Yes, it's vety large. Therearc ten roomsin that house.
qf{q dfuôqf.{RcÊ{{*or
Anil Jyotikoparivãrpanithüo úa?
Is lyoü's family large mo?
Ê-{q Eôà, ms{-tr rfi q rqf6rr6qr"-àft-àg{r+TS-qrr{cr
tRtìïqI
B{iay thüo cnama, tara nnih'Ìt dhani chan harek 6ahalmã
Jyotiko buvãkã dur--cãrvafãpasal chan.
 It's not lfige, but they are rich. Jyoti's father has several thc ownednounsare plural:
shopsin eveql town.
rffiB{rqT RameSkiãmã Ratnesh'smother
3lfrsàft-+ÌEr{-qrsËq ? ìcwsr rrri{F Nepõlk5 gãüharú Nepal's villages
Anil ani Jyotikodãju-bhâichainan?
As in statementsof possessionusing -Èt -sãga or -fu{ -sita,
And doeslyoti nothaveanybrothersT
ltâlementsof ownershipinvolve the useof the veÍb 6 cha:
tq-qq Èc1rsqÌftrfrçsâ qÈfr s, fifr r@qrq rfr <furr g€-w+r<q o1 lRameskã duúânã Ralneshhastwo
çscrq{filql dãju chan. elder brctherc-
Biiav chainan Jyotiki eüF bahini cha, Kãnti. hijoãja um-
f*qâ <q & t Bindiiko dãju chaina. Bindudns nothave
Darjeelingko eufã skiilmâ chin.
an elder brothet
No. He has one sister, Kanti. Nowadays sheis at a school
in Darjeeling. However, if somethingis being identified as a belonging then it
bccomesnecessaryto useÈ ho insteadof 6 cha:
Qftrnr Jyoh-kã lyoti's, belongingto Jyod (plural possessions) àeÈv<aÈf66qÌ | yo sãno ghar Jyotiko This small house
c16 thãhã knowledge,informaüon ho, is Jyoti's-
dftrd Jyoh-lro lyoü's, belongingto "Iyon-(singlepossesslon) uÊ*<à<q{c-< r ü Bindiiko d{iu He is notBindu's
tr* dkkâi very (usedonly with adjectives) hoina" elder brother.
<q-mt dãju-bhfi broúers
çòtdff Jyotiki Jyoti's, belongingto Jyoa (femalepossession) It is possibleto use -â -ko in a string of ownerships:
çsâ eu$ one(feminineending) çfrffiqFfr Jyotiko sãthi Iyoti's friend
@qM hij.âjr nowadays cfrlìr+ì ${ãÈ S{Í Jyotikosãthikobuvâ Jyoti'sfrid's fafw
Erffeq Dãrjiling D arjeeling vfrffi flffi Jyotikosãthikobuvãkolyoti's friend's
q< skü scúoo.l ghar
ç+r+ìw father'shouse
ümffi (lrffi Sqrrì Jyotikosãthiko Iyai'sM'sffids
Grammar Ta{rgTd{F buvõkogharkã house'swindows
jhyãlharü.
23 Ownership:-à -ko, -â -kÍ, -+r-ká with nouns
and names 24 Words ior and:.{ rã, 3Ìfrani
Unlessyou areusing-út -sãgaor -fuc -sitâ to tâlk úout possessions So far you have met two different Nepú words that arc both
that are 'wiú' an ownerat the time, úe particle-+Ì -ko mustbe used translatedasard. { ra is usedto link paiÍs or the membersof a group
to link an owner to â thing that is owned.The particle performsthe of nouns,pronouns,or names:
samefunction, and occursin the saÍìe placein â sentenceor phÌase, Íà, qktr<<rq Jyo6 Ambikã ra Rãm lyoti, Ambka and
as the 'apostrophes' ( 's) in English, and can be attachedto nouns &arl
andnamesin úe sameway: *r r 6er+e-< baftrahufãkghar thebankandthe
{r{+Ìfu"drq Rãmko kitãb Ram'sbook Dostoffice
Setiko buvâ Setì'sfather cfr ani, on úe oúer hand, is usedto mean aad when we wish to
However, -fr -ko behaveslike an inÍlected adjective in that the introduceanotheÍtopic oÍ to âsk an additionalquestion:it can often
vowel must changeaccordingto the numbeÍandgenderof whatever meanand Íhen.In spokenNepali, a sentencecan neverbegin with t
is owned- to -i whena femalehumannounis owned,andto -ã when ra, but it is possibleto begin a sentenceÌvirh qfr ant.
 atfr i+; qÌ o t qfr{
ani baik kahã cha? Anil whereis the à,.à<aqÈ r
bank? Subir ho, tyo Ratan ho.
qfrr ani? And then? Yes, that's Ratan.
anythingelse? {rrr< d{ÈÈã{{-d-{fi-+ìqrdÈ-{È?
+ftftrfrfrqÈ r ani timi ko hau? And who arcyqy,?
Ãnand tyo rãto mofar RatâDjfto Ephno motâr ho?
A third word for azd that is usedonly in scholarly,formal or official Is thatrcd caÍ Ratanji's own caÍ?
contextsas â substitutefor { ra is úe SanskÍitloan ifqTtâthã.
rma Affi , <-ri-+ìsrdi+ì *ã{ È |
Subir hoina, Ratanko sãthilo mogar ho.
25 I know,you know, etc, using W thãhâ
No, it's Ratan'sfriend's caÍ.
ï@ thâhâ, often pronouncedthã, meansknowledgeor inÍormation.
qFr< aqrffi cfr qÌã{e t
The most commonway to statethat you know somethingis to say
that the knowledgeexistsfor you or ro yo4 using the postposition- Ãnand tapãíro pani mo{ar cha?
{fg ìãr-, which meansto or for: Do you too have a caÍ ?
smr ar{,R Èr< ol rm È <Iç1à çea Èa< o t
T{r{ qrËT
Sub-rr ahã, mem mofar úaina" tara mem d{iyüko eulã motar
úere is
cha-
acfffiqrErËq I No, I don't have a car.But my eldeÍ brother hasa car.
râpãíãirhãhã r*r";j"i"*;;,,
"h"i"r. ('to you thereis {tr{< <crqòq--{+Èe-i{'dor
Ãnand tapãfuo dãjy'üko molar kasto cha?
t{<-{rârffir *ETE?Bindúlãipakkãthâ* ;::Hïf*:} What'syouÍ eldet bÍother's car like?
cha? for sue? (w {-ô-{ il"{+Ì+.{3ífr crcfì8, ï{<rfr 6,\rd-<qttfr tícrffi È-{
Bindu is 6FõWrt.r?
úere certain Subir dãjyüko molâr ali pürãno cha, tara rãmro cha' ekdam
knowledge?') rãmro. tapaí<o mola" 5i çfiaina ni?
Thesequestionsand statementsare frequently abbreviated: "tra old, but it's nice, really nice.
Elder brother's cn is ruther
qrër6 | So do you havea caÍ oÍ not?
thãhâ cha. I know.
cïü6? thãhã cha? Do you know? 3TF{< ràarÌì qser qr{{-dÍ qrà o t
qrü ràr r thãhã chaina. I don't know. Ãnand chaina! mero eutã sãikal mãtrai cha.
No! I haveonlv a bicvcle.

Cl9 Ratan'smotorcar <rò rãto red srfr sâtlü fn'end

Subir and Anand havejust spottedtheir friend Ratandriving pastin Ìer molar car \rr{tT ekdam really, very
a red car. qrÊ ãphno own q|{{-d sãikal brbyc,fe

Sfrt rrò+ã{qrd+ÌÈ?
Subir rãto motsrmã tyo ko ho? EXERCISE13 Answer the following questionsaboutDialogue 9:
Wo is thatin the reil car? r rc+ffi qrffi Èrqo t Rataqifto ãphno molâr cha?
ffi,Èe+r q {ÈqÌfi?.-fr{dÈ t rãto molar ratanko ho?
ïi-<
Anand Râtân, hoina? I cffiqrd+ã{o r Subirko ãphno motâr úa?
It's Ratan,isn't it?
 r Vffia"{+ìÈr<at+oc r SubirkodãjyükomoJarcha Ncpal.Nepali doesnot havea letteÍ to representúe Tibetansoundts,
ki chaina? ro it usesE ch instead.
that stateownership,using the
EXERCISE14 Createsentences
Grammar clements
Drovided:
Owner Quantity Possession
26 Ownership using -à -ko, -& -kí, -sïr-kã with F.s.I 2 houses
unchanged(tdirectcase')pronouns = Ì{rlíúfERq merã duifã I havetwo houses
ghar chan
The postposition-fÌ -ko can be addedto two kinds of oronounsin
exactlythesamewaythatit is addedto nounsandnames,i.e.wiúout I DhanBahãdur'swife 2 elder sisters
requiing any change to be made to these pronouns. The two 2I 0 mother and father
categoriesare: 3 My mother 4 glandchildren
4 They 0 sons and daughters
i Themostpolitepronouns(<cÉ tapãr',.rd yúã, *6ï vatrã,q< tralury,
5 He (High) 9 cows (rl É gau
ii Plural pronounsthat end in -Ë€.
óWe 5 far buffaloes (È6 bhâisD
aqf*ìewrm àS r yahãko 6ubhanãm what is this
ke ho? Derson's name?* 28 One's own: emphasizingownership using
+sÊ qrrqà à : vahãko kãm ke ho? lihar is hisiob? |rÍc++hno
rfi-*-+ìTnrÈo ! unihârúko lugã Theirclorhìngis
anaufho cha! slÍange! The word qrd ãphno meansown and can be usedwith any of úe
*Using snFTFI6ubhatfamauspiciousnameto aska personal possessivepronouns.It doesnot matter \ühetheÌit is being usedto
nameis mearrmy owt oï your or",nor anyoneelse's own; úe word remains
morepoliteúan usingïÌrÌ nãm.
the same.It is an adjective, however, so its ending must change
rccordingto úe numberand genderof the thing or úings owned:
your, our
27 [trlyr,
È qrnÌ fffr mero âphno sãthi my own friend
-d -ko cannotbe addedto úe pronounsr ma d d tã you, trfr Umi your own children
you and qr{Ì hãmi we. Instead,úese four pronounshave special aqÉõr fiFr úìrràô tapafoa aphna
chorãchon
ownership('genitive')forms:
3Íffi 3ilffi qÈfr Amiiãkl ãphni bahifr Amita's own
qm al becomes R mero my, mine youngeÍ ster
í la you becomes È tero your, yows
f.fqr lrmt you becomes ffi To emphasizethat the thing that is owned is úe owner's very own
tinro yow, yours
possessionand doesnot belong to anyonee1se,úe ending of wwÌ
8l+rI nâml we becomes qtÈ hãrnro our, ours
ãphno is changedto -ai:
q-I {|II
:-5.
-:-5 Tfl -5-
ËTI
.
mero nãm Jeni ho. My nameis Jenny.
ffi +rq qÌqrq àí{. 1Ìsrà qrd qtEr({ | Râme6koãphnâisãikal Ramesfi'svery
timro nãm Sonam Your nane is not
fuÈf È r own bicycle.
hoina, Chiring ho. Sonam,it is .-Dahim---.
3TFrflfrfld EEfr | Amitriki ãphrai Amita's veryown
Tsering.*
qrÈ q-<qfir+rtà r hãmro thar youngeÍ sisteÍ.
Our fnnily name
Arlhikãri ho. is Adhikxi.
fu"fi-{€È<rfld' yiniharú merã ãphnai Thesearemy own
* Theseare both Tibetan names,current among people bÌ{rbÌô Ë11 chordchorfhun. childrcn.
who live
along Nepal's norúem border, and also amongTibetanrefugeesin
 29 Asking questions:the use offrki IXERCISE 16 Write â simpleaccountof the membersof your
The word order of a questionin Nepali is exactly the sameas the llmily, alongúe followinglines:
word order of a statement:when spoken,the difference lies in the
My nameis...My homeis in...
intonation; when written, the only difference betweena statement
tn my family we are...people: (list the membersof your family,
and a question is úe absenceor presenceof a question-mark.
usingrelationshipterms).
However, Nepali-speakersfrequently end a question with the
Next, give the following information úout eachmemberof your
quesüo-ning word ftF ?ki? which literally meansor...?fr f+ r ho ki ? family:
and f+ ?cha ki ? meanis it or...?andis thereor...?
My eldersister'snameis...
d-acr+ôqrffiqrff{ yo tapã <oãphno Is this your own Sheis in... (givethenameof the town whercshelives).
ür* ? sãikal ho ki? ücycle, or...7 Repeatthis informaúonfor eachmemberof your family.
ffifffi q"-Frq|g-6,q tapãíro gharmã Is therca bicyclein If any of your siblingsis married,stateúe nameof their husband
EÌ{? sâikal cha ki? yout house,ot...? or wife.
The questionmight also include the negaüveform of the verb, to
meanis it or isn't it? or is ütereor isn,t there?
D tO Wtrosebook is this?
F*tt ciyãho? is it tÊa? rfrc àriffiìf{dwÈ?
F*qI ?- ciyãhoki? is it teaor...? Raómi yo kaskokitiib ho?
sq[ ËÌ1-461{{ r ciyã ho ki hoina? is it tea or not? Whosetnok is this?
F*" i ciyâcha? is ÍheÍe any tea? frfr È ÈqRqr.ò süfi aÌffi tr+rs ò r
ÌÈFITEFõ? ciyã cha ki? is theÍeanyEa oÍ...? PÍiti mero vicãÌmã tyo Súryaki chon-kokitiib ho.
fuqr o f{ th I ciyã cha ki chaina? is thercany taa I think thatis Surya'sdaughtÊÍ'sbook.
oÍ.not?
ftq qffr oÌfr s ( ?rcrq qr{rÈq I
Theselast threequesúonscarry the implication that if úere is any tea
RâÍmi Súryaki choú cha ra? rnalãi thãhã chaina.
the speakerwould like to drink it. Similarly, a sentencesuchas:
Does Suryahavea daughteÍthen?I don't know.
ffiÉ+ì q(qr r{ 6 fd ?tapãfuoghannã Is theresaltin frfr q'Í FF
'qT T{õr
q;6-jrírEi|{r r q-:finFÌÌ
@Írr61 r
nún cha ki? yout house? PÍiti mero vicãrmã unkâ'rkianã chorã ra e\ianã chori chan'
suggeststhat úe personaskingthe questionis in needof salt. I think he hasoneson md one daughter.
EXERCISEíõ Translateinto Nepali: c|w oìffiilqààa'r
Ra6mi chon-konãm ke ho ta?
1 You (Middle) are my son's friend, aÍen't you? Is youÍ name What's the daughteÍ'snamethen?
Gautam(gautâm)?
frfr qrüÈ{ |
2Is youÍ (Middle) friend's faúer,s name GaneshMan (ga4eÍ
rnãn)? Do you know or don't you? Pnli thâhâ úaina.
3 His (High) nameis Laksmi Nath Qakçmi nãth). I know úat. I don'tknow.
4 My homeis not far from here.Whereis your (Middle) home? tfrq oÌtrdqrqàÈr
5 Your (High) father is at the bank.Does your motherknow? RaÉmi chorãko ndm ke ho?
6 Their (Middle) cows are in our field. Don,t úev know? What'sthe son'snarne?
7 Our family nameis Pokharcllpkharel). We are Brahmins.
8 This is not your (Middle) watch.It is my moúer,s.
 ftfr ssfrflq ÊrêsTàr changedependson what úe word is. Generally,nounsdo not chânge
Pn-ti usko nãm GiIÍí ho. in the oblique case,but certainpronounsdo. When -+ì -ko is added
His nameis Girish. to pronouns(except(i) the most polite forms, (ii) plurals ending in
<f{q +frvr+ÌvÌ<+frfrI vr5ror "fF -hârú ancl (iii) q ma, È tã, ffi timi, and qrfi hãmi - see
Rúmi ani usko umer kati ho? thãhã cha? Grammar 26 and 2il), úe pronounshave to be modified slightly,
And how old is he?Do you btow? and âÍe said then to have changedinto úe oblique case,from their
original, unchangeddirect case:
frfr es+Ì sÈ 6td È qrüÌ Èa r
Priti usko umer kati ho thãhã chaina.
directcase obliquecase ++ì-ko
I don't know how old he is.
s ü 3rI us 3cqì usko üs/her
{frq sâ+oÊ{ rfu-{r*qrFr{.sf+rrqs
ràf{õr*sÈ+à I yo q{I yas *q yâsko üs/her/its
Ra{mi e Íhikai úa ni! kitjibmã Girtíko nãm cha, yo kitã-b Ì
aÈ tyo .{q tyas gqà tyasko Ns/her/ìts
usaiko ho. ïfr u|n- 3{ utr ï{+Ì unko ár'Mrer(potite)
Oh, it's OK. Girish'snameis on the book This bookis his. firfr yini fqï yitr ffi yinto li,s/her(polite)
Êc-fi tini t.rí dn ffi dDko lÌr'slher{poüte)
ncà kaslç6 wá6ss2 sq- umer age
Ê-qr.
Icãr thought,opinion ll,È usaiko-áls landno_one The obliqueforms of the pronounsfr yo rúr'sandefr tyo fáaúare not
<z ra? indeed?then? elre'g pronouncedexactly as they aÌe spelled:
üÍect foÍm obliqueform pronunciation
EXERCISE17 Answerthe following questionsaboutDialogue l0: qr yo q{ yas 'es'
r qftr{Êcw+roMfrqr ï* tyo a{q tyâs 'tes'
Süryakã katiianâ
chorãchor.t-chan? When the postposition-(IÉ -lãi is âddedto the oblique forms of fr
t fricÈtrqnqrTrífrrjrÌo f+Ècr Pnïko vicãrmã Siiryako yo, eò tyo, and s i the word is often pronouncedas if the 's' has
choÌi cha hi châine? beenlost ând the 'l' hasbeendoubled:
I gr:ÈoMrràfrr Süryakochorâkonãm ke ho? spelling pronuÀciaüon
c qÍì fs-{r{qr rfl,ÈÌ ïrq e r ani kitãbmã kasLonãm cha? ,Ífi{É yaslãi 'ellãi'
ç qï11tt tyaslãi tellãi-'
uslãi 'ultãi'
Grammar í( " 1tE

pronouns change to úeir oblique

All of the in the box above must
30 Ownership using -mr-ko, -ã -kt',-+r-kã with forms whenevera postpositionis addedto úem. The examplesgiven
changed ('oblique case') pronouns in the box show what happens when úe postposition is -fr -ko, but
exactlythe same chânges are necessarywhen oúer postpositions are
Nepali grammarhasonly two cases.A noun or pronounis alwaysin involved:
eitherúe 'direct' case,which meansthat it remainsasit appearsin a
dictionary, or úe 'oblique, case,which meansthat its endiìg might r+qrâ crüËf, r unlái thãhâ chaina- S/IÊdoesnot know.
needto change. 4qq1fffi 5r yasmã cini cha? Is thae (any)sugar
in tbis?
A word will alwaystake the ,obliquecase' when a postpositionhas
beenaddedto it; whetherthis meansthat its eníting actually has to An exceptionto this rule is the postposition-dtt -sãga wiú, which is
alwaysaddedto the unchanged('dircct case')form of a pronoun:
 s*iqÈsrrì'cr úsãga paisã chaine. He hasno money i'Ì klr who? + -à -ko 's n*rfrlçlsko wúose?
(on his person).
kasko kitiib whosebook?
When* yo andefr tyo arebeingusedbeforea nounto rneandúsand t , *t +t ? r t 't E - kaskã chorãharú whosesons?
fla4 they shouldtake their oblique form if a postpositionis addedto q,+lÌìlq l8'11 kaski bahin- whosesister?
the noun.
l\4ostotherinterrogaúves(e.g.à ke wnarZt{Í kahã where\ do not
fr vqr yo Sahar this town huvcan obliqueform. so úey do not changewhen-à -ko is added
becomes l() them:
{q rr{{{T yas Sahannã in this town
yo keko mâsuho? what kild of meat
dtu{ tyo din 'ìì4ìrrgqtt
that day is this?
becomes eì gg<r+ìfig fr | tyo kukhurâko That is chicken's
(q tl tyas dindekhi
tq Íq l {E sincethat day mãsuho. meat.
However,úis is a rule úat is ofien ignoredin everydayspoken In Englishit is saidthata personis 'from' a paÍticularplace,if that
Nepali.It is particutarlylikely to be ignoredif È yo andià tio ur" is wherethatpersonresidesor hashis/herorigin.In Nepali,thesâme
separatedfrom úe noun they describe by another adjective or cxpression usesthe genitive-fr -ko, insteadof any word meaning
adjectives.The longer the following phrase becomes,úe more from:
permissibleit is to usethe direct form ì yo ffusinsteadof its oblique
form rtITyas: s a-6tfi vrò $ t ú kahãko mãnche lno? Were is he fromT
(literally, 'he is
In this town: qq sr{{qr yas óaharmã aperson of u4rcre?')
oÍ àrrqlr yo óaharÌnã s iÈ{r{tEìÌqì"È à | ii Gorkhãkonúnche tut" He is from
In thisbig town: 4iÌ qfr rr{{{r yas fhüto íaharmã Gorkha.
oÍ qI õ-dÌS1{{{r yo thüIo óaharmã (literally,'he is a
In this big old town: 4q q* g{Tfr srflqryas thúlo purãno penonof fudìâ')
óâharmã qÌtú+ìqrqqÈt yo kahãkocãrnalho? Whereis thisrice
or Ì õ-qìgrrì ar{<qT yo fhúto purãno from?
6aharmã çàfn*r+ì qrqqÈ | tyo Ppkharãko It is rice from
fi yi úese andfr ti úose do not take oblioue forms: cãmal ho. Pokhara.

fr116€€ yi S{úârharú thesetowns EXERCISE 18 Create sentencesthat state ownership,observing

fi rr6<qsm yisaharharümã in thesetowns grammaticaldes to the letter ândusing tbe elementsprovided:
íl qr8è fi gharharü thosehouses Owner Possession
fr qcEr-qra ti gharharübãÍâ from thosehouses
Qüantlty
E.g.he 2 house
= 3({r<{dr ÍRE1 uskã duiÍã ghff chan he has two houses
31 Interrogatives:rcà kasko whose, ffi keko
of what, rctÈ kahãko of I f,om wherc? I That boy 2 houses
2 This big village only 1 teashop
The Nepali word for wúo?is * z ko? WÌren Íìe -fr -ko úar links
3 He (-ow) 8 daughters
owner to owned is addedto úe +ì ko that meanswho?, the latteÍ 4 sons
4 SheMddle)
must changeto its oblique form, which is rF{Ikas: many friends
5 This man
6 \{ho 0 friend?
 Ett ne cook andthe pilot
Rovi is soonto marry Shailendra'syoungersister,and the two men
|tl meetingfor úe first tirne. Ravi's job 1alçsshim all over South
Aoia, while Shailendrais tied down to his work in a KathÍnandu
hotcl. Ravi, who is very much Shailendra'selder, feels he knows
moÍe úout the world than Shailendra,but Shailendrahas the last
word.
rft fcfrÈà<,ÈEqìz
ÍtÈ< et, q,üàq ravr{<F*w6ç;o, {ça 7
<fi È,q{È r
lÌÈ< aqÍ{{-d {rq rrrfi;;o,tÊst t
tâ cER.F. g. ú.wtrrq! r+frftrfrfrt
ítÈa q{Ìfu{rÈ{qrsrcr€ r
ft ffi{Èì{Ê;ìcrc*rfe<qfrqFoÌt
al ftÈ< qã rc ãFà qÈ qrÈ{ qifï-{ rr eÈrfr gq, * uo.qqÈqrlq{
-ì
rn+ì wggo, {rtr
{
*l/ Ir ft *, +fefrgrE rÈóiíF€., ìFiFfiÌïTsF€,6FrTqr.E,
{dfrqF€ |
-:í J +f6ì+rôç*€qfrqFqt
úu^
6r)',
1l
€l
0t
F+
ÍÌtfq aqÉ à fi{qr qrÈ{ ErTC€ ?
rÈ c Ë{ÌÊq-{rq-+ì
rnce { fr t
'\) íÌÈ< qrgí qríËq
"

CL <fr qÍfer rÈìqdqrn<aqrÌqfõ rÈì Èèfi qìfitr{s qÌ* f{qri-dtz

o ìqrq qÍ58{ t
tÈ< q cf{Ëm òàrr Êèfr rrerr{F+ì{rFrqr{r {frr56fr |
<fr q,ffiqrR€Ìt
{t+q È, q qfqqÈtu oe {M vrà { r

o rF{ ií, rd <rÈ!{qèfuq(ÈFqrR-{Rffi@crrolfttffivnr

q|Ql

c In this unit you wlll leam

. how to talk about what you
{ttfq a<q q-ErËfuqr qr (Krqfo q $rs{ qrru te-d q çsa q-df\rÌ
deor

CL and otheÍs do no]mally,

o
.ì)
habituallyor in the near
ftrture
. ho!ìrto usè simplêadverbs
. how to discuss times, days,
and t€quency
 {r{{if fo work qt-snLondon llhllllendra Yes, I've been that hotel's cook for five years.
q'c. RoyalNepal
Air Cotpomcion Èì +dt usual.ty Rlvl There, how splendid! From now on I will come to your
T. 1. hotel every Saturday and eat good food.
€Err hotet iÌRr /ndra
qrT ro go qfa+ fourisr fihullendra But I shan't be here! After a week I go to London.
al6ì nrô someÍ.imes tuqrï Ílight There I will open a new restaurant.
*116 ouÍsrde 3{I€ìTtO Corne
n@ cfr never crËírgÌÌesr
Qi right here -ì qrtr for Grammar
tú always sr'rTfood
€Tro be qsrnTÍo coo.k 32 The dictionary form of verbs
qfrqfu a lifile qrì coo.k A verb is a word that indicates úe performance or occurrence of an
lE'È!to tÍavel $t{cr{ SaÍurday uction, or lhe existence of a state or condition. English verbs are
Èd De,lúi ffi úasry
ftr-ff CalcuÍÍâ words like see,Íun, do, eat ar,d heaÍ. So far, you have encountered
gtï to eat
arqr Dhaka (he various forms of Ít and È that mean am, ts, and are. These are all
6wr week
+tt* Karacár cf6 afteÍ lbrms of the Nepali verb €l hunu Ío be.
3t Dubar R(Ì resfauranf The dictionary form of a Nepali verb always ends in -1 -nu. This -1
6t{ v-6rwaeroplane da 1eo*, cnding is attached to úe 'verb base' - the part of the verb that
qrfiE pilot
distinguishesit ftom all other verbs.

Ravi For instance,

You're Shailenúa,aren'tyou?
Shailendra Yes,I'rn Shailendra. You areRavijyu,aren'tyou? tti garnu to do consists of verb base \- gâr- + the dictionary
Ravi Yes,I'm Ravi. form ending -{ -nur
Shailendra Wheredo you work, Ravijyu? dE basnu to sit, to rcside coÍrsists of verb base d{- bas' + the
Raü I work ât RNAC (theRoyalNepalAir Corporation).And dicúonary form ending -{ -nu;
you? Èq bohu to speak consists of verb base dq- trol- + the
Shailendra I work at úe Shangdla Hotel. dictionary form ending -{ -nu
Ravi Do you go outsideNepal sometimestoo? and so on.
Shailendra No. I nevergo outside.I am alwayshere.But you
alwaysgo outside,don't you? 33 The habitual prìesenttense
Ravi Yes, I travel a little. I go to Delhi, I go to Calcutta,I go
to Dhaka,I go to KaÍachi. SometimesI qo to Dubai as A tense is a set of forms of a verb which indicates what the
well. relationship is between úe time the verb is spoken or written and úe
Shailendra On what work do you go outside? time when its action takes place. That is: are you speaking or wriüng
Ravi I am an aeroplanepilot, you know! the verb after it has taken place, while it is taking place, or before it
Shailendra Don't you go to London? takes place? Most Nepali verbs have a full set of pâst, present and
Ravi No I don't. Usually I go only to India. Many foreign future tenses. The habituâl pÍesenÍ tense is used to make stalements
touristscometo Nepalby our flighr. about habits or regular occurrences such as I do, he lives, they eat,
Shailendra I too cook food for the foreign guestsin our hotel, you she takes, eÍc.It can also be used to refer to the fuÍvÍe:. I go tomonow,
Know. they come next year, she atrives on Thursday, etc.
Raú Oh, you'rea cook?
 The habitualgesenf tenseof all Nepali verbs consistsof the verb
{{ lffnu Ío do
base+ a verb ending.(The verb basesintroducedhereaÍe the Dresent Affinaative Negaüve
tenseveÍb bases.As wilJ be explainedlater on, theÍe are also oast
rlngulrr
úensebases.)Nasalizationis addedbetweenthe baseandendinsof qq TT .rÈ
{
cenain verbs.If úe veú is affirmative (I da / go fcorre). its enãing .reï q I|<TT
írft,úfi-{€ + -õT =
is one of the o forms of fl to áe as set out in Grammar 11. If th;
rt qq\ + -FRT= rrcq{
verbis negaúvelI do not,I don't go. I don't come).its endingwill
hffi,ffi{€ IÍ6T llI + -(;TI = rfF
be -ë1dain + úe sameendingtakenby E in úe affirmative form of
the verb. The only exceptionto this rule is the form of the verb taken s, qÌ,eÈtm.l 116 rlI + -{jT = rr€t
by {, where-Q in the affirmaúvebecomes-Èrr dina in úe nesative: sff,fufr.tnfr .tq lr\ TTq
fr,fr
Afrrmative Negative sn-tr,m-tt,mqs
-E -cha --{ -daina (witho, È, efr)
-q -chu -È{ (withq ) In V-veús, a 'half n' (; ) is infixed betweenthe bâseandthe ending
-dina
-W -úas -ÍiS -dainas iwitr ã i in the affirmative form, and the vowel is nasalizedin the negative
-q -chau -5T -dainau twith ffi) form. This is an important spelling convention, though boú
-EÌ -chaú -sìì -{*inaú (with ãrfr. ãrfi-f€ ì affirmativeandnegativeforms arepronouncedasif therc is an 'n' in
-q -chan Eìl -dainan (ültl fr. fi. Tfi.ih. fiÍfr, the middle of úe word:
andtheoluralformsof !ÍÍtJãnu to go
sfr,foÍÌanoÊcfi) AffÍmative Neqative
alngulrr
Íï g T +. i - q = qt+ + tqÍ = q q.!
There are thÌee categoriesof verb: C-verbs,V-verbs ând Vv-verbs. .ì-l
"fT+; + -6ì =
gfõI qt+ + -qi t = --!4-+
ql qíl
If the baseof a verbeudsin a consonant. it is a C-verb;if if endsin üm, üfi-{s
it qr+;+-t'(= gr.bÌT ql + + qí* !
-
! :-
= ql c ' 1' 1
---iê--

a vowel it is a V-verb andif it endsin two vowels it is a W_veÍb: r :--s-

fr+, fdfi-ËF sT+; + -d' = -
ql + + qÍl
g
= qrqi l
g;,rÌ,cfr gT+.+-E = qt+ + qÍ -
:-
= qtqí
--!ì-

Dictionaryform Base Carcgory - è--- --::ì-

ífr,firfr,ffi sT+; r -Eq = qFba q l + - +C n1 = q l c'1 'l

"t
grrnu b do \- gaÌ- C-verb fr,fr
Eq basnu Ío srl rcside {{T- bâs- C-verô e.ff-{€.fr-fr-{F,ftfr-{€
fl hunu tobe Ë- hu- V_verb
qT- In W-veÍbs, the second of úe two vowels is nasalized before the
9ì1 khãnu to eat khã- V-veò
ÌqT ünu ending is added:
to take fr- ü- V_verb
ãuru to come qfs- qlì{ ãunu Ío come
1l-gf ãu- W_veÍb
]rc1 piunu to drink ft-g- piu- AfÍfunative Negatìve
W_veú
slngular
IT qtg + +-ú =qÉ qrs+'+-È;r= 3Trft:í
The way in which úe verb baseand the ending arejoined together Ërfr,{rf€s -.
sitg + -È.=qr$fr
+ -al qrs+**-àfr = ql€ô
dependson whicb categorythe verb belongsto. Alt C-verbsúhave d
qts + +- t tl = qrfriq qrs +'+ -Èi{ = fltiàiq
in the sameway asthe verb Q to do in which the final consonantof frfr.fdfrEF 3lÌif + + -Et = fiioÌ qrs +-+ -idÌ = qÍtÈqì
úe baseforms a conjunctwiú the ending: s,à,d 3lÌiI + r- -6 =qrfu qrs+"+ -èï = qrÈà{
:rrg +o+ -ççÍ = qrËq qrs +"+ -à;r{ = srÈeì1
fr,fr
sflE€,fufr-6s,frfiq€
With úe High pronouns(dcrq, +*Í. +*Í. egr úe verbs behave Again, this is a simple statement of fact and therefore it needs
differently. The baseis simply the dictionary form endingin -{, and nothing more than the simple present tense q.
the affrrmative and negative endings aÌe -ü.6 huncha and -€.ï 3rMq{{úE I I am here today-
hunna respectively. The verbs remain exactly the same in the This implies that I am regularly here on this paÍticulaÍ day: Íúis is
singularand the plural. whereI am on this day of the weekor that this is a statementabout
High Íorms the futuÍe: I shall be here nday.
..-:
.rí garnu to do A|ly sentenceúat is in tl)e presenttenseandusesan adverbsuchas
Aptmative Negative usually,always,every clay,monthly, oflen, etc. !qU!! usethis tense:
rtl + -ü;6 " t , ll. I + - É. . 1
. |1E. qÈ{È{qf5ffiIüql I am in the office every day-
3[Tg;[ãunu Ío cone
AffiÍmative Negative
s srÌi{dú6 r He is alwaysthere.
3ìT31+ -g.E = 3rrc1go qT3{ + -gq 3T|gTilq
35 Èfwfr usually
34 Using the habitual present tense Èì qeÌ is a combinaúonof ÈÌ mucá, many with qÈ srmilarly.
The habitualpresenttenseis used Thereforethe phrasemeans,literally, 1iftemuchor like many, andis
usedto meanmosÍly or usually:
for habitualacúonsin úe present:
q fre-amr 6rq qd r oÈf wÈttìe"-dnrTkTqri6? o*" u"
I work in Pokhara. ^u:f;,|:ïF**t
sfi-{F ìq|dqrqrq I Theylive in Nepal. ffitsÈqÈtqÚof r Nepalisare mostly Hindus
to describefacts or situationsthat are regularly or generallytrue; * tÌrÌr nce is virtually a synonymfor food in Nepali.
ertrffi Èm ffi ge r DaÍjeeling tÊais good-tasting.
ìq6{r È} fuqFrais rrtq 6'o1 r Many of Nepal's Íarmers # nì only, vfr also, too, even
are pooí ffi 16d occasionallyits non-emphasized form rTì1[)is usedto mean
for âctionsthat arc going to occur at a specific time, usually in the muchthe samething asthe English word only, but it comesafter the
nearfuture: nounor pronounit qualifiesin a sentence;
*k q eusqqtrc t TomorrowI (shall)go q cÈ rÌl(d EFE I Only I go to India (I am the only one
to London. who goesto India).
q qqtq'-rqfu rqfm T;6 r After an houÍ I shall tell you. q ìT|{d qrí ! | I go only n India (India is the onÌy
"6
place I go to).
The habitualpresenttenseof g{ can be usedin placeof the fr ando
g TTTììT|{ €Fb I Only he eats ice (he is the only one
forms, in order to cÍeate an important difference of meâning.
who eâts rice).
Compareúe following four sentences:
g rrm qrì eT;tt t He eatsonly ice (Íjlce is the only thing
q{{ÌE I I am here. he eâts).
This is a simple statement of fact and therefore it needs nothins more The first meanineof qÌí is too or also;
than the simple present tense E.
q cfr ìÍÍa( qF€ I I to<tgo to Inüa (as well as other peoplQ.
qrdÈ€ | I am here. q rrnaqÈ qF6 t I go to India t@ (âs vrcll as to other
This means l am áere (on a regular basis) or I shall be here. countries).
qrq q T{íq I I am herc today. s qi{ rÌrõ €F6 r He too eatsice (as velT as other people).
s rne qÍì eF6 r He eats rice too (as well as other foods).
 The secondmeaningof rfr is even,especiallywhen it is usedin ìÌfr{Fc until tomorÍow
negativestatements: frrl-<rgq asfar asPokhara
T(qf ìTTõqÈÈï | Thereisn't even anyÍie in üE house. '(Frt is often used in pbÌasesúat also contain eiúer -{Ì.c .&omor
rnh\rdsfrqiqfrà | I don,rhave,r", ío.- *p"r. 'tfrr fom, súrce (do not forget that only -èfa can be used with
trâ qrqr r{r cfr ffi W I In your houseevena mouse oxpressionsof time to meânsrnce):
is hungry.
e-fi ffiàfu fia.qrcÌ{q qqÉ shegoesfrom Delhi to
w6ru-*ra
nto-q r Kathmanduby plane.
37 +FËà?
whan?, +Èà+rôsornetimes,frÈFàcfr
neyer ErarIT
c-dÍ5â {ìàfu s dÈ{q 6{g;o lFrom fwo o'clock until
+ftì is primarily an interrogaÍiveword meaningwhen? six o'clock he is at home.
ffir€ qrcd õÍEà qr{Ë;6 ? l./'.}Iendo yotíw t you go to Inüa? icfi-Es ìì wqEq qrì {rÈs-t t TIreyorúycomeasfar as
ç{fË€ ilqf. õfËFÍCF6{ I Wen do they/wü theygo to themarket? my nouse.
.nÌ qTfir is one of a small number of two-word postpositionsthat
Two very useful two-word phÌases that include tf{à and its
emphasizedform n@ are: +@ t@ sometimes,and n@ qÈ bcginwith the ownershipsuffix -fr. It meansfor, in the senseof for
never. T}le first is usually only used in affrrmative statements,the üp sakeof or intendedfor:
secondcan be usedonly in negativestatements;both can form part , foodformvfarher.
Hecooks
of a question:
lÈgeIIXTTtr"
qf fÌrofq ls(rìr ?his book is for him.
-rrrr 6r r
fffi Ìì qrfir à '16ï ì wnat do you do for me?
O fifi+|{È1rqìcÌqEFbÌ? Doyougo a Nepatsorrettrcs?
A qÈ.{
EXERCISE19 TÍanslateinto Nepali:
a r6t +@ vft er6Ì wrç6q 1 Dtns he nevergo ürcre?
A flõ"-q CFÍqFÍiõ í{ õf{q I We won't go to úe market today. There isn't even one rupeein
He nevergoes,but sometimes
{rôrvr;o r the house.
I go.
2 What work doesRãju do?He works in úe NepalRãsÍa Bank' His
38 Modes oÍ transport elderbrotherworks theretoo.
3 Wheredo you (High) live? NowadaysI live in Kathnandu.
The posçosition -{rc, despiteits primary meaningof _ôom,is also 4 DoesyouÌ (High) yo.nger brothergo to úe off,rceby taxi? No, he
usedto meânby in connectionwiú modesof trânspoÍ: goesby bus.
utÌ *r=-fnr 5 Peoplefrom Darjeelingusually speakgoodNepali.
g-ír zqn4Ì+ra" qr üÌÈq. +e*ra Sweshdoesn'tgo home by EXERCISE20 Constructsentencesalongthe following lines:
Subject Time Place Yetu
3.Olew postpositionsi -qf@
aften -qqup to, until; I q every day Katbmandu go.
-dilfir for , ífi-ë€ usually in Pokhara üve.
The single-word postpositions -cf6 aner and -qrq up tu. until J ffi always in faúer's shop speaKÈ;ONepalì.
(rronounced samma) arc used in exacdy úe same way as other 4 ët{€F nowadays in Ram's office work.
5 s never in school speakEnglish.
sirnpleposposiüons:
6 afrqrè afterone week London goes-
irwfu after that
sÊq'ffi afrer 2 o'clock
 r{í qÈsrcfr-qTF{tr{Fìrrdqr,rsot fo t
Cl tZ Womenin the vittages
Anne, a Nepali-speaking British woman who works in Kathmandu,
mffi rrn qqrgl qrÌ €rffi-qÍfr{QF-à õrq ËF6r
qÍ ffi{Fs@qF{rrmr*rÊq1 t
is múing her first visit to rural Nepal. She is now on farniliar terms
with Shanti, who lives in the village where she is staying. Unusually srm 6-ÉÌffi{s r{K Tsr$q ç6p$iaq,üfr wtcr õfr qÈ
7
for a Nepali woman of her age, Shanti is unmarried. qÍs-.{à firq€;Í' !
qï ffiàìwd"nfr+ìe"aerÌ r c{ frqÌqsìctrqfrqrcereÌ t
snffi rÈìwÈo+ìeqq 161ifr rÍssq q-Raìtd{ TéfuqI mfr $ rqrfq€fd{rlsn-rrffi<â.ré{ ìTrcuFoìt
c{ fdï.qtd fuqrì s{h r qn e-ì|il{ iÈiqrèÌ ú@,òi{ ? ç{ ffiqrcqfrìfq<'fr+fr.rrâe t
snô ,ÈtqÈq*, qrà cfr ü.8 ! ìnn.q sEfu1 { ïp{rfu{ ErÊEq I w* @grd-mFrcEcdrfuqfrt@go t
ir{qfu rfr q{fl qÈqrffi qrfir Èqr cfrrtfuõ I q{ qfrftfrÊ*6r{ffirat
ffffi qã,q6@cF{t{üqÊ ì

ÃfuEì at what time? rffi easy

s4 to get up an ta üve, Íeside
vtd at six o'clock rÌrq úaÍe
crs"\ eldeÍ brother's vife gq ro s.leep
-tfi abouÍ qrc-reúandsandface
iqfu so,thatmuch ìII to wash
Èqfr enly aloming È< wet or inigated íield
dtqrò dar& ç€ á1one,on one's own
i emphasizingword s{T to renm
qfd cold ìrÈcqR{ì at half past eleven
ura sprfug, watÊÍsouÍce së time, tüm
úscfu aft that, then ffi.tife
c* aÌl (emphasized) qrâ úard
ÈqT Íeâ @ maÍiage

Anno At what time do you usually get up?

c{ il{ fdffiqffiE rÈtrr rrq É-{,òfi r Shanti I usuallyget up at ó o'clock. But my sister-inlaw getsup at
srr€ q q-{Íqr-qrqnìÌq{qr+ts Íì, R rnrmrr{+Ì ort Èt {àt r about4 o'clock.
c{ qÈ ffi srcf sÍà {Èft-<eq6-.ofr r Anne Why doessheget up so early in the moming? At about4
o'clock it is very darh isn't it?
sn€ e-6Ìvm *ìvrÊ roa;o recscfus€ú8, 6ra_reg6.o, Èw
Shanti It certainly is daÍk, and it's cold too. Sister-in-lawgetsup
qpa5;s1ffinqpag-g I
andgoesto the spring.Then shemakestea for everyonein
s{ ÈrfiftrÈfl.q\rdqrgü.o ? the house.
1rfá {fl , <qï$r ( ìÌr€d,rEr1-ü6I Anne But it's easyfor you. In the moming you've no work, is
c{ ç{Ì-qsqgrrttïs,Èqfd I that so?
{rfr òe-t,qqr<aìqfu rnfdr {È qffie-< ac+rewÈ.sa Iqg *l; Shanti I live herein my paÍents'homeyou see,I don't havemuch
qqR {ÈFd{ ìr|í1qF6q I houseworkto do.
 Anne And whendoesyour (elder)brotherget up then? tt is fairly uncommonfor speúers of Nepali to use thesefoÍns in
Shanti He sleepsuntil 7 o'clock. Thenhe getsup, rvasheshis face conversation,and in many contexts they would sound almost
and hands, driús tea and goes to úe frelds. pôdanticallyover-correct.They are encounteredmuch more
Anne Does your brother go to the fields on his oum? commonlyin literary, offìcial, andjoumústic language.
Shanti No, he goes wiú Faúer and younger brother.
Anne Do úey only retum in the evening? 41 Times of day
Shanti No, after I I o'clock all úe men of the village return from
the fields. And at about half past 1I they eat rice. The word Eì is derived from the verb orq which meansÍo nng
Anne Is it always the women who cook the rice? slÍite. It tÍanslâtesas at... o'clock:
Shanti Cooking the rice is always the women's job. g$.{!I at 1 o'clock
Anne Do the men never cook úe rice? 1E
q"r at 2 o'clock
Shanti Where do men ever cook rice?* They do not, in our house at i o'clock
that is âlwayssister-in-law'sjob.
Three further words are of use nere: +if6 p.rusa nafi: <1ct pIUs a
Anne Do you eat in the eveningtoo? quaÍreÍ;vtn ,llJnusa quaner:
Shanti Yes. 'Weeat in the moming andthe evening,twice a day.
Anne How hard your sister-in-law'slife is! €-{râ-{{ì at a quaÍter past 3
qìÈ qÊ{ì . at half past 5
Shanti After marriagewomen'slife is hard.
Anne And will you not marry then? cÌì qK {ì at aquar t er b4
Shanti No, I will nevermarry. This is the generalpattem,but thereaÌe two exceptionsto it:
*No/e.'This is sarcastic,and shouldnot be taken . Insteadof qÈ çf *ì, it is customaryto expressúalfpast I asÈ6
literally.
qq:

. Insteadof qÈ <Êeì, it is custornaryto expressúalfpasr 2 as+fi€

Grammar
40 The habitual pnesenttense: feminine Íorms To makeit clear whetherone is talking abouta.m. or p.m. (because
The 6 forms of fl havespecialfeminine forms (seeGrammar 11). mostNepús do not usethe 24-hourclock), it is sometiles necessary
Thesemay be usedasfeminine endingsin the habitualpresenttense: to specifyúe time of day when using +ì. by usiog one of tìe
following terms:
Èqr$òs r You Q-ow) come.
ktql iqr I Íou (Middle) do.
frErt rnoming (from dawnto late moming)
g qì"È | Súe (Low) goes.
ÈsÈ dayrime(from late moming to dus$;
efrgftq r also usedto meana.fÍemoon
Sfte (Middle) sleeps.
iIìFFT everxing(aftersunset,beforcnightbegins)
Eachof the four affirmative endingshas a negativecounterpart.The (rfr night
differencebetweentheseand the masculinenegativeendingsis úat
the -È- -dai of úe masculinebecomes-È- -di. in ttr" f".iúo", f*Erqqreqì at I o'clock in the moming
fdd gâ{ì at 2 o'clock in the aftemoon
ã qrãÈ+Cr You (I-ow) do not come. ìc+loqì at 6 o'clock in the evening
ktqTrrÌ<ïr I Íou (Middle) do not do. qàEs{ì at 10 o'clockat niüt
s F51$foq1 Súe (Low) does not cook
frfÌ Èkd-{ | Two further times of day are{Í{ dusftandwtq miüay.
She (Middle) does not weep.
D+2 Oaysof the week Nopalihas severalwords that aÍe neaÌ synonymsof (faõ . Theseare
qÌÈ, qrfr andre. For the tirne being,userr+ in pÌeferenceto these
The word for day that is usedto denotea day-longperiod of time is olhers.
]-*Í, but when it is necessaryto specfy one particular day of úe
weelç the word usedfor day is +f< (pronouncedbâr): IXERCISE 21 Constmctsentencesalong the following lines:
qrq + Er( È? I4that day (of the week) is it today? Subject Time Place Verb
I íqTÊ at 7 o'clock at home eat rice.
Accordingly, each day of the week has a Nepali name that ends in
Eì-t, just as úe names of English weekdays end in .-day,:
a efrqFò in the evening in úe hotel drinks tea.
rdEs on Thursday to my house come.
4 fufi-{€ twice a week to the temple go.
Sunday .II{(r{R Thwsday frÈ{R 5 üÈâ on Saturday ât a ftiend's house sleeps.
Monday *q-{R Friitay lI-rìK
Tuesday TÍ-.d-{r< Saarday xÌfr{R EXERCISE22 Consftuctsentencesalong the following lines:
Wednesdav qtFÍIt
Subject from to veÍb, etc,
I 2 p.m. 6 p.m. am not at home.
In Nepal,Sundayis the fiÍst working day ofthe week,andoffrcesare 7 ilcÉ Wednesday Friday arenot in
closed on Saturdays.In India, both Saturday and Sundây are Birãtanagar.
holidays. sÍrQs Tuesday Thursday do not work.
ln everydayspokenNepali, úe word qfg the day betoreyesnrday 4 fffi I a.m. 10.30â"m. do not go out.
is usedto denotea dayof thepreviousweek,while]rftì oúeris used 5 ft-frEs 2p.m. do not study.
to denotea day of the week to come:
.tr9^"""
qìfi.TITFÍEI(
Iast FÍiday
next Safrirday

4Íl Frequency: re+

The word q-4f carì be used in combination with a number to
communicate the frequency of an occurrcnce:
\r'[ Tè?F one titrE, once
5âre+ two times, twice
frcrã{ thrce times
Thesephrasescan the-nbe joined to a period of time (a week,a day,
etc.), using either -+ì or -qÌ , to expresshow often something
happensor is donewithin that period:
q{T 3|ÏqÌ \rfi QqÍ{r çd cFF My mother gof.sm the market
q!ïì|{ qTtË;6 I oncea week.
+tf qf{fi 6*1 o1uT.rr mii qFÈ | My younger sisteÍ goesto
schoolÍìve timesa week.
 CltS ttiringa rickshaw
lt llt a late eveningin winter. Ashok, a govenment officiâI, needsto
lËt to his home in Múarajganj, a nortlem suburb of Kathmandu.
RunBahadur.a rickshawdriver, is not keenlo travel out sofar at this
tlme of night, but he is preparedto take Ashok paÌt of the wây if the
frriceis right.
wÌs qÈ{sntqrfrfrr
qrfroõw r*g$q rr{vrggo I
rqa-or<<
{tÈ{ q*r<rs,Íq
t{frÈ{rffit
rq e-q$ i.ffrq, iTfõtqT{Tq,reqp{ Israro,ffi ffi o tqewm
crkqravsqqrÌcro r.{d{ra-qfffi ft-{àqí |
q{È{ go,6.o rr<+fàtroì ftz *fr {< rqqrâqfuõtns rË
.KÈ |
wr;|-{rg{q-dr<6€E{?iT,c=nq{firlÍÊ1Q1 |
c{Ètr qqrs ïffi r q a qÍì rqrq {FmÌ H I
dl
{1.
':/
/H
F GI
rl
rqrd{rs{ *rff+ÍàÈggot:
lrrÈd m-{rffiò{r,
-qrff
f.isn{ te,frvrffiào*íì@ I
-
4
tt
-

oo
--l(.

et o 3
--.+\
4)
6-ll

'q oo
In this unit you will leaÍn
N . how to ask or tell peopleto

(rl do or not to do thinga

. how to use the postposition
-qrâwith the indirêct obiects
of veÍbs
. how to use the altemativê
negativefoíms of the hãbituat
pÍesonttênse
. how to use the postposition
-í+{
. how to use the woÍds for but
xóy andbecajse; 6xpÍèss
ag[eeÍneÍ and assent
{vr{{rs{ fiq {frqÌ f{1QqarÈErdÌs{frqÍqrq {rfr {â qràqr sr Rln llahadur Give me 30 rupees,Súeb. I won't go anywhereat
night in this cold for 20 rupees.
âìs r+àrqrsrqq-dfc+snÊ-.o r Ârhok That's fine. Don't go anywhere!I'll take anoúer
{qr{{ìs ìqÈqrffir{ {dfrflnqrsTË-ï rqqrÌosrR r rickúaw.
Rln Búadur You won't find another rickshaw in this cold.
âào rq-qrffi{r. qt=B'1Fçr q"iï 1
There'sonly me now.
{ur{{Ìg{ rqrffit q qOrfr
wiq< r*fr ++rÊc<<rÍàrqr+frqrs€q r Arhok OK then.I'll go by taxi. It makesno difference.
Ë;6,qqÊq-$€rfiIqÌftg$q rr fuàcr=qr Rrn Bahadur A taxi will be even more expensive,sir. Ard you
q"{Èfi í,q rwÈàflKà.Ès-drs r won't get a taxi âroundhereat night. All right, give
me 25 rupees.I'll takeyou quickly.
fic1rrnbtsúaw @,f to act qúckly, huny Arhok Right, right. Now don't be slow, drive quickly.
qfr empty lhey! / do you hear?
qq Ío srÍ dolI4t
@to gtve
qei\raítE MahaÍajganj, a suburb of r though,but, then Grammar
Kaúmandu @to setout,get going'
ïi\to take xà anywhere
tl4 The imperatives
{f ro looft crrlto get, frnd An imperativeis a form of a verb úat is usedto give ordersor make
ïÍlto tansPort takesomewhere vwfin makea difference rÊquests.Imperativesrange ftom peremptorycommandsto polite
wfìwre Ì-aampa4a part of qTeven moÍe
rcquests.[n English, the different levels of politenessare usually
Kathmandu rS çt ro be expensive
.qrffi Ía-xi distinguishedby the use or omissionof a word such asplease,or a
foi quickly
t won't you? q4 now phrasesuchzs would you... ? but in Nepali levels of politenessare
ÈBa ight @rÊto act slowly, be lae hnplicit in the gÍammaticalforms of the variousimperatives.There
q-cráurry aqlslto drive, oÍEnte ue four levels of politeness,correspondingwith the Low, Middle
* È.s+meansboú to walk wtd,to begin ajoumey oÍ to setout. undHigh second-person pronounsplus an extra Super-Politelevel.
Thel-ow andSuper-Polite arcnotfoÍÍnslhata foÌeign^speaker is ükelyto
urc.Thefour levelsaregivenbelow,usingtheveú Ìlt úodo.TheEnglish
Ashok Hey rickshaw!Is it empty? arcnot meantto beJit€ral,but to give a senseof thelevel of
baÍìslations
Ran Bahadur It's empty, sir. Sit down. Where will you go? noliteness.
Ashok Múarajganj. How much moneywill you take?
LOW \ gâr do! (usedto give commandsor
Ran Bahadur Look, I won't go to Múarujganj at night. Ìt's a long
adviceto a peÍsonyou would
way, andit's cold too. I will take you only as far as
normally addressasó
Lazimpat.Pleasetake a taxi ftom theÍe,won't you?
Ashok All right, aU right. But how much will you take? MIDDLE rR gara dol (usedto instÌucta personof
Ard look.I'm in a bit of a hurry.Go quickly. lower stâtusthanyourself,or a
Ran Bahadur In a hurry sir? Right, give me 50 rupees. familiar, whom you would
Ashok 50 rupees?But I wouldn't even pay a taxi 50 âccressas rílirJ
rupees! HICH rf$ì{ garnuhoepleasedol (usedto aska request
Ran Bahadur How much would you pay a taxi then? of soneoneyou would address
Ashok This isn't a tâxi, it's a rickshaw.Right, take 20 politely asrÌrÉ )
rupeesand get going.
 SUPER-POLITE rifrcr garnuholãpleasewouldyou do! (tsed to Dictionary fonn Impenüve base
ask a requestof someoneyou .c_ +
pl-
l nl kc l Í.t
might addressdeferentially) q-
li dva tqi
You are advisedto use the High imperativesin all contexts,at least k, w/Jsh "à
ji5
until you are suÍeof your reasonsfor using anotherlevel. Lt wcep {.t 1t-
.>
Negativeirnperativesare exactly the sameas positive imperatives, lo he 6Í 6r-

exceptthat they take a negativeprefix, ï- na-. 'l'he second vowel is dropped ftom úe bases of W-verbs:
LOW ir.i{ nagar don't! lt, come
MIDDLE nq- nâgara don't! lo send qõrsï
HIGH ïIf{ãRf nagarnuhos pleasedon't!
SI,]PER.POLITE ìrìIËlnTTnagarnuholã pleasewouldyou not do! EummaryoÍ imperativeÍorms
V-verbsand VV-veÍbs
Clearly, the more polite the imperative is, the longer úe word
becomes:in its positive form the most polite is a word of four úfirmaüve
syllables,whiÌe the leastpolite has only one syllable.The High and qlnP lnn it Eú<e gge)$aú 3li&f b a'tÉ CAqbsvJ
Super-Politeforms consist of the dicúonary form + a suffix (úe Low ET q fi 3ÌT rt6l
suffixes are -frq and -frcr respectively).For C-verbs,úe Low and Ers *s qrg (|6tõ
Middle
Middle forms are simply the verb basewithout ând with a final High qrrd{ ftrrÈ{ Kd{ ffiTA{ qè-F{È{
-a -rsdò-dr
vowel respertively. s-P qÌ-{È-qr fiìTòdr Kò{r qrs5Èdr
Summary oÍ imperative forms negat| e
C-verbs Low ;Ín|T rà ìrÌ {3{T r6t
Middle ftffs ïqììF
affirmative
tt1 ,
---:.o ao dgro sif
High ilqrTd{ ïftrT€q ir{à{
qÊ5Èqr
í |ç{a(
,ÌI $P ilflÈdr ífiìÈdr ccõrç{È{r
Low {{
Middle Tf( {{T One additionalfonn of the imperativeis simply the dictionary form
FIioh iràq c *.18r.1 of a verb wiú its final vowel lengthenedftom g u to s ú. This you
Super-Polite rr$rqr c+ ' tQr .1 i use to give specific instructions to a person of lower status than
yourself,or to a familiar. Again, the negativeform hasthe prefix {-:
negafrve
Low r\ ras r tq- i ] | tìítq- Yqi I Now read this book.
Middle iFR iFRT ftÍÌ (rn ffqmrql nÌfi | Don't wash the rcd clothes in
HiCh i.rà{ .rqt'lQt*j tr sF6Íì r hot water. They'l| fade,
SupeÍ-Poüte rrr$l-qr .rc *tgtq I you know.

The Middle imperativesof all V- and W-verbs rake the suffix -g
-ü, which is addedto the verb base.At Low andMiddle levels, five
commonly used V-verbs behave irregularly by adopting special
imperativebases.Theseverbsare:
EXERCISE23 Translatethe following commandsinto Nepali:
a addressingthe personconcemedas ffi:
I Hey, don't sit on that chaiÌ, sit on this chaiÌ.
2 SpeakNepali in Kathmandu,don't speakEnglish.
3 Readthe big red book, don't readthe newspaper.
4 Give the boy an apple,don't give him an orange.
 b addressing the person concemed as d{Ié:
5 Pleasedon't come at 6 o'clock, come at about g o,clock.
6 Pleasetell me bur don't tell him
7 Please take this cup and give that cup to him.
8 Please go to Nepal. Please speak Nepali there.
45 The postposition -erg-/ãias object marker
All verbs must have a subject: úe subject of a verb is the thing or
person that is performing the action of the verb. In úe sentence úe
man eats ice, the yerb is eals and its subject is the man. Many verbs
(those verbs that are called 'transitive verbs,, as exolained in
Grammar 58y can also have an object. ln the sentenceìbove, the
object is nce, becausetÌìat is what is eaten: úe rice receives úe
action of the verb.
Objects can be of two kinds: drrecÍ or rndrrect In Nepali. an indirect
object must always carry úe postposilion -+É. wtrictr wilÍ often be
translatable as to or aÍ..
q16ffir6sr1 I say@you.
whcn an inanimate noun is being tÍeated lilrc an animate being (a
dcvout person might bow to a book, or offer rroÍship to a sâcred
rcck, for instance), in which case it will be treated as an animate
nounano taKe-ítQi
if the subjectcarries úe subject-markingsuffu -ì linnoduced in
Grammar 59) and it is obvious what its object is, it is sometimes
unnecessa.ry to ÍÍÌark úe object with -qrÉ.
More complex sentences may include both a direct and an indh€ct
ohjcct. ln úese úe indirec( object carries -.rrã but the di-reclobject
ú)cs not, and the rules about ânimate and inanimate nouns become
inclevant:
qffifrTrrìì"q I I saythisthingtoyou.
s qqr€ÈqrÈ.Ú | Hegivesmoneyto me.
ìqrË 3ffirq ;nì |f{|q k;ràg I Pleasegive that book to hím.
This is a complex area of Nepali gammar, and the foreign leamer
must develop an intuitive senseof when to use and when not to use
- qt5.

s q-{ì€fu6 | He gives to me.

err{se-<râ@ r Pleasegive to him.
46 The habitual prêsent tense: alternative
nêgativeÍorms
In sentences úat contain only one object, the general rule is that
personal names, human nouns and human pronouns (úe, sÌre, wq All V- and W-verbs have a secondseriesof negativeendings,which
etc.) should carry -qrg when they are the object of a verb, while sound more abrupt than the standard -Èt -daina range. In úis, the à
inanimate nouns need not: dai or k di syllable is replaced by a half n (;) while the vowel of the
verb baseis no lonper nasalized
rI qkÍ qF6 | I eatrice,
{FrT eT"ìÌÌ. Ë6I I We watchtelevision.
çfi-ËÈ ri-d rnS6{ I standaÍdending altemative ending
Theysing a song. g, qÌ, aqÌ)
He wÍites a letÍeÍ.
-f{ -daina -q -nna (with
-tq.l -orna -nna (with c)
q {éfur€sÌÈEI I'11 askhim. -l'rs -oünas -q{r -nnas (with õ)
ç{E€qqri {E{ | They watchme. -(;TT -dainau -*n -nnau (with f(ift)
However, tlere are certain situations in which this rule is broken: -dainaú --TT -nnâú ( wlü r .Er +llE- )
Er +j
- ..5 ql . -â- ---5, ç..--ã
-EnI -dainan -qï -rman (w rl n í1. gí1, l q' 11,
. rn contexts in which a human being is being treated tíir, ano tne pluÍÍu
as a
commodity úat can be bought or given away (giving a daughter l orÍns oÌ 3' l l , l qíl
in mariage, for example), in which case it will be treated as an andfa'iÌ ;
inanimate noun and witl not take -orâ:
 These endings are commonly used with the verbs qt1 and qÌ{: ttfr<rffftrtfr"<qrfq t Elder siser goesto Düjeeling.
q{26-{F T{rgkr<vrol I TouÍistsso to the hills.
S/hedoes not/ ll lf no verb of movementis involved in tlte phraseor sentence,-liR
wiII notgo wilI Doteã mconsin táe vicinity of trc p\aceoÍ location to which it is added:
Idonot/ qqf . í ldo n o t /
will notgo qrúmvf,f<<ql;ÈF ffi nr6{ | AroundDarjeeting,people
will not eat
You do not/ (l rlrl.íí You do not/ speakNepali.
will not go will not eaÍ r6reFa< rì-et <R kÈ go t In thehill aÍeasthe weather
frfr EFiì You do not/ ffiqriÌ youdonü/ is rathercold.
will notgo will noteat
flf -fm can be âdded to the word qì at... o'clock to introduce a
{rfiqr-iÌ We do not/ üfi{s trt;lì lye doror,/
will not go will noteaÍ mcacureof vaguenessto stâtementsof time:
ffiqrfi S/hedoesnoí çfi-Es ìCï-ìI mey donot/ t qlf qìÊd{ flft I lll comeat about1 o'clock
will notgo will Dot eat qrff Eq {ìFfi tÌrd qF6Ì | We eat at about 10 o'clock.

The useof the altemativenegativeendingis obligatoryin thephrases 48 The negative particle í

I do not/will not give and,I do not/will not take:
qdcrftÉÈìqrffi{Èdt ï n! meansdo not befoÍean imperative,brot won't you? lM ü\
I shallnotgive you my bicycle. lmpcrâtive:
qffirffiQRid|eÈ{rffir I will nottak moneyfrom
yatr hand ìTr(nql1Èq Ì Pleasedon't eat the Íice.
q{tq-{rn-dÈ{r Please don't come here
Otherwise, these alternative negative endings are generally rT|-{q|1òq{ | Pleaseeat the rice, won't you?
interchangeúlewiú the standardforms,but tìey aremostoften used
e-qïqregòqrr Please come here, won't you?
wiú úe first personpronoun(c 4 to convey the seriseof I shall not
or I will not Íather than f do noÍ. That is, úey are often used to It elsomeansboth neither andnor:
express refusalto do something: r{ t r+c o I we I HeÍe thereis neither a shop
q rÌmsÌÈí r I do not eat ice. noÍ a school, '
q rrreqrd t I will not eat rìce. r$rrcÈ{rocTèër _ I haveneìtheraay moneynor
qqd qÍÈ{ | I do not go to schooL any cigaÍettes.
q gq srrd t I will not go to sch(nL.
but, d though
49 a-<
47 The postposition -fr{ Íowards Therearetwo wâysof sayingbuúin Nepali.iÍ{ is pretty welì an exact
-Êc<-tira is a postpositionused with words that denotea place or tÍ0nslâtionof but andcanbe usedin much the sâmeway as bütât úe
location.It meanseither (i) in thedircction ofthat placeor location, bcginningof or in the middle of a sentence:
ot (ii) in the vicinity ofúat placeor location.It is alsoused(iii) with fu'+rqrrfro, a<qfuoìs t Thebookis gooil, but it's
úmesof day to meanaboutoÍ appÍoximately. mtheÍ shoÍt.
i When the phraseor sentenceinvolves a verb of movement-Êd( Èfr q f<re+.r-<qr=o il{ {rfr {|t{í | TomoÍow I shall go to
meansüterally in the dirertion of (thoughoften it cân be translated BiÍatrragarbut I shall not
as Ío): stay the night.
iï can neverbe the fust word in a sentence.It can follow a time, or a ['E meânssomethingltke it is good or OK; it has much the same
subject, or someúing else, which it qualifies. When used in mcttningas{q\ , but is ratherlessdeferential.
stâtements,it meansasfor, though,but oÍ howeveL
q ( qTõr{rfr | q qtq qïÈ{ | IXERCISE 24 Translateinto Nepali:
È I am a vegetadan. I do not
eatmeat. I Thosewomen never come to üe bazaaron Thursday.When do
they come,úen? They usually comeon Tuesday.
+ .roqrd'affi{rsèrrfiÈ, But Kathmaaclu ís thecapital
rIRr+ì1-trqÌIrfrAìF{ | 2 Foreignersgo from Kathmanduto Lukla by plane.Nepalisusually
of Nepal,not the capital go by bus up to Jiri. From Jiri úey walk to Lukla.
oÍ India.
3 At what time do úose men go to the fields? They go at about 8
ìqffr tncr t qfqà o, fra Eg6q r Bú the Nepali languageis o'clock and they comehome âfter thrce hours.
quite easy,why don't you 4 | will stay in Nepal only until tomorrow. At 10.30 tomorrow
understand? moming I go to Delhi. After that I go to London.
d may also end a questionor a command,in which caseit translates After 8 o'clock at night all úìe shopsaÍe shut.I won't go to the
as thenot in that case: marketfor you now. I will go tomorrow moming.
What work will you (Middle) do for me?I'll go to úe marketfor
acrlfr qrqrìql-{qr ú{ú6 r Is your motherin NepalT you (lligh), OK?
No. My younger sister never cooks food for úe family. Sometimes
õ-ÜËTd;6( ? WheÍeis shethen? eldeÌ sistercooks,sometimesmoúer cooks.
ìïrcdrn(1Ë;EI She'sin India. She(tow) goesto schoolevery day, and so doeshe (Low). But
aqr{ fi-r qÈft-<ÌÌ q< 3rs$.6 ? WilI you come to my house their little broúeÍ doesn'tgo.
at aboutthrceo'clock?
+t,S*r5traË" I No,I don'thavethetime then.
{l-d {S qï91€;6 d ? At what time will you come,
then?
frffieì-vr{t Is thatyour bag?
Ètc-t- No.

R€rSmÌ | My triend's.

50 6qand ú@:OK, all right

If a Nepali-speakeris askedor told to do sometÌring,and s/heagrees
to do it, the responsegiven is commonly either Q{q havas or ü.8
huncha. Thesewords are both derived from úe veÍb ËT Ío be. {ï{{
hanslatesas may it be so,and is a polite word that indicatesassent.
The middle E of {s{ is pronouncedas if it were a vowel, and the
wordis pronounced 'haus':
Sg{, ffiqr{flAtãÌqrfiT Hey Dhane,maketeafor the
TrFn (FSïSõ | guests!
F{È{< | Certainly, sir.
 Cl t+ Townsand villages
lllrrrl is doing her homework. She has to write an essay about the
rlillcrcnccs betweenlife in a city and life ir a village. Her younger
lrrÍhcl and her parentsare helping her out.
lqq'.rr jnq qm 6d+ì +rq o rqcrl q{frq,rfdS è {sr t
.r{4 | il6,qFEfi_rrwil
l.trt,lr dqrcìqàìr<Tã+sr{<T<È, qro o t
qro o r+qqrdi ËÌ r
'l t l l
lqt{,{r{qr'+ì qqìr<r çì w r .ramd' BÌ ' rÈÌ+ì {racrcÌ Ëï '
6rõ{r€ìrr.qrrffi qào, qr{qarmr r
llqÌ à, ffi, q-çc, ÈFqÌiivrc;rgrrr6r6<q1 r
qt{I rr *qâ"r"<r a-à sr{<Èq * É{rlcr taHffi qììr-<r Efr
{rË{ËrI
se{ q{ qíi r qqÊ r m diq r
l.tq"Ír&fi o raqrffi d_dÌ
'N
d t+
It
rlì:qr Í-{-{qí q"ir r
lqrrqr iç+m sr*,sì +ÌE-íïf-{ úo rrri+ì "ír+ctÊrì çz r
J qi{iâ qm 6 t rrq{fr fi-{ir<r in.iÈì fi-fi {áÌ TEÌ €F6Íì |

o
1l
JU 'lìÌr
--l rntqr ï ë{r c{f{- ú81 ï Fr{cr-q-f5 E;El ï T TFr Trfá'
'^1
.-{ q-u<rrcr{crr6rìwrór
l.rr,n gn < âà fl rnr rnÉqrüEr sFr q-6,qdt qft ffi €;@ì Ìntqr
'-.t/
ct fl;n cTqrÌ<qt 6;5 I6fgq 4 3I|{t ?

o +nr {,ffigntÌdr$ ra<rr6r'wwor+n, q-sdn, qÍ, qqrqF{Í

gÊtìr úq rÈì cFà6s vrqrfrEÌfi T{ q<rÉq t
o
1+
11+r Êqqqr,arsffi
ffisrË"rriqrgtmúr
rnt i vrqa+ìdfficr m-{õd aÌr{tE rstqìtìI,

iErsn rc.+ìffiqqr€rtt'à rqõrìÊrri+ì fi-fi às I

lrgÌtrr r{ to assisr, lrelp {w complicated, difficult

4q' the world {|Er alr
(arÍ<r{Ì higgesr ssT clean
-t{qr Ílìan <<tfã tasty, Ílavoursome
ffiTokyo !<1 thing, matter
x<fi to be liked sÊ true
fw why? qríIqrõ traÍrspoÍ
fìnÈ because +w<to lospiral
In this unit you will learn fi-fi .lfe \lqüI facility, convenience
. hoì,vto make compaÍisons r<v<rs1 Ío ü&e
. how to expresslikes and
dislikes
 Bimala Today I have some school work. please help rne. Father. rìì qi ftÍÈ qc{<r {fr o r My houseis biggerthan
Father All righr. I' help. your house.
Bimala Which is the world's biggest city, do you know?
leÈ qcr<rR qrqà o r Thanyour housemy house
Suresh I know. It's Kaúmandu. is bigger.
Bimala The world's biggest city is Kathmandu? Hou/ can it be r,Ì Erqfr <rqv<r ffi ë;o t Thatdãl is tasüeÍthan
Kaúmandu? Delhi is bigger than Kathmandu, isn,t it this dãL.
Mother? Thanthisilãl thatilãl
Mother Yes, Delhi, London, Tokyo are the world's big cities. 'Ì <rqr<r eò <m ffi úo t
is tasüeÍ.
Fâth€r Bur there is no ciry bigger than Tokyo in rhis w1rld. Tokyo
'I hc words 4â or ;{t(r more. or úe emphaüc ;qr'à macá more, aÍe
is the world's biggest city.
Bimala OK. Do you like big towns? I don,t like them. olìen put in front of úe adjective to make it absolutely clear that a
Suresh Why don't you liÌe úem? comparisonis being made:
Bimala Becausetown life is complicated.Village life is easy. È'Ì lrr5 ffi rngìF<r +â qì o t My village is bigger than youn.
Suresh How can it be easy? Village life is much harder úan town grg çqrÈ frr&
{qmr Ë;tsï t Apples from Jumla are
life. In a village there are neither big shops nor cinemas, mucIl tasúer.
nor are there good schools.The town is what I like.
To express a superlative - that is, to say that something is the besÍ or
Bimala What you say is true enough. But in a village the air is
lhe cheapest- the same consÍuction is used, except that instead of
clean, and the water tastesgood too. In a village the food is
comparingsomethingto one or a number of oúer things you simply
flavoursome.Isn't that so, Mother?
compaÍeit to rf{. al.Lor llJ.qq, absolutelyall:
Mother Yes, \''lhat you say is true. But in a town there are the
facilities of transport, hospitals, schools and marketplaces. ÈinÉas$qr6-ôo I My village is the biggest(of all).
qàìI€I qÌóÌ
Many people like town life. õrdffi6r {õ;n ú61 Oranges fÍom Tatopani are
|
Father Bimal4 now you know úe difference between village and the tasüest (of all).
town life. Tell me now, out of úe town and the village, Since all of these examples have been descriptive, they have used
which do you prefer? either 6 or q;6. However, it is possible to define something as Íàe
Bimala I don't like town life. Give me villase life! biggest village or the cheapest rice: in üese çases the noun may be
menúoned twice (though it need not be), and the { form of úe verb
can be used:
Grammar
ÈÌ q<vqr<r qì (qo È r My houseis thebiggest(house).
51 Comparativesand superlatives .È qtq vfi{qr ffi f3ìfu)È t Thatmangois the tastiest
When you compare úings in English, you say úat something is (mango.t.
bigger than oÍ better fúan something else. Much úe same convention qÈftqi;TgsÈsrc+r gÈr.rqr rfr Americansare the wo d's
exists in Nepali, where the equivalent of the English preposition Íúan qÍf{q-{Ffl | ichest people.
is a postposition, -ï{;qI. But in Nepali the adjective remains the same
as it would if you simpÌy describing what you are talking about EXERCISE25 Translateinto Nepali:
-were
- for example.rrfÌ good remainsas
'rfr good, and úere is no single I Londonis bigger than Kathmandu.
Nepali word that means beÍer. Comparative sentences can be cast
2 Americanpeopleare usually richer than English people.
eìther wav:
3 Kathmanduis further from Englandthan Delhi.
4 Kathmandu is Nepal'sbiggesttown.
 f Which is the world's poorestcountry? m ConstÍuctsentencesaboutlikes anddislikes along
IMC|SE
6 Thereis no languageeasierúan Nepali.
útofollowinglines:
Pt.non Co|our ükes?
52 Likes and dislikes using r{d
Etample:
The simplestway of expressing a li*e or a dislikeof someúingis to my motheÍ red x =Ìfrqrcmr€Ìïòt'rr{iiï r
usethe verb phÍaseqi cT which üterally meansr rd (rFÌ) to falt 1fi1 ./ = Èt qrqmrâ
{È tq rc cdr
but translatesas ro befited. The subjectof this verb phmseis not tlie
I gÍandfather blue {
personwho is doing the liking, but the thing that is being liked.
2 my eldeÍ sisters black X
If no personis mentionedin a stâtementthat usesw { , then úe 3 you (High) gÍeen {
personwho is doing the liking is mosrprobablyrhe perion who is 4 his youngerbroúers yellow X
makingthe stâtement: 5 they purple /
.à,fl-arccd r Thatwtg is ükd. (,llfterh* song,).
dÌrs{qcqã | London is notliked. t9 ta why, fuqrÌìbecause
iFt r wlry?can be usedon its own to aska question:
ÈqÊ*rqiiiï
r ;;,y##Hy:,il;",*
('I donotlike thisnmgazirrc
at all'). A crrqq aTfuqEF6 | TodayI shall go to the offrce.
I fwt whv?
If no personis mentionedin a quesúonthat usesrFI rd, úen the
personwho is doingtheliking is mostprobablythepersonto *ho- A s$qrâià csq r{ c6 r He ükes that shop.
the questionis being addressed: B fç-qt whv?
ftÈ t r {í cd I Is blue colourliked? More commonly,however,fdï ? wúy?is part of a longerquesúon:
qrq aqÉ ffi fuà qfsq qq-d-F t why will you go to the
.-àtï*qrirdr{Èr ;'itt":;:#"i#:),,,, officeeaflynday?
('do you like red or dont you?') s{-qrâd c{|"íf{{ q-{qd r Whv does he üke that shop?
If it is necessaryto stateby wúom a thing is liked oÍ distiked, úen ln suchquestions,the positionof f+< r dependson what the question
the personwho likes, or tlte pronounúat standsfor that person.must âskedactuallyfocuseson. In"Íheseexamples,it focusesoÍr going to
takethe posposition -orrâ: theoffice ufl on üking, so it is positionedimmediâtelybeforethem
ry$ Q-<ì !t ar wi t - I üke the cotouryellow. in the sentence.Nepali quesúonsvery rarely begin úth f*":. lt
gfi-+crâ qH t r fiwi r Sushi|likesthe colourgreen. Írplies to such questionsgenerally,however,do begin wiú FFiFìï'
eqfffi fl+ t{r qq diï I Do you not ükethe coláurblack? tncause:.
se-{É È fr {Tsr q-{ diï r He doesnotlke ihis whiv ctoth. fraraiqfoqqrÈìryq6 1 Becausethereis a lot of
I-ess comrnonly,the liker of somethingcan becomethe subject of work at the office-
this kind of sentenceby using the verb rfi q{Bï, in which caseúe fr-{ì{ìç_Èqrq3{fr(dúE I Becausethat shopis
postposi(ion -qÉ is sometimes addedto úe úinÀ rhatis tiked. quite cheap.
q Èòtlr r{ TtrÈ6r I like the colour brown. fì-{rTì becausecânof coursebe usedin a sentenceto link a causeand
acÉ'{rfr ffi T{ qrsggo ? Doyouüke thecolour
purple? its effect:
q fl-ifr fl{ qit-{ td-dì{ì t fq{ r I do ror eat beef becauseI
am a Hindu.
 GÈr.ft ìFÈ,qffm{ì o @+rfi { r He doesnot speakNepali
because is a Híndi-
.he
EXERCTSE27 cà{ ffiâ{ (Readand undeÍstand)
The following is your first encounterwith a passageof connected
prose.Look up any unfamiliar words in the Nepali-English glossary
at the back of the book, andthen answerthe questionsúat follow in
Nepali.

üfr +{TrqÌ r qïfÌ T{ çs-r qrì ee-<.-rr

6 | rrqï+ì ru efu $ r
ã'réql+ifla *rÈ q' :rft araro rc' qr *-+ f+q dr{qrEì qr+*;o r+gf+r
oftv r+qÍo r+@ +rS r *rftr vr;o tqËitrfõEfd rfrfuq+rãrr
qroft++ì*È Èìffiqs rq q1qÊq.{drnârqr+Fì qfr {r6qr$
wrg6< t e-qÌsì qçÍüs r tr<qì sTq ,rç6.o rqFi-{F+ì TrFr{{Ì ìTrd
.rtrsgqo rm+r€g€-w+rqfA.ftr{dÊ rOÈ açafus
\recrHï{Ts 16ì{
fìì Wír {r;Ìtr qÉ rrgÍïffi ì ar"r ï;È | Tú lTd'q< --qr.iòr I
qÉÌqr F{R 6, a< ãrfidt {@ qf{ í{r.+ì crift qldi I qaï rÌË1sT
qFEEãàìTm futfr
Coq 16iìÈ FirÈ' í{ìì=È crrÍÌ€T€1 r oo
ClildF (questions)
Ì üir fdÌ .rFEï '
q frfu q a|-sqfuq qE{ EFb 1
.H
ì
4r.
o
t
q)
ì rn frïd,qreÌqEüE ?
o3
CLo
8 qaqÍqt {rFtË;6 t
k Èqfi+ì ïr{I qFE r
a erdq|6orn=à6sÈ-{ Èìqfr ffi Ë;6ï ?
qt
-

In this unit you will lêarn

. how to usethe simplêpast
tense oÍ veÍbs
. how to usê the agerÌtive
suÍÍix -le
. how to namethe parts oÍ
the body
 Cf 'tS SanOhya
drops by frúì yesteÍday í{cf'{ buÍ evenso
à anywhere qtfur m ráeend
Sândhyahascometo call on her friend Asha. Shehad also calledat q\ at home ln<rpÍwithoút hope
the house the morning before, but had been surprisedto find it qfr my place, my home frqqrà{r on Íáe way
deserted.
Ashaexolains. qì rrfr leaqy rarn
wrÊr{ your place,your home
rÌfr someoae à<time (a quantity o0
ìFàqT Rqì acrÊ{ËÍ flfq* z qtgl ç9remember €q tree
3ÌFTt @166rraf,rvì+Èr *
qÏR day befoÍeyesteÍday *c súe.lter
vê,qI e<@Ê+6mrilrf+qi3fiE rqÌqr +ìÉÌqfr fuq{ | fuq to get wet
qT{TÌ avt€rcEÌ +fr +ì qrs-ct{Èr
W a few, some
ltryffi tkÌ Pashupatinathtemple qmÊ n forgive
(rgqT tvra,frw,rÈwacìft-rqrErq3rfrffiìTEr rv frFrffi qk< BajÍa logini temple wr'n umbella
3TÌSn q1qrà I qfu Sqr,qrqr<rrrtqsàô ffi crfirìcrq,rE,TS ct{ rRrc'r CáanguNaraya, (a temple) qrdnr sky
IÈ* (ï-dì rogeúer,eachwith the other fficrfi figfit rain
qrfu{Rftà,àí{?
rrwà enjoyable Èë! ro meeúup
ìt;Ë.qT $,vÊ-+nffir
frÈ dtuectly,sfaight ç[t
3ÌXItt qIÊ++R Êd{rcq {s qk( ur;E r+fr @.È{Tï Ërfr-{F$È qì.s. qw half 'evs
tfie{ ta tell, relate
qìfrl c{qffi qfr{ *nì qrqr+O È,- rd1 to warr
(l;F T ecÉ Èfi srffirt q{cfur'q qr{ü.6 I * Nepali hastwo words foÍ shelter:ì4 rneansshelt from the
fi$I ãÌí{ tqÌR srt{{r' c {q frffiqì qkr rrq ro@wfrr*J rain, while srqt meansshelér fÍom the sun
apçrqúrqfr qF6 I
Fèqr @iÌõrrqn$à.l Sandhya Wheredid you go yesterday?
qrçn q àÌ q* \'€ qr=em qfe Ìfr Èâ {rgqqrã qre{ Asha I didn't go any$,hereyesterday.I stayedat home.
tffiàÉÌ
È+qFq{rfr tr{cr afur | Ërfr d'r-È,Ìqk{'rÌqü rA"+ rqrEql Sandhya But I cameto youÍ place yesterdaymoming. There was
wn rr I no onein the house.
vaqr qktqrìfrqfirÈ r Asha Wïat time did you cometo my place?
qrsn fu\r{ rsrk{K qrd{m qrï eq-tÍú-s Sandhya I cameat seven,no, at abouthalf past7. I yas a bit late.
ú6 rqrs-{sa@ÌrqÌ Asha Now I've remembered!The day beforeyesterdâyFather,
qfr f-c fEç{ r
s+qr il acrif* c{qtffra f1Èçftqqq. òrq r q dsrffiàfi1qr {rsr Moúer and my youngerbrotherswent to Nepalganjfor
q0-erçrqqÈilr qh ïqffuF qr:ìrrrrq rqrfq' q íT,reÌ,{g qÍì a few days.Yesterdaywas SatuÌday,wasn't it?
{. Sandhya Yes, it was SatuÌday.
Asha On Saturdaymoming I always go to the temple. And
qrsn fi-ffràqr-ôsrficrcÌ r{rfi-Ë€.Srr
ErcrfEç{ tqrfr à{Ì Ì{qrq yesteÍdaymoming we went to Pashupatinâthtemple at
çsa se+ì +Ìarr *e+r rmr{ ftqrr* r rrn n{Èqr A I úout half past5. Therewas no one at home.
t;aw frq, àfr Èn rrd,r srm firfr rq-arfu<
qmrqr;ìiqrò rà r Sondhya Do you go to Pâshupatinaüevery Saturday?
ffiqr'ftqrìc-ìrr Asha No. Last Saturday I went to Bajra Jogini temple.
srsn Ës{d kfr rqMrÈ!ràÈ tqq-à{,Êcr fr@q, vàr++< SometimesI go to ChanguNâÌayantempletoo.
g{regftl Sandhya Who did you go with yesterday?
 Asha I.usually go alels lut úe day beforeyesterdaymy elder 'l'honclbur verbstake the sameendingsas all otheÍ verbs.It should
sistercamefrom Baglung.Now shewill stay à few days [lro lx notedthat the final -a of úe presenttensebaseof the V-verb
in our house.We went to the templetogether.It wasvery t(d1 to tbrgetis droppedbeforethe pasttenseendingis added:
enjoyúle, you know.
Sandhya Was therea crowd at the temDle? Vclb PÍesenttensebase Pasttensebase
Asha Itilto forget ffi- birsa- Êd- nirs-
No. There's a crowd there ònty ut"r 7 o'clock on a
Saturday,We went very early, so therewasn,t a crowd. 'lhc basesof W-verbs in past tensesare shortenedforms of the
Sandhya But you didn't come straight back from pashuDati. pÌtl|€nt tenseverb bases(seeGrammar 33). The secondvowel of
did
you? Í waitedat your door for half an hour but evenso lh0 presenttensebaseis droppedto form the pasttensebase:
you did not come.In the endI lost hopeandI went back PÍesenttensebase Past tensebase
VV-verb
home. qÌS{ Ío come 3{Tii- 3TT-
Asha On the way back it rained heavily. We didn't have an Ìn;ì3{ to cooft qì6I-
FFTit-
umbrella.We sat in the shelterof a tree for a while. Did Íw1Ío úmk ft-s- fr-
you get rvet?Will you forgive me?
Sandhya No, it doesn't matter.I had an umbrella. Over Pa tense verb endings
here the
sky becameda.rkandonly light rain fell. ï'hc simplepasttenseis formedby takingthepasttensebaseof a
Asha riChj tlrcn sister. Today we have met up anyway. vorb and adding an ending to it. As always, the choice of ending
l*l dopcndsuponwhat or who the subjectof the verb is, andthe endings
Pleasesit down, havesometea,tell me all the news.
mustbe leamedby heart.They aÍe:

Grammar AffiÌmaüve Negative

íl The simple past tensê slngular

q -E -õ -€{ -inã
T\e simplepast tenserefers to acúonsand eventsthat happened nff, {rfi-{s \'iÈ
in -qÌ -yaü -enaú
the past,oÍ describessituationsand conditionsthat were tnìe in t -ã{ sìS -ina6
the -is
pasl It usually correspondswith úe English I went,you ffi, Êffi-6r -yâu -çir -enau
came,he T
said, they were,it was,etc.,but can also someúmesbe similar 3ã.ÌrÌ. aqÌ (m.) -qÌ -yo -S{ -ena
to the
English presentperfect:I've gone,the rain hascome. s. fr, d (i) -€ ^ -i -í{ -ina
gff, ffi, ffi 111.; -g -e -qn1 -enan
Past tense verb bases rfr, firfi, fafr tr.t -EI -i! -EìI -inan
The pasttensebasesof all C-verbsandmostV-verbs arethe
sameas
ff, fr, efi-q-setc. -g -e -(ì1 -enan
the present tense bases (úat is, úey are forÌned by taking
the
dictionary form and dropping the ending _1_ see GrammJ
33). 'l'he boxes that follow contain úe simple past tense forms of the W-
Howwer, the:e are four particular V-verbs-which form their past
tensebasesdifferently. Theseare: vcrb qÌ!t{ fo come and úe irregular V-verb q]1 Ío go.
qIAï_ to come
Verb Present tense base past tense base
to AfriÍmative Negative
ëT wasà *- (I came,you caÌÌe, etc.) (I did not come, you did not
\ to weep come, etc.)
gFI to go gï- = qrsi
rT- fi* -q- ,ils qr+-€i
€1 to be fu- orrr- flfr,üfi-{s 3TT+ -qr qRÌ fi + -qdÌ = {siì'
í qr + -E\ qTÊq fi+ -Eì{ = qlrq{
 qr + -qÌ
ffi,frfrdF
o, *, çft <m.l rn t -*
= qrqÌ
= qrqÌ
3ïT+ -çdÌ
qr + -qt qr\r{
66 The simple past forms of fl fo be: firqìand ì{ò
=
s, qÌ, .à (i) qr + -Ê = qÉ 3ïT+ -Fi = qÌa{
sfi, ffi. fafÌtm.r fi+ -( = 3frS qT + -qTf = qr\'ì|ï AffiÍmative Negattve Affïmative Negative
çô.frfr,ffirrr rn+-í{ = qffi fi+ -ETï = qIEì1 fc-si
qÌ, dÌ, gfi{s erc. 3{T+ -g = 3IrS 3ÌT+ _qa4
ri ftq ì{g ì{fÍ
tlr{Ì,n{-{€ Fffi FìrrÌ ïIITT
qq to go í tu'< tq5íí ,ïS l|Éis
-ïç.ü
Affrrmative Negative tí{Ì, fidfi-{F ffif ÊìcìÌ IIITT lTç{r
(I went,you went,etc.) J,, (m.) ffiÌ fEcí q-{Ì rTs{
Q üd rÌot.go,you did notgo, etc.)
rt+ -l{ = rfaÌ j,, 'Ì,.*
4Ì, .Ì (f.) tuq fufi t€{

üqr,{rfr-{F rr + -grÌ = rr(ìÈ ì,{Ì,tufr,ÍÈfr(m.) Íìc l-qqr1

r{g ì{cìI
( { + -Ë q r'fÌ.Íffi,ft,ft(r.)tu"{ï FnI trq qEìI
tdfr,fiÌm€F ,| | ,ír. srtE * e[c. f.{c Iqcrl lTg ì{cr{
s,t,Qt-.i rr+-dÌ
g, qÌ,.q'l (f.) rr+-€ HlghÍorms
sfr.ffi.lTfrtrnrq+-( .fiÉ, Tt{F etc. üi€qd üÌâ {dl{sï
rfi.frfr. frfr (f.) Tr+-81
qÌ, dÌ. :rIËÂ erc Ir + -g Thc simplepasÌ tenseof úe verb €1 fo be has two forms. The ftrà
Íìn'mtÌanslatesas wasor were,and this form of the verb is usedto
The High forms of the simple past tense consist of the dictionarv t lk aboutsituationsandconditionsin the past:
form of a verb (úï. 3rFín.ïFr etc.t. combined wiú: ffi q ìqmqr Flsi, qÈfr+rsr fuq I YesterdayI wasnot in Nepal,
- the suffix -ìIfr in the affirmative I wasin America.
- the suffix -ïrgt in the negative. rrr+qà fqçq.ffiirà t The food was*notpolluted,
It WASpqÍe.
These forms are always the sâme, regardless of ihe number and
ffi ÈtTt rerra rtrfr M t weatherwas
Yesterday's
genderof úeir subject.
verybad.
High Íorms ${ {{r{CCTT€firúÌ{rÊÌq I Dhan Bahadur had two sons.
i4Ìgï Ío com€
Affirmaüve Negaüve * The word
qrel +-ì{fr Eà is loosely ünslated zs Polluted. Any food that
iìTs-cììÌ 3rc{ r -ìÌç{ = srtstìTç{ has come inÍo contact with someone's mouú - either directly, or
ETl Ío go indirectly via a hand or a utensil- is considered1& and therefore
Affhmative Negaüve may not be eaten by any other person. This everyday concern
qX + -tr* qÌ--r.ì* urd + -vçq = qr$T\r{ about cleanliness and hygiene is given a deeper meaning by
Note the following examples in which the Nepali simple past tense notions of caste and ritual purity. The observance of úis rule is
must be translâted wiú the English present perfect tense: traditionally strict€r among higher Hindu castes such as the
Búuns than among, for instance, úe various Tibet(FBurman-
crff indf r It has begun to nin! speaking ethnic groups, and it also varies between families and
ttfrqre-_íì*r Has Gunii arrived? social classes. While parents and elder siblings may share food
*fr trqÌr Power cuÍ* with úe younger children of a family, âs an outsider you should
Nofe.'*Power cuts ffe an unfortunatefeatureof daily life in Nepal. obseÍve these rules unless and until you know for sure that the
{fr meanslampbut by extensionit is alsousedto meanelecrrr.c 1.islìt people wiú whom you are eating do not observe úem so stricdy
Whenpoweris restoredaftera powercut. thecry is +fr qrÈ : - themselves. Food should be touched only wiú the right hand,
becausethe left hand is used for toilet ablutions.
 I
ïhe rrâ form refers to changes,eventsând transformationsin the
past andmay often be translatedasúappened oÍ became: \(,1 heÍe, in this place qÌïr oveÍ heÍe, in this ürection, hither
a|íÌ there, in that place 3ìrT over íhere, in that diÌection, thtther
o qrà firà, qfu a cfusd ìr* r He was stupid,butlater he r|J wheÍe, in which place in which direction? whither?
becamea Pandit- {,dÌ somewheÍe, in any place fd to somewherq ìn any diÌection
qr{rffifirÈ, qfu6ffirrfr r The food was hot, but then it
became cold.
u96ffi,rfuag:eÌrd r He was happy, but IaEÍ he 67 Someoneand something:the uses of €
became sad. lnd *fr
ãÌóÌsÌÈÌ{m, cfucfr nrrc{ I The rcom was üny, and
Iatü it didn't become
An un adjective,ÈS meanssomeor a few.'
cleaneither. ÈôÈ{ a few days Èô È€T somemoney
m'ÈarÈÊEm, dqrdqÌ€ì rrà I qcr{ oho GovindajÌ, what +fr qF6Ë- somepeople ffi c àâ som.ethingor
q êhõfìqi
*:.--5.-
I happened rc you? Nothing omef
has happenedto me. Ar an adjective,ÈS also meanssome,but can only be used with
The following pairs of statements illustrate the difference in the humannouns,and usuallyin úe singular:
meaningof the two forms:
"À-ôcFÈ somemaa (whom I do not know)
Ttqtqfrtfffrfq-i{ | My sisterwasi11. *€Ìq +Ìü someoneor other
ÈersÈfrffiq-t1l My sisterbecameiJl. Much more commonly, these two words are used as thiÌd-person
frÌorqrrrfffqd I It washot in theÍoom. pronouns, and they can be understood to have the following
Èarqr trf rr* r It becamehot in ürcroom. rneanings,dependingon úe kind of sentencethey occur in:
cTd{F{< fug I me shopsy@ shut. Affrtmaüve statement Negativestatement Quesüon
qTdQ€ {q rÌg I àô something nothing nYthing
The shopsbecameshut.
i ìI.ÍÌ aÍìd ìTg;I arc comrnonly used on tleir own to sÌ€Ì someone no-one anyone
tell someone tàat
something has or has not been done or completed, when boú qcqr +Ìô o I qrqr +Ìô Ìàí t Is theremyone in'the house?
speakersknow what it is thal úey are ta.lkingabout. For instance.A çfi-{€qÈqrqr"" | Thereis no-onein the house.
and B, who are boú staying in the same hotel, had previouslv been - They are in thegarden.
discussingB's diflÌculty in getting an air ticket. A seesB comins
ffiËrmnào tÈOen ÈÊ whatdoyat havein yur had?
back to the hotel. and he knows that he has been to úe airline office.
dà{fi{r ì I don't haveant'thing in my
Instead of asking him did you succeed in booking your ticket? allhe
hand,motheÍ.
needsto say is:
In negaúvesentencesqfr even, also can be addedto 6e6 ft-$ and
A rrâ? Did it happen?/Any tuck?
çÌfr to heightenthe negativityof the serrtence:noüÌing at all, nobody
to which B will give one of the following replies: whatsoever:
B ìrfr! yes, it's done! or B rÌç{ ! R qrr+rìfr vfì Ènt I don't have anything at all
No,no huck!
in my hand.
56 Location and movement q-fir+Ì€Ì qfrròï | There is no-one at aII in
the house.
Nepali has two sets of words that mean úere, there, and where, The
first, ending in -QÍ,refers mainly to static locations, while úe second.
ending in -dT.is most commonly used with verbs of motion:
 EXERCISE28 Translateinto Nepali: (, õnrÈìE rqcdq rccÈqrfuqr aqn rì€ fr r dcr€€s
I Pleaseopenthe window, it hasbecomevery hot in this room. {Fà{TI
2 Yesterdaymoming the children were all here.But todav no_one rÍì6-{rd È Fâ R rrÈ qrq rÈì{ffiqrqrN r{ëÍ erarqre
cameto schoolat all. 3{r3rÍìI4r. í' FÍITFÏ GIríÌ q-6rqïr I
3 Last Wednesdayit rainedheavily. I didn'f havean umbrella,and rÌ{ g$q r{qrâ.rdÌq.r&{ rqrqr{€qÍìÈÌmrqffi r
I got soaked. qÌfi-qm fr{ 6, âr o, qs sÍè rn | ... qgrifr, qrç .r'trÌcr rqlEcr
4 Grandfatherhad two sons. One was called Sanju and one was
calledNiroj. Sanjubecamevery rich but Niroj *ã, u.ry poor. Èqrft-i-Ë€f{?
_ {t!l ìr y f| tq
_ .:-__â,l_
ì.nQt ú.t
.
I
5 The peopleof that country were very poor and therewas nothins É.u. É.ú

al all in theirhouses. qÌfi-{rt se fi{qrqfr trsSâ tÊrta qÍì fuEg'oft t

6 Yesterday many people went to pa6upatinãthtemple, because w;'<rvr< 6o rçeaffirr r
yesterdaywas a full moon day (pürgmâ).
crsrt.ifi a respectfultitle for q.sï Íecently,justnow
â religious teacheror a leamedman ìfitl to calL,invite
Cl te n visit from Shankarprasad alrqi in good hea.ltlÌ(polite) ,rÃú to teüoff. abuse
q< other,addiüonaj
ì thatwhich
Shankarprasad Acharya is a priest and teacherof high social status. s& dratsanre(erdrasizedfmn of d dra) zÍè,fi a do imndiately
Motilal phonedShanka4rasadAcharya a little eartier,to invite him
Çàjust one c'"-ú to foÍgive
to his house.He is anxiousto cultivate good relations with such a rr*r to lnform rfrct frstly
man. ShankarprasadAcharya has just arrived, but the domestic 'ri qrËTríúoarive
frr1 ro ast
arrangements arenot runningsmooúly. ezr<rcady frr1e biscuiÍ
qÌâ-fiq 3rrqdfr, ïrreFrcl
qRrÈüil.6i? Motilal Acharyaji, greetings.Are you well?
sFfi{Ttrr<sr{rq tffiÉ Ê{ ? Shankarprasad I am well. And you?
Èá-dre rcÊ rr* s r Motilal I am well. Please sit dorvn, whaÍ would you
sqÈ(, àÊ{deE like?*'
{qrq? Shankarprasad I will havewhateveryou are going to have.
rFF<csrE MotiÌal That's fine tlìen. Just one moment.I will tell my
dsÉ ì fugg.or
wife. I don't know what+'?shehâs cookedtoday.
cu-Sìfu"oft r I'11 ask her, all right? ... Oh, Anju, Anju, where
Èô-qrq ü+(a rsàfuï rq haveyou gone,huh?*3Isn't thefood ready?
sfrrffi r*+<.qfr Aqi,t What? I have only just come from the market.
3rrq s{ì à à Wïat to do. indeed.there'slots of work. I am all
v+re1r<r€ m6r alone.I'll preparetea fust, for sure.You people
ìTç{ rqdÈE-,à ?... pleasesit down.
S, .ì{, .Ì{, f(fr Motilal Oho, how late úings are today! I invited him to
{ ilr r E Ì È ? q n T our home.He camefrom faÍ away,but you didn't
fl.r|{ rT(r{ ? cook any food.
3r{ ËT{ ? q T(qt
aqiu Listen. Don't tell me off. Therewasa lot of other
rqrcqraqr{ rà,Ìi work in úe house.
Motilal OK, OK, now do it immediately... Acharyaji,
pleaseforgive (me). Will you first take tea?
 Shankarprasad Yes, yes. It doesn't matter.
nbllrtuccasewhen-à is addedto it. q andõ take specialforms when
Motilal There now, the tea has arriyed too. Would you .il h uddedto them:
like a biscuit as well?
Shankarprasad Yes. Please give me one, would you? { becomes Ì producing qà
*' à fuTúo ?whatwi you take? d becomes à producing àà
is a more polite way of asking
someonewhat they would like to eat or drink úan à ufggo wfur All of the oúer pronounschangein exacúythe sameway asúey do
will you eat? wlth oúer postpositions:
*'?à is repeatedbecauseMotilal expects
his wife to have cooked a s beromes ss poducing wà (oftenpronounced ulle)
numberof different things. fr becomes qÌI pducing rr<rà (oftenpronounced
elle)
x' Motilal andhis wife Anju are a tradiúonal iq'{à (oftenpronounced
tell€)
couplein úat theü use d becomes Foducing
of pronounsis asymmetical: he addressesher asfrfr, while shecalls iÌ lFq
becomes -{tl prducing rgà (offenFonouncedkale)
u*q. Less traditional couplesnowadaysaddressone anoúer as gfi becomes sÍ producing rtì
F*
krql frft becomes fui prooucing frmì
c.--.:-
trff becomes r(.r pKnucmg líÍrí
tè+rqrÈr I worked.
Grammar wfàfqkq
g{È{qr{TqÈÌÌìï | He did not greet me.
58 Transitiveand intransitiveverbs c----â. -c- ì _
-ô-:-
3-{{E-{ -çscr F|6r crn d€ì1 | Theydid not write even
All Nepali verbs are either transitive or inÍansitive. When usins the oneletÍÊf,
simple pasrtenseof any verb it is irnportantto klow which caregory
mrtà s+qrâer{K IìTrà t Did you give her a present?
the verb belongs to.
Somecommonlyusedverbsare a combinationof a noun with either
A transitive verb is a verb that must have an object. For instance, we
thë verb {t úodo or úe verb fl úobe. Sucha verb is nansitive wiú
cÍìnnot see without seeing something, and that something is the q{ but intransitivewith Ë{:
object of our seeing: it receives the action of our seeinq. Wã cannot _ _ -; 'I
---À--.--.:..'-:_
34tË€qÌrFrqr-q' {< Ìr' mey shut the cinema.
eat, or do, or ma&e or look- without something ben{ eaten, done,
made oÍ looked at therefore, all of these verbs, plus many others, are frÌqr-q{ {< trÌ | The cinemaclosed.
said to be 'transitive' becausethey act upon something, which is their 6r@om5.eÌ | We staÍtedwoÍk.
çrq{!,{r{Ì t ^ The workbegan.
oDJecr. ,I
-----:-: - -..--.:
{T{dTrq€EdFTqÌÍqrpn Thegovemmentstopped
An intransitive verb is a verb that cannot have an obiect. For the strike-
instance,all verbs oÍ molion are intransitive: we may go Ío a place. qfi ltà | The strike ended.
{çffq
or come 1?oma place, but these places aÌe not receivers of úe action
of moüon, they are simply destinations or sources. EXERCISE 29 Put the following sentencesinto the simple past
tcnse,beginningeachnew sentencewiú úe word Èfr yesteÍdal and
59 Transitiveverbs and the suffix -ì rcmovingúe word fir foday :
The subjectof a transitiveverb in the simplepasttensemusttakethe Ì fiq ffir€ kcrqr{ëq ?
agentive(or 'subject-marking')súfix -à. Lingústically, _àis a reüc 1 qFÍ q \rseÍ f{-{rE ffr6 |
of an old p-assiveconstruction,andit hasthe original meaningof óy. l crwqrfi-6serg eÌàrÌ |
Because-à is a postposition,the subject wordìust ctraogJto ttre r qrqçfi-ës rr|{eÊn1 rsfi-ës+ÌqcqrqÍ[{ Èï t
! {|EfTfrìHfd-{R;ÈìÌ ?qrqsrq{T€f,rft<rrrs{ú6t
( 3Íftrfi{f 36451 ra-qÌffi g6.o r
 60 Further uses oÍ-ì ü Wth nounsto mark a causalft[ction
a With the subject ofa transitive verb in tens€sother thap the past tÍ( |õ,Í{íÍ'è becauseof this
-à must always be affixed to the subjectof a transiüveverb in the FRÌ fi'RVÌ"ò becauseof that
simplepasttense,but it can also be usedto emphasizethe subjectof ì nr<qì t becauseof what?
a transitive verb in the habitual present tense in the following
lbo phrasesoe tf<vrà andrRT{ï{qfì meandueto thatcauseaJlddue
c[cumstances:
ío úis causerespectively,andthey arc commonlyusedto meansooÍ
. if the sentencesaysúat it is paÍ of the nâtuÍal tâus;
order of thinss for
the subjectto perform the verb. and thereforcstatesthat thi-sis a gmffisM+aÈ lrtv{r<Urà He is a boy of a tenderage.
role that is specificto the subject: 3GìÉ TÌf'á ïffiqÌ | So pteasedo notgive him a
1g<rìgcwir A chickenlays eggs. aSarelÍe.
4fTq {rqT q"r;6 | A üger eatsgoats. È-òr qrc tq qrfr q-+ ritre rRqrà Last yeaÍ little Íain felL.
qrqì;qrì È;E I Sunshinegives wannth. q-qt({r qrrq ffè q-üÌ ìíà t Thereforerice becamevery
rffirq|Ë-{à.ffiqÍàl A proper BÍahmin doesnot expensivein themarket.
drink alcohol. Thc abbreviatedforms of this phrase,a{€ ;Fror and i{ÈÈ, are very
if the sentenceis a questionaskingwho or what is the subiectof a commonlyused.
transitiveverb:
Other nounscan take -ì when they are úe causeof an event or a
wàefrSarr;ar Wo saysthat? condition, regardlessof whether the main veó of the sentenceis
qrE{.€ì fq{r firs6 ? Who will make theteatoday? tÌansitiveor not:
if the sentenceis a responseto a questionsuchasthoseabove.or qfiflqà à-{rqr ÈÌ crtff{s ffi In time of Íanine, mmy
focusesin any way uponúe subjectof úe verb: rrfu r peopledie of hunger.
qrqRÌ rì-;ïË.6 Ê{ | Èàgmvrfràfrrd I My cloüEs weÍemadewet
Mother saysso,you know!
3{rEïr€ì È{r fiÈ6 r Dy Íatn.
Tod.ayyoungerbrother will
make Íhe tea. EXERCTSE g0 .Èl{ETft
b To denot€ the use of faculties or instruments
qk rrfu{rr fqrÌ | ìqÍ{qr qrÊ-{|.íq{r 6;5 r qfusi qlt{ r qfur*r *<
fuq rdìffidcÉqfrq-S r srarít\r{. o qríËrrrqr t sqì\rícr
qrfr rnà g.EÌ r Wehear with (ow) eaII. qrrr-{Rft -friÌq tccÊ{t@cÊ
Fn-crerdìrÈfr ràrìqmqrqrff{Rffi
üfrEìiràffir We bite with (ow) teeth. Èr r<rqqfu{.fô r <rr+ÌEclcfrqfu{qTt{à r<rrfrfiqrfq{Èqk{
qrfraffifuÌr Welook with (our) eyes. qr{irò r qÊ{rcr +6iì qqri.irrà ' qrs qìft-t q. ç,Í+rà t crqr rrw$r
Ofrqcìffir We speakwith (our) mouths. rfr+ qrqrflà e s-ì ':nsìcS*-+ Aqr . crg r "à q cfir{ Er€ '
qrfrrrtè @ r We smell with (our) noses. q
rràqr qscr6|drfu " <rqà q-d t -nir
ffiËF<rÈìdràrïkïqF6ï | Nepaliseatrice with (tlre)
rrf,dF
Íight hnd.
ffiqsàà6rcìrmeìÈ+r r r qfuà{RM? I @<rq rdrrfd r
Nepalisdo not eatÍice with
(the) Ieft hand.
r qffiqÌcqrôM t  @{Frfrqmrr{Ìqr-iÌ{Ì ?
I qfu {-rà à rr* t u {rq r qrarfrfr {+sq {à ?
r @à+nÊ+àr
14
t ;l
61 Parts of the body
ol HEAD ARMS
lol ar+ì head cï{iï upper iìün
tol Tq,q-$R face {rd hand/

tët
ll
3ïtqr
ïTfi
Tq
eye
nose
mouth
3ìì-{r
?tãíl
{rr
forearm
finger
elbow
fingernail
tl
ll
sFi
{ITTõI
eaÍ
hair
$qì-dÌ thumb

to l q t(l tooth LEGS

E9l ffi tongue cËr
siâ necvthroat qír foot
chin knee
beard gqÌ heel
3ÌTqT toe
BODY
sÉï body OTHER q- I
ffi back {rRi blood

6r€Ì
stomach
breasVchest
6FiÌ
Ëre
skin
bone ïd=
õÌ:I
frEI|{
shoulder
watst
heaÍ
,ïoto
lung

rVoo
9=
o+
ro
--

ã
In this unii you will learn
. how to usetwo vêós in one
sentencê
. how to ÍeportinfoÍmation
Írom othersouÍces
. how to usethe continuous
tenses of veÍbs
. how to discusspeople'sages
 Cl tz R day ofÍ work ícEr<rvt*È<ar@ü.it
Rajiv hasjust completedhis fust week at úe office. He and Keshav rldlq íqrtfrrqrpi€€@Ì ur.q : erftaar o, {tr r
discussplansfor their day off. ftfl{ à, er,à6 Içf165 as Sq qF6q ì tft<r+ôFr er{F qrãr-qo-arqr
qt-a ìTg{qFEmi 1
rr,fl { rffi qìT{sfi-{Fà TEfuI
ì{r çfi-{F {údra +ô qÈ W fqq{sFs{ì ràô Awr qfu qrfi-As
Ír6fr{ fqç T<i-fi qfì qqÌ |T<ftd{ Tl'' Ërìngì ò{sÈr
qrr,qr q-È qrryarqì ït{ .rqì, +EÌ {Iaitr{r-;r EqqÈr
'qr*iÌ
orqÍqr {È{ ilqr Èà 3Ìsgrffi R r*Ìô il*{€ gt+r rè< Ê<rq t
.-+€ úo t*k <qr€qÈ.M qrgús f+ t
rÌR't€rïcg-{rôrrf+do rtts +r<vràiì-tdÈE tefi-esofu
dÈft{Qqq?
ìrÍ{ rÈ a qÈìsrq qffir ìÌ\'{ rìg+rtd{ q Eì{f,ffi nÌc .È rdr
qrtlõb I
ïÍfi-{ srü crqr qiil{ qÍì çìï,r'i{K, ft a rqÌ {frr q sì ú€ r
ìqs feq rrliÈfi1 q fffffi $Ì{ú r3ì-c tt+.vfr r:rr* çr+ì k<
65t, qrFrqf{slq{ üffi .rffi .r€.6 r

r$ day off, holiday FrnÊ+ plcru'c

çã t how? in whatmanner? dqr nver
trersl ro sperd trme fi< bank of a Íiver
ffi-* mfüq*Efrft+rr frtufi all day <rçò rri to e47oy oneself
qrÈ long srd shade
àsr< È | *fr ( srffi È Íì r qrkeRËì{ 3rÈq-+ìqrFÌq-ár+ÌÊfi Èfr-l-àS someúfug or oúer st cards
go rarr{u_9fuE6+f65fr ? {rFfi or ,Èn to play
!f.dt-q-íÃt somewhere ot other .m.r,i ro cüat
{tüs fr=Efr r <cÉ Èì qïÌ E_ÉÊfer +rt Êeregü6r Èdì{R Èfl Ío meeÍ n€ ground
{q€.E ? gr.ri ro a1t, conrerse q@Xto lie down
à{r+ f{nrfr SÈdï|tuqfr .qfàqrfr Èàïrr gjh;r È+6sÈìwÈàg- trrqÃq pÍogÍamme Í4<87 to fall sieep
+1S È y+r q61r-tm.rqr @ ì a woÍd maÌking information se<rfr úe lrome of a man's
rmRè6Ê q 3lfu€-rràô parents-in-Iaw
gathered elseivhere
ììffiiiïr
T* qqr"-"tT-r4rf.*qF61açqfdËrn f.r rì rììíq nìlnn 'ri to try R invitation
qm qnmq g < t
ictè ÍúerefoÍe q\zrì dÍfficulg awkwaÍd
{rfi-{ *frqì 6nirq 16Ìo fr r rft small child nÌrrr{ ro púone
ÍÈÈi on fooÍ q#t decìded
ìrqm sfi-{€rM ErE(ì |
{€ sq fo board a bus {ír flìrsd Ío trnd ouú
{É-{ dcr€cÈ"rr{ú6fs ? cr.{ the second largest city of the qrü qr31fo find ouÍ
ìvn r +ìÊrvrrqi rÈfu t*En Èft +ffi rqr qrÊ;bïì reqeÈ*fì Kathmandu valley l< OK then?
 ìTqÌ IAA rtì\r tfus evenrng N(,tcn*r A populaÍ picnicking spot in the south of the Katbmandu
yt1 to reach, arrive üf<iq 6or" Vllley wherethereare botanicalgardens.
qiì3;rr úings to eaú;food Farel to becomeangry +' A beautyspotto the noÍtheastof Kathmandu.
+fv ago

ÈÌfl iq adàtu
Rajiv Tomonow's our day off, isn,t it? ffi arem{èõr 6Ì |
Keshay Yes. Tomorrow is Saturday, you know! Saturday is a day
off for every office. Won,t you take úe day off, or what?
Rajiv I certainly will, you know! How do you usually spend a
day off? Do you sleep all day?
Keshav I do not sleepall day. Life isn't that long! I usually spend
my days off doing something or other or going somewhere
or other. Sometimes I meet up with some office friends
and go out. This moming I talked to Daulatii. He savs
úere is just such a programme tomorrow too.
Rajiv Where is tomorrow's programrne úen?
Keshav He saysthey will go to Godavar.i.*,
Rajiv Will you go too?
Keshav I shâll try. My wife says she will go to úe market
tomorrow morning. So tomorrorü moming I will stay at busnetwo*map,Nepal
Sãlhà
home and look after the children.
Rajiv Will your friends go on foot? It's quite far; ish'r it?
Keshav Yes, it is rather far. They say they will go by bus.
Apparently buses for Godavari go every hour, via patan. Grammar
Rajiv What will they do when they have reached Godavari?
Keshav They say úey will take some food from here. A few weeks
62 Two verbs with the same subject: thê -q{
ago we took a picnic to Sundarijal too.'r, When we reached
participle
Sundarijal we sat on the riverbank and ate and enioved ln English, if a sentenceoÍ a part of a sentence(a clause) contains two
ourselves. Some friends sat in úe shade of a tre; and verbs performed by the same person, both of the verbs take tlrc sarne
played cards or chatted. Some fiiends lay down on the tense and the word 'and' is used to link tltem, e.g. I came and (I) sat
ground and went to sleep.Thafs how it is. Will you go to down, I ate the rice and wert out In Nepali, the fiÍst of the two verbs
Godavari tomorrow too? almost alìvays takes a special form (called the 'conjunctive participle'),
Rajiv Tomorrow morning we are invited to my inJaws, house. und the üteral translation of the same sentencesin Nepali becomes
So it's difficút. At about what time will thev leave? having come in I sat down and having eaten the Íìce I went out
Keshav Thar has not been decided yet. This evening I.ll phone A participle is a form of a verb úat may be used adjectivally (to
Daulatji and find out. dcscribe nouns) or as one pa.rt of a verb phrase il certain tenses.
Rajiv When you find out please phone me too, OK? I'll be at Nepali has a variety of different participles, each with a different
home this evening. cnding and its own technical name. In this book, eâch paÍiciple will
Keshav Sure. I'll phone you this evening.But now it's late. Today be referred to by the ending that distinguishes it ftom all the others.
isn't a day ofï. úe boss will get angry and teli us off.
 The conjunctive participle of a Nepali verb is most commonly
rsô çqrdì{ EÈT\re.r à{Í qrà t He satnear the window and
formed by taking its past tense base and adding the ending -g{
-era ate a banana.
to it. Therefore, we will call it the '-era participle':
{ ':r+ì gm *q{ dcr€{ÍâfE;€ r I shall wash his clothes and
Vetu Pasttensebase +n pmiciple give them to you.
,t1 TR- .È{ having done lü-uÌffiàqrfrqs{qr qrc{ qd Yesterday Ki shanji came
t6 5 'l Ais- fô"< having walkd fr<g-rrf+ r into ow shop and bought a
íÈ- Ê\'t -avà pair of shoes-
having taken
qÌ1 rT- Ìrg{ having gone c'i-õ qq rr\r{{rKqrfiqà | They went m Khumbu and
ff_ 3nS{ hauing conre cümbed Mount Everest.
F{ ì{- }TC{ hauing fuune,
ì|qT,the -era participle of Ë1 Ío be is also usedto meanvia.'
hauingfun'
Note *The baseof Ét is alwaysì{- for a participle. FÌ- is never used r* Ê+qrcÈd ìT\-{qì=E t mat flight goes via Delhi.
as the basefor a participle. {-Ë€{Ì {g ÈìT{r ìÌC{ fs-qrd ÍÈ t TheiÍ buswent to
Kathmanduvia Pokhara.
The -era participle refers to an action that takes place before tIrc
action of the main verb - that is, the final verb - of the sentence.But
otherthan thât it doesnot really havea tenseof its own; the tenseof ül The nêportedspeech-markerì
tlìe sentenceis the tense that is given by the verb at úe end. ï can only be used as an appendage to a sentence, and never on its
Therefore,the action describedby úe -era participle can be in any own. When it is added to úe end of a statement, the word ì indicates
tense:past,presentor future: lhüt the person speaking has been told what s/he has just said by
Nepali English lumeone else. It is usually possible to asceÍtain who oÍ what the
q qrç{ {È | I came and sat down. murce of the information is, but sometimes it is left quite vague, just
q 3nq{ iRE I I come and sit down. ur in English one reports a rumour by begirning 'I hear that... ' or
qrÌfr qrqr q*o r I shall come and sit down 'they say that... '
tomonow. lf someonesays:
t trm cr\r{ arflq1rrE I I ate riçe and went out. tcfffiÉMìTÌfiiiltfrì t Your son is hungry
q rrm qrç< qrflË<qro r I eat rice and go out, (+ reported sPeech-marker)
-
Èfu r vmerç<*116<
vr;q r Tomonow I shall eat rice
thc Dresenceof dgTíiFÌ SfrT vour son ln the sentence means that the
and go out.
pcrson speaking has probúly been told by your son that he is hungry,
In the English sentences, both verbs are in the sâme tense; in úe in which case the sentence could be translated your son says he's
Nepali versions only the main final verb has a tense. The subiect of hungry, Houtevel it could also mean that someone else has informed
the Nepali senrenceis usua.llysrated at úe very beginning of ttre the speakerof this fact: one can only be sure if one knows the context
sentence, as in thes€ examples, but sometimes it is not mentioned in which the statement is made.
until after the -era participle:
Similady,a sentence suchas:
r{raqrq< q qrÈ{qFE t Having eaten rice I go out. 3nq 3Ìfuq EÍà{ ì | (He) won't go to the office
The -era participle is formed in exactly the sÍrmeway, no matter what today (+ rcpofied
or who the subject of the sentence is: the level of politeness is speech-marker)
indicated by the main verb of the senrence.lf úe main verb is
tÍansitive and in a past tense, úe subject must take -à. could mean he says he won't go to the office today or she says he
won't go to the office today oÍ they say he won't go to the office
Íoday. Wiúout kno\Ã/ing the context in which the statement is made
you really cannot choose between tlese translations. E tg A chanceencounterin Darjeeling
This kind of confusion should not occur during a conversation! Srrbiris a residentof Da{eeling,and Asheshlives in Kathmandu.
because úe meaning is always clear in its context. Sometimes, Sorìe months ago the two men met while Subir was visiting
however, a speaker will add ì to the end of a statement in order to Kuthmandu.Now Subir is surprisedto meetAsheshunexpectedlyin
disown responsibility for its truú or falsify. The following statements l)urjceling.
suggest that the speaker has heard the news s/he reports on the radio. rr.iIJ Tà dw€ {Èi + rri flq;Ì, r aqliaf i;'rs: q 6aa cr t{ : ïcfif,.
or has read úem in a newspaper: <rfrFrí.qrffiïÍ {-Sqmf+ ++rS r
srrqcfftd€qì | They say it will notnin today.
qdrq ffi, t q'dËKÈfuqú+ì ++ç<eiur ãÌrìrrqrnrt rrÈq rfròr
ïTtir+ì eyqfr +rE ìcF{ qnÍ6 ì I The Inüan president comei qrq cfì q ìcrdqr a€ nrq {i fqq Íì r
to Nepal today, I hear. {l.ft{ qFc6FdqqE'o <rffi-f,'qÌ t tfu*n vfì ËÈo1 r
If someone said someúing but you did not hear what they said, you JÌÌq ,ffi { uì{l{F qÈlro1r< @ oèr 3rrqÌqqqrk r6ì"bì
miút wish to ask someoneelsewhat was said.A quick way of doing r,H sÈ.Ìt{à à€ Ef ìì'ÌÌ, È rlÌ{r srf{ È6 +i rnÌ rw<
this is simply to say: r.É T@s.rfrÈèq r<qqrRufà çfi-{T Tdc.õàq r
What wassaid? çfr{ é1.iclÈfl .ir+{rTdÍfr6- o1.r+ +rarnìr rar=o1
tffi1 'ìlqqrfq
qrfr qfr ìe dnffi srçdr, Èfi r m qrlEfr rÌffi trq È
EXERCISE 3Í ConveÍ the following pairs of sentences into one
BÌ? q;T 16lq I
sentenceby changing the first verb into úe -era paÍiciple.
JruFÍ ìËA *ft nf **<rg* g r+@ e*Ê <nF.r+rqìÌÌe €ÈqrÌ
Example q rqrqár, iú ffr ri úc r-ffiÈ,=
+â Ë r*pqr ffiq
q q{ SF€ | a4qqfS q q'TTrqrrE | = q q( Trq{ ìqTqIìq.l;6 |
frRfu go1 t+,:rresâ-+ìqfuq tcc È r
I shallgo home. After that I shalleat. I shattgo home and àat.
1 q frq1sq;s| e+scfuq dqÉirâ fuft ìc6 r s"nïTô-{F ììÌôèfu 1r{qrF{ qí
qFq ?qÌüt frìq ?

i q Èqr< mâìqdcfffi ìFq r 3rÈc fr, òÈÈew=q rcrq qsmq<rÈoì r<fÌT{r r{qrqrqï
ì çfi-Ësf{{rq td;81 resqcfbdqrw qrsq r sffis€rqqq {T@Èüfi-{sà ìsfi{€ {€ qÈ{rqEq.{{Í
v fr àâ e+-qqrò rer6!:iÌ-fr ffi r qqq r$qWqÌÊwaqrâ.nffi r
k q3rfurqrro tqffirmÈ{r€ | fffr{ &+ \irÌ ocÉàr3r+ffÉ qìRq ÈÈqqEq Ëì qrra-or f++à
( E{Ì {rrr sEì{fr t+{Ì Èt Eç+ì qrqr qsrrqì r qrfEsfï. çfrrôqfrs r
EXERCISE
32 Construct
3rfrq q tqìi' q-qrã+qratTÉ-fi hq'' r-qq +r'"Ê frs' fi E rlcf$
sentences
úat tell someone
to do two
things, one after úe oúer, along úe following ünes: rm qii 61q;6;r
<qrqI ìTrdr{|{ I (f, = ïfi-i R qFned firq qiq {È ÍÈffi. e{fr q o.ir È{rrfi{qr {È{
ffiÉr{r+qrq{gcId{ r
you / eatrice / sleep You please eat the rice
vrfi-{FÈrrrrsÈfeÌqrqfrïqfoq{vtìú tÈq<qfìeào1ì rar
and go to sleep.
àEffi 3ÌÊq$Ìròs rq aqriõrrqfr qrfqsq qç<dcrffi
lr+ïerà@,9< ?.fr 4rà iqfi-fi frlì {Èc+r g.o r
r Íafr r q' fl11 +rq rÍt
rí]'F{ ÊqqrtÊfierc{ qrs{d\q ( rÈô{dr<à{ |
1 aqrÈ 7ìft!ì €q 7q{ ïrq
r ffirg+eftì.rq "
S-ô1 ìrÈ, fqqr ffi rrfr rkqr ïqÈõ{ qrüe r3{il{ trà, "ffi
r acr€r à tddd Tõ{rïongteq 1ìqrÈfu1r o,vrçfr,qN,aqwR I
r Íàftr q.sqc.{rì+{Ì,{rs{ -
{ dqì€/ Srqrqm/Èilí+ÌT{qr sq
 vmfi to be surytrised g{ úoopen Arhesh Yes, they will go to Loretto College. I hear the school is
qfuq last, frndl extremely good. WÏen we got to know that we put úem in
Q Ío see
*nr{vi to move úouse grlrft wlicá ? úat school. They will study there for two months. AfteÌ
íq what? qfiw exíxemely two months we will Ìetum to Kathmandu.
sq foÍest rF< to put place llublr You did the right úing. Are you going to wâlk to the
<'I ur conservation rf+ up, above EverestHotel now? It's a long way up, you know, and it's
Èï-Íq depaÍtment eqiã steep,uphill srcep roo.
uq to Ìeave, quit 1à€{ï fo comeouf Afh€sh I forgot and I came out of the house wiúout any money.
qscrlq úr's tme firlal ro end That's why I'm walking. Where are you going?
frFà youngest u,ú that one, over there
Subir My offrce work finished at 5 o'clock, and I was sitting in
È e.ldesr -qÈ asfor
fi,n to begin to be, End towards that teashopover there, chatting wiú my friends. I'll go
g{reÌ indrecÍ
wÍà progress ìqrcd Ío súow home in a little while. My houseis in úe samedirection,
ra úere (emphasized form of em ) you know. But this path is ratherindirect. I'll comea little
T7 to circle, wandeÍ
qq to study qr.I üÍectly way up with you andshowyou anotherpath,no?That path
cr< memory ffi slowly, gently goesstraightto the hotel without any diversions.
rnRiì second eldesr ffi it's oyer Ash€sh But pleasedriú youÍ tea slorvly and then come, won't
Ê{ì Ío ôrget ffi cold you?There'sno hurry.
d-ô Èq ro swr'm 3{ì{ 1aÍeness Subir Forgetit,* the tea's gonecold. I'll come without drinking
ffiq s.fopp erqfi súopkeeper thetea.It's 6 o'clocknow,it's late.My wife will be cross.
Here, shopkeeper,I'm off, goodbye.
Subir Oho! Wïat are you doing here? I was surprised to see you, *
Note ÈrÌ is a colloquial expressionmeaning that'soveÍ anddone
you know! Have you moved to Dadeeling or what? with, or that's not somethingthatneeddetainusfuÍheL
Ashesh No, I've been working in the Forest Conservation
Depadment since one week ago. Last year too I wâs doing
the same kind of work in Nepal, you know.
Subir And how long will you stay in Darjeeling? AÌe úe family
Grammar
with you too? O4 The continuous telses in -àE
Ashesh My wife and daughters are with me but this time we came
The continuous presenÍ tense refers to actions tlìat arc occurring even
without our sons. The younger son is 13 years old now, the
us the verb is being stated, and is the exact equivalent of English verb
eldeÍ is just 14. If they don't go to school they won't make phrasessuch as l am going, they are watching, we are eating. JusÍ as
progress.So úey are studying Lhere.
in English, the tensecan also be used to talk about the future, so long
Subir Yes, you have tbree daughters, now I remember. The
us someúing else in the sentence makes this clear: I am going
youngest is called Lakshmi and the eldest Sarasvaú, is that
lomoÍÍow, we are eaüng out next Sunday. This tense of a verb
not right? But what is the rniddle daughter's name? I have
consists of a word that is the Nepali equi\alent oï going / watchiitg /
forgotten.
catrng, followed by the appÍopriate form of@ is or arc. To form the
Ashesh The middle daughter's name is Radhika. Now Lakshmi and
Íirst word, the ending -à is added to the present tense base of the veÍb.
Radhika are swimming at the Everest Hotel. Sarasvaú and
my wife are shopping in the market. The schools open from ll the baseends in a vowel, üis vowel must be nasalized.The ending
tomorrow, you know, today is the last day of the holiday. is invariable: that is, it is always the same no matter what oÍ who the
Subir Which school will úey go to from tomorrow? Loretto rubject of the verb may be. 6 is úe verb that must change according
Collese? l() number, gender and level of politeness.
 tigarnu to do fuorntically, the negativeform of úese tensesshouldbe createdby
m+-ào = rfE 6 I an doing ch|]lgingE to Èï, firà to fuç<, andsoon. But in reâl life theseforms
ërfr,Arfi-{€ rr{+-<6t we aÍe doing ltt vcry rarely used. For instance.if someoneasks: <crq õrc tri
-l.-È

ë rrí.+-st11 -rs - you arc doing

fr{frTrEõ lürÍt'l ureyou workingz andin fâct you-a.resimply readinga book,
\*'id = TK 6t you are doing
ióúr unswershouldbe alongthe lines of {rt,
q fddr< ra.ÈE No, r rn
õ, qr,FTr(m.) \ *- s P = rI{ E he is doing
s, qÌ, a{t (t) rfq ft úlng a book.
\* -18 = sheis doing
---ê c--Â
s q t . t q i t . ^r ( 1^Ì ( m .) .q +-5P1 = rf{ 6{ he is doing ïtrott is a specializedcontinuouspresentform ofEt Is. This is usedto
çfr,firfr,Êafrrrt
II\*-5181 -r!.-: sheis doing lly thütsomethingexistsin a paÍicular place,contraryto a listener's
qr. qr. .Jitgà etc. = rf< Eq
\r-<81 they ate doing tlp€ctations,or to stateor emphasizethe fact of its existenceplainly.
h occursonly in the singularform oà o:
ElT jãnu Ío Ao
q qr +'+ -è o = q lq t2 I An polns
crÍÌí{, ftqTrqr ËrÈ q{ I'à o t Nter all, we do have a house
ãrfÌ. Fr+f6 -. s.S = qf q t9r Pokhara.
we aÍe gotng
d w +'+ -Èog = ír{cr€ïqr Ê{qrilq{ 6à E Íì r Thereis an airpon in
frr{Ì,fdmqs q t+ + - q !9 1 = qrq úf you are going Kathmandu,you know!
S, ?rt,aqÌ (m.) q r+ " + -Èo = qSY heis goins
s, fl, aqÌ (f.) q T + + -< E = qfq6 sheis Boing I!(ERCISE 3íl Change úe tense of the verb in úe following
sír, r.{.tr, t(|. (m.) w+]+ ,.àpq = vsPl heissoins Fntcncesinto the contiruous present:
çfr,ffi,ffi111 qT+ + -< TFf = qls | ffir{-*een rq1ç-1e2
qr. qr, s.llE- €(c. = qfc te1 they arc going
r ìTÏETõõ|E\68 I
I q{r{<w;q I
Tlte conünuous past tense is used to describe what was achrally going
r s4-{sffi wqr âq r
on at a particular time, and is the exâct equivalent Of English verb
r/ rd s erô f{qìk$ ìGE I
phrases such x I was goíng, they were watching. we were eaüng.lt
is formed by adding úe invariable ending -à to úe presenttensebase IXERCISE 34 Change úe tense of the verb in the following
of a verb to cÍeat€ the Nepali for gotag / watching / eating, jvst as in tcnlencesinto the continuouspast,andmakeany otherchangesto the
the continuous present tense. Instead of ending with E, however, the $nlencesúat thusbecomenecessary:
verb phrase must end with the Êf- form of úe past tense of "
ë1, r rEràfirqnqeqrd r
meaning was or were. Wiú High pronouns, these tenses end wiú
r êr*ìaf+-G'q-e-rtt
*Ë;6 in the present and €{Ë;uÈ in the past.
r ìÈ qrqrfrTrsrffi r
r efi-esèâ.*.Èr
Continuouspresent I ç+rìcrfr+ràrr{rrÌt
qrrr{I*6s fi-oinsào1 r Ourfriendsarcsinginga song.
cÈ.ft+F€rcroqëÈ r YoungeÍ sisteÍis Íeaditg out ú Which one? This onet The uses of -qG
ap@m.
3Ìrcrirqrqn c{ Ë ËgÇ-EI Mother is looking at the The word srQ is frequentlyaddedto adjectives,or to words suchas
newspapeL fr, eÌ, 1n to replacea noun. In this contextit can be understoodto
Continuouspast meanone:
qr{r€r*{€ãír.r€fEq r Our friends weÍejoking. fiffià thetall one ëìEÍTQ that one
sÈ.ftT-qr.rëÊrtr ïffi the Íedone qlqì lÉ ws one
Youngersister was
performingpuja. ?íq I 18. wrucn one!
3rgrfu{rq-6rÈàËt€d I Mother wasmaking tea.
 acrt+Ìq{ffiqrÈÈ rÈq<s<à Whichoneis your house?My ht pt'uctice, affirmative forms almost âhvays take the -g{ ending,
qrqì-qrÈ Èi r houseis that tall one whllc rrcgativeÍorms most usually take the -ÈeÍ'{ ending. Because
over there. tní is the longest of the three possible endings, it is emphatic.
( ltnrklcr the differences between the following pafusof sentences:
q{.ìEr*ÊÊr"qià?(dqrÊ Which one did you buyT
FFí I I boughtthe cheapone. r qld qrg{ {rÈ{TrE I I atearÌdwentouí
The secondusageof aíl is contrastive.Here it meansas for
t fld ïqrldï qrRï TrEI I wentorlt withouthauingeaten
trrô *qcrqo q=s l<f€qGqq I go n Rato Bangala School. ï'hc Íiìrm endingin -i is lesscommonlyused,thoughit is obligatory
qF|ë*r,3Ìf5qsTtË-.EI As fu elder bother, @e) does lRccrlainidiomaticexpressions:
not go to schooL he goes to ícÍtürrïÈâËÈ{| I sinply haveto neet you
the ofÍice. ('havingnot metyou it will
Èqì"òqrü{ò,.ìM+{r<ò r This man is a Brahmin, but notbeall dght').
that one is a Newar. qfr !'Ìffi fficÍ r,rÊ qq Èq I My daughtersimply hasto
go to the cinema(li:terally,
66 Other Íorms of the coniunctive participle if my daughterdoesnotgo
to the cinematheïeis no
There are two other forms of conjunctive participle which mean
happiness).
much the same as, but are used less fÌequently than the -q{ participle.
!ÍFÌ q-{ ò{ {Erâ, .rà ïÈ fa{ Dasaincamebeatingthe
These forms end in -Ê -i and -È+c -Ìkana:
ffi t drum, Dasainleft, having
given us debtsto beaÍ.*
Veú cl. ota. 1 cj.W.2 cj.ptc.3
rFI to do rf{{ ÌÉÌ Notc * A proverb.ào qqÍg..to play a drurn; ìmrâ is from the verb
doing, having done
c:- ìr,rgc, which is the causativeof dst ro carry Dasainis Nepal's
tË s.l to walk
to take
t ÉE' r EEl
tqF
F**
Ìir*F;r
walkin!, Iìaving walkd
taking, having taken n'rostimpoÍant annualHindu fesúval.
gFt to 80 qc{ Eoing, having gone Incidentally,Nepali poetsareblessedby this wealthof choice,which
to be rTs{ !rid{ being, having becone nrokesit mucheasierfor them to adjustthe numberof beatsin a line
0f verse.
The negative forms of all participles are formed simply by adding the rl{1 oìlTderqF {rd:ìq( ìíRÍ l!|FE{ | My cúi.l&er washtheir
prefix ï- na- to the affimative form.
un <tÌ€'+c rrrd qÌt #fi Ëà{ t handsbefoÍe they eat.It's
not good to eat without
cJ.ptc. I cj.ptc.2 cj.ptc.3 washingyour hands.
iFfa{ ïI1^ 4!p not doing. not having done fWc'{ SfEï li{ËÊdï s@ cF{ she takesa showerbefore
.ÍrE5r <Fï 7IdÈ1{,4 not walking. nor having watked shegoesto bed. Shenever
.r tÌq'
$Gqf
fl1g +l4rr+4 not taking, not having ta*en goesto bed without
rïrç{ ï,T1 +1Tï6í not going, not havingEone showeringfr$t.
iïq{ ï1{{ íYliffi ap1}d;g, 2ot having become
EXERCISE 35 Construct sentencesthat state thât each of the
pcoplein column 1 performedeachof úe verbsin column 3 wìthout
pcrforming the verb in column 2, úus producing 12 different
tcntences:
 I 2 3
emrÚÌrqs ìtí ( 9 t.l or sons
Bmthers SistÊÍsor daughters
Ìfr qrqr qÈq(qrT d iâ eldest
ffi qrffi qrt{fr secondeldest
{È qTkô sri{fr tltird eldest
{ÈfrÈfr ÌTÍÈô rrt{trr fourtheldest
q fFd {'r;ô youngest

67 ExplessionsoÍ age ThcseteÍns areprimarily adjectives:

There are several ways in which a person's age is expressedin +è È drrr àâ q{rrq Êd{Eïrrcqr My eldestson stayeilin
Nepâli. The most straightforwardis simply to define a person'sage d,FÌ t BiÍafrtagarfoÍ someyears.
H 3efr ttÈô bÌffi f4q1qfr 1 yss1el4sy hissecond
usrngü :
daughtcrwasmanied.
ràoffivì<áv ef {1 My son'sageis 20 years. aqr{ qq-<r fr{ Ef ìrâ g{úto r You are úree yearsolder
cqq-à S{rfr dìr rtffi Ef È r Sanjay'sfattw's ageis B0years. thânme.
More commonly,however,a personis describedasbeing ofa certain
Alúough wà is usedto meanolder or seniorto.bolt 5p6l416 crì
age,usingthe possessive-d :
mall canbe usedto Ínea'lyoungeroÍ junior to.
Èfr ìâ aÌfr qrt{ ïffr ËÌ r My eldestdaughteris ffi qìr<r fi-{ fli iFF6ì EÌ | YoumetÌre yearsyounger
frfi qr.sr fi-{ af {fì 6ì r thannE.
qqrfrq^+i+ì€'Ë"ffi ,tilff|,"'lÍ,,0
^o -, Íf;gr andÈat areoften usedratherlüe nicknamesfor children.rfiã6l
and+t!ô youngest can also be used to addÍessor refer to young
In all of úe above examples, the veÍb at the end of thè sentence is
childrenwhosenamesone doesnot knolü:
equally likely to be the past tense rtò, indicating that this is the age
that has been attained or reached by the person concemed: grr;ô, q+fu;r+er+r* r Hey giÍL, come here a minuE !
g ftF6r, fïqra{rg ! Hey boy, bring the tea!
ÌìsMvÈ<fiqafràr
cqq-+ìq+rÈqÈ<q€sf rrd r
ÈôÈ&aÌfrErqsEffrìr€r
qqrfr{a$nÌlrEr Èt 4ffisçqffisaffirl-qq 1

68 Further relationship terms

The various offspring of a family eachhas a title that indicatesthe
relative statusin terms of age. As averagefamily size decreases,
some of tlese titles are falling into disuse,but five are still qúte
cotÌmon:
 E tg out shopping

&l II
gl
'ì
4+{ =
'ì
.+ Anjali and her younger sister have gone to the vegetable maÍket to
buy food for the evening meal. Dil Búadur, who has a stall at úe
market, sells them some of the items they need.

o
-r
- er6fi rrà r
Èd+qr<{ tqÈÈârffiridÉàqr@r
rqï ecrrfrvrto t "

3
qt
fq-d*qrg{ crí*6 Èâ, ÊdïqrËà r * ac+rfr-wwfr Íì rqtdÈ+
t+ffiac*rt
qrgdErqtÍàòt
çfrqr qr*6 r

kd*qrg< d.rà qg ffi qro $rt 6 6 R :ng ffi o

tFrqÌÈracÉdrt+.dq{qr@r
F trqGffiúofrr
o
-

+ In this unit you will learn

kq{dE( rrò q{ ffi úsì m 'Me cfr âà o rgr*rtq fd{ü6
Èfrt
{rffifi-{ffiÌròqtÊ1fr{rqrqor
. how to discussthe prices
and availabilityof vaÍious È{+qÌg{ srffiEq{FrqÌr
foods srqô ç+ffi@qr<rffivmgor+ì+fr{r
. how to declaÍe neêdsand
wants
fc<*qrg{ g6È qÍ-q{ffi rdqrffi ofà qr@ r Arúali How much are the potâtoes?
q-qfr qdTsrm'ìÊ1QqlffiqSs1 qq1ErqcÊ{sr Dll Bahadur These red potatoesare eight rupees a kilo, those
Èr e-qr qÈ, ràq r* ei-+rfr-qfi{ È frt qrrq r Ercd qrÊr r*ï white potatoesare six rupeesa kilo. Which kind of
qcdqr qr1È\ r potatoeswould you like?
Aqlali Well, which one tastesgood?
qÊoq{ r
Dll Bahadur They say the red potatoesare tasty, but úe white
rcq qQrql ttgcf{ qAÌcrËï rqrs ffiqr crt.6 1çaqÌnor vfr onesare fine as well. Which will you take,sister?
qFE"6| Aqlali Give us threekilos of red potatoes.Do you haveany
onions?
6;o twqrfrsàw-d rsÍàrrà ? Dll Bahadur Yes.Tenrupeesa kilo.
ç+ fuc, q Êffs fi.i 1q, í{qfá'q {ffi ìrô r
rq q q Q I q ( .
Aqlâli Give me onekiìo. How much areúe mustardgreens
qÈ{ vrì *e qrìe tsrnlï 6 ? per bunch?
Ède-{g< 5. ;fr qqql 615q1íÌ awffi qqifi qlf6Èï " Dll Dahadur Five rupeesa bunch.How much do you want?
Aqlali Justgive me onebunch.It's a bit expensive. Do you
€ srf(iÈïr+rwcrlrfr { r haverice and lentils too?
ÈcÍ*qlg{ 6d {dÈ +rr r và ffiEsqr€ qqifr q-{ cd, òí{ ?
Dll Bahadur No, I don't. This is a vegetableshop,you know!
aqrffiÊÈqfirffi*rrà< I Pleasego to anoúer shopfor rice and lentils.
ffi r qns, ar qr* rwr qrqttt 3ìÌE mfi6s o1 r Aqlali And meat?
s;Nfiròqnrqì€qr DII Bahadur You can't get meathereeither.You can get meatin
Khichapokhari.You can get fish theretoo.
|Ë1 Ío be wanted, needed qK meat AnJâli All right. \Ve'll go úere now. How much do I owe
dafifr yegefables fir+rffi Klrclrapoklrari you?
crçI to be available (an area of Kathmandu) Dll Bahadur One moment, I'll add it up. Right, it comes to 39
latuc rype,kind qrortrsú mpees,
rd cúeap Ílxra'fi to addup,calculats Ar{sli I haveonly a 100rupeenote. Do you havechange?
q\ potato(es) Ìa nore (of cunency) Dll Bahadur Yes, úat's not â problem.But don't you want any
a1q price nFFl change chilli peppersl
ccrs onior(s) qrecr problem
Aqlali No, we don't. This is enoughfor today.
rrd mustard ffi chillipepper(s) Dll Bahadur What a strangething! All Nepalis like chilli, don't
ffq Sreens qfr tfusmucú
3rriâ strange
they?Don't you like spicyfood?
Xa bunch we do, but nowadayswe have some English
Aqlall Yes
aÍqq uncooked rice frì spr'ry
sÌ{ .lenü.ls trrtn nowadays friends at our house.They don't like spicy food at
all.

Anjali Shopkeeper,hello!
Dil Bahadur Hello sister.What do you want? Grammar
AÌ\iali Arc vegetablesavailablehere?
Dil Bahadur Yes úey are, sister,why wouldn't they be?This is a 00 Âleeded and availablei qrÊ{ and crËt
vegetableshop,you know! In my shopeverykind of The passive verbs tIÍfiï to be obtained/be availabte md qrfft ro be
vegetableis availablecheaply. oôcdedlbe wantedbelong to â category of verbs called 'i-stem veós'
becausea short i vowel (O is addedto the veÍb baseto createtìem. ss qrFrrqrt ffir ça*fi qrtà r A healthypeÍsonhas
It is a featureof Nepali, andoúer relatedlanguages,that verbs such no needof
absolutely
as to want, neeü get aÍe expressedin passiveterms: raúer than 1 medicine.
teed, Nepali-speakerssay is necessaryto/foÍ ne; insteadof f got, qr[T
they will often say wasobtainedta/foÍ me. The thing that is wanted,
neededor obtainedis madethe subjectof the passiveverb, while the Thepassiveverb qT{f,rrcans to be obtaineübeavailable,andit is the
wanter,neederoÍ obtainerbecomesits indirect object,ma*ed by the paosiveform of the v srbqq b get/obtain Its mostcommonusehas
postposition-{rÊ. the senseof to be available:
q Èâ, +d qrq crE ?T{Ì $ãà{ €1 Hey elder sister,is lodging
"ri€
qTfq ro be needed/ wanad is the passiveform
of the verb qr(í ,o availablehere sir,go and
wisú.{f{;ï is usedmostly with otherverbï I wish to leave,I want tí) askover there.
leamEngüsh(seeGrammar ll0), whereasïrfu{ is usedwhensome ìqmqr rrâqtrr w{à{í{{riì+ì Yoü cannot getbeefin Nepal,
Íárngis neededor wanted.
The habitualpresenttenseof qTk is usedto denoteneedsthat âre Sometimesthe active and the passiveform of the verb are equally
regularor húitual: 0ppropriate.For instance,if you wish to inform someonethât you
Ê-.*t* à qrtro r Whatdo peopleneedin lífe? rcceived the letter they sent you, you can choose between the
T@ following:
c]-.EáF-n?cfíÍ qrlúE I peopleneedwateÍ.
rrÈ6tcrâ rs à vrl6o ?
qfrìàffifffifficÍEl I Íeceived yoü letteÍ the
What elsedo peopteneed?
qÌ;ÈF-flÊ €lì people alsoneed.food. otha day.
T{T ct{ stÈ6 |
qkac|-ffifficrrdr YoüÍ letteÍ was Íeceìved the
ffi{F-drâàïrle6? Whatdo sick peopleneed.? other day.
ffies-eÊqffirqrlesr Sickpeopleneedmeilicine.
To express-
the senseI want something,Nepali usesthe simplepast If thepassiveform is used,it is normal to leaveout a mentionof who
tenseqTÈà, e.g.: rcceivedthe letter. This will be understoodto be the personspeaking
unlessit is statedoúerwise.
q-{ÉffiqrR+l I want sugn.
ss-{ÊÈ{rqrH r aboutDialogue19:
EXERCISE3ô Answerúe followingquestions
He wantsnoney.
Such sentencesdenote a need or desire that is very much in the r Èq {{rc<ftÌq€qqra-c*rfrcrí-6 r
preserÍ, despite the pasÍ tense of the veú. The person who is r <ròqr-*àErq+fr È r
speakingconsidersthat this needor desirearoseimmediatelvbefore r *fràergà<rrfrt
s/hegaveutteranceto it. v Êq +{r<<aÈ q{drì'Íqrscr{.E?
r rrRI{BÌ crí;Er ?
The negativeform erftà;t is grammaticallyin the presenttense,but ( {sdFÍr{ <[.Ìr'ïÍ qrrË.E FFfllËq{ '
it is usedas the negativeform o1 6sdì qrÈ-E alr6 qfm to meanrs
not wantedor is not needed:
q Èâ, dsr{qr€ ffi qrftqì ?qÈ, Hey elder sister,do you want
qfQ<{ | somesusar?No I don't.
70 Food vocabulary qrwrâftffiààqiF{fr t Whatthingsdoyouneed
for taday?
ila{rt Vegetables sqTT Fruits
fl{ potato 3rFqÌ gltava EXEBCISE 37 Create ten sentencesusing úe elementsbelow,
cucumber 'f le mango first stâting whether people need úe nouns üsted in the middle
{rsô.sõr*ìfr caulifloweÍ ìrrfít ume column,andúen wheúer buffaloes(dfr{s) needúe samethings:
cabbage +{ | Dmana qt'ÈAa-q1È crfr I l l É .u Ora-----aiì-
-----c-
l l Qc "l
+dìì.sr tornato liqqr rcmon rì{t{s.{rr€
chickpea gn:f{lr onnge
{|{r
ElÌlT
tiÍsErK (fodder)
omon .qls appE
5tÌÌ puÍtpkin fareÍr(educadon)
raüsh qN Meat ÌqIaÌ (eÌecmciry)
{rTdÌfaqï okra lqrrfrrrg cfucken
rleat
qFÌ greeas(of severalvarieties) qfrd qrq goat meat
ffi beans <qÈrq butra1o
Íleat
{gc*Ì rq pig mear
Other foods
qqI{ chutuey 3T*{T gnger
millet tr€Ì{r chilli
fus ghee qTqìÍ rice
(urrcooked)
<IìT lentils cQl . yoghuÍt
e88 ranrç soybean
ì{lÌÍ tce (cooked) coÍrr"maize
qTSt frsh qq;t garüc
buttÊÍ

71 Using -crÈinstead of -+ÌqrÊr

Although the principal useof -qr€ is asan ,objert-marker,,it is often
interchangeablewith the postposiúon-* eirÊrfor:
1-cÌd'fltT or cq lq fQ IoÍ IatheI
ç{qÈ.TràdrFr or ç+ qffi for a month
Ìì{rft or +rqf E IoI me

fr*ÈfrÌfrqrcmÉÈr Thisgift is for my moúet

gS|qÉ I .For[.rsáa(dedicationon the
title pageof a book of
poems).
 treO n placeto stayin Kathmandu
l)ipú and Múesh have both come to Kathmandu to study at
'lÌichandraCollege.Their first needwasto fird placesto stay.They
comoarehow eachhasfaredin the searchfor accommodation.

ri 1+ II
3l
,(nl,
-
ol.
.-+/
o at+
3o
-oi
çl

oo
4'1
â]
.-ìl
.
3l
.l

3
@
âF{ aqÉàÈ{r qfu+Éqcls_fi{4lt
q-{n €, qmi rqflq,rÈ rrÈ rs<{traÈ{qrfr qrìÌ +ÌarqrtÈ tdqÉà
Íìt
rfì ffr+ rqrÊ Es <rà qà rq qr.rqff{qr Çrg41mffi eq tvaà
I! wGfutd{.< fràq qiqR.qrcFFo rràs Fqrtqreì àfu.o t
qÈ{r :È$,Èrnt+fu+aroq-rÈ rsr+EraTà qiìq àfuà{ rqfi.
=

o \d( {R€-{€ qrààfu;rfi r qqdrflïqrì qÈ;ú r

frT{ È<r<crffi {rfr {È{ qâ o r
qE!Í àar âào ra-<q<cfrsT.õqrÈer@qFòfrto t*d'r ìwfr
In this unit you will learn
dFÈï rFft{ 556137Y4 +n Rc r
. how to descÍibê Íeelingsand fr.m rËi+ì qFÈÈ ?
impressions
. how to discuss Íesemblances
 ÈT sqlïrf.+ÌÈ ravr{fi qfi cr-{ qï{rí gr-t"*aÌ,$-sr I Mrhcsh The room's OK. But úe landlord comes from outside
âç+ È, rTqfi Tãs rrE rsdrlil{ ffi rnqr 3rRi6c frfu.6 trììÈ Kathmandu.He doesn't speak Nepali well. Sometimes
eqÈrr q1ìeEs+ q,ç ìrnn €;6 | we misunderstandone another.
qeT õïgtdçrnà(? lllpuk Where is he ftom?
Mrheeh He's from Manang.You oncewentto Manangtoo,didn't
frw qr+rf,r qcrâq€q rt r+ rc_et{rct{qw 6ôì-.àfu6 taqrqÌ you?
S{-g{ t sÌqr-ïreqëaì rqrq a-fr EÈr qs rü gfièï r6Ì{ DIpak Yes, I went once.Over therethey don't speakvery much
s-d {et t\-€q g<{ { snd õrSÈ | Nepali becauseúe peoplehavetheir own language.
Mrhesh But how did you like the place?
è<t lodgings, rented accommodation q<qRlandlord Dlpak I really liked Manang.You can seethe Himalayasclearly
{È+õq eas.i.ly @ to match,accord, from there.You can't hearanythingexceptthe sighingof
q"{ad eventually, in tlrc endl cometogether the wind and the sound of running water. It's not like
5È a locality in north-central ìr{IF À4amÍg(ceÍrtral
Nqsl) Thamel.It's a really beautiful andpeacefulplace.
Kathmandu where many tourists stay err ft'ÍÍlq Ìess
y{ Íeally, very ìft1 to be spolen
{FrEqÍ< Bag Bazaax a locality in rrÍct larlguage
eâst-cenhal Kathmandu sÈ place Grammar
Èe Eãs Trichandn Coilege
IFq to be Íeached
@w theHimalayas
Enií clea4 cleaÍly
72 Feelings:the use of nouns with qrì1
qR window
@ wind, aiÍ ln English,peopleactively experiencephysicaloÍ mentalconditions
{sl to be seen,visible {È-ggsighing sound ruch ashunger,thirst oÍ happiness:I feel hungry, I am thirsty, I was
qÈq süghtly, a little *{Í-ìTffË{ uyersaÍdsfearÌrt happy.ln Nepú, however,the relationshipbetweenthe condition
gì any rt+o úe soundof nmning und the person who experiencesit is reversed,and the condition
(Rq lounsú water (hunger,thirst, happinestbecomesan activeagentwhich affecúsúe
Tc pop trfr sourd
ÈfÌa musrb personwho experiencesit. That personbecomesthe indüect object
s@ exceptfor
{<1 to be hemd audible g<< beautrftl of thecondiúon.andis úereforemarkedby úe suffix -+É. whilethe
sïT fo sÍnke, âffect, seem zr< peaceful condition becornesúe subject of the verb eflrï which can be
ctà /i&q srnuTarro translatedin various ways aocordingto context but here means,o
effec be felt.
Dipak Did you find lodgingseasily? As with sTf€, to be wanted, if the person in the sentenceis
Mahesh No, I didn't. It wasratherdifficult. tn the endI found this experiencingúe condiüon at úe time the sentenceis uttered,the
litde room in Thamel-What aboutyou? vsú qlrï mustbe in the simplepasttense,to showthat the condiúon
üpak It went very well for me. I will stay at a friend's placein has affected that personor beenfelt by him/her. Thus, an English
Bag Bazaar.From his house you can reach Trichandra phrase such as I feel hungry becones in Nepali translaúon
College in five minutes. you can even see the collese me+object-markeÍhungeraffected:
Íìom the window! qqri rÌ+ mrÌ t I feel hungry.
Mahesh Oho, my lodgingsare ratherfar away.you can't seeany
If thepersonin úe sentenceexperiencedthe condiúonin úe past,the
college ftom úe window. you can see only shops,
verb drrr shouldbe in one of the various past tenses,including the
restaurantsandtourists,andyou canheaÍ only pop music.
simplepasttense.However,if the simplepasttenseis used,the time
Dipak It seemsthat you don't like the lodgings.
needsto be mentionedto avoid ambiguity:
 f{frqqr{ ìÈfisrr* I I felt hungry yesteÍday. \
Bxanryle: (qrfr)
á4ppiness qqrâqfr õrtÍà t
If fte verb qpq Ir itt the húituâl presenttense,it implies a regrìlâÍor I (qÍ{ tffsI (l((E | ,
habitualoccurrence: I f{â nungel \.lttnt t
È+ Èt qfs q-ìfir( q-{ïq È+ qrrs r I feel hunw at about r <ÈfreÈfr saúress(<:r{)
5 o'clock every day. r Ìfrsrl úarúoea (f<qr
areúless(qsÍ{
ln all suchsentences,despitethe fact that they translateasffee1,you ( fr fr cordness(q lsl
aÍe, etc., the gÌammâticalsubjectof the verb is the condition úat is
experienced,not the personwho experiencesit, and so the verb dFI
,, {rfr a headcold GÍÌI
to be felt car takeonly third personsingularendingsltnoronà+ or
acougü1ffi;
rqnqTrrí). r àâ embaÍrassment (<4Íq)
r ô{r deep (ffir )
@È àt Ê+srÍ er{{qdÊ yesterdayI atea lot of rr q-{Ì fear (e{ )
ffiqrrà | ctilu'Ia andI was thinty. rì {È üguor(r+fr )
ecrfÈrr Èt r-{Ê gsfr qrÍì I I am verypleasedto have
met you. 73 How do you iike Nepdl?Using adiectives
{rfr slrqr{ EÈ-iÍrà ràfr ffi In the üght he felt cotd. with cr,1
ìR-qfg{qr qÌrqt I A few dayslater he caught The veÍb o{Tr{occurswith adjectiveswith the basicsenseof Ío sâike
a cold. ore as, or to seem,a'f,dthe person affectedby the verô takes the
rÈfrqrqrìa-rnqsrÈ r Rame'smotherüed in (the postposition-{r€. The questionrtô trrfr'! meãnswhatüd you think
q+fir*rl g'e fl'qÌ 1* month oÍ) Chüt and of it?, how did you like it? or how üd you frnd ir? úth referenceto a
everyonewassad. paÍticularpoint in time:
qqrt qèT{rdft-{Ê€r qrlô r I fell asleeparoundmidnight. t <cÍffi I ìcrd {RÌ qr.È t How üd you üke Nepal?
Nore * .dr{, üterally to fa.l/,is usedas an honorific veó meaÍìins Ío ìqnt{r€ÈìrrÈmrà t I üked Nepalvery much.
dre.The non-honorificverb meaningÍo dre is Tf. dtfrwrqrrâqrrÈr How üd you Íind the
In statementsof generalfâct, the personor peopleaffectedneednot Engüshlanguage?
"
always be mentioned: rqrÊqsnq.rrâ qr.fr r I found it vety difficult
indeed.
TqqÈ{Íc.r qrà qr"6 r In the month of Pus one
feels cold. qÈwqrftrnmrdqròr And how did you frnd
qqt{r q.lr{ËarrÈì rr€i On the buseshere one Iapanese?
s-f{-ïT€ {rr5 | sometimes feel s suffocabd. <qÌtnqr gq.nàorrà t I found thatlanguage
Anothermeaningof cffi is to apply rn a moÍe hÍeral, physical sense: evenhatdet.
Èòqfrqqr@{rrôr My shirt became muddy. The questiont€ò qrter with the verb cF1 in the hâbitual present
qrqr 3nrÈinrà r The house caught ftre. tensemeanswhat do you think of it? oÍ how do you üke iú?in more
generalterms.ContÌastúe followingpairs:
EXERCISE 38 Construct sentencesthat say úat the following
peoplefelt, experiencedor contrâctedthe following things: Èfrlrffiqltrl{d{rfr? How didyoufrndürcfad
lastnight?
ffiqmr*'dqrr6r What do you think of Nepali
food?
 S sqrqrq {R iil.à r How did you like thatnovel? Oftenthe passiveform of the verb is usedinsteadof úe active form
ffi ilfa-sdcr{{rÊ nd qrrei r How do you frnd Nepaúi to indicatethatsomethingis or is not possible:{fT€ canbe}reard.is
üteÍaãtre? âttotDÍe. qtq-v can De seen. ts vtslote:
EXERCISE 39 Consftuct sentences that say that the people in the Èà w{ arcÍ{reqfuo f+ gfìàt t canyou oÍ canyounothear
left-hand column did not find úe things in the central column to be my voicefrom thete?
as described in the right-hand column. ilt.+Ìti..Íre $ralTsn rrffÉq Èk s t From Nagarkot,EveÍestis
Examole easily visible.
ffiã this food gooèbsriÍÌg = dcr&ngàerqrffiilÈ a-*6rfr irÈ qt slrcrÊIï gÊF6 t Now ow village can be
r
reachedwithin onehour.
I thar song sweet-sounding1ffi)
ì {rififfqr his village shange (fiËÌ)
ì \:Ìl lQ ê Japanese diffìcult 75 Simirar fo: qR
dÌTT India nice çftà is a memberof the group of words that also includesrrd l&e
k +t, | ìtl Nepali easy tlls, sâ or i{RÌ ftfte úar, andt<ì lfte what ?/ how? lt is ]usedrÍl
two slighdy different ways:
74 Morc passiveverbs qÍd canbe usedasa postpositionto meal similar a ot like:
Every transitive verb in Nepali can, at least in úeory, produce a qqd qFÈ r A personüke me.
passive'istem' counterpaÍt: aqrià bÌ{r È ìrrís$ s t Yow sonis üke my younger
brcther.
Examples oÍ active and passive verbs ilr@rrrqrffiSf+;ot Yow languagesounds
to speak to be spoken like Nepali
-o'"'1
eq to see tõ bè seen The following phrasescan also be appendedto a statementto make
S-g to heaÍ qFrï to be heard It lesscategorical:
{q b undeÍstand to be understood
ììA tu say STFTí to be süd ...qRÌo t ...it seems
ql1 to eat GITí;T ...q* qqrl qn o r ... it seemsto me
to be eaten
...qd rtn€ qrrfr r ...it seemedto me

There are also a few intransitive verbs that can do the same: qrqqffrÈq*o r It lmks like it won't nin aday.
s qfE qr$bqR {qÉ ilÈ{ | It doesn't seem to me that he
will come today.
ST to aÍrive SftX b bereached
ìqrd çsëTì1ef È qRÌ qqrÊ qrrfr t 1rseemealto me that Nepal
wasa heavenon eafih.
wclìIqrffiìTrsÌ{ffi{r In lapan the Nepali
70 Making adiectives into adverbs
ffi-it'q-sërrdrcÌÈtr{rdqFi6,
;i#íiË:,Ï"i::i'* Adjectives (words that describenouns) can be made into adverbs
(woÍdsthat describethe actionsof a verb) irÌ a vadety of ways.Some
ìcm'iqr-â rEsrrqà ;qqi!Ãf i Ííl i,iÏi ï#] ;
çd*H huvethe postposition-frr addedto them:
+r."Èqü'nffiqrcdàír "'
ffi quick ffiúr quickly
Hi*ífi,ri#^;"" f6-if stow RÈq slowIy

&
 qfqqt e a sy {ÈFÈf.r easily IXERCISE 41 TÍanslateinto Nepali:
rrfr good {rìÉ,r well
I The Himalayascan be seenftom my window.
Some adjectives can also be made into adverbs simply by 2 The Magar languageis spokenaroundPokhara.
emphasizingthem: 3 Your (High) voice cannotbe heardftom here.
È quick quickiy 4 Your (Middle) village will not be reachedin an hour.
5 It is said(that) thereis a witch (bolsi) in thât house.
Oúers can be made into adverbsby adding the posçosition-à to
ó In Tibet the Nepali languageis sometimesunderstood.
them:
7 Pleasewalk slowly (High). We'll reachthe village easily now.
.I IE ì üfficult r r r g itÊ1 with difftculty I I am very happy to havemet your (High) son.He seemedlike a
nÈ{r difficult tM with diffrculty very clever (calãk) boy to me.
The two setsof adverbsin the following box arederivedfrom the set
of adjectivesto their left:

Adjective Adverb
rt€ïT h,ke this {qt or {È in this
mannef
eqRÈ
ors€fr üte úar <q(frors€t çqàorsd in úat
q<ì simitaÍto qsô or qÌÈ ,ffiiÏï
Ì*íf xe wnat ! {ql'Ì oÍ 6qÌ how?

Theubiqútousadjectiveq-È canalsotakeúe advèrtiialform{trfr.

dmrnfim-còffiÈ | Thatwod<wasdorc

{q*-.**.ô1qÈ #!"fftï**"^,.
gr qr€ qT{ QÌí.;iqFiÌ {rsiÌ EÌõ | Thatman is
Gennm buthe
speaksNepali well.
EXERCISE40 Insert-qr€ or ì in ttregapsin thefoüowingsentences:
r q_ffiíÈ{l
I ÈÌTrs- çs.rfuarsffi r
ì 3c_ {Q qr rrÈ qrrà r
v ffi qrqr_ Ts-rl{rrà t
r {rfi-As_ fic rnqÌ r
 s{_ ilRÈËrõ_ ìTrdqrô |
u aqf- qnafrfuqsÈÊd-{r{r.E,
. dcÉ _ frq{r rd qr.à r
( rT-a$qÈír
p Ofr_ Èìr+frqrd r
 21 A late start
The Paudelfamily haveoyerslept,andto makemattersworseFaúer
hôslost his watch andúey do not know what time it is.
!ÍFt qr,{r,q@ffi{üfr7
n qrOràaÌfr lqrwqqrs{Hò{r rrrrEffirÈct
qcfr d ràoí Er rq*qiqqrÊàorqÍs r
tT ssqrâ sars +E rcÈ{r ffi H ild.rq{ Tfidà firà-s-â ÈÌ{
õTìì6iT I

cçrt 6*q rqkqrqe-eÈt<q& qfc.{scfuqn ïrs{Ésõf$E r

{Ì scr.Èqesõrq-*?ffiàM?
{rqT È, Sh qè t èffi ravr{ì @ g+ *a +rc-rvô t oefrrrà
â-a,òrq t.rc+ì firfr effiqr 6rqàs e tiq.ds fd t
ceff {r!{r !qrõ{HÈfl, fiìqÌ{ffie t
sl
4l GI ìT rÈqrqqRàffiqà rffi rrn eàâ ràq3{F{èsEq
qcrçiÌf{@r
tdsÈcr
al
- o É
rF
J
(ffi ffi ç<rqÌsffio 1qq'qft€ firS€ 1
qerfr,g cefr I Èô qrç{ *@vw t
5 o
aqT
-aJ qsfi 3nq+ìËq, qrqrrtqr{Ès€-iri R;RÌ vrô È1vqr{2
:.P
ql
o
rü
crqT retoïúÌfr, ffi *rg+wtr-* grnqÈf<Et
qffi âàsfr rqrqqrt-ffiRfr tmtdrq*gfroào rqÌ{Fq{rn
ll, vqr$ofrrq,k{r Rrrà,qrç{ô\ rErqfr qrç{Èqt
-
qfr sor\-{FqrËqr
qrqT q, ll, eqbÌfrÈ{rqq.ôq rqrrre-qr€
Ir
J
st
q father,dad 4q to wear
qt{+ now firâ rnner

o rq Ío Íin& stnke
mw perhaps
ÈqritíugúÍ be(seeGrôrmar 92m È{r)
aqcfr süll, evennow
qffi pockeÍ
orn n feel with thehaú
.iÈ a quarteÍto
à< well; I don't know
{r vrel m rouse,lift up sFT to cometo the boil
J In lhis unit you will learn

o . how to us€ the complêted

tênsgs
. how to stâte thè time of day
. how to Í€port what otheís
cR frsÍ (adveó)
N down, below
firÈ-qô wa c1oc.k
t well; I don't know
trai immediately
ú& laundryman
sffr sar'; woman'sdress
$r cÌodres
,çlq who htows? searchme! È this evening
havesaid Èe coaÍ sWãfr father anddaughter
. how to us€ verb forms to
specify causes
 Lakshmi Father,Father,what time is it now? 'perfected'or 'completed'.lve shall seelater that this participle can
Father I don't know, daughter.Perhapsit,s 8 o,clock.Is your bc usedon its own andin otheÍ tensestoo. It is formed very simply
brother not up yet? hy addingúe ending-gà -eko to the pasttenseb-aseof üe verb or,
Lakshmi No he's not.He is still in his own rtrom. In the case of úe High forms, by âdding -ïIgdrÌ -bhaeko to the
Father Get him up now. But first go quickly downstaiÌs,look at dictionary form of the verb. The -gô participle describes the
the wall clock in the shopandcomeback. conditionof its subjectin termsof someúing it hasdoneor hasbeen
Lâkshmi Very well. First I'll look at the clock, and only after that ln theDast.
I'll getbrotherup.
Father Uma, where'smy watch got to? Have you seenit? Highfoms All otherfonns
Mother Well I don't know,I haven'tseenit. Whichcoatdid you = qÈ doae
rrt + qç+ì = $${qd \- + qfr
\4/earyesterday?It was that black coat over tlere, wasn,t
it? Feelinsideits innerpocket,then.Is it úere?
cq + !Tç{r = EEì{q+ {{- + q{Í = 4Èô seaÍed
Lakshmi Father,faúer! It's not 8 o'clock,it,s a quaÍer to nine! tft* = Íq*iïï<dr Êd + qdr =ffi toryprÊ"
"ç+
Arel+rrV*
Father Oho, we're really late today. Hasn't your brothergot up
yet? And haven't you madeany tea? w{ + rrçÈ = E|Xìì\'+t Ír- + qfr = {qd gore
Lakshmi The waterhas only just boiled.Now l,ll mate it right q + vç+Ì = 8",ì\'+r iÌ- + \'fr =M c,ted
away. ffi + rr\rô = eìT\rdi ìÌ- r (rà = rrqd r*n
Mother Lakshmi, oh Lakshmi! Hasn't the washerrnancomeyet?
Lakshmi No he hasn't,mother.You haven'tgiven him my new
The secondword in úe completedpresenttenseis the appropriate
sari?
Mother lbrm of the verbE, âccordingto the numberandgenderof the subject
No I haven't, daughter,I only gave him your broúer's
of theverb.If úe verb is transi(ive.úe subjectmusttake-ì because
schoolclothes.
grammatically this is a past tense:
Lakshmi Then that's aU right, you know. Todàyis Sunday.It's
brother's schoolholiday. He'll bring úe cloúes by this ÈèqÈEr I have done.
evening,you know. There,the tea's ready,pleasecome. ffiqüÈìi t You are not asleep.
Fatherpleasecome too. snàmoI He has bought..
Mother There,úere, father and daughterdrink your tea. I,ll get êIrÍìiI trRffr Er I We have foÍgotten.
brotherup andbring him too. çfi-Esq'otÈqt t '" They have not gone.
The -q+ì participle can take feminine and plural endings,just as
adjectivesdo. If the subjectof the verb is feminine,the endingshould
Grammar bc -(fr -eki:
77 The completed presênt tense sÈfr6{TrçfrÈ t Youngersisterhasgone
to school.
This tensedescribesan eventor action that happenedin the pastbut
still has somebearingon the presentbecausenothing has happened lf the subjectis plural the endingshouldchangeto -qrFT-ekã:
srnceto supersedeor negateit. It is the equivalentof the English áe @++RvÌ*o1 | Theboyshave saidhello.
hascome,she hasseen,tlrcy havedone,but in Nepali the Englishúas
Theserules are observedconsistently in wÌitten Nepali, but less
is replacedby the Nepali for rs or are (b, Eq, 6Ì etc.)
consistentlyin the spokenlanguage.As always,úe High forms are
The tenseconsistsof two words.Tecbnically,the frst word is called the sameregâÌdlessof the numberand genderof the subject.
the 'f,erfect participle', becauseit describesaÌÌ action thât has been
 Although the completedprcsenttensegenerallyrefers to an action ITGRCISE 43 Answer the following questionswith (a) a simple
that was completedin the past,certainverbsmust be translatedinto prrt uffirmativeand(b) a completedpresentnegative:
the continuouspresentin Engüsh.Theseverbs shouldbe thouehtof
asverbsthat indicatea specificümited action (for instance.qE-fo sir Bxample
down and gq ro go to bed or to fall asleep),or that refer ô the ï;wrà rìtsrqr+à t a {, qrçfr t(Yesúeúas).
(HasKdnchãscrubbedúe pos?) t qÈ,qrffiÈq t(lVohe hasn't).
beginningof an ãction:-
sÈqqr{Èor He is sitting on a chair (he
r fiafffuqvr1ìràt
ì qrlEï ïT6,qr€ï qrs--i}Tà ?
has sat down on a chair).
qrfr cü o r t mrt+ì q<qreà qFÈ qrfr t
It is nining (it hasbegun
| ftÍffì rfid qÍqï ?
to nin).
Èìaredgàrìo r My headis huxing (my head
hasbegm to hurt). 78 Stating the time oÍ daYusing *sÌ
qrfrsffior The wateris boiling (the fvà is the simple past tenseof the verb EE, to ring oÍ to stÍike.
water hascome to the boil). Lltcrally, qçà meansit struckor it rang,andits subjectis a number:
s qrfo+Ì ftÌ6Íqr{Ì{Ì o r He is slecping(he hasgone lhrocrang,half past four Íang, elÊ.The verb rcmainssingular(that is,
to beüfallen aslee| in the li cndsin -d in tlÌe affumative) in all instances.
upstarÍsÍoom.
Althoughit is gÌammaticâllyin the pasttense,{d is usedto ask or
The completedpresenttenseis often usedto give negativeanswers tcll thepresenttime.The negadveform is usuallyqìà Èc.
to questionsthat have beenposedin the simple past tense,because
the simplepast(asexplainedearlier) doessometimesmeanmuchtìe t@tn*dt Is it 4 o'clocknow?
sameas the completedpresent:
rt,qrc+çÈr Yes,it is 4 o'clock .

o +Ì qrò r Wo has cotite?

oÍ
A +ÌS*q.a}àr No one has come. r{, <r<*ffiÈn t No, it is not 4 o'clock .
In everyday speech,úe -q+Ì -eko ending is often droppedin úe It is very importantto distinguishbetweenthe verb ... irçqÌ." baiyo,
negative,andif the baseendsin .a or -ã the yowel is lensthened: It is...o'clocknow andtheadveú ... {ì ... bqie, at.. o'btocki
+ÌSm'Ëar No one has come- mr€+Íàsìq{qqú6t - At whattimedo you go home?
q rn'Èï I q flàctq{ÈqF€ | I go at half past 5.
I have not gone-
qftàçqrqÊ*çÈ, Èçq t It's âquarteÍWt 5 now, isn'tit?
EXERCISE42 Translateinto NeDali:
fr,rr+rfrffiurq t Yes,Í'11go in ('after')
I Elder broúer hasgoneto Da{eeling. 15 miuutes.
2 Sister-in-lawhas stayedin Kathmandu. Statingtimesúat include minutespastor minutesto the houÍ (oúer
J Has anyonecometo your (High) house?your (Middle) younger thanhalf andquarterhours) involves the use of two different forms
brotherhascome,but apartfrom him nobodyhascome. of the verb qE Ío rngj theseaÌe the -era {ìr and úe
4 The waterhasn'tboiledyet. -participle
Infinitive form .rçÍ plus the postposition-sÍ{:
5 I havegiven your cloúes to the washerman.
qts{È{ frq fi{+át TwentyminutÊspast 5.
6 He (Low) hasboughtfive new books.
qì'qe-trdrqfr{ffid I Twenty minutesto 5.
EXEBCISE44 Answer the following questionsabout the
clockfaces
below: E ZZ Wtrlctrcountrieshaveyouvisited?
qâ+rqr+Íàqsôr SuryaPrâkâshhascometo úsit Om Búadur andhis sonDhanBúadur,
undthe conversationhastumedto the subjectof foreign favel. Dhan
qS+ I qÌsfr{-,à r
Bdâdur relatesanunfoúrnateexperiencehe oncehadin I-ondon.
q-S+lqrõfr{dr
qâ+ r qr sÈ Eq{"-ô r +fr q-s* a.r $mnr orâ f<èvrrtqÌrËÍ gry\'ào I
drq+{rc(q qRïqÍ qffi slqqiqr qfr ldqrãfr9
qS1. qEq6fr2ffiçsfr6r
qf mrvr È'{t trcr-'r q rrrl{srq qrì qffi fu( a<qçô W qfe+rcr
q Èqrm.r( rdqÉ{èc wgT(rfrEï r
Èc õ,ït€.raìq t q rrç+ì rh rÈ ìd aÌ'r trq +qr<' d ari 3TÈqqs{
qìàffiorr+ì ffivqrqr rwrÈqrÈqk{rc+Ì òA qf{
Tìqt\'frà |
Smnr awffi aM$rgï {r{+6 r
Èq rErc{Frè{qrïô s ì rqk qÈ q qffi ffi q-6 Ì{r+c w.€
11Ì<1çê firò tqug-ffir (qríqr 3FTlFrdT
Êfr rÈqssì rm
qrçq {H ì-{rqr s{fiÊ qsã í.crËà qã{r cfï ìr{Ì ì r
qfwrn àràcr
Èr a-6rg'q ïì, q-{rar<.1,i mrrr$-trc flÈ sqr r+rs c !
trï d{r$ {s{ ( {{r lq{ ffi +è {Íq {fqfd( fqffi ftrd tÌìÈ{r
qfçcsrã erdrrçfrì < crfr qÈà q ffi +{ e+Èqrq{,TE t
*e @È"ncrr urô $-aqq\rfrìq 3ì-dqrrffi Èscr{È r
ffiqr àsqr {È qfFò3Èxrò { iq{qì qk ffi Es
rrs€{ qr\r{qúÌ #ÈsrqFà r
qfn+nr *,+fràrràr
uï*qr{i às{r {È qÍfirsàÈ*{r+rd qFìzfiffiÈ( ìTrì+ ffim
qì+ôcP{qrücrçôW t
qf r+rw wÈewvfloàrrà t
traa6g *.cv< vr$ qcq qrtts ffi rssàq-cÈfi{ qrd Èqrg(rs{
õrgfi {rq-ÈSìÌÌ{ rqÉ eqr{ ffi t
qfr+rw @+rs fi-+<C<rç+ìfqç{ ?
uìía-qrg(fuç{ rÈcrmì 6<ràt
trr rErg<lfr Èvr q<rqtffià \'scr3qàfi cr6fuflÌ, òfid ?
"cfr
ur a-6r< qw<rfuìi r
 fqèlnabroad {rsffi conducÍor an empty seat before the bus set off, I sât down
Ta to íxave| Èq. ticket beside another man. On the way, the man who was
cqi Burma qïT Ío a.rk for sitting beside me got up and left, and a little wlìile
+ò{ q|{ 1asÍyear sÈcr bag later tlìe bus conductor came and asked me for the
rrqfr 1ast,prewous
<rèe yzllp1 money for the ticket.
Ts ,ftts (the nameof a monú) Íiiq. to extÍact, take out SuryaPrakash Yes, and úen what happened?
1ìv ,Europe rIIrq to ÍItn away DhanBahadur The man who was sitting beside me had taken the
fulfuei coursq process q{q of goodLúfiMt rrallet out of my bag and run away, but I had not
q414expenence hürjst
grkr secure loown at all.
cê incident $cr'r,ë aoylce
ÊÌì thefamiliaÌ form of the son'sname *+ Surya Prakash And what happenedafter that?
thing, item The conductorwas â very good mân. He advised
#rT Story Dhan Búadur
Q{T3T ro be .losÍ
àqTtime, occasion sqÈfr useful me, saying that I should from now on keep my
qÌc seaÍ moneyin â secureplace.
ctõ lessoll
-+ÌÈs{r besr'de f{T Ío lean Surya Prakash Apart from the money,no other thing was lost?
Dhan Bahadur No. Only úe moneywas lost.
Om Bahadur And, having lost money like this, you leamed a
Surya Prakash To which placeshaveyou travelled
abroad? usefullesson,didn't you?
Orn Bahadur I have havelled in India and in Burma too. What Dhan Bahadur Yes,I did!
aboutyou?
Surya Prakash Up until last year I had travelled
only as far as
Indi4 but lastpüsI wentto EDgland. Haveyou not Grammar
visitedEuÌoDe?
Om Bahadur Europeis somewhere I haven.tvisited.My eldest 79 The completed past tense
sonDhanBúadur got to Londontìvo yearsagorn The -çà participle is usedwith the appropriateform of the veÍb Frà
the couÍseof his work. Apart from him, no_onein (was, were)to describean âction that occurredin úe past and does
our family hasvisited Europe. not necessarilytell us anythingaboutúe present.The technicaÌname
Surya Prakash Did your son like London úen? for úis tenseis the 'pluperfec(. Often, úe senseis that the action or
Om Bahadur He says.it's very pleasant.Just the other day he eventdescribedhasbeensuperseded or negatedby someotheraction
lvas saying úat after a little wbile he will go to oÍ event.This tensecaÍÌ usually be tÍânslatedby using úe English
l,ondon a secondtime. He hasn,t forgotten the word úad but in Nepali the tenseis usedwheneverthe speakerfeels
enjoyable experiencesof London. But when he that thereis a ceÍain remotenessbetweenúe eventthat is described
stayed in London one unpleasant incident andthe presenttime. The following examplesillustrat€ the conüast
apparendyalso occurred. in meaningbetweenthe 'completedpresent' tensethat takesE ând
Surya Prakash What happened? the 'completedpâst' tensethat takesffi:
Orn Bahadur Oh Dhane,comehereandtell Suryaprakashyour q E{ s++Ì 6 | t haveÍetumedhome (and
story,\yon't you? thatis whereI an now).
Dhan Bahadur Certainly, father. One day my q r{ sffi fqEl
work had finished I had Íetumedhome (but I
arounddusk,Because
the office andbecause
my lodgingswerefar from
it wasnining, t boardeda
an not necessarilythere
any more).
l
busandwenthomein that.BecauseI couldn,tfind
 qFfrÈfrìt*O**a+1| His elder sisterhas not rcport her words verbatim to youÍ mother: 'the vr'omansaid "I will
married (sheis currently oometo visit your motheÍ tomorrow".'
unmarried). Thc nâtuÍalplacefoÍ a Nepali verb is at the endof a Nepali sentence,
ssfrÈâìf*qrrÌÈfrÊìEìï
| His elder skter had not snd so the Nepali for saidot askedor Íold usually comesâfter the
maÍried (but thisis not to woÍdsthat are being quoted.In addition, the word for sardor asled
say that shehasnot or Íold is usually precededby the -g{ -era paÍiciple of the verb cìrT
mmried since). to say, (i.e. rtì<, but occasionallyrfr; *t"n servesthe Purposeof
ÈÌsNÈf+.areqHÈïr My sonhasnot Íead thisbook markingthe endof úe quotation.Speechmarksarenot usuallyused
(and still hasn't rcad it). when reported speechis wÌitten down. The basic structure of a
ÈÌaffi*frareqàìFÌç{ r My nn hadnot readhis book Bcntence that repoÍts what someonehassaid is:
(buthe mighthaveteadit quotrd p€rson+ -à - verbatim quote- rrk - said / told / asked,
byrcw). Êtc.
crfi cÈe r It is nining (it hasbegun sqÈffi rÍq àòrÌÈ{ qtnâ*sÌ t He askedme whatmy
to rain). namewas.
crfr qÈfirô r It wasnining (it hadbegun
to nin). ssìàftgìnsrrÌtì;arqÊ q6rà t He rxlercd thebry b ptt
ÌìarefrgàtÌo r hishaton-
My headis huxing (my head
hasbegunto hut) ffi uSà q qrSEa< ficr qrs{gq YouÍ fÍiend hassüd thathe
Èòa-e+ìgÈ+ÌM r My head washurting (my qÌ{ ì{ìà o I wiIl come but his motheÍ
headhad begunto hurt). will not.
EXERCISE45 Translareinro Nepali: If the personwhosewords are being quotedwas making an enqÌriry
of any kind, the quotationwill end with the interrogativewoÍd fs' to
1 My father had neverbeenabroad.
showúat it was a question:
2 In 1978I went ('had gone,) to Nepal for the fust time.
3 They (Middle) were sitting in the bus srarion(bas bisaun.r-)but s{à qrE ffi qrF{{ TqÌ f{ ì{ì-{ He askedme wheúer I had
úe bushadnot come. cSIfrÈÈ t beenout today.
4 It wasraining but Ramehad not broughthis umbrella. Ìò.nwàõcr€qrt q{r{ eíFd My gide askedwhettrcr
5 His (Low) headwashurting but he had not tâkenâny medicine. fqrrfrqìà t I wastircd.
6 They (Middle) had come from IlãÍn bur úey had not broughl
âny tea, EXERCISË46 Reportúat the personin column A said üe thing
in column B to the personor personsin column C:
80 Reporting speech using rrÈ{ ABC
I my youngerbroúer it won't rain today said to faúer
In English, when one reportswhat someoneelse has said, úe usual
construcüonis 's/hesaidthat' following which onesummarizeswhat 2 that tall man are you English? askedme
3 moúer is your friend hungry? askedmy sisteÍ
was said: 'she said that she was going out'. In Nepali, however,
4 the teacher closeyour books told úe children
speechis usually reportedby quoting the actuaÌwords úat a Derson
5 father don't go out tomorrow advisedus
hasuttered:'shesaid"I amgoingout".' lf a womanhastold yàu that
she will come to visit your mother tomorrow, in Nepali you would
 81 Eecause it is, because Íf was: the _rr+Ì çrqqèàq< the house where Ram-liYed house
participle with -ì Ram lives
The -q+l +6 O*ciple is usedin combinationwith the word s.r<ur kftà ìTÌfrr g{e€ ú e thingsyou said by-you-saidúings
(cause,Íeason) plus -ì (úe subject-markingsufEx introduced
in frfrtwtlÈvrfrte min ünt fe lastyeaÍ last-yeaÌ-fallenrain
Grammar 59) to show that the action of a verb is the causeof
somethingelse: Erf-{{lrà à-qr theüme we wentto bed we-slepttime

@ rrfr-vÈ ffi'rà Èà q'sãr \r+Ì ò{{K lastMonday goneMonday

Because it wasraining
c--:i .
-Ì1/lqllÌ,i r yesterdayI bought ln thesephrases,the -9fr participlebehaveslike an adjective,andits
an umbrella. .o cnding must changeaccordingto the number and genderof úe
areftÌ qlàaì rr<q'à q È++ft qì EÈ r Because I had a headache nounsit describes:
I stÂyedhome all day. the man who cameyesEÍdaY
Frflcfrìffi-fi.È
Th€ word õFRoIis very often droppedfrom this construction,leaving 5t
tÉq | rqcìr onél thegful who cameyesterday
only úe -ç6Ì participle plus -ì : the boys who cameyestÊrday
fuuÌ+tç+ràaqs
3rìftTrqr àqFfl'{Ìfr ïE\r+Ìì Wich is theletterthat
Tw;;rÍâ Becausehe hadno Nepali ffiffiffi9ffiQÈr
|{€ flrqÌ t friend.in Ameica. Krishna Devkota wÍote?
felt lonely. aqrqil€Ìààfrï.Ìfuqdqro I me dayI metyou seems
erò ffi crgTqdì {{fô ffi Because üke just the otheÍ day.
he dnnk hotte; his
ï-ç.IÌ | cà-È'{r qï&5 qirr fdrF{{s Educa@dpeopledo not Íead
bngue got bumed-
qSàfl r book Ïke this.
EXERCISE47 Combinethe pairs of sentencesto producea single
sentence,
alongtlte followingIines:
83 Ordinal numbers
.Exarnple:€r+r ffi 6 t.{èè ÈÈ qrt-{ r= qnr ffi ì{ç+Ìà Èì qrtÌ | Theordinal numbers(frrst, second,Íáft4 etc.) funcúonasadjectives,
r aqÉìÈìfiÈqnrur-trd re+Èà Èsr qrrô r
avrõcrÊ just as they do in English. With five exceptions,they are all formed
ì {dfsr q._g€fi reotÈ<6Í qa q|ï!{qï 1 by addingúe suffix -ï to úe numberin question.Thus:'
i {rfurrrtr-Er.qÊ'ìa+qíÈqÌàdì,i qR r qÊ fourth
four
r g{Ìrrdq Èï rsçÈ-s(ì fu& È{ I
cì'q five úcï fifth
k ç{+Ì*q|{ffi6rà rerèìe{qÉS:qcnr*| frs 20 ffi 2oth
Èfrq 33 Ìft{ï 33rd
82 Using the -u-âparticiple as an adjective
The following numbershavespecialforms:
In English, sentencescontaining construcúonssuch as .the man
sd one ---c--5
YìQ't I frÍst
who... ' or 'úe housewhere..., are very comlnon,but in Nepali such
sE tw o ql ql second
constructionsare rare. Insteâd,a phÌasesuchas .the man who came , :-__5,
(|t,l
ú-{ urree third
yesterday' becomesin Nepali .the yesterday_câme man' and .the . l--$
slx t9cI sixth
housewhereRam üves' becomes.the Rarn-üvedhouse,:
mne íq l ninth
Literally: qrd
qÌ rqrcrsrftr<m+ì Thisis His Majesty's eighth
ÈÈ atC-à qFò Íhe man who catne yesterday-came
man ìqm-Tqqr È t touÍ of Nepal.
yesteÍday
 qfl.+Ì^cH f{iaT
üqì rntrr qt{ò Or the frl]jt day of Asarthere
rr\rdÌfiïÌ I hadben a \andsüdein
our uìllage.
r@, frsa can also be used as an adverb to mean before or
previously, by chatging its endingfrom -o to
-ã:
cF{r cÈìcm 3rrgnrqÌ ? Have you visitedNepal
Tr€
{rEìI, qÌ {ifÌ frrCEqÌ t|ãdõõÌ | previously as well?
No, this is the frrct time
for me.
Whenit is addedto ceÍain largenumbers,the suffix - Ì modifiestheir
meamngsin a ratherdifferent way:
{|ir hundred ( |q I hundredsof
{ER Íúousard {qRÌ thousandsof
418 hundred thousand qrcÌ hundredsof
thousands
of('lakhs of)
{.'712 En miüon s.ìd tensof milüons lq/
CL
o
of ('crorcsof ) {
4
Èi+r< gcrrlreÌcr@-.{'r Hundreds of thousands ot
Íl
fiqÌ,{Ë-qFÌ ìqFfr ïlìrF€F
qf{ FIg I
peopte dìedin the Second
World War. meÍe were
I q)
thousandsof Nepaúi
citizensamongthem too.
EXERCISE.A Trânslateinto NeDali:
I The guestswho cameyesterdayareall English.
2 It's raining outside.Take úat umbÌella you (Middle) bought in
the bazaarlast week.
n
-

g)
3 The month whenyou (Middle) arived in Nepal is Baisãkh. br
This is thetenthüme thatI havevisitedNeoal.
The housethatyou (High,plural) stayedin is veryold.
o Last Friday I had not receivedthe letter you (High) ÌvÍote.
tr
7 He (Low) is not the man who camefrom India. I
8 This is not úe presentyou (Middle) gaveto mother. I In this unit you will leaÍn
. how to say hoì.vlong ago
I
somêthinghappened
. how to talk about seeingor
headngactions peÍÍormsd by
othêrs
. how to discuss intentions
and the mêaningsof words
. how to use dates
23 An exchangeof letters
lrq dear snto eneÍ
This text is adaptedfrom a passagein TW Clark,s IntÍoducüonto lqz friend ffi Ío undersÍand
Nepal, fiIst pubüshedin 1963. .ì\ near to íÈ+qq,loved ones
eïwgn sand upright Ìq love
+.racreÌ t'(ï a game played with pebbles qmrr+rgood sasúíes.)
1"8k /t /l q'e< schoobnasteÍ ÈÈfrFebruary
ÍÌqfrarq qq face csfü{ úosend
ÈRfu q q'rqÌ|fi lqpq r.fiqr iÈ qfuq fe{ frrd rffi{ snfuroam E s Íeply
qï( ÍeâÍ(s) ìq fo unr'fe
r-ÊTq{rq qìr<Ì qlìl sì-+r üÊ qfl ràqd1ei r6d rq6ô r qr6tforgiveness
-fd'rrÈ qtoflow
\rícr crqq +tÉÈr ffi s'- í{r\'+ì rrÈ qnqrrà rqì qrFìa merúer of a casteof itinemnt qqÍí account descripüon
W.6-diq frrì{ì ÌiT qfur*ra sÌq qÌF+ìÊÌrÍ T{c{rs1 Ío .Lke
village singersor minstrels
i{RIì ò+lesq gÌ rr@r \rsãr rrtì sfi{ç+ì ffi | ìì íI-qfiq chilüood @ to btow (a peÍson)
{rËqÌF14{rÈ++fz ífi ,rqr+ì, Vffi {qrq-+Ì{Èr ftÌii tÈ àÈ time,0m {È I ránk
;ffiil gr+qr qÈ qtffir Èrqaq s-+ìr t+q+rno.+Ì n<fi frddle, Nepali vioün qqrfoÍgiveness
ìTì. # rq fflÉ'{ffid cfl rrc1Ío flng <{ÍícF{.to get to se sorneone
W èqr.nrr sÈ qìri AïÌ ì+' r+ r <etrs{toplay music (ultra-polite)
{F+qErâE'ftrt Tffi àqlrrqr rfulagrffi ì{q-+ìì{+{ dÌiìrd ffiitl ìTTËtrÌMEMOTY
tqt q-{rs È5i m qEÌì {qr+qqì qiír fqìÌr r {w clolera
dcr{+ Êre ncrç+Ì Èì rrà r qs eG â1Ìnosr
@*i r dcrl < dcr+rr ei to dle
ÈrqcìrÍâÌqr {v{rq+r r -Ê
tcfffifud,+'{K Kothmondu,2045/9/9
DeorÍriendRoiu,
-T$ì'
R! SiRJ lÂct trom tomorrowI will notgo to school.Todoywosmy losldoy ot
frq fq-{frqrt school.I stoodneorthegoteondwotchedboysyounggrthonme
Êdfr{ 6.r6n+qrcc6\r+Ì fuíï qrqrGrfrdrrà trrqEìqB{ràfu ì ployingwithpebbles.WhotÍunl A mqsiersowmaqndoskedme
why I hodn'tgone home,it wos lote. I turnedmy Íoce owoy
T TrT Tg qmÍà a' 6r+fet 3r r gì rrq È+Ìààtui r
T+qrsÌ becouse ìaorswereflowingfrommy eyes.
qld rd{Ì r|'{tcr-"S es I
SlowlyI reochedthe gote. A Gqine wos stondingoutsidethe
frfrà ìÈ+Ì qd+ì qfuc Èisì {srì qriqfi M rÌì çrqcr gote.In my childhoodI hqd heordhim singingond ployingthe
eerctqnfiffi ç+r( rs-{+ìi-rctqr rT!-sffr
È rr+à qràrq Íiddlemonytimes.I puto littlemoneyin hishondqnd oskedhim
çqrq lffiqrqÌ{qra Èq-{É 15rì;rrÈ616a lqaqr{rHgÍrl why he hodn'tbeento theschoolfor so monydoys.He sqidthqt
ci{ àq ì{Ì{r q rürt ì{-sú frÍfr il{ì È++r qro aqr;,Ì he hqd beenill, thothe hod coughtcholeroond neorlydied.
{ffi Èì qi{ìr qì } r3fiffi;{qr{
às-q:il' frdr ErsdìT Fqlhersowmeenterthe house.He oskedmewhy lwos so lqte.
{r.{ qrsfirfl | I did notonswerhim,buttotherseemedto understqnd.
3ìrqrtrÉìÌ T{qR T{r$ rffi +ffiqr q a6nirr eTqrqr.6 I lÍs beeno long time sinceI receivedq letterÍrom you. Now
*{Ì+ì qdq ïcrç+ì ct{ àì sd ììqr r{fra,irràq.àqrsc, ' pleosewritesoon.love ond goodwishesto you ond yourloved
ffiffi,<rg ones.
YourÍriend,Kumor.
 Dorieeling,25 Februory 1989 ffiìcrqflr'+Ì6Fdft-{Tà t How mmy days hasit been
Deor Íriend Kumor, sinceyou cameto Nepâl?
I wos hoppy when I receivedthe leiteryou sentÍrom Kqihmondu. Thc word F<<day(s) is optional here. It can be left out, or have
Since lqst month I hove been intendingto write but I didn,t write
ttroúer word for a period of time (e.g.Ëqïr week qÈ+r monÚ, or +i
becouseevery doy some iob or olher come my woy. Forgiveme
ydaÍ)subsünrtedfor it. A personwho has,ot üsited Nepâlfor a long
ror oèrng so tqte.
lime might be askedthe quesüon
ïhe descriptionyou wÍote oÍ your lost doy ot school wos very
touching.lreqd il out lo on editor friend. His nome is Kumo'r fcffìcrqT,rs*6Fda{rrÈ r How many yeüs is it that
Bhqndori. He liked it very much. He soys you should write o you have notgoneto Nepal?
slightly longer occountond send it to him. He soys you should (i.e. sinceyou last wentto
wrilewhoÌeveryou like.lthink KumorBhondoriis someonevour Nepal?)
brother knows, is thot not so? But he soys he hosn,t met íour qTq{qrç+ì E€qfrTr ìrÈ | It's two monthssircÊI alÊrr]F,a|
brotherÍor mony months.He hos moved here Írom Sikkim.
Pleoseconvey my greetingsto your moiher.I osk her Íorgiveness @fufq{rÈìqÌàììrç+ì6 | It's beena |ong time since
tor not hqving wrillen o letter.ll is mony yeors sinceI hove seen I watcheda Hinü fihn.
her, I connot rememberhow mony yeors il is.
Yourwell-wisher,Roiu. 8ô Seeing or hearing another penson'sactions
The -Çd paÍticiple is usedto describewhat sorneoneis doing when
mother peÍson seesor hearsthem. The sentenceson the left-hand
Grammar :lde below say úât someonesaw or heard someoneelse. The
rcntenceson úe right amplifu them by noting what üe personwho
84 Using the -\-dpaniciple as a verb lr seenor heardwasdoing at the time.
The -g+ìp6i"in1";s usedon its own, without any auxiliary verb, to In such sentences,the -Çà participle translatesas goìng, singing,
form ân abbreviatedcompleted present tense. In this câse, the playing,speaking*c. andin the word orderit mustfollow the pe$on
negativeis formedby addingthe prefix ï-: who is being seenor heard. If the person who is seen-or heard is
s6Èèqrçàr When did he come? pêrforminga transitiveverb, then s/hemusttake the suffix -d
@qn'Èt He came yesterday. 3ÌTFÍqrr tf,qrqrs qq I qkqàftrffiqq.rçdààr
fafi-esqfq ftï ftTrqà r Why üdn't you come before? I sow you tvvo d.qysago. I saw you going to school
€,1fufraa-+rq+Ìryr
I Well, who knows why we two dnys ago.
didn't come siÍ!
$ràT{rÊga"tÈ | e-{ràÈì iftd rr\r+Ì {qïà |
+rrìdftÍfrà? llhat have you done? Father heqrd mz. Fathzr heard rne singing
qçfr5rqfifr I Iust my own woÍk a song.
qrqrèe-qr{€-dÉÈì\rfr r ryrà-a-<r{èìrËr,àì+Ì
6 How long is it since...? ürcI t
The -ç*Ì pafticiple is usedto expressúe idea of tirne having elapsed Mother watchedthe children. Mother watchedthe chillren
sincesomethinghâppened.For example,if you wish to asksomeone pbying pebbles.
how long they havebeenin Nepal you can phrasethe question,you IXERCISE 49 Translateinto Nepú:
Nepal comehow much time happened,:
I She(Middle) sawhim (Low) playing caÍdsyesterday.
 2 I heardher (Middle) singing that songlast monú. qïgrqrffi sÌft s fr tTÌ{ ssà wondering('saying(o
3 He (Low) sawhim (High) coming homethreedaysago. fir* Èà t himselÍ)')if therewasany
4 I sawyou (Middle) smokinga cigarettelast Wednesday. millet left in the
5 He (High) heardher (Middle) speakingHindi last week. pot, he looked inside.
6 They ffiddle) saw you (lr,Íiddle)going ro schoolthe day before
yesterday. ltc -ç* participle of ì{rí followed by ( or {r, (i.e. rrÌfr 4. . or vÈÌ
tí(,,. ) means I intended to but...lt follows a statementof what the
tp€aker intended to do:
87 The -çà participle with È or ò*q
{rqfu{|{{qRqFqr{d This moming I thoughtI'd
The -Çà padgipls is also used in combination with the appropriate
r Èqràrrq{ r go to themaÍket, but I
form of the verb { to form a completed present tense whicb
didn't evenhaveanymoney-
idenúfies and emphasizesúe subject of úe verb (úis is less common
than úe combinations with n and Êrò):
Fr&ècqvffiaefràrrfrt I thoughtI'd write a |etteÍ,
but therewasa power cut.
c-fr+rq v{ìqìaì È r That job is üÊ one he üd.
sÈftìfr*lÈ,fuü.rÈò5a r She is my girlfriend, we are @ What does this word mean?
not maÍried.
Another use of the -çÈ participle of ì1.1 is to state or ask úe
The -g+] OrO" Ot" is also usedwith fr or Stt to form a comDleted
mcaningof a word.
presenttensewhichemphasizes the factthatsomeúÌinsis or is not úe
truth: fitrqr'frdrs' ì{Ì+ìàÈ t dìfrqr what is the meaaingof the
'f+-crq' t{È book È | woÍd 'fuaw' in angüsh7In
rrìqr6rffiòfir It is not fish thatI bought. Englsh fqf,Ia' rÌEarrs'fu)k'.
çfi-Esqk< q\rfrròfií r It is not true thatthey went to ffiqI 'book' ìTÈ+ìà à t ffiqr what is themeaningof the
the temple.. '66st' r{ìd Í=rdwS t word 'book' in Nepali?In
NqalL'tunk'ncas'Èaw'.
88 Thoughts and intentions using :ï+{and rrÈ A secondw^ayof askingthe meaningof a word involves the use of
The primary meaning of the verb q.{ is Ío say or Ío 1e11, but it âlso the word rìrì, meanr'ng:
has the important secondary meaning of to thinklto remember. you Themeaningof himãlayais
MqfÈ'ífrq<Èt-
might find it helptul to think of the -qr participle of ïì.{, (i.e., rÌ+{) 'homeof snow'.
as meaning saying to oneselfin the following sentences: q{ È lgw{ Themezningof
gKdr(T+Í 3ìÌigR_r,EFfrì
qì l-tqr qrË1q€ qfËà Eï rrÌ{ q Renembedng (,nyìng tÌ+ì Ê+-flqd t 'pusbkãlaya is home of
E!ÍÌ(kT{ qFr | b<nks'.pustakmearc'bak'.
0,r myself) that guests
.,)
were coÌmng to my home
in the evening, I headed EXERCISE50 Fill in the gapsin the following sentences:
for the market. q rlÌdlmgerÈ_{r
ÈQ-+raqq arero rrì< e4-q<qrqtr, They setout carÍJringrice, ì dìfr{rffiìïÌ+ì_ AÌl
<rd,T{{Èqrfr+{Í=&I dãL,saltandte\ remenlaring r dÌfrqrÈqrì{ffi- ÈI
('saying (to themselves)') r ìqrfr{r letterìTÌà - È|
thatKhunbu is far from lid. r ffiqr lacg:{ffi - 3ì'ìI{r- È |
1 ffiqr rn6rìthrrÈ- fr1
 90 The Nepali year 'l'hcword{r-T is u_sed to referto paÍicular years.instead theoúer
In Nepal,most peopleusethe traditional Bitram calendar,the fr*;q ^of
word lbr y€aÍ, which is used for periods of time tfrc s'ì ráÍee
q"lõ.insteadof lhe Westemor ^Eú,
qrÌ onehundrcd years)-Nepali-speakersoften omit úe
Gregoriancalendar,The Bikramvear Jann, q{ {rq
beginson the first day of the springmonth of *Fnq, which ía[s rwo fáousandwhen mentioning a particular year, just as
$ trcn
sometimearound rhe middle of April (on April 19 in l99g). The Bnglish speúers might tâlk aboutwhât happenedin '97, ratherthaÍÌ
monús are solar raúer than lunar, so the correspondence between '1097'. So, instead of salng úat someúinghappened in çÉ*tr vn
WestemaÍÌd Bikram datesis süghtly different from year to year. fÉ he yeaÍ 2007,Íhey will often simply refeÍ to that year astlÌï qr(T
The Bikam calendrical era runs 56 years úead of the Westem lhëycar seven-
câlendarfrom January-1 to the first day of È{ro, and J7 yffin 2hsad mr{ gl vrmr r@ rr+ ìrre In which year üd you tust
from the first day of i{rg p11ilDecember31.Thus,Januarvl99g qTç-{ìIà t come to Nepal?
beginsin themiddleof úe monrhof rr{randendsin úe middléof the qqRì{qfu,qttefrwffrqrE I I camefouryears ago,in the
following rnonthofqTCin the Bikram year of 2054,while September yeaÍ ) t.
l998teginsin úe middleof úe monthof rreÌandendsin themiddle
of 3r+E in rheBikramyearof 2055. Thc monthsof the Hindu year haveclassicalSanskit nameswhich
lËkc slightly different colloquial forms in eachof the lânguagesof
Bikram Sambatdatesmay be expressedin full: South Asia. The classical names aÍe used on formal or official
r.rr slq srfufr 11Tà qrf{r( Friday, the22ndday of Kãttik, documents,the colloquial namesin everydayspeechand also often
In writing.
lear 2054 (= 7 November.
1997) IXERCISE 51 Translateúe following datesinto Nepali:
or in an abbreviatedform:
Tho months oÍ the Nêpali year
ì'ks q{r< ìl qà 31st day of AsãÍ, 2054 Colloouial name
Classical nane
(= 15 luly, ï97) I mid-Aprilto nid-May
tt* 1**
The word G meansday of the solar month.Thus, if you want to Ì v{iq qõ mid-May to mid-Iune
gTqr6 rf +if . nto-Jtne to lwa-Juy
know thedatein úe Bikramyearit is comrnonto ask
fi4qr qTirt mid-Iuly to mid-Augu't
qÍqT'{GÈ? What's the date today? ìTtã rì{ mid-August to mid-SePtembeÍ
qM\r4s'rgq rràÈ | ( 3nÈfi qqq mid-Septemberto mid-OctobeÍ
It's the 21st today.
The Bikam Sâmbatis usedlesscommonly amongNepali_speakers 6rffid 6rttrfr mid-OctobeÍto mid-NovembeÍ
qTÌfrf rflgT{ mid-NovembeÍtomtd-DecembeÍ
outsideNepal itself. In Nepâli-speakingcommunitie. in North_"^t
t qTI{ mid-Decemberto mid-Iaruary
India and Bhutan,the Westemcalendaris more generallyused,and f{
q|€i qTC mid-Ianuary to mid-Febntary
in this casethe word rrà is replacedby üe word<rfrq, dai of a montlt r6fdttrI
Ìt
in the Westemcalendar: rì +l mid-MaÍch to mid-ADtil
f{u qr Ìô ãtrô l&Ìfr+ì q;q ìrà 1.Fí My youngestdaughterwas
rfurrrr r w rr@ à.fu+rfrcqrr bomin 1g3. In which Thursdayl0ú January1921.
I
month?On the 23rd of the 2 Tuesday10thChaitra2016.
month of lune. 3 Sunday26thNovember1956.
4 Friday lst Phalgun2042.
EXERCISE 52
Èrgry5ìqI
$q+ì ffE wcrc.rq+ì g€ +i trà r ,rçô vrq ErqÈìqFr q{{
gW çscr {rÈ trÈ{r Êgrà rg€ 6wr +È çga <rÈ ìH
cfr qórs-1"{tr<rsì fEçfl qrìï
'-tÈà es ïrcr{sr {Trr B-{r
.{q 6rrqà .rer qhq o1 rç+ q.ilr afq ilífi-{f,.drc ïr-i"ìà
flilò vfagÈídrq çsaqqrc-<tÊTqÈ rartrretç+f furr
qr€ì Êq-+ì+qlÈ{rqRÌ nfr <qfrà àfuçc IgW
SizT ffir-{r
+rQÊr rvecrâ çear sqÈ{r cr* qrt{€ r'r(È Èr+rt firtr
<rtrÈ-{sfuÌ* 1rq-qfum gìrrà#"ra t<s+ì.mrr-{Í
\.orr
vtfuM rvcì qà +mrnÈ o a<qrfi qrqrfr g-üsïü
rq- ftmewdr a t3rrcrìr< (ÌTg.E.+fr tficfo ilr +ìrTÈÈ
.ilcrà{Èrìïqsì +lrÈl qì
11rç6ufr refud <qffi à r.o+ "
ìì' srr{ìi'E{ r il[ê +nft+qÌrrq-ffi F{ràTr-fuci + . qnfmrÊ
qvrffi à rilffi Êcìì ftÌÈfr à1 wrrnrgo, gf*q r r
ffi{€ { II
rfì
I tìsô ErqqÍcn {ç+ì +fr sf rròr
ì g<+ì <rw vrrn-*raà q-are-_qrà
r
$
{
IT
ì <rvÈÈç+lffrìrr {ìH fsi{ERcr(trsr 6a ?
gH mrfrrfÉtarc+rqvq+Ì firà r $, t"+
gW{fu{cTE4È.rqrfü6 ?
t wr+rgìrftrf+tRvqrràr F,qt.ï

I
I
J
a
I
I
t

In this unít you will learn

. how to construct condiüonal
sêmences
. how to exoÍess doubt
. how to maks suggêstions
. how to discuss whethêr
somethingis enough
 CIZ+ Out trekking fqqqrqr e-sàSfuEgof+r
Subhasis leadinga group of foreign visitors on a trek from pokhara sTrs rrnqffiqÈr
to Jomsom.They havejust arrived at a lodge after a long wet first Êqqrcr d, ftrgfrqracrrfrvfrvÈ I
t
day. As they eat their evening meâI, servedby Oitmay-a,Subhas grrre 6q, acdÊcÈ sa-d{ tqffiErqofd t
discussesthe route for the next dây with Bekh Bi,radur. the fs-{flcr <rcasm rflìfi-{s-qr€ srrdg'ât
lodgekeeper. gìTr{ gôQ-cr rÊèr@e ecfrÈìrrrasïàqt
È{cfqr araàcfrsÊq1,Èfit
$Tr{ $,s'@+kawvrÌçor
ìq a-Ërgiqìfr ffiÊ{€ ièlvrfr w< uÌà6g6.o,frt't
$Trs q-dflàà rqsrrtqÈtr
qq qQrs. q-{rcrc Èìlvrfr Erì qfi 1 q;q6 qi arà çsàÈ ta<rd
lrrÊfu drà EÈ.s rec-+ìqrâqrÈ qÌgrcrfrflì erâ ò
qffi qr<s qÈ erà S r*fr çô vrft q-* rrì cr{S'
ilà{réEr{A\,ctdvffi$er t
{ìTTq eÈqrà{rérmdrfiÊÈfuàcò{r tâècrfi-{rc{rfrftr Èfu;6
ì rfgrq Èf fq.ft{F-+ìrâ c6<6e, qft t
dqsEìs{ d o fr m q* rrfr râ ì-drqrõà-{raàA cf{ àFiàqtqrsì
qwrffir€ €(.{ô{ÈdrawÊgfl6, Èflt t *frsrftcü
TìqrdÈMqffà{r
STr{ q6, sFqïr<1u-*q(àicrtfr t{ctÈfrÌâ<r t

qr< cookedrice,food, meal qrq{n-ta stay foÍ a night

È{crsr <vrfuswrlar +È<vmerg$q { a rft wrcàfro f+ rràr r !X(l) to be enough -q<ta below,loweÍ tlown than
rÍÍrr<perü4ps È€ bes4beÍfer
sTrs qfr qraàccrâsn+<g.à frcr Êâ ra-srfì o t* r ca ta add, suwlement toP up
È{qrqr g,nvì@rà<r+s3io r ïi úeeps
quefr the Gandakiriver {ft-d fo be fru1súed
àe*Uermfr arrtqt fdrfu{ qr.ì Íì r g< bridge Èffi Gúorepani(a village)
qrq6 Gáanúung (a üllage)
sTrs qrsfr g{ sk ffic< wÈ rffiq116" às-{r *fu uf to tlescenil
qìvqqmlìrô ìrì Èrfi-{FqiÈrFd( ffiq Jonsom (a village) cã next, firther
dÌ-ffi EEfifcr rr<+rw cì€q ryeaúer dTI to divide, üfrtÍcatÊ
qTfrc-qì'Tì qfu ,rdr È-drrqrà ffi
Td ÌF{ cfr Fo, ssr cleaÍ uaqfqR.Dhaulagiri (a mountain)
ÊRrì fd<rt QC{il-d.rfr qÌqìraqqfrà{ dìr tRÌR{rq rròcrô TatopaÍri(a village) aË{ desire
dl-dM SFrsíìTìïrfr-+-qf+rv+â e r !A(2) to rcach,arrive ëfr? isn't thatso?
Èeìqrwe ryrllmeer(probable
Èqq--q{ aràcrfiTqr ilq {+ï \'sarqfÈ rngo rqràqrffi ìrÈ ìÌì futrc tense:seeGrammar 9ó)
v6Ì <reaqSq a rrn5*ìqrqe frf ra<erctqrearffi
qrfEft-{wi, {rà qFi r+rô qfr s tilcri{F.{ô {Rïà ïì
ìq ò{r rqRvqmr,rnaÈsr r
 Dilmaya Pleasesit over hereandeat.Will this muchrice be
enoughoÍ not?
Subhas This muchrice might not be enoughfor me, sister.
Is thereany more?
Dilmaya If it's not enoughit doesn't matúer.TheÍe's heaDs
moÍe.
Bekh Bahadur 'Whereare you headingtomoÍrow, eh?
Subhas We'Íe going down to the Gandakibridge andúen
towardsJomsom.The path is downhill, isn't it? ff
the weaúer is clear tomorrow we,ll probablv
reach Tatopani around dusk. But if it aiso rains
tomorÍow like it did today it will be rather
difficull The path will be slippery, and walking
slowly we probablylvon't reachTatopaniby dusk.
If we don't reâch Tatopani by dusk, where shall
we lodge for the night?
Bekh Bahadur Below Tatopani there is anothersma[ üllase. ff
you are slow on the way stay therc.I've forg-otten
the naÍne of the village, though. But from therc
Tatopaniis higher up, the path is rathersteeptoo.
If you stay there that will be better. Oh Dilmava
where'súe rice?
Dilmaya Will you havesomethingmore? '
Subhss A ütúe more rice, please.
Dilrnaya Thereyou are. Shall I put vegetâblestoo?
Subhrs SuÌe,pleaseput vegetablestoo. Is therea tttle bit
of dãl too?
Dilnaya I'm afraid the dãl's finished. Have your friends
had enoughrice?
Subhas I expectthey've had enough.ForeigneÍsdon,t eât
suchâ lot of rice.
Dilrnaya They don't eat with úeir handseiúer, do thev?
Sübhas Yes,it's a bit difficult for úem.
Bekh Bahadur Tomorrow you're going via Ghorcpani, aren't
you?
Subhas There'sno other way. How elsecan we go?
Bekh Búadur From herc, the path to GhoÍepâniand the path to
Ghandrungarc one and the same-But from the
next village the path diüdes. The lower path is úe
pathgoing to Ghorepani,the higheroneis thepath
going to Ghandrung.If it Íains heâvily tomorrov,/,
go by the Ghandrungpath, it will be a bit easier.
Subhas You probablycan't seeDhaulagiri ftom úat path.
I gatherthat you cân get a good view of it from
Ghorepani.How they long to seethe Himalayas,
right?
Bekh Bahadur That's true, but when it rains heavily nothing can
be seenftom anywhere.Next week you will come
back by lhat path, won't you? Only go to
Ghoreoaniif it doesn'train tomorÍow.
Subhas Right then,thank you. Now it's time for bed.OK?
We'll meettomorlow.
Grammar
91 Real conditional sentences
A real conditionalsentenceis the equiYalentof a sentencein English
úat begins with rÍ and talks about events úât might happen oÍ
situationsthat might exist in the futuÌe. It is calleda 'real' conditional
sentencebecauseit alwaysrefers to what will be or what might be,
andthereforewhat it describesis possíble iÍ it doesn'train I will go
ouÍ. There is anotherkind of conditional sentencetlÌat talks about
what might have been,but was not, and is úerefore impossibleor
unreal:if it hadn't rainedI wouldn't havegoneout This secondkind
of conditionalsentenceis introducedin Grammar 130.
To form a realcondiúonalsentencein Nepali, you taketwo sentences
andlink themtogetherwiú the word qì. ì{ì is a participleof the verb
ïA to say that is not easily translatedwhen it is usedin this way,
becauseit simply marksthe endofthe 'if clauseof tlìe sentence.The
I
closestEnglish parallel is found in an informal expressionsuch as
say/ supposeit doesn'train...'Íhe 'ifl clauseof the sentenceusually
comes before the main clause. When it is referring to some
tense.The
possibilityin the future, its verb mustbe ln the simple^Past
'ifl clauseof a conditionalsentencecanbegin with aÏ< lf, andin fact
it often does, but cÈ if is not essential.rTì is essentialin such
sentenceswhether{È is usedor not.
To constÍucta Nepali sentencethat meansif it doesn'ttain I will go
out,begin with the simplepasttenseof lo rar'nasthe 'if clause,then
 add qì to show úat the 'if clause has ended, and then state that you lrtr instance,shopkeeperA is âskedwhetherthereis any rice in his
will go out: rhop,andhe is sureúât thereisn't, so he answe$ categorically:
cqft)qrfrÈ{ q"l q flrtr EF6 |
Q qr{fi, qr+q o t Any ice, shopkeeper?
(IÍ) it üdn't min (maÍks end of ifl clarrse1 I wiV go oit. A Ètt No.l
(condition) (consequence)
Dut shopkeeperB is lesscertain; he thinks thereprobablyisn't any,
= qr.ft qÈ ì{ì q qrf{< Ef€ r IÍ it doesn'tnin I will go ou- but feelshe hadbenercheck:
qÈ ftrfr qr\riÌ ì{ì q \rÊ qFqt If you.don't comeI will Q wqfr.arwo t Any rice, shopkeeper?
B ôïdhr I PÍobably not...
ak *r+rlg'rà .rì Èâ cfr{Fa-{r ,fl,ïâl-** oo- ,*r- {rE qffrcâïÈ{r I It probably won't Íain today.
qrqfiffr{r qì o ?qïËrÈt, vto {cr rls clnstr athome?I don't
ak<rcngdfrrrruÌqï,++a ü'j"T.jï;ut anychitriin futow,hepÍobablyis athofiE.
ãfi | the dãl it won't tastegood. Youpmbably won't get any
{E|{qrq|-gcrifiÈ{rì
The second half of a real conditional sentencecan also take the form meatht themarket.
of a request or â command, instead of a prediction:
The probablefuture tenseis intÍoducedin full in Grammar 96.
cÈdcrffi wrâ{rràqìÈò*arqr fyou feet tired, pteaselie
_1c':Ar{I down in mv roam.
09 The -ì -ne participle as an adiective
rrfr ewcw-qr lraqa w nc+ mì If garüc is íot availabtein
16A. Í{qÌ ? the market, just buy gingen This participleis simply the dicúonaryform of a verb úth its ending
do you understand? changed from -1-nu to -ï -ne:

EXERCISE53 Translateinro NeDali: dictionaryform -ne participle

ql1 Ío go (verb) qrì going (adjective)
I If you are tired, pleâserest. Ío eat (Yerb) [{rì earing(adjecúve)
2 If you are thirsty, pleasedrink this water. rFT ro do (verb) rìì doing(adjectle)
3 IfouÍ guestsaÍe hungry I will go to the marketand buy fruit and
vegetables. Thelust useof úe -ì -ne participleis to describenouns:
4 If you (Middle) do not cometomorrow,motherwiü stay at home frq{rqÈírà úe mad n Pollnn ('Pokhangoingnú')
andcry. thingsto eat ('eaüng things')
5 IfI do not cometo the office by 5 o,clock, pleasemeetme at the q|gìAqr next week ('coming week')
temple. bedroom('sleeüng Íoom' )
6 If faúer doesnot sendme a lefier this week I will phonehim rÍrr rFTrlf;b a working man
at home. ffiffi{rfu( a Nepali-speakingpercon
It is importânt to distinguishbetweenthe -ì participle and úe -gô
92 Using È{r to mean pertraps, might be participle, becauseboth are used to describenouns.However, úe
frw is the proóahIefirnrre tenseof úe verb fl to be, and meansiÍ -çfr participle always refers to actions or situationsthat are in the
pastas compaÍedúth the main verb of the sentence,while úe -ì
@robably) will be. lt can be added to thà- end of stâtements,
regardlessof their tense, to qualii' úem and make them less paÍiciple refers to situationsúat are either coterminousor in the
câtegorical. futurc ascomDaredwith úe main verb:

rG
 Arfrìcr<{È +qrqrr Wen we lived in Nepal q lrtrn qrì | I'11drink tea.
qrfr ìcrq {ÈÌficr r Wen we live in NepaJ. l'{qrqrffi<nàt Shall I put sugaÍin the Ea?
g.11qrq1ffi qFÈ 1 A person who hasclimbed Everest. kÍÌ r<rd, gmìrnà t Don't put sugaLjust Put milk.
qtrtqPÌr ï6ì qr;ò I A person who does/wiLl q{ Erì, Èí{ ? We'reoff now, aÍen't we?
climb Everest- rÌ, qi(rrà,ffiqfr{cfuqÈ t Yes, it's late, we'll leavein a
q-{ï{ fufrÌ qrò | The person who gave the lectuÍe. ütÍle while now-
çaq-{ ÈìqFò 1 The person who gives iecal,,],s/ 'l'hcrc usagesare acceptable,but it is more polite to usetlìe variable
will give a lectuÍe. vÉrbendings,especiallywhentalÌing to someoneyou aÍe addÍessing
The negative is formed simply by adding the prefix ï_ to the verb: $ rú.
iclrì unavailable
nor eanng 06 Tlre verb $T to anive, sufficc
ïfdffi unfoÍgettable Thie verb has two different uses.In the first, it is usedto mean fo
.{fr{qÈqFMffrï.fiÌ Wy have you givenraksi to a nacManiveat a destination,andin this contextit is intransitive(that
@ftrfiòz person who does not drink? h, thesubjectneverneedsto take-à):
3iìfri--{dMdnfrqrfd-{ Why do you tell off a boy fr t{crc sÈ ô-{ {ì ffi gre t This flight ÍeachesDelhi at
trr.ft.Ìirir who does not undeÍstand half past 3.
Engüsh in Engüsh7
ìcrcqr ìcríì "F{rs-drrÈÈõrgÌ Although it is an intransiúveverb, $! also hâs a passive 'i-stem'
Frui* that are not avülabhe
sÌÍRr{ qrÉ;6 | vorsion,which is gfiq b be Íeached:
in Nepal can be found
eveÍywhere in AmeÍica. Èà'nÈaàs tsÍffq cfr My village is quite a long
qr6i{t{q qrÈìsr|{qrrÌr È gÌà r Because it is clottd.y today SFtàÈfl t way away. WeWbablY
there's no chance of seeing
won't reachit even
Everest,
by nighfall
Whenthe subjectof úe verb Ío arrive is coming towaÍdsthesperker,
94 Using the-àparticiple to talk about Íuture ratherthangoing awayfrom him/lrcr, thenthecompoundveÍb 3ìÍ{g{
actions (consistingof the 'i-stem' of qfu1 + gq) is comrnonlyused:
The seconduse of úe -ì participle is as a kind of grammatical iï, ir <, <rrrtrffi frw wn t There,look, ürc Varanasi
"v.ò flight has aÍrived.
shortcutto talk about plâns and intentions for the near future. It is
used frequently in informal conversation,ând people who speak The seconduse of 5{ is to mean to sufficelbeenough,and in these
Nepali as a secondlanguage(both Nepalis and foreignen) findit so contextsthe verb is transiúve (i.e. its subjectmust take -õTin past
convenientOecausethe verb endingis the sameno matter who úe tcnses,andwill most often tâke -ì in úe habitualpresenttensetoo).
subjectof the verb is) that they sometimesuseit excessivelv: The peÍson for whom the commodity mentioled suffices or has
awtErÈfrwÈr nufficìd musttakethe object-markingsuffix -eÍâ. For instance,if you
AÍe you leaving tomonow?
frrr,frPq6,oç:"r;, No, we'rc staying tomoÍow
wish to say úat five rupees will be enough money for you, tlte
Nentence will be constructedasfollows:
and leaving the day after
tomomv q-drq qis{FrqÍà $6 ì
<cÉÈ{rqÈÊdsfrqrì r for me five rupees + -à suffices.
Will you dÍink tea oÍ coffee?
EXERCISE&f Write Nepali sentencesstatingthat the amountsor
commoditiesin the right-handcotulnn were or were not enouú for
thepeoplein the left-handcolumn;
I the touristswho cameyesterday food /
2 úe Sherpawho helpedus ten rupees X
3 the womanwho cookedthe food a kilo ofghee X
EXEFCISE 55 Write Nepali sentencesstatingúat the amountsor
commoditiesin the right-hândcolumnmight or might not be enough
for the peoplein the left-handcolumn:
I the touristswho are coming tomorrow food X
2 the Sherpawho is going to help us ten rupees /
3 úe womanwho cooksthe food a kiloìf ehee /

q
q, g
-
I
úl I
{
/.H
rl

q GI
sl
úJ
3l
-ì
o
=

o
x
1+

o
q)
In this unit you will leaÍn
. how to use the pÍobable
Íutule tense
. how to talk abouthow much
time and/or moneyit takes to
do somêthing
-
 CIZS Goinghomefor Dasain <ã (the festival o0 Dasain 1n lcbdness
Saroj and Krishna both live and work in London, but as ftrqq,r{ to decide ã+r snointilÌg
the great
annual of Dasainapproachesthey begin to wonder whãther gw marn qÉd a maÍïid wümIì's PüenE'
-festival
they might go hometo Nepal to celebrateit. cr3's pound home; her natal home
Efr as mucá as q<s AÍabia
vÈq dcreffir€<èôqrÊrq<qrgús ? \ a6fiíqr s6.l9as1
T".Ì {Èàvcq Èrsq qür àrccÍ6 fï r uA<@ excqt fir / ryt frírÍngoing sÊìE to ÍeÍIÌm
3rTrqmeAns Cdq pAlArc
sÌq È{rcrt* rrìvrlrr ra-<Èvr wà{et, q.SvFr+rÊ6ofr r rÈ+n relaÍive TasIq Pomp and.splendour
qiT{tc God q 17-to celebrate
Twr ç+ qqr+ì @ avnçcr fr rcà eqsr ïÈ{r rÈì qrÊrqcq
s - q q r È sl ìÈ rq mrmìw rg rr+frÈvr cr c,'
Will you go homefor Dasainúis year?
ròq eeÉq-{rq-drc wqvì rrì lt< c+ rrsreqrr6,È{.í ? Saroj
Krishnâ I haven't decidedyet. WÏat aboutyou?
T*Ì d, qts ü{ EÍàqr.fi rqfr {-+râqErçqre qnrrrrr ìTìqfr ffit Saroj If I get úe rnoneyI'll go. But it's not just the money,I
qE€€ d ?qt'sntrra Es qq+r ìe +.raqrdEr.6e r needtime off too, you know.
còv qF6q Krishna You'll probably get one week's leave, you know. That
@ $e ec6ss 16a+trqrìqfqgr<+fun gÊqwrmrqrr
won't be a problem.For me the main problemis money.
TE"r 3ii{üfrqrÊqìE-frè<nqwr+ìgflàwr 2fr ft-qrçqrfEà{r How much doesit cost to get to Nepal thesedays?
Èà'r rq+rtu-6rr*reqrt EÈr q-dscrq6ï r Saroj If you go by air it costs!500, doesn'tit?
Krishna Yes, it probablycostsabout500. And if you don't go by
T""T <ffi Èqrqrdcrâ Trqr+ì +Ì {n1 e r air how else will you go? Does a bus or a train go to
{Èq S{-r( 3nqrW6.E r +ror < vrÊqr flE€q cfr Ë;q | {€ Kathmandufrorn London?
aÈ<nqsvfr +r<eq rv,r-cr++Ì Saroj Sometourist busesdo go. But to get to Nepal by bus will
TsrrÈ ìTìr rt gipr i pÍobably take at leasttwo weeks.
TtT qfrÈfrÈr
Krishna And will the bossgive us four weeks' leave,indeed?x'I
Ft-q fr-{ sf qfu ÈâìrÌ fc-{Trà r+@vr* s-fr6È vrq rrn ffi think he v,/on't!
ilfT crídql'çfr@ rÈqrqcÈqrsfr{ r Saroj He won't! Therejs no altemativeto going by plane.
qrÈfiTrr-qrQqrÈ+í? Krishna But who will be at your houseat Dasain?
T5"r Saroj Faúer and Mother will be there. Youngest and third
{Èq rrfrdr6rm-<*r$àrÈorqqcrfr rs € qÈíràfu{.drrr q eldest broúer will also'be úere. Other relaúves will
rË a rÈ vrr probablycometoo. If God is kind I'11also get theÍe.
@ fr\'{ ììà qnqEqqï qÌd qlgqrr i 16r fr q1q
insì St 6{ ì rç+qffi qfr vfuô Krishna And what aboutyour elder sister?
fer vcer{ r Saroj Thrce years ago my sisteÍ got maried. So far she has
Í*Í 3r.d{rì+rfrqstì fu<fr rd gs r rrnì ìràqil ft r
Èqr cometo the natalhomeeveryyear for Bhai Tika.*' She'll
{ÌE ,rÈ à-qT.dÌ dcr{ ËtËÌ-üÌr gâ-<n<eqÊr* s <tÌ õírcÍ.nqrçr probablycomethis year.
nÊi;a rq6 o1=qr* s-{è qfl qdq{ Krishna Won't your secondeldestbroúer corne?
firí{Í r eq-€qrqàr
Saroj My secondeldestbrothermight not comethis time. He's
Om{qrrTcftrqÈ{ffflïr rvfr qrfr àìqr, ãnô ffi ÌrdÌ beenworking ia Ambia for two months.He saysthatif he
E TTfl !
doesn'ttakeleavethis yearhe'll probablyget it next year.
 But this yearhe saysthere,sno questionof coming.After
a yearit will be a bit easierfor him. Probable future tense: verb endings
Krishna What is life like for Nepalisin AÌabia?your broúer q -tsïTT
must
havewritten? üfr,{rfi-{€ -qì'{r
Saroj It's-probably hard,but you watch! Within a few years à -ifÌ{
he
will eam a million and come back. Then he,il eo to ffi,f{fiEõ -qì-{r
Pokharaandbuild a houseüke a palace.andwe.ll súy in s,*,eÌ(m.) -{t
it and celebrateDasain with pomp and splendour.ïíren s,Ì,çfr(f.)
we'll look to seewhoselife is hard! efr,firfr,ffi(m.) -qFÍ
*'
Notes The addition of ï makesa questionrhetorical: rfr, fiÍ;ft,fr-fr (f.) - t-l.l
úe person fr, fr, efi-qsetc. -qFí
askingknowsthatthe answeris ,no'.
A-* is a day of úe Dasainfestival when sistersanoint
l' ".lã their
brothers. Probable future tense: verb bases
Thefomrationof the verb basesfor the probablefuture tensehasfive
Grammar rules:
I The endingsare addedto the basesof C-verbsin a regularmanner
96 The probable futurê tense (q irËqrr ;ï do,ã rnis you ualÌ dq fefr mtcr youíi\I do,etc.l
Nepali.has.several different waysof expressingthe future tense,and 2 If the baseof a V-verb ends in -ã, the endingsare addedin a
úe main differencebetweenthem lies in ttreirãegree regulaÌmanner(q qfi{T I will eat'r,7qÍ;Ílhe will eat.rfr qrcq
of certainty.
he v,ilÍ eaL eÍc.)-
The habitual presentand continuouspresenttensescan
be trsedto 3 The V-verbs Ê1 to give, f<1 to take,andfl to be are irÍegulaÍ:
refer to the future,just as they can in English:
a ÍÈ1 employsthe baseÊ- in first personforms (q kÈqr I wr11
Èfü ÈÌ rrrg ìrradqFb r Totnonowmy brotherges gíve. 614ÌtcaÌ"tr we will give\ and<-in âlLloúers {s à;{Táe úIi
toIrúia gtYe
ÈfrÈìfirrrrcdqtà61 Tomonow my brotheris b fïll employsúe baseÍq- in fiÌst personforms (c fus4r I wili
going to India. rafte,{rfr ffior we s{r,rai(e) andì- in âll oúers (g àëlrúe ú.[
Ofcourse,both of thesesentences would be in úe presenttenseif the rake,
word ÌÈ were removed from them. The probabte t c fl employs the base{- in all fonns except the first person
tor" t"nr",
however,is usedexclusively to refer to ttre future, unO singular;thusr{ ã{r 1 wil.l be,but efÌ {fr1 she will be.
it
within it a measureof uncenâinty: "oniaì. 4 Verbsoúer thanft1and frl whosebasesendin -i (principally the
passive'i-stem' verbs) take an intervening-€- betweenbaseând
ÈfrÈrrrs ìTnesrrqr
r Tomonow my brother will ending,e.g.ÊÍìger ft will beforgotten,cl*<I it wi be obtained,
(probably)go to India. etc.
rn the affirmative, úe probablefuture tense 5 The baseof a W-verb is usually the normâl presenttensebase
consistsof a verb base
plus an ending;úe endingsare asfollows: (e|rs- from qÏõI, fus- from &q etc.). But for úe fust person
forms the secondvowel is dropped.Thus: q {fÍ{rr / wiJI cone,
õrfr qrqt{r we ra come,but g fisqT úe wltt come,üfr{€ qTg-qq
thev will come.elc.
 ProbableftrtuÌe tense The High form of úe probablefuture tenseconsistsof the dictionary
K f o b e qE Íogto .rf roao qlÌFÍfo cone Êg Ogrv form of the verb + {cr . It is úerefoÌe identical to the Super-Polite
Ë"11 !ì ts"| | rTGÍT qriqr ÈÉ{r imperative (see Grammar tl4) and in fact the two meaningsdo
&ìtdr EFftdr rRì'dr qr+dr l+ìì-{r converge:
È
üs
ffi.ftm-{€Ë|.qrqr
iFTRT
IRIïT
3rrsqr{
qrqì-{r
àflr-
àfcr
Ètlr+aqrarqr€ F+e à{òqr t PIeasewïite me a letor
from England.
s(m.) Erorl ü Ètl TdT 3ITìrFÍT àdr
s (f.) qrfr qrefr àcmcqra qcrâ fre àq{cr ft t Will you write me a letter
,J.t| (m..)
€ r . 1l IIíI
ìfr ftom England?
Q l ' l l' 1 ETiÌFT TìïFT 3fiBqr{
s-ft(f.) q,.'l qT{r 3rcft
fr,fr,sfr{FËrflI &
"*d
qïsfl1 -flT
<fl{ 97 The inÍinitive ç qr.{,What does ft cost to... ?,
Formally, Nepali grammarcontainsnegativefomrs of theseverbsin How long does ft take to... ?
which their endingschangeto -+f{, -mïd{, _*{qÌ, etc. but úese
The verb (TriÍ is used to mean:
are encoìnteredvery rarely indeedandúere is very little purposein
the_foreign leamermemorizingthem. Generally,the futurã nãgative . Ío cosÍ when it is combined with a sum of money:
is formed eiúer by addingthe prefix +- to the forms listed abú, or rfr Èsrtnror How much does it cost?
by usingthe habitualpresenttensein the negativeand adding
frtr frs lFrqler.st It cos* 20 ntpees.
terhaps Ío úe end of úe statement.The meaningvaries stigtrtty, o Ío Íake when it is combined wiú a quanútv of time:
accordingto which form is used:
q Efefi | +fr (t{q {rE r How müch time doesit take?
I'11probablygo. fi-q qqã qrr6i t It takesthreehours-
q {Efõqr I I'11probably not go (with rhe sensethat
thepersonwho is beingspokento woutd Note: there is no Nepali equivalent of the English 'it' in these
preferthepersonwho is speakingnot sentences;and, althoughthe subjectof the verb qq may be plural
to go) (e.g.türee-úours), the verb behavesasif it is singular;henceeFrtru-ar
q qTrErI^€f{T-
- | ifT.E,not ilFÍ grëTqïq.
I probably won,t go.
-
Thesesentencesmay be extendedby prefacing úem úth a verb,
s IqqEÌ Ttr{r I He may not be a soldier. rvhich must appearin its infirdtive form. This is very simply the
s fecÌÊ {èï d-dÍ | Heprobabty won,t be a solüer. dictionaryform minus its final -u:
Becauseof the slightly doubtful tone of this future tense,it áaj to be Dictionary fonn InÍiniüve
usedin sentencesthat refer to úe future and begin wiú the word qE lTFÍ jâna to go
slÌlfE,peÍàaps; fis{ qÌiFT ãuna to come
qrq qÌÈq rpn€ Èfu-sffiErÈ{r r I SÍf Tt{ pugna to rcach
won't go todây.perhapsl,ll
go tonorrow or theday after.
Boú forms of the veÍtr C{ and-ï) canbe translatedas úogo, ro come
The following proverbusesthe probablefuturetenseof the verb rIf, and so on, and there is very litde difference in thet meaning.
to frll: Howeveq only the form ending in -ï mây be used in this kind of
èiÌr.ft È rrfr frÌ q-qiTcÍ+Ì crfr I (Í) you're a queenandI,m a sentence:
queen,who rvill f l wateÍ Ètqrqrq+,frÈfl 16r How much does it cost to go
from the weLl? to Go*ha?
 rÌrqr qr{ fr{ q!-erqt'E r It &,kesthre hoursto Êach The word +tq is used before an exprcssionof quantity to mean
Gort:,ha aboutor approximately:
È{qrqrq{3rrç{ Kr çfiÈ{dt.6 | It takesa wholeday to go to
gt cft{sÌ flFr AÍ'ffi ri-{ <€ ftrÈ We will probably need
Gorkhaand come(back).
FqrÈõÈdr I aboúttwo kilos of salt foÍ
If,the sentenceinvolves nouns or pronouns(e-g. how long a monm.
doesit
taKey9!..., oÍ how much doesit costú@._.) thenúese musi
takethe n-qi"E +à T{ gr{ 6e-q <q fuÌd r|16 út takesaboutten minubs
postposition-{rÊ:
n rdt my hourefromhae.
ÈìqÌTEri ïFffitv$l s-frqscrâqfi It took thema weck to reach ïhe word qfr is usedafter an expressionof quantityoÍ time to mean
QKrqr.qÌ | Mukinath from pokhara. asmuch asot asmany as:
Tq.r4fã gql Tï õFirlEÉç{ BqT h prcbably won.t takeus a
q[rfi m TrÍ+r qrËq{r Efr rÍrf{ff{F ffi As mny as 12peoplefrom
QÌ{r. iiÌí_qrr tfq qrì a|rõïr r weekto reachHumla from
f*cc-{dsrqì | Íáis village üed in the
Ium14 it will probably only
Second\lorld War-
take us thÍee or Íow days.
BtÊ hasthe senseof almostoÍ veÍy neaÍly:
D gXgnCSg Sô pur the followrngsentences into rhe Drobable
futuÍetense,substituüng the wordÈfr for |di in each: â qqïft{€{Í{ 6rsr C-{ qÊ \rd It took thesetÍa.tersalmosta
q<f cfrà t week to teachLhasa.
t @Ècq{rÈtr*firòr
t t+ir ft=tr+railacrd qq <âqrdrïfà {rrò r EXERCISE57 TÍanslateinto NePaIi:
ì rÈfl ìT{f{ìHi <Jï{r E-rq-cìÈ ríffëF.à
TrÍrcr @ {r.ô | It costsf,500to go to Nepalby air ftom London,andit takes15hours
8 r€qr q]ÌIr{ qr'rgÌ{{r (Tw qfrq I
r qrrs-{ï. <rrq mrq r to reachKatbmandu.I alwaysbuy an interestingbook ât the aiÍport!
fuf,1ffi| 1156
t rË*dlrF{r qrËïrËFt+qqì õrrwÌ ïfi-t- ffi{ qrqrí | \ryhenI went to Nepal last year I bought a very fat novel ând it took
me aboutten hoursto readit. I will probúly go to Nepal againnext
year, and I might buy two novels this time. In Nepal' I went to
98 Wods lor approximately Bhadrapur.Ifyou go to Bhâdrapurby busfrom Kathmanduit's quite
Nepali has various words that can be used to mean
about oÍ
cbeapbut it takesa whole day to arrive therc. Therc were a lot of
approximately: people on the bus going tq. Bhadrapur and the road leading to
Bhadrapurwas very bad. I didn't buy a book for that joumey,
-ft-i about1wiú expressions of úme only) becauseI was going with one or two Nepâli friends. If you go to
appÍoximately, rouglúy
vt tí Bhadrapurby plane it costsa lot of moneybut it doesn't take much
aboutasmuch as
FTè
time.A planegoing to Bhadrapurleavesthe capitaleverymoming at
almost, viÍtually
l0 o'clock. If I go to Bhadrapuragainnext year, I will probably go
The postposition -Íè< (see Grammar 47) is used with by plane.
expressions of
time to líoÊanat roughly such-and-sucha time
E{ {Èffi q[g{È{ | pleasecome at about

ruares-dì,lrìËnfr{trd{
,n* , ii"!'i,iiir;uicktvwewiu
aÍive at aÍound-dusk.
 Dl26 Arrivingat Tribhuvan
Airport
International

*l/
ó*" -
'ï
CLJ {
rrr

o
€|.)
'\)
q, HaÌish hasÍetumed to Nepal úeÍ ân absenceof 20 years.He finds
rü t+ the alrpoÍ completely unrecognizable,ând he enlists the help of
Nirmal, an aiÍpoÍt attendant, to see him through the various

o
Ir
formalities.
ú!r
ffi
ï{Ri !
affi qqq 1dqÉqrs€rd qrss{s-dfÈt
J
o tfur qi, rr<sì q=grô qrc. g. * Èqr+fl tg1-{q t, wrâ
ìqrq r-qrq-+ìÈì qf !rà rqÈàffir+erq qì-q-<
qrì ffi t

C c--S-
t"t +tq
Tqàq ï, sirqlt6, àà'r:filrr't
&r o, q <qrffi qrFT{q T{r fiffir$o rffirffi fì{tÍI

o.
-
ËRrr
frfq
qr@r eqd È qì ffiÍtdrri s.à orq-'rqrsfir{c6 r
q(ffiïFrfc{Ëfr rfrrei@ r
q, qrs.Fiò{{ re, qrrrrt qnqrà rq-d{nqn Êqr* |
EREI Èà srqn a qftèsq trffi à |l-qÍÈì Ì€q ãFiïIifF
In this unit you will l€arn à*r
. how to usa ExpÍessions
mèaningshould,ought, m.rst
andhd to
 t{fr t'à {mr rÈi wÈvt+ffic qfì qFà{ |
tí!-q queue,line qm,ri ropack
rqislìffir) wrtq ciüzen En-vra clothesand suchlike
fir;4 luggage ur< special,pnticular
Ëftsr rfl qÈ qÌç+ìÈq |ffiÈ 6rò fu + { r féa to pick up q,fl to be tiÍed
Èfq fudr rrftiï tq fir{ dcrffi qr{r{ fTfrìrbr <acr{ì fi to wait ìq to carry
qqÉet{fiRÌ@r 'r\'{ rq qfr sÍi1.| .rë.Èúeary
Êr<r.ri ro worry ffirí reseryadon
ËfirT ïq{firqÌ?TÈrrffiÈwràa rÈcrwgr* r qÊ..dto exchange Tnr{ Naxal (a disüictof
f+i{ se+dÈto re+fl.rS{ sr--gò{r tr{r{ oÌStOmS Kathmandu)
Gtsffi
llarlsh Hello!
ffi rrò r iiSq, ïcrffierqrtqrtgfr rqE<cfffi qrr Nlrrnal Hello sir. Have you comefrom London?
Íìç r<rifa< vn5rfr r Harìsh Yes, on the R.A. flight that hasjust arrived.Listen, I have
(qRT{qD not visited Nepal for many years.Before, the âirpoÍt was
just a cow pasture.Tell me, whereshouldI go, what things
ãfuT ïrfFFR, 1FFRI do I haveto do?
q-qR 3Ìftr5 vrvÈáàersgfrq a rsÌrq Nlrmal OK, I'll organizeeverythingfor you. Do you needa visa?
+€kra qreflÌ(r+ì r
Ëf.sr qrre{qrd ;ïÈ{TcÈfrW; r If so, you haveto standin that queueover there.
HÈÌish But I'm a Nepali citizen, you know. I don't needto get a
r<n qÊrta @ rOf à frr*Èdqriçr*Ê racr€à3nÈqrt {ìaÌ vlsa.
$r Nlrmal Oh, pleaseforgive me. Look, the luggagehasarrived.Now
{Rtr S,ìà*rì;wrwrìâ tg{n-srcrqÈrqs{r +s r*rvc àS you must pick up your luggage.
rhr Hrrlsh But my luggagehasn'tcomeout yet. Doesonehaveto rüâit
r;qR 3ÍfËrffi eq€'Èqr, d'rArfi'ì Ètr, àqf r q, *fi s rìrò r a long time heÍe.oÍ what?
Nlrmal Probablynot. It usually doesn't eventakefive minutes.
ffi *rs@q6w<rmrffivrft-qnff ffi6 rqrrrí cfr
f<1à1, acÉ I err+crqÌ*{r, q +E6 | After frve minutes:

{RTÌ qïq,.rãÈor r Harlsh It still hasn't H^ it been lost on the \üay or

ffi something? "o-"'.
avr€tqÍ{FqEÈrÈà*lìffiHììâ?
Nlrmal No needto worry. I'll go inside and get youÍ luggageout.
ËRqr t'iq r<rrà q<oq-{smcr r But you mustgive me ten rupees.
f{dr eïa rq-Atqra++srqgq aqrffiqr ç+'{q {firqÌ qfr qFE r Hârish Ten rupees?I haven't any Nepali money.I must exchange
qh acr{à{qÉcÈ ç{ tqÊtr{Ì ltrìa{f( lÈftÈdcrÈ somemoney.
r
Nlrmal There's a bank over úere. Go úere andexchangeit.
3ÌI's" R Á (Royal Nepal Aü After frve minutes:
xluTt e6"i"1
Corporaúon) +mrÈ passport Nlnnal Done?I-ook, your luggagehasâÍrived. Now you musttake
f-q< cowpastuÍe qtq ,o open the luggageandgo towaÍdsCustoms.
firqr yisa wÈ-self,-oneself At Customs...
 Harish Hello, hello. àar-È@sÌnìqwir Boys and girls shouÌd speak
Customs official Show me your passpoÍ then. Where have you the tuth-
comefrom today?
Ilarish From I-ondon.ShouldI openmy bag? The affirrnative constructionis commonlyusedto pÍescribecorrett
Customsofticial Yes. We haveto takea look inside.Did you oack behaviourin generalterms:
it yourself? Ê€rfqsìX€râqr<\irÌt I StudentsshouldreslBct their
Harish Yes, I packedit myself. There's nothing special teacher.
in it apartfrom clothesand suchlike. qààffiqrAwil Everyoneshouldbelieve
CustomsoÍIicial That'sprobúly how it is, but we haveto look, in God.
whatto do?There,thar'sOK. It,s done. ffiìqrffqrqrrfffir A husbandshouldlove
Nirmal Comesir, I'll call a taxi for you. Give me your his wife.
luggagetoo,you mustbe tired,I'll carryit.
Ilarish There'sno need,it's not heavy. ffrs mB?
oÍmurq çÕdrõÍrfiÈol?Êl
Ninnal How far are you going? Have you madea hotel
reservation? tr6 dÈdrà
üt,rfuor? stqdr
Harish No need.There'smy brother,shousein Naksal.
Nirmal That's that then. To get from here to Naksal by Èt ffi rr{íôrçõÌìdI es c-'crsìBrcrcfrqt|6r rfrexrÈmwftrr
taxi costsabout100rupees.Arìd you mustgive w6ì RÍãRgrd tõ 5È{ mvreâftàpÌ m çq r ,ÌrÈçg I
me 100too.Thankyou. Seeyou again! Èr ïì k*r fqrEtqdr qÌM dì {ra Èì r dt aS5wntrì rrn r rtln
rn* qraq,ãrfrõõi
'rffiõÌ r.ftlÌàtfirqÍqhs-d{ sÈ qd 'frí' {rcnÉdq{
q{ìqqr
drdrstdr{ì srun
Grammar rm r ìnm at* an Èì e rcìÌ 'rd dffi niìÈ
rrí âr r rr{aìc-.{rfli õrcÌfrâtí'clTir sÉq{ arnçdr
99 Must, shoutd,don,t haveto
The combination of the dictionary form of a verb with third person
singular forms of úe verb c1 Ío .Íai,(có and viï in the presenitense.
and cìIÌ and f'í in úe past.lis used to express meanings such as
musL need to, should, have to, and ought to. The two words âIe
joined together when wÌitten:
rfro ft qü SGc
ilfrì a{fi Rq @
ú Íaft{ìÊ wrEcfr{Í{írqfrírisÍíaF I

in N€pali
I UNICEFadv€ítisêment
ffie
must be / should be / hasto be / ought to be ho flìainh€adingtransldes'To b€ ablgto live heatütilyis a hu[ìan Íighl,every'r/oímn
Stt " dtooldgêtüis rtlht
qE mustspeak/ shouldspeak/ hasto speak/ ought to speak

If the sentencementions a person upon whom this need or obliqation The meaningof the negaüveconstructionwith È is not exactly the
'falls'. s/he must be marked in the sentence_ oppositeof this. RâtheÍthan sayingúât it is wrong to do something,
with the posçosition
-írq lt tne verb rs rntransrtlve:
it simply stâtesthat theÍe is no needto do it:
Êd@rìf{qïv-ïÈ you do nothave to eaì-{€{râ q rr'a.,dcrfà ìtaÈ i I will tell them,you ilo
|
not neÊdto.
cotne tomorTow.
r{rtgrawro, avr€ìÊna{à r I have two pens,you do not
- or wiú -à if the verb is transitive: needn buy (one).
 f.<ìffi.rEqr{rs{qìfu r A pretty girl doesnot needto @rr6tnrcr€ +ar-wrÈì YesteÍdayI had to run herc
wearjewellery. arÈ*q$.ò t and theÍe to manyplaces
The word d& is commonlyusedon rts own, rvithout beinÂattached in town
to a verb.to meanno needor don't bother
However,the sameconstructionis usedwhen the speakeris talking
q dsrâ lrrÊrcffr Íàq( :rrtq r i*, r bÍing aboutúe irnÍnediatepresent,becâusehe considersthe obligationthat
{ somewaterfoÍ
you, OK? pÍessesupon him as he speaksto have 'fallen' in the past tense.
qrfi-ftrg€*arrrfro r No need,we have two Becausethe obügationhasalready'fallen', úe speakerexpresseshis
bottlesof watet intentionto carry out the action without further delay:
If a needor obligationto be somethingoÍ somewhere.falls, uDonan ïrffi qrnqr &à qrlò, ffi {-"{c-S I Mud hasgot on to the child's
inanimatenoun, that noun takesneitherì nor qtâ: clothing,now I mustwashit.
q,f,{frqrs"rïì lffitd-dmôì{ Laok, teacherhasanived.
acÉ+ì q-ffiqr Èvr d {ìwi I There simply.mustbe money
rqg-ì t Now we mustopen(our)
n your Pocket. booksandrcad.
EXERCISE 58 Change the following statements of fact into ìqd qtq fi{ffi {< F€ t{qÈ{r The Íestaul.antwill closeiu
statementsof geneÍalobügation. ' Íir" minutes.NowI must
È-Sr.fr r
Example pay the ü11.
e qt+ Èt wfuewro | <r*r€ qì+ È< *fur wr-rqtir EXERCISE 59 Change the following statementsof fact into
He goesto the office everyday. = He hasm go to the ofriie statem€ntsof pastoÍ immediateneed:
everyday. Example 3rdq sÍFE I = a|-dlrefÉ sl1q-ì |
e6È+fel+fwuÊt sFort qÌr Êfi qFFqEr-{qiï @r'rq{t= @qcr{qt$ìït
He doesn't go to the office = He doesn't hdve ta go to the r ffiS{I c{cÊíflc-+ì qk{ Errrq; I
every d.ay. office every day. ì ffifilfr qffirrrlqfõÌ |
r üfrffiq-srqÉïr ì 3rdÌTsïÈvtE I
t Ìò rrnAÈ*ÈcsrqrÌrdnF6 I ! rê"TÌqq tI{ +IITIÌTFTI
I {rq È{r È, {rfi-üÃqfussrcËìì r €*AsT{{€èflrtTqn1 |
( ttsfÌ sTFfl{qr{ E|{ìïqï | -
v s-fi-{sËfud +qrm+r3à+qr
r qifl{ q?qçrffi raÈçrq qrscr ffi rrd r
e. qtq q rÌrd q-frsFfi 1ifr ffi ç6[sa5;5 I
10í The verbs frq andfrrrit
The verb ÍìE is very versatile, and can mean to come together,
1OOMust, had to match,fit, get along,etc. It is bestexplainedthroughexamples:
The obviousmeaningof a verbfottowedby úe simplepasttenseof I That colour rcally doesn't
(I1 ro fal aqÌür + tÍSrr r-{à R{
lcTd e1vÈ) is an obligationin thepast: match with this colouÍ.
@ wr+r mE;rfr avç rqrÊ rqR yesarday theÍe weÍeno õfqrqr fr qià fu++ì Èq I Thiskey hasn'tfitted
{rÍr-r I vegetablesin the houseand thelock.
$irao+Ì õrr fm'{ÌI I They cameto an agreement.
**É .Ã:i; f:r:Xi'-iïoIí'*
*r* qtuq{< ftrà,çr.*{Rqr qq #gqi afr qTq3rf{ fr€{ | In this sentencethatword is a
rrqï qEqü r "
office was shit, so I díd not little unsuitable.
have to go to town,
 Èà ôa qrsr sffirr <rÈ*nrfrs rMy songers alongwelÌ with

The veÍb fqïrr.ïí is the causativeof fuq. That is, it causesa coming
together,a mâtching,etc. ând translatesinto Engüshas to uo*gl
assemble,adjust,fuing togetheÍ, soÍt out:
de qfr€rìvà, vrffr r<rq That'sa little expnnsive,
fucrc{Ê1{qr shopkwpr. Pleaseadjust the
price for ne
Èfr +fr *ì \zì r cw frerv.ar=à
r Whattine shallwenÊt
tomomw? We must aÍÍange
a time.
whvfuq{ r+vrrftere.ar=fr
r Waita nmnent, won'tyou.
I haveto tidy my haiÍ.
a-etlriEed g<rfuaÈ1q6 Now you are in agreement.
rqqrs{d{ | Pleaseshakehands-

&) qt
{
úl I
I o
rl
-
fõìJr.

-q
o tr u

oo
É

CL =
II

ã
o
1+

In ihis unit you will learn

. how to ask and statê what is
Íight and what is wrong
. how to ask and state what
one is allowêdto do
. how to identiíy some bãsic
facts about religionin Nêpal
 El2Z Americansat Pashupatitemple or+rqrasd E{ g{r qrsï Èà{t
Jirn has been living in Nepal for tbree months, and he is showins fqc ffiEï ErmÊT iìT\r+Ìì Íìrí qÈ s+ È4 ìrâ6 lilr qÉ{r+ì 3iitrí
fi qÍí;6 FF ?
someAmericanfriendswho havecometo visit him thesiúts of thã
KathmanduValley. He wondersif he might take themintúashupati c6i'qrrrfr dqrrr<r "i( s .fr FÈ Fqà 6rH ïd o Íì teqs{rt
temple.The policemanat úe entranceexplainswhy he cannot. yrwfr rr=o1| ilrftF Er.Ffrôrr a d g<rì rc*raa-frq r
qìFrlz1r{t|Èwfr q|d àfu;6 rFrEï rr.õqld,frT@ +rwr
TdË*qETgq I e{s+ì sÌ4 Ffq Ëà{ tsÈ 3r{kd €rE I
fwr gà ra<t.refrrrào r svqstÈ r
r6t fsr, yerfrrr^grrtr!ryreSqtil *"\:ofr $ of rerd
qrqqr EÈ{ qqrqkflar+Ì qk{+ì flià trÈ E{q àì cç6l
fuq ircicrz qt<trÈ +È tr< 6-.5t
r6t ço, ç+<È&+ e ra<ffi,r Èsr,ÊàSr@.nqc Èt
$< rg,rafo.sa
1

c8 there:in that veryplace -!F<rc\ the other side of

frsrç{ fo feacá aq to be covered
qqffi a follower of a reügion qd tulloc.k
rqr< utteÍance,somethingsaid ft ro"ross
fqq üfr qÊq{fi{ïqn €;6 r qdiï meanng 1< deadperson
Írâtq ancient Eír31 to bum, cÍemate
*tffr avrif. E<ìrr+reqrfiìï(rÈ ? frfiqq place of pilgrimage ffiW to takeaphotogryh
q1ïadimqoper
fur 6rfi-q€qìfudwË qrq+ r ffiv special
i.r+q Íüle fu vq.Shiva temple
sëfrÈ{ ?{fr ïÈffi +qçioavr€rur{o ffi rrw +-qÌfttrà r @qr leatheÍ <w vrew
frq {âi 3{Ìf-frrqr3ìÊqfr ffii IqfË,ììqÍq qà+ fi-qtrÈ,nrrÈ rr.v ôq to be made fru.ri ro be careful
qftq cos11y21d,comlnund grq trouhle
ilfrqF<<Êrd.. {rerftqÌfl fúe Baérnaü river ..
r{et iì-È,srìFadrqrqt{ ffi ìÍrqrfufi qE"6 r rrqrâcrü fr\r{ rìqrfr
furrsì qrfrs-{€Eï r
Jlm Ìs it all right for us to go into the temple?
fwr rvr< oq rra*Ìe + grfrvÊr<Frrra il.6 f{ gfi? Policeman Which country haveyou comefrom?
l-6t evr€ftatrtie-qS6çgo r Jlm We havecomefrom America.
fqq èrqiffi* qÈà g r Èì gÈrÌ r Policeman Is that so?'WhatgoodNepali you speak!Wheredid you
leam the Nepali language?
eqt Tírt+ì Tilc-q,
dqr{R gSil€r
Jlm Right there in America I leamed a üttle. Now I have
fu F,*tqa-* tqr$-{€túq nìì\rqÈr
rr<vràacÉërffi Êr*cs lived in Nepal for threemonús. Can we...
Rlqq? Pollceman Aho, can you leam Nepali languagein America too? I
c-tô {È frFàï rà qrlcffi {k{ ffi {ììr<Í Frâ-{ frúFq-{ didn't know. Are úere peoplewho teachNepali?
raà avrÊfi ï-{r Jlm There âIe plenty. Tell me, is it or isn't it all right for us
fr flcd rosq *; ffiq fTffif€ ïrr6a 1
to enterúe temDle?
fqTfrü"ì fuËq+-dÉqa-ftr* cq f{@ r+frftqìTq'cÊ sììì
Policeman Are you a follower of Hinduism? úvisable is / is not aI ngfu. Often,no subjectis mentionedin these
Jitm What doesdharmãvalanbi mean?I didn't unde$tand. sentences, which are often generalstatementsaboutwhat is and what
Policeman Wïat I meanis, are you a Hindu? is not co[ect behaúour:in suchcasesit canbe understoodto meanone
Jim No, I am not a Hindu. lvin you not allow us into the should..oÍ one shouldnot...
templebe€ausewe are not Hindus? qkrrr Tdr{rs{ ãÈ{r One shouldnot wear shoesin
Policeman It's a bit inappmpriate.This templeof Pashupatinaúis a tenple.'
Nepal's mostancientpilgrimageplac€.Thatyou should fq rrri nlvr< .n€ +q gia I According to Hindu rcügion,
know. So special rules apply here. The priests only it is wrcng to kill a cow.
alloìv Hindusto enter.And evenif they are Hindus,no- trliq--{fl-{ qrt
Ewrff t'Sfr ït &{ Accordingto Istamic
|
one is supposedto wear anythingmadefrom leaúer. Íeligion, it is wrong to
Jim It doesn't matter. It seemsthat becâusewe are not eatpoÍk.
Hindusthereis no quesúonof going inside.But canone *
get to look at the templecourtyard? Nofe The solesof the feet oÍ shoesare unclean,and shoesshould
Poüceman On the far side of the Bagmati river over úere, the be removedbefoÍe enteringthe interiors of houses,temples,e!c. It is
hillock covered by trees, right? They call that alsoinsulting to sit with one'slegscrossedin sucha way that the sole
Mrigasthali. Crossthe Bagmaúriver by that old bridge of one's shoe is in front of anotheÍ peÍson's fâce. Sirnilarly, carc
over there.From the bridge you can seeRajarajeshwari shouldbe takennot to let one's fe€t passóove any paí of a Nepali
Ghat.* ïìere, Kathmandu'sHindus bum their dead.lt penon's body, nor shouldone touch anotherprson on úe crown of
is not right to take a photo of that. It is extremely the head.
improper. The alternative negative forrn of fl (E-q instead of frt) is also
Jim I've understood.But what is there at Mrigasthali?Just frequentlyusedin thesecontexts.The subj€ctof a verb in a s€ntence
Aees? of this type musttâke -ì if the verb is transitive:
Policeman No, at lVíÍigâsthalithereare many Shiüashrines.Therc
f(frìfirààiqfí6.ï, You should not eat no mwh
aÍe lots ofmonkeys too. You cansit in the sunthereand qfrffifr qfï( Ëõ | spicy (fnd), but it's OK to
look at a very fne view of Pashupatinath temple. eat a LitÍle.
Jim Is it all right to take â photo ofúe templeftom there?
Policeman Yes, that's ósolutely fine. But be careftrl úth the
monkeys. You shouldn't give the monkeys any fruit. 1@ They dont allowyou to...
Tbey'll give you houble. Nepú uses the verb f<X to give lo mean Ío leÍ or to allow. Tbe
*.
Noúe A ghãÍ is a steppedplaúorm leadingdown to a river. GhãÍs subjectof Ê{ will usuatlytake -ì in all tenses,to makeit absolutely
are often used for úe performanceof religious devotions and âs clearwho the subjectis. When oneof the fiÍst peÍsonpÍonouns(rÍ or
crcmationsites. qrfr I ls tle subject,howeveÍ,it is unlikú to take -à exceptin past
tenses.The sEuctureof sucha sentenceis typically:
Allower+ -à Personallowed+-qr{ Infmitive R (Ío alÌow)
Grammar qì q{cr s{qÍ€ Tè qrï È{ã r I did not allow him to smoke
1ü2 Is it ail rtqfi b... ? Usingthe infinitive a cigaÍette itt the house.
with 6<rfir r6ftìfrffitktrrgtrcret Thepoücemanprobably
Êàl òqr I won't allow you to wear
The combinationof the infinitive of a verb + fo / {àí expresses
shoesin the bmple.
meaningssuchas should/ úoúil not,is / is not peÍmifred is / is not
 q-frfu{{<rrqÌfrfrì?{fràÈr Why haveyou stritcheil off The English translation of each of úe above sentencescould eouallv
rqrÈ erc-{RTõíÈsc r the üght? Switch it on and begin becausethey are Newats... urd. because sheis old...
let me read the newspaper, The addition of cÈ (even, ajso) ro rÌ\rr makes üe sentrencemean that
won't voL! although what is stated is indeed the case, oúer things are not as
16Ír<r vrfv wn Èàa1rvQÈvÈ Qheg;on't tet you go might be expecled:
sÌr{I6 | higher than this.Theteis a È+r<vq{ cF{çfi-{F ffiqÈ Despitebeing NewaÍs,they
dangerof landslitu. drcq r
* speakonly Nepali.
Note The Nepali eqúvalenr of ro suaÍcáon is d! ro open.while Despitebeingold, my
Ío sm?cáoffis .Í< qì. ro sãur Sqr<firftqwmrÈìr
r*T qt-<(qFtd.6 | gÍandnotheÍgoesto the
EXERCISE60 C.eite fi],e serrtences along the following lines: templeevery day.
allower allowee place/ time verb allow?
I people in my house smoke X 105 Religionin Nepal
= qqF,kF-drâfrqqqrs-+ë qrí ffi 1 Religionis anintegralpaÍ of tradiúonallife in Nepal,which is úe only
allower allowee place/ time countrJin theworld with Hindúsm asits official reügion.Theconcept
verb ajlow?
I mother my friends in ourhouse of qq GightÊousness,duty, morality, rcligion) çervades maly
drink alcohol X
2 úey us into the temple go acüvities,andreügiousconcepÍshaveplayedan importantÍole in the
/
3 elder brother children in the moming Bhâpingof society.Môst Nepali-speakingpeopleare Hindus, though
watch TV /
4 father us in the evening go out there are many Buddhist Newa$ and Buddhism is also prevalent
X
5 you (High) touÍists in the temple aÌnongthep€opleof thehigh mountainregions.Islamis represented in
wear shoes / ?
mostTarai towns,and thereis a Muslirn communityin Kathmandu.
TheChristiancommunityis very small.
104 rïc{ being and rrs{cfr dêspitê ôeirig
s{\rt,the -q{ paniciple of g , is commonlyusedto point out the For Hindus,religion consistsin úe worship (fw) of specialbeings
cause (gods:à, ia6r; 4 Oarticularúmes(certaintimd of ttìe day,holy dats
of something,in much the sameway that the
-Ç6Ì participle is used of the weekor month,annualfestivals,etc.),in particularholy places
in combinationwith -à to createa paÍ of a sentencebegi;ing with
(ata fanily alur, at a temple,etc.).Theysharea beüefin theprinciple
because.When ïTç{ is used, however, the cause is stateà bss
of rebiÍh. theconsequence of âctions1rf). andtheillusory;atureof
ernphatically:
lhe mâterialworld ({crQ. The ultimate aim of reügiouspracticeis
ìqrc vqi e+{€ ffi * È-*o +o* Being Newars,üny spak dcliverance(frq) from the endlesscycleof birú anclrebirth,but most
ÌTqTqFT Hindussimply hopefor a betterrebirth throughúe accumulationof
Bhashatoo.* mcrit ouq).
Ètr5nrenr$vwr.{rcàtrq Being old, my grandmother lìuddhism and Hindúsm are closely intertwinedin úe Kathmaadu
rnqËõr very seldomconresout Valley towns, and sornetimesit is difficult to decide whether a
of the house. püÍlicular temple has a Buddhist or a Hindu dedication.For many
*
Nore The ofEcial namefor the Newari languageis ìyÌir vrw. The Ncpalis, the distinction is meaningless.However, Buddhism is a
KathmanduValley, whereit is úe indigenouslanguage,wasknown distinctreligion which, unlike Hindüsm, hasa founder,the historical
âsqqFTuntil the pÍesentcenttrry. Ituddha called Gautam4 who is also given the title Shakyamuni.
Buddhismsharesmany beliefsin commonwith Hinduism,but it has
n tlillbrent concepúonof the conceptof deliverance,which is firqiq,
ihe 'snuffing out' of desire. Unlike Hinduism, Buddhism is also
practised by monastic comnrunities. The religion has its own
pantheonof deities.Of Íhese,tbe Bodhisatwas(beinsswho have
delayedúeir own attairurent of ffi and have voweã to work for
the enlightenmentof all sentientbeings)are widely worshipped.
To stâtethat a paÍicular deity is worshippedat a particularplaceor
time, usethe verb phrase-d F* W
*$<<wr6d1wrço r Mahãdevis woÍshipryilat

worshippedin thegreat
festival of Dasain.
EXEBCISE 61 Translateinto Neoâli:
A Which god doesthis templebelongto? Is it alt right to go inside?
B This is úe temple of Gânesh.Yes, it is âll dght for you to go

z
inside,but you must tâkeyour shoesoff.
A Is this a very old temple? q I
{1.,

oo
B Yes, it is very ancient.Peoplecomehereevery moming and do
püjã of Ganesh.
A
B
Why do they haveto comehereevery moming?
They do not haveto come,but it is goodto comqhereevery day.
If you do püjâ of Ganeshevery moming your day will be { I' qt
A
successfirl.That is a belief of ours.
What shouldI do now?
rl
r
g) =
B You havedonedaÉan of the god, and that is good.pleasegive I
sl
o
II I
a üttle moneyfor the temple.
A I do not havevery much moneyon me. But perhapsit will be âll

B
right to give ten rupees?
Yes, that is fine. Pleasecome, it is late. Nolv we must go to
Paíupatitemple.It is not so far. If we walk üere we can reachit
q)
in half an hour.
A Which deity is worshippedat Paíupaútemple?
B Shivaji is worshippedthere. ã
-

ln this unit you will leaÍn

. how to us€ ths Nsoali verbs
that meancaÍÌ
. how to describêvêós
. how to talk aboú leaming
and teaching
. how to talk about wanting to
do something
Cl28 How manylanguagescan you fiqT language q;q 9ths1
qq to get to, Íunage to
speak? ìq to speak
q\ to be able to gn old man
Ëri{TE fir{{if,{crrnqr*qvwr.v r Rr mrik q! old wonan
qÍí!{NÍ mothef tongue {Er-{Tô-{€ young men and women
ffiqq flïffitqàfu ì fqqqrcrduE rfrq rnqrÌÌ qmïrqr à È r
cÍ<s Íeality 1rE${ ttìe stalsnÌn Indian TV channel
ÌÌ erÊïfuq rrrqrqrqrd 1u q€r È r qïg one t seÌf È'à rarely
efirrq fqq rrrsÌ dqrfi ïEïrqr ì ò{r, a< acrffi qrÊrìTrfr cÍì q.r birrú gui ancesÍor
à*rrr.drrqrqdo, È{ï r s@ word Ê{Èsrqrfi Brtisli Á.rmy
gâ boú RïeE ro reoeive('consume')
ft-qÈ*qfuq rnqrÈì qrqwe m r+rqrà, il{ fffr sÈÈfu ì q ìqffr fircaqrq to get by, fiincüon a pnsion
$rqr cÍì dìrq I qrcí{qr qnrÌrqr rTÈ à È I qmà q-.qaru czà at al| .rçq surprse, amazement
ffirrrcrÈtdqrqwraffirncrÈ r rra qd usualy, mosÍly Erq to k?ow
ëirrw Èr Ê+<r{qracÉ qrgrrrqrrì sr<{rg fr gà *f Èr cq6o r
ffiÊfr fl{r qft ffi rnqròfr ffiÍf;Ìr r Harsharaj How many languagescan you speak?
Tilbikrâm I speakthe Limbu languageever sincechildhood.The
ftrqkrq {df{É ìqrqÌ ì-q 3rr$à{|
Limbu languageis my moúer tongue,in fact. For me
a,irrq çr*qr$èq r úe Limbu languageis like mother's milk.
frrqÈmecfrròín,mÈìwqr$s+{Íw€ r{sTI ìcffrqr firr *nsr Harsharaj The Limbu language might well be your mother
tq-üE rarÈ rnÉ6rffi-qF'È{Fflè,r<T ErÊ{ qqR-+ì qrfir tongue,but for you Nepali too is like a secondmother
tongue,isn't it?
{rE1 3rq{r+rq tÊ rr €ld qrf{Fas o* q+ TrsnrrdÌ Tilbikram The Limbu languageis the languageI learnedfrom my
*oT r.-+Èrr{"Tìcfi-{FÊ{,qnÈd rqìilqq€fu+ïqÉàfi r
mother, but I also speakNepali from a young age. In
rfr 1er$t-6= Èt r* EàvÈ rnvr ìw çqï q-{Èq r
reality, what does'moúer tongue'meân?Is it the
qfi.Tq frq{ ìvrderÈd <cr€õn€ T{ T{ Eïces qÌ{q qfÈbï r languagespokenfrom birú or the languageleamed
ft-qÈnqq @ Sff wq t l1fr wfr ô-q ch {ïe rìcrôìrfi-{€{Ê fiom your mother?
H Tn rqid qrà 5*t rgqrq{â'{- ffiqr qrcr F HoÌsharâj I think you can give both thosemeaningsto the word
ftfrr6s & r qFr+rqìvrqqr ç.<rfiï qfr eiiqrt.E rF $ï 'moúer tongue'.Can your moúeÍ speakNepali too?
{$È gar-{sfr qqffi qrË-.oïìqmqrr Tllbikram Shecan't speakNepali.
^ Harsharaj Not at all?
ehrq deS reÊ llÌ g<r+r ìzÈâ-qs qrwr qqfu€ q<r srd
Tllbikram It's not quite like that, but sheknows very little. Faúer
qÈ41.gn-r e r +ir*.6{dgqr Mr crì Èí{, sÈíÌ cÍï ìq
can get by in Nepali. The men of our villâge travel for
r-ecfuffir trade or they woÍk outsideúe village, but the women
fttltf{nq mì;zÈáE€wì fe-r, {Ì-fr vrer *Ìe rd àg gr6s vÈ o1 generallystây right in the village. So they don't get to
d* ÌnÈfl reô-q€Èì qÈ ÈÈsr qrff+Ì R'q qFbï r*fi learn any languagesotherthanLimbu. And the old men
qÌ? È-{ï, õÌ8-+ô qrr6s a fr-S vrvr r.er fi wq rrrw*d andwomenusually can't reador wÌite any language.
Harsharaj What languagescan you speakexceptfor Limbu and
T<rÈÈ rcd vqfir q{r€ qfr fi'frfua qc qrÈ fir* r
dcÊilÊ{F dr-frfç6qaqÈí r Nepali?
Tllblkram I can understandHindi and I can speakjust a little as
{ti{rE dffi I q qd{ {€ er {Ìf, skï rqtqrs .rf, e qq iÍr.6 m well. It's not so hard for Nepali-speakersto understnd
eiìú qrÈ crft ràqràqÈr Hindi. The youngmen andwomenwatchHindi filrns ât
 the cinema. Nowntluyr. y(,u can get to watch lVhen discussinga penon's abiüty to speaka language,a corffnon
Doordarshan in Nepnl {r wcll. It's rareto find young construcúonhasit that the languagecomesto úat person:
peoplewho cannotun(h.r$tntì(l Hindi in Nepaltoday. qcrâ ffi qfu qfr qÈs r I know just a little Nepali.
Harshara.i That's true. And the chilchcnol the new generationare
ffi-€{trfr+dq3{rÈremàqqÊàí ì I can sryakhglish butI
not illiteratelike úeir unccstors, are they?In schools
ca nt wÍite ìt.
úey leam to write and rt:rd not only Nepali but English
too. EXERCISE62 Vy'ritenine shortNepali sentencesstâtingthat eâch
Tilbikram But it's not just childrcn,thcreare alsosomeold men of the personson úe left is able to oerform eachof the verüson the
in our village who cüD spcakEnglish. Most of úem rigbt:
receiveBritish Army pcnsions.And thereare someold I speakNepali
men who cannot only spcukbut can alsoreadEnglish. she(Middle) cook Nepali food
It's amazing,you know. At one time I wantedto leam you (High) understandthis book
. English too. Did you ncvcr want to leam English?
Ilarsharaj I can read Engüsh but I can't speak it. I'd like to 1O7 To get to, manage to
practiseit but I don't hoveü friend who knowsEnelish. qTgl meanscan in the senseof getting the opportunity to/managing
Whatto do?
Ío. It suggeststhatpermissionhasbeengranted,or thatciÍcumstances
are in some other wây favourable. The difference in meaning
b€trveenqïnX andqst is particularly markedin negativesentences:
Grammar q!-sffr q ìcfô +fr crtÈ{ | In London I can't (alon'tget
106 Io be ableto... the chanceto) speakNepaíi.
Nepali hâs two veÍbs that mean can. They are each used in ìqmqï Èà dÌ-fr fufl qrïÌ t In NepalI couldn't (diiln't get
combinationwith the infinitive of a veÍb. <q meahscan in a way thechanceml leam Engüsh.
úat refers to the iúerent or physical capability of its subject to 3{q TFT'CIST {.6í Cì\FÍ| He could not (üd Dotget a
perform the verb in question: chanceto) climb EvercsL
qrsqqr dqr{ T<{ qtï qrs€-ï t You won't be able to (won't
g qrr{qÌen qEï $16 | He can climb (is capable of getthe chanceto) eat
cümbing)Evercst. - gundrukrn london.
s grFçqrqr qdï {Èí I Ne cannot cümb (is not
capable of climbing)
The passivefonn of cT<{ , i.e. ctq! , can also be usedimpersonally
Evercst. to statethat somethingis permitted,or that the oppoÍunity exists to
In sentencesin pasttenses,the subjectwilt take -ì if the verb that it do something:
was able or unâbleto Derformis transiúve: w-s+rnffiqÌqcrt-{ r In London one doesn't get to
Present tense Past tense speak Nepali-
qrà *ffiqr v{Í{qTqrs-.dïcr{à{ | Onecannot@etpermission
oavr€frgrgav+à | gn Sa q+{ r
s{ì dcrgaò
He can't understand what you say. He could,nï understand what to) climb EveÍest duÍing the
you sat4. cold weather
{qTEÍlìl-{ lr*f CIFTqrí6 | One gets(the chance)to eat
qdfffireq-€ (f<{ r qì çàft-arqcq qH r gar&:!k in the Helambu
I canl read that book. I couldnl rea.dthat book arca.
EXERCISE 63 Write nine short Nepali sentencesstating that each Rçrs1 is the causaúveof Íìq ând it therefoÍe meansto causefo
of the persons on úe left managed to perforrn each of the verbs on leün oÍ to teach.
the right yesterday:
he (Low) climb Everest
{rffi çser{aràrqÍâfr fiï'neï An old man in the uillage
they (Middle) make a phone call
frrrç+ìftrà r taught me to sing this song.
you (Middle) ear gundruk
+dfi vrrre<Í{5flÊ qnfl{qE{ Sheis teaching these small
firrr$à916o 1 children to read the alphabet.

108 Describing a verb A secondveÌb that meânsto teachis cõTgd,Ìvhich is actuâlly the
câusâtiveof g€ to read, to study. Thereforc,vari{ is only usedin
Nepali usually uses the infinitive of the verb (e.g. fufl to lean,
more academiccontexts, and only Ïenrs1 is used in combinaúon
leaming) wher.that verb is being describedwith an adjective.If you wiú the infinitive of a verb to meanto teachto...
wish to celebratethe easewith which you havemasteredNepali so
far, you might like to declare: acÉÈ6-drfiàqõrq€õ t What do you Each at
this school?
ìqFft fufr {ffi il.o I To leam Nepatiis easy. q ÍFl(í c-drs6{d I I teachmathemaücshere.
gf+ì qf<uf qf stnÈ o fa{rg His pronunciationis a flqõcÍ{õFqrERlÊì,r.ifu+rg-S6€ r what will you tÊlrjh
+r."rà sq+ì ìrrfr qs rrà o r üttteodd. So ir is üfficuh tlrechilúen to do today?
qrqqífi-{€-{r{Èsrs.r-iffiE t TodayI shallteachthem
ïrt.-*,.È{rq.{qqròq;b
I i,"tïff,,fff,i"lio#;0," to add up.
for money,
3Ì5qfò and rt|à can both be translated as difficu]t, but thev have Súool subjects
süghtly different connolaÍioDs..I|â means difÍicult in úe senseof EÊd€tq Histoty fq-ír{ science
somethingbeing hard or tough. while 3ÌqaIIà meaÍì6úat somethins rTfrlí Mathematics 3iÌfr English
is probleÍÌÌaúc, awkward or tricky. Tmq Geogmphy ffi Nepati

í09 Io leamto,teachto
fufl meansto lean.It is usedwith boú nounsand verbs;when
combinedwith anotherverb in a phnse mearútg to leam to... , tJte 110 7o want to...
verb that is leamedtakesits inÍinitive form: There are severalways of expressinga wish to do sornething.The
q ìcrfr $rqr ffi-q t. fust is to use the verb qrq to warf ro in combination with the
I am teaming Nepali.
qffiì{rqr\a{mql infinitive form of a verò:
I am teaning n read Nepali.
q ÈfrìrÌ ìnqr fu+ì fuE I gefrè r@ q.ea 5n q-< GúÍuji wantsto tell the
I was leamins chinese.
q fcfu4i ìrrqr +q ffi fi{qr I wasleamiig to write
ìcmqr dcr{ qrd cfil<Í(à qrFr6Rr }I4haÍsoÍ of presensdo you
Cbinese.
s.rqrc6. Ê+a <16ggo ? want to buy for your family
rs.È {r+ ËÌfrfu+às r Now Rame is leaming to in Nepal?
dÍive a caÍ.
The secondway of expressinga wish to do somethingis-to use the
T 93Ì oÈa** *r"* u- My daughterhasnotteamed past tense of the verb phraseffi Fflq ,which is $T FÍtr4Ì . This is
perhapsa morc typically Nepali way of expÍessingthe sameidea rFT
{Írà meanssomethinglike mrhd súuckor mind tended.It is in the
pasttensebecausethe personin questionhasin tle very rc€entpast
conceivedthe wish to peÍform whateverthe verb might be: úe wish
hasjust 'struck' himÀer. In their simplestform, suchsentencesare
structuÍedasfollows:
subject+ cÉ - infinitive verb - IIí qrrô
çqr€ s It;Ì qrÌà I I want to cïy.
s({r{ Tr qríT{ qrrà r He wantsto go home.
The negativeform is qìr itÈt:
acri{r{üffi{RT{qÈí ? Don't you want to stay at ouÍ
plüe?
tì, frSqrârfl-errrstÊ+-rr
rr crìï r Weü, why don't you want to
sing a song?
If the sentenceis about a wish that was conceivedin úe pastbut is
no longeÍ ent€Ítained,rFÍ dTl{ musttake the completedpasttense:
rvrâttqÌ Tì dfifiiâqT 1161r wand to soúyin wn
T{ {Frfi ÍqqÌ, í< ql-{;T I Anwican university, but
I could noL
gt
qt qe Sn-!T{â"-cfr-{r<-{Ê I wanted
s.rï $Í qq qFFFÌïsFÍÌ,í{ ïq{
n phoreyour
fam y whenI terched
c+
kt qtt t Nepal,but lcould not
find the number.
í+
Ir
J
1í1 Verbsmeaningto belbve
ffus Fnglisl yelb to beüeveEanslatesinto Nepali in severaldifferent
ways, and the questionof which veó to use dependsvery much on
o
context.The ttrrc€mâin verbsare:
CL
(-vÊqÌq
CqDffiqf
to accep\ rcgard we|l, Íespe.t
to in, have faith in o
qicìtsT
q aqrirì (râqr€Èf q];g r
'.ust as a factual
to accqt
'..uth
I respectyour elder brother o
1+
qFfÍrf
CHql"q I
q sfi-{s-d F-fl-fi Ê{r+rq rrËï |
a lot.
qf {r, +d qÊìlÊ I betievein both Hinduism
and Buddhism.
I don't /rustin what they say-
o In thls unlt you will lêaÍn
àft-WrqÈtfïrçrgÌRir I beuevestongly in thegús U

v@tdgnroretr@er
nd gúdesses.
It is difficuh to believe what
they say.
to
-
. how ìo talk about puÍposô
ând b€glnningto do
something
. ]ìow to talk about
nínembering and Ío€ating
 q-+r$aï
t6rfrrfu n=ò'r-$àv
DIZS Xatyanivisitsthe doctor fi-fi tÌEc,ert{ flÈq,ËrfrErs<rqr
frq sÊià{ r
Jivan takes his daughter Kalyani to see Dr Shresúa because she has
been complaining of sore eyes. sr.às r{FrràgqÍàc-{frrqffiqt{ffiËïc+E lq dcri{rÈ
q{,È trt Ê;q rwfr à$ fetgrr t*6n <ìg;r ffi gÊrr+
ú-fi +qÈqrs<vÈs r sifi à srr.FiïÊ&, àa r
3cÈ( @
sr. âs q-{È r*g.È( rqA-òqa,àqÈr
ff{í Ê+qgf€'qÈq. rrqflE rffn frq +-araqqtcsr
fifi <r+<erffi Ìfr oÌ{Ìffi qS<ìqrí{ qr\'+Ì rffi rrq'ô fiÍâ
er. Èw $ vÍì ffir cs{cr crf,-Etq,f{RÈqmàq rqR ffiÌï
ç <n fer wÌ r3rrdfe6ri arsaì Erìaì r'r 'rf qrfi rqfc iqÌ lrçt:rì qqÍ€Èqrs{ ìft qrsgòq t
gìcfu €ïE<qÉ Èlars1l-s rrì< qffi-{s {dr<6aRqRÌ r
er' aÌw q, es rÉrà <crtì... rrfr, ffi írq à È õ ? sr. Dr fi-{ì-.ndlêr4aúe: adidìoeattÌEdy
fiqr!ÍÌ f€{rqfr,sr€{ vÈ r ffi rL Afi cor*er,save,unking lnafii
ffi unwel (oppositeof tâ) ers{r frewood
er.4q qfr ftrfreÌr r ersà lead llcÌ smo.ke
{--qr!fr vr+ ili, er€{ vrà{ r Eq ÍoluÍ ffi a Wil,pltute,cauehürrtb
qr.,ìq t;r+Ì ãrs+Ìqrq qH Erf, errffi r cer<r 3TÈffi qq to staÍt,betn 3r'lq Ío boil
frEt{ r àqre{ úocooJ
-cl-oafter
ú-+t à8Ê<ïàfulr"ìEr(È ga.riÈ€ r@{ì< flArcdgìqÌer ctfr chiL1.ütile one qÌqftr medrcine
{rdT lïqfr F|gl ffi tongue fra Ío büY
gr. àq rrqcïrfr, lffirâs r ÍqqÍ üaÍfhoea Èf. again
r_(.qr!ftqiqr gc*€r-€isÈ r
er. Èq çr *È fui è'rqror rr+qrÈ 3Ìiqr$qf 1ìr. Jivan Hello Doctor Súeb.
t"qrfi <àqifl qE6ere-<rÈ r DÌ Shrestha Hetlo. Sit down, Tell me then, what's happened?
Jivan My daughter'sbecomeill and I have come to show
er" àq qÍqrrÈàËq qrc* r
heÍ to Doctor Súeb. She's been unwell for several
+enfr gn+n qc Sìcfu g6ï qìrà er€< qÈq rqfd-{r{qq dÈi#ì days. This moming she beganto say thãt heÍ head
t+üìflÈqtr+rEq.ÌttÈ r hurt. And when we heardthat \üe thoughtwe should
er" qq ãrs-àqi{$b ? show her to Doctor Súeb and we camein a hurry.
+-erfr eireÊ*EngÈ ffi, er+ervÈ rrEafirà rr* r Dr Shrestha Oh, you did the right thing... Child, what is your
nâme?
er.àq qÈÈÊqr Kalyani Kalyani, Doctor Saheb.
+-c+rofrç*rere< vri* r Ih Shrestha And your age?
er. àq asÉô ÉÌffi sçcq fri ffi 5S ç.s r Kslyani Sevenyears,Doctor Saheb.
q-fi Dr Shrestha Did heÍ headonly begin to hurt today?Shewasn't ill
+-ôqÈii qÈ qsdÉ È{r {rÈ Êrd er€{ vri* rÈvrmffi before this?
{rfrì ú-fi sq Êd q1ì sÊ firà ì{fr rs{rsrÈr àô c rrq'+ìÈ{, Jivan For severaldays she was saying úat her eyes hurt.
sr. 'ìq qrqr o"n€E-€àrfi ìrrt q{rg{g;6 r YesterdayI looked ânddiscoveredthat boú eyeshad
ú-{4 ç}werr<r@r becomered.
sr"àq çâffiftÌr Dr Shrestha Tell me child, how are you?
Kalyani My eyeshuÍ, DoctoÍ Saheb.
 Dr Shrestha Just show me youÍ tongueúen. Which eye hurts?
Kalyani Both eyeshurt, Doctor Saheb.
t'f qìT to go (in oÍder) to watch
frq çargr to send (in oÍdeÍ) to get
Dr Shrestha Wlrcn did your eyesbegin to hurt? |r{õrcI to come (in oÍder) to do
Kalyani My eyes began to hurt after I got to school on
Wednesday,Doctor Súeb. I satdown to reada book qrfi-qs<rwr*rqt ï{fr< sÌà oÌ t We aÍe going to the foÍest to
and at úat momentmy eyesstaÍed to hurt. cut frÍewood.
Dr Shrestha Doesyour headhurt too?
qF,òArÈ
qrqfrÈfr c-d ïn-S+ì This aftemoon a man from
Kalyani It was hurting this moming, Doctor Súeb. But now
lrrÊèf,qrgà6 | the next village is coming
it's better. to |ook at our cow.
Dr Shrestha And what úout your stomach? Sometimes,thepostposition-eTÍàis addedto úe irúinitive of üÌe verb
Kalyani It doesr'thuÍ, DoctorSaheb. to emphasizeúe senseof purpose.This is especiallynecessaryin
Dr Shrestha How is your daughter'shealthusually? spoken Nepali, when purpose is often expressed outside the
Jivan A few monthsago shehad diarrhoea,Doctor Saheb. frameworkof a ftìll sentence:
When shegot diarrhoeawe gaveher ,Jivan_Jal'and
rfrqs t6ï cìq-{r sïà q ?ftìcr Why aretheygoing a
she got better qúckly. Apart from rhat, noúins has
ÈftrrÊ r Pokhan. To watcha frlm?
happened. why haveyou enteÍedthe
fr*ts frq s-{frTïcÈâ t <rs{r
Dr Shrestha What do you cook your food on at home?
{r-{{rl ? forest? To cut frÍewood?
Jivan On a cooker,Doctor Súeb.
Dr Shrestha A kerosenecooker? Anothercontextin which purposeis expressedis one in which you
Jivan No, Doctor Súeb, we cook on fuewood.We ale Door wish to saythat someúing is neededin orderfor a paÍticulaÍ Yerbto
people,kerosene cannotbe afforded. happen.In this case,the posçosition -à qrFr for is âddedto the
Dr Shrestha The smokeinside the housemight have harmedher infinitive of the verb:
eyesa little. I will give you medicinefor this. And for sÈ fiffi qrÊr à qrR.o lqÌà What doesoneneedn takea
a few daysdo not forget to washher eyestwice a day, tqffi{rFÍ+{È{rqrR€ | phongraph?To takea
moming andevening,with waterthathasbeenboiléd phúogr$ryoutdacanwa.
andcooled.OK? qÌ ìH q-qrc-i-dÌ{rÊr Èì gea a+raft In order m play thisradio
Jivan Very well, Doctor Súeb, thank you. Where shouldI ffi, I had to buy a battery.
go to buy the medicine?
Dr Shrestha You cangetit in anymedicineshop.There,takecarc.If
sheis not betterwithin four dayscometo show(herto)
í13 Beginningto do something
me agatn. Nepalihasfour verbsthat meanfo begu. Theseare:{-Ë1,{õqi'
qlq, ândqTIt.

$fland$d
Grammar $ is a nounmeaningDeginntng.Thus,gt{ï meansin the beginning.
112 Expressingpurpose {ï€{is intransitive,while 1t tr! is transitive;they havethe senseof
to commenceand Ío sfarÍ rcspectively.They âre boú used as the
The infinitive of a verb can be used in combination with verbs
such mainveÍb of a sentenceandcannotbe combinedwith any otherveÍb:
as !TÌ1 to go, 3ÍTgí fo comq and also with oúer verbs, to exDress qTqrÌ ãFiFq rfr {ì $ ü'6 ? At what üme doestoday's
purpose.In thesecontexts, the infinjtive of úe verb mewts
in order proganme begin?
to do whatever the verb might be: qrfrà$ rFft*
+rrsÊffiwà rre 1The work is very overdue.
We must staÍtnow-
 Compare úe translations of the following sentences, one of which
e È{ and aTlT can boú be used with the infinitive of usesfl{ and the otheÌ qlq:
a verb to indicate
the beginning of an event or action. Although yÌc,I and qrrï boú
sqfuq Er{{rmo t He is on hiswayto thetenple/
mean to begin, there are certain tenses and contexts in which one
he is aboutto set out for the
should be used instead of the other, and in some contexts tlìeÍe is
temple.
some difference in meaning between the two verbs. Nepali-speakers
s qFq<qn qrRs t He hasstartedgoing to
use these two verbs raúer more than English-speakers use the
the temple.
English verb Ío begr.
The fust sentencemeansthat he has begunto go to úe temple, and
Eï!-I has the sense fo sÍaÍ fo... In the past tense, it means úat the
is currendy headedin that direction. The secondsentencesuggests
subject began to perform the yeÍb with which cÌq is combined, but
thathe wasnot previouslyin the habit of visiting the ternple,but has
it does not imply that the verb is still being performed:
startedto go Íeceníy.
gqk<qrq qïeà t He staÍtcdto go to the temple. qr.í is more suited than sflF{ to casual or involuntary âctions or
Èfr*fuâewrfrr My younger sisterstaÍted events,It never takes-à, even in the past tensewhen the verb it is
to cÍy, liúed wiú is transitive.
qlq is tansiüve rvhenit is usedúth transitiveverbs,
so úe subject
must tak€ -à in the pasttense: Further èxamples of erg and q]n1
qò qfic-{,ffiì.ì-f,iliqÌ? ÍIeyDqak whatareyoudoing?
$Frtmqffr | q rkrq]-q Ìd, qrqr ! I'm eatingrice, mother!
fÍom last Wednesday.
<rìx<ìtw*r<qrerFTrç+ffi r Fatherhad juststattedTorcad crfr q'iqr.fr rffiErdr dn1q-S I It's staÍtedto rain. Now we
thenewspawr. mustopenthe umbrella.
qre is usedin thepresenttensein situationswhere {rfrfuq@tudqqqfdffi From themonthof KaÍtik the
the subiectmâkes
a voluntarychoiceto performúe veó: Ër crFEr wealhüstãtsto fu Íadw cold

q qrÈrr-f,qrcs r I shall sbrt b do it today. 114 After doing something

*fràfueffiturqr"oìr He sayshe will start to learn The postposition-rrfu ater is addedto úe past tensebaseof verbs,
EngüshfÍom tomoÍow. wiú the -e- vowel forming ajunction betweenthem, to mean:
dl.T qrscfu after eating
iTltif has the sense to begin fo... It is very rarely used in the present
\tqfu afrergoing
tense, where it gives \üay to sITq. In the past tense, it often means that
r{ffi after saying
the verb has begun to happenor be performed. but is slill on_qoing.
For instance. the sentences q q' ì-rq {rÌ and c sì qn mr+ì
sàcfu aftergening up
E ,igit tTqqfu after being/becoming
be taken liteÍally to mean I began to go home and,I have begun igo
lrome but in fact they can both mean f anr going home or I am on my <raqrffiÈ {T{ràfficÈR After he had a nighanarein
way home'. f;Kreq qà{ | the ni4ht"he could not sleep
agan.
g rrr{, Íàfr {ffr El-{{rìrsì ? Hey, brother,whereare a1-qrqrqÈTfuff{rqqr{€{É AÍter motherandfather have
you off n? +,eàqtit died, who will look afteÍ the
q6fi-qqnqrHlffiÍìr I'm going to Thamel.What small children?
aboutyou?
rrffiâvncrÈt I'm on my way to Bhotahiti.
 ffi td{rqcrsà,-6ra-rv*qr rk I wentout aftcÍ I hadgot up qK is a noun meaningnernory or recollecâ'on.One way of saying
qrffiqErÈ<fuË r - in thepale early itawn, that you do or do not Íemembersomethingis simply to state:
waslredmy handsandface, Ifqrâ qr< g t ('to me theÍe is
f remenrbe.Ì
and bnshed my teeih.
memory').
Nore * In Nepali, one 'sees,a dreamor nishtmare. qfiâ qTEËq I I don't Íemember('to me
thereis not memory').
115 Rememberingand forgetting
Il pracúce,this constÍuctionis usedmost comÍnonlyin the negative
TheverbÊfr mean s toforget: to statethat someonehasno recollectionof somefact or eventfrom
6fr45{1ffivr* Don't foÍget us! the past:
qrç .l.idSÈ.+ì dcr€frrrc Ê{ r Pleaseforgive me, I have àÈìqffiTlrÈ tdcrffi Thisis somethingthat
forgotten yout name. qr4 ìàï È{[r I happeneda long time ago.
3nEf(frW{reffifuìqr* rilà Wy üd you colte home late Peúapsyou don't
ÊCrÊ*ì+rgr fÍom school today? Did you Íerrrember.
foÍget the way oÍ what?
In the constructionsthat use zlf(, the person who is or is not
N-ore * also the expressionqrq-r cTFiA\ ! üterally, don\ kijl
remembering is passive. S/he is not actively remembering or
affection,which means.don't forget me/us' or .keepin touch,.
forgettingthe matterin question.But the verb {F€1 is usedto mean
Êft is also combinedwith the infinitive of a verb to meanÍo foÍseÍ ta Íemembedrecallin a more active sense.As explained above,it
to... rarely occursin the negative,becauseúe verb Êfi ro forger fulfills
r+rur;.f,+ar.6 uoç4tìnr{r pleasetorgive me,I forgot to thatrole.
Êq
tqÈ r r< vrà tacÉìo{ì3nqrì{ At lastI've rcmembered. You
Í*o',.*<*"-"+mqrr{ffi
1 #:,i:;"#,tffif;: rìTl\'óì ftÌà, ÈEï ? said to comeat 6 o'clock,
maÍid he foÍgot to ask üdn't you?
for a girl.' 6frì {r€i { flfr @ ffi SometimesI recall my
Nofe * A proverb which describeshow in one's rush to set qtà< qitq t weddingday an'dI smiJe'
somethingdoneone can often forget somecrucial ingrcdient.
The causativeof {T{! is RTs|-gl, which literally meansto Íemind.
If you wish to tell someoneto rememberto do something,you should HoweveÍ,it is mostcommonlyusedto meanto explain/counsel:
tell them nor ro forgef to do it, using È+ìT: {ìf ÉÌ<r Êdü.rf qrà{ rssqr€ qk My sonrcfusesto marqt.
+flc-dsffEAffiffiè,fl AfteÍ you Íetum to England, {F{]!1àq ï I Justexplain thitgs to him,
inìRr Ë d ! Íemember (don't forge) to wouldyou?
ra'rìteus a letteÍ, OK7
trììTnÌ-ìHqr g{FIRT|tï Pleasercmembr (ilon't 116 BeÍoÍe doing something: postpositions
ïr*cçrq I füget) to listento ihenews beginningwith -ìr-<r
on theradio thisevening.
Thereis a set of trvo-woÍd postpositionsof which the fiÌst woÍd is
There arc two veÍbs that mean to ÍemembÍ _ rIrE and sìFgT .
Ët -rKÍ. Becâuse -rr€t is also used to mâke comparisons (see
Theseare usedin slightly different ways. Grammar 51), these postpositionshave at least a vaguely
comparativesenseto them. Three of úem mean before,and canbe
usedwith nounsor verbs:
 -T<rsRà befoÍe,Wuious to, ago ückots.Before father Íetumedútl the tickets I askedthe driver
-ìr<I3Tfr befüe, Fevious to, ago if the bus would also go to Dhúlüel' He said úât it would.
-q-<rflrIÈ beforc, /levious to, ago dlo said that úere was no questionof not going to Dhulitüel
3TFnrqi{ sü^qfuzRIàqqT\rscr Tenyearsagotherewasn't there is a good hotel there. Bpfore the bus sets out ftom
Frlms{qfíÌqq{ | for Panchkhalall the passengers(yãtnüÂrü) eat theiÌ
in úis paÍt
ïfïl:ashop meal there, he said. Suddenlyit beganto rain, so we all
v{ Rrt ïI<r cÈà rÈì qqqrqr qrqiïI BefüE19@no-onehú set & Dlaceto sit on the bus. After a few minutes ouÍ joumey
È++ìfqç{| fmt on the moon. began.
Thesethreeposposiúonsare alsousedúth verbsto meanbeforc.In
suchconstrucúons,-sf<t mustbe addedto the dictionary form of the
verb:
rF<-<Fr*rçr<rv@ElrcÌ"'r pleaseíemembr (ilon't
iRFfgRI I foÍget) to t3,keoff youÍ
shoesbfore going
into tbe temple.
wvqv<r wnÈt<MÍi(Ir€ * qiÌìfr AefuE going homeI wantto
rtrr <r6q l- give you ihisgift.
çr<rrÈ fc@ 6n g4I Wby üdn't yoi washyour
lì6;TïuÌq.FÌ? handsand feet beforcgoing
to bed?
EXERCISE64 Translateinro Nepali: .
My elder sister got married two weeks ago. Now she lives in
Dhulikhel (dhulikhel). Dhulikel is aboutten miles ftom Bhalranur.
Last Sundaywe went thereto meetheÍ husbandandher new family.
To get to Dhúikhel we had to take a taxi as far as Ratnâ paÍk. At
RâüÌa PaÍk we had to board a bus that was going to panchkhal
(pãcskhãl). Dhulikel is on the way ro panchkhal.
After we arrived at RâtnaPark fatlìer had to go into a shop.He hacl
forgotten to buy any presents(upahiir). you have to give pÍesents
when you are visiting someonefor the first time. Fatherhad to eo
into threeshopsro buy cloth (kâpâCõ),sweers(mifhãf and bangl-es
(curã). Mother beganto feel worried becauseit had begun to get
ratheÍ late. We did not know that it takes only one houÍ to reach
Dhulikhel. We did not know eitheÍ that busesleave (chupu) every
hour.
After fatherhadboughtthe gifts we beganto searchfor the Dbulilúel
bus. A man standing beside a new blue bus had besun to shout
(ksrãuu) 'Panchkhal! Panchkhal!'FatherÌ{,entto the;ffice to buv
 30 The map oÍ Nepal

tMoutrtâitrlI SsqtÊ fr{lfE

lTowd 4
Moutrtâiíl 2 qÊIurÌ
qFr{qÌ{TT lTowtrl5 5rS{

z
Moutrtaial3 flbwDl ó tÍ<ÍãFR
r+Ir
tTovúl I
[Iowúl 2
TracrsÌ
íqInFInt
tRiverlA
tRiv€Íl B
6!rm
T=^+

o
rfFl[t
J llowúl 3 Èq{r ÍRiv€Íl C

o
3 t'q)
il
4l ffi as1 ÈtÈq rqvqrailrâ ffi nÌqT àì g<r qrErcrs{
vqgar qvcÍâèìsfuffi ftÈfirr ffi ltt gf* o t

I 3
qt
ìcm{r SézrÈ6 <Ig-{€q rvtrcrr*e o r*a sïfr€ ïÈfií ffi
qca çr< qcà s r<fuurqr
q
ÊqEF r TfFctfrmq e
rrÍ€rr qtr{ rÈqÍ,tdËT{,
qÍì frFmqr<r c{
( qÈ{q qrndrì
ìrq-{cfr èfurE*
a-wrqrrí( {drcfi r lTr.d-qô ffi ffifr <tg {c-t t
tt õcl-âEfq"rffi firqmÈfu u*fr< q-flrfà qÈ dqr*è +i-q-ér
trrÈfr'+Èl{tcRffrsfuonrq-<ÍâÈds tsffdrtffi{€ cà€cfr

o
{ì
r.w retrt+ìqfiq çq-6q6 qfr sd viÍ{ qrccô sd qtrFs rqÈtr
vfrcrl-qÌsirdffi n-< +.€rsg€w Ef qÈ f{snEs qd Èffi tr{ qrqr
sfr{sì qf.c s'È{ Èô,rf crà rsÈà cffid úc qrì eÌfus rffiq,
ffi, qï{T{ { t{rrflR mri+r sr{c{€A t e<riqrìcl* qÈ Èãï,
ìffi, frsEt, q-cfr,qrt t qq qrqr{€qÈ qÌftrFFt
In this unit you wlll loam a-<r$Èãq-<T qIfr r{rê È*e rrdfrqfi-crrqqÈçfi+{ffiú6 |
. about thê g€ogrâplryoÍ fr€rìE€ ìfi-{Fqr qrï àq a-qq&, qrqì-{Fqlqà àq {rfr Tqq r
N€pal efi-6rrÌfr, ercr < erevr56sefr vrq rff{qr++ì dÈ sr€rr qEÉ
. how to usa bhamê to m€n -d{(ÍSfì-d+-qòtqr6à'*qrqq-
È*qrqdr*furqqftr<rçqçì{rqift
cúd ütd dtâ,t
. how to discuss ph!/sical
locdiong
 (qr qrfirqfrr+ì qrr{ 6 t aq{ s'R!Íà
"-qÈEÈrdãRqÈràffi c-{m{"i,qpoÍarÍ
rqrírr qTfrRE€ @rrq {rT+ÌdìíÌqÌ | 'IIn qrÌ+rq rffi rnqr{+ t6& àz ihe hill region
un gowiag dce, paddy iÍr$ túe cold season
u;Fw{g1ï cÈqqìqr{qrvt",m qq rr{ìcrdqÌ#r, g1q,rm. frq.
ìE úoplanÍ s{Íí the nfuy season
arcrffr{É irwr Èáq+tr fiql€s qF{àfuq I af to descenil qt4{qq necessary
qArS { ffi" È* o rqÍ e.rcrrvr,q-flg, q-q!Ìi, qq-{rfi q+ naize 7+ tuck
:ïr-<ï "rfu
qqr dqrc+r Ê Sfr áufÈlo qrâ car
vìr<r q.qr Êre-,6 vç-q r q-eiáqíìqt rrr€ .
q-Ers+Ìqq-ffi aw goat mqFt noneúe less
<Ì+{r srfr s 1q{ Èi-{r{€àqffi wrcrÈaaì
ìncrÉ{rfod6ts{-{F qtauf qFq qfr ïfiET+Ìrr@Ìq{qm ã{rqR
ÈI Look at the map of Nepal. From this you can discovermany
S{ frTTT si-sì +d'E€ ffi{ rr.dÊd{erq rfrqÈì sqiff.
things about Nepal. After looking at this Nepal's geognpical
rrrsâ { +Ìfr ì+{F Èrq-6.Eq!iq rqràqrcrfi ãc qd r.+t {rt!rì
fr situaúoncânbe undeÍstood.
qfdr{s Er*qr sf{r r a* sqircr crfr cffi
Ëiq si, Ècr rrqqs Nepal has two neighbournations.In úe north is Tibet. Tibet
rqq rd êôr#eì enFrqrèqr+rffi Ë's r
hasbeena province of China for 40 years.In the southare the
ìcrqqr qrâEF.Èt +,cq gl-ì +-r à q-f,rcÉ ik avr{ vrql crfi statesof India calledUttar Prâdesh,Bihar and WestBengal.To
vìt-€-r6 t<IÌSTãÌt€qrcq, r qf+tr€ ffirR q64 16r qfr qr_qrtFïTq. the eastis Sikkinn,andbeyond Sil*im Bhutan is also seenon
gr Èt uiÌ ffi6e-crÊ qÉi
-ficf{ ftqì*, this map. But Bhutan is not a neighbournation of Nepal as
China andIndia (are).
T*Trm4p c\ animal, livestock If you climb from the border of southemNepal towaÍds the
-ïÌqÈqr abouÍ qr{ Ío reaÍ noÍth you haveto cÍossthreegeographicalregions.In the south
ffft-+ geograpJhical ErdFrTya[e/ is the Tarai region.Nepús alsocall this Mades.The land of the
fisfr flÍuaâblr \ to be l@ated
fuÌdÌ np'gábour Tarai is flat and úere thereis heat like northemIndia's. Long
dmrw P2g4a2
<ty nation agotherewasjungle herebut âbout200 yeaÍsagofarmen came
rrqilìrd poliâcaÌ
sg< aorÍlr stFfft-d culÍural hereto do agÍicultuÍe.They cut down the jungle andbeganto
rR pÍovìnee Èq cerfi€ famr- Now úere is only a little jungle left. Nepalganj,BiÍganj,
càqrsúare rí-{qr popdaâb, JanakpurandBirarnagararetownsof the Tarai. In úe Tarai not
$ o"r <4 n inczease,gow orúy Nepali but also Maithili, BhojpuÍi, Awadhi, Tharu and
sfroÍ soaÍrl Èfr searcá otherlanguagesare spoken.
frqnr border ï<èfun to go abroad
àt region Above the Tarai region is the Hill region. Here the land is
{qs{ hüÍrrplace
qr<.rf to cross,nayerse mostly uphill and dowúill. The farmers go down to plant
tl( Ìeuoú€,faÍ paddy rice in the valleys, and clirnb up to plant maize on the
irfl-í land cÈsq resÍ
qqdq level, flat qa mid- hillsides.They alsorearbuffaloes,goatsandotheranimals.The
râ heat Ès-Ed<fr?lióeto-Bunaan large valley of Katbmanduis locatedin the Hiü region. This is
vfrcrlfrcr long 4go frre< pea& Nepal's political and culturâl centre. Becausethe population
i\q jung|e, uninhabitedptace -+Et+qr co4parad to has increasedgreatly in the Hill rcgion there is a shoÍtâgeof
rÈffi agfculrure,farmragl a4{IC @cry)ation land for agriculture.For úat reasonthe peopleof the hiìls have
wqr to cut down qH mary begunnowadaysto go abroadin searchof work. The birthplace
Èfr agÍiculare, fanning \à among of úe Nepali languageis in far west Nepal, but in middle and
cft-6 Íemaining c€r rivs eâstNepal TibetcBurman languagessuchas Newari, Gurung,
Magar,Lirnbu, TamangandRai are also spoken.
 Aboye the Hill region is the Himalayanregion. Here one finds qlïkFr{ {Fd{ õIFrrRÍt3t-iï[gT q5 | The town of LalitpuÍ falls
the world's highest peaks, such as Sagarrnatha,Makalu, within the Bapmaüzone.
Annapum4 Dhaulagiri.The populationhereis small compared
to the populationof the Tarai andthe Hills. The languageof the
people who live in this region is similar to úe languageof 118 Above, beloq beyonú moÍe postpositions
Tibet. They believe in Buddhismand their main occuDationis beginningwith -T<r
trade. A setof two-woÍd posçositions,of which the first word is -ìr;<r' deals
Many rivers emergefiom úe Tibetan border and flow toward with úe physicallocationsof things,in termsof height,distanceand
India. Among úem, the Kamali, Gandakiand Koshi are very soon:
important-In the winter little rain falls. Thereforetheserivers -rqr qrFr above
are small in the winter. But after rain falls in the rainy season -ìI<t dnr below
all úe rivers and streamsgrow. That is very necessaryfor .TI<I T{ beyond, on the far side of
agÍiculture.
ËrÈ.rFíì-<rrrrfE{ffi ràcr,n$rqr Therc aÍe no setllements
You can discover úat there are very few roads in Nepal by qrfu+ì*co rmrn$r<raqaàì above our village. Above
looking at this map. Many buses,trucks and carsrun on those rirr6sq rwór<r ac{Ì Èr-6rr ow village there is nothing
roads.None úe less,most Nepalis still have to walk to reach qrfr *n rì ì r but foÍest. But below the
úeir homes. village there aÍe many
fields. We plant rice in the
EXERCISE65 Answerthe follorving questionsóout the geogÍaphy
frelds below our village.
of Nepal:
r ìqrd-{F d-{râÈf,{É ì rl;Eï ? Of cowse,bothqrfu anda!í arealsousedasadveósto descÍibetheup-
-r ffiqrsmÈd õ{É er-dcrqI T{ tï ïiqr{F drfuq ? and-downway in which muchhumanmoYement musttakeplacein úe
ì cËrETefirfi qqFÍ rrq TqÌ FqÌ Ë;E ? Himalayas:
ef{crq€T-{ Eiqr{,.srfq;q r fu{F{r tc-{r{qrArfÌ ffq-{|qr In the pale eaÍly dawn we
: T-]*5|Ë-5* E q
:Â qr T_'E-*ï 3-{Td-qrEqãR^csr ? qrrçq qrfu {õS' rqÌ-ÉIq'"iT<r cümbed up to graze the
-T qr{flí ã? qqÌ ïcr{EF{ 6 r|.-q{6 ? +fuqrfrõqÌngfu{e-d t cows and goats. BefoÍe
dusk fell we came down to
the village.
Grammar
1í7 Usingc{with locations 119 The use of rrì to mean named
The simplestway to statethe location of somethingis to usethe veÍb r$ ir ,t" -ì participleof the veú EE Ío say. It can often be
translatedas calledor named:
Ëï fo be, w,lúchin the prcsenttensemust take its E form. However,
the verb cT, bterally to faLL,is often usedwhen úe discussionof a qfffir-qrq rìqrÈsE{ a snìalltowncâlld llan in
locationinvolves somesenseof direction: east Nq{,al
ilfffirn$ffirlil{qri: WheÍe (in which direction) is
{fr$ì{d?iÌsr"fr a stÍangecÍeaíre called
your village located?
the Yeti
rÈerqgtrrrÈq-aïffi a new studentnamed
It is also usedto locateplaceswithin countries,districts or zones,in Gita Khadka
which caseit canbe thoughtof âsmeaning fattswithin:
Note the word order of the phrases above, Instead of 'a new student
named Gita Khadka', Nepali has Gita-Khadka-named new student.

i
1ãl The use of Tà to mean t rat
ïfì is also usedto link a question,a fact, etc. with its content:
ffiqrÍàÊkifffr<T{rÈÈdr me questionamseas to
rÈc{{sãàr wúch hotel would b
the best.
ffi r€ìfl qmssïç+ìÊràq-àr.drà I üd notknow thatyou had
sr€TÌcrs{ | cometo Nepal.
avr{fi' frrô6ç6'or-âr wrn.qir I hop thatyou will b
well soon.
It is peúaps useful to think of the sentencesgiven above as
containinga questionor an item of htowledge that is describedby
rã, saying:
the 'which hotÊl will be thebest'-sayingquestion
the 'you had cone to Nepal'-sayingknowledge
a 'you will b well non'-nying hope
Ne-pú is rich in proverbsger{, which might also be quotedusing
I
*rgr ta-ììr ìc vre< rì eqr{ r TheInoverb that saysthatoil
dÉs not cone from tr
o'qffi.Í*È,uïìï++ #!iï,iiili*r,*^, o
ur+ { fÈ ven r hmour memsa ggeatdeal
(but) wealth meansashes. o
ffiÈqffiqrêïrÊsqrtr Theproverb thatsaysihatm
insectdÉ$r't how the
valueof üamonils
CL
1+
o
o
3 In this unlt you úll l€am

o . how !o usé üìo hatÍtual

past teÍìso

x
. ÌNowto tl3e o)ç퀀lgiong
mêaÍringdrirê and

o
as soon a3
. hovvto talk about hopss
and do6ir€8
 Clgt aao habits {r6;rts' qrq fa rr5ior qtffi ffi Ef qfqrrçq q-{FI
o14a rrü | r*ir €Íi{ì. cÌt cfí EÍÈì".T,
An old man tells his gÍandsonúout how he decidedto give up
1ffit<tr+a-t<.qfgH, í{...
smoking.
ilfr d{ dqÍ€íd sfi-{€à rÈ gÌa urÈ, f{{ t
Trfr aql{1;tìcÌTire€ì-1q-d-,{q-c{rr
{g.{ET €, eÌffi rr r qsãrrecà w6fr màera:È r@twà
ú.{r qÈ{rrrF"ì,q-deÌÈ{ r"rfi-afrqili+furìgì-aurtorÈ r rqÌM |fuÈfi-t€ T{râ Èì+ ï-ê !
ïrfr ovr€Èì aèa urgg.vì r
qgrqr .f, $ eraì rÊd{TïsEìÈff,Èçcar1-àafqì< cqre"Ì rqÈ S any, some €rfi-rr.{ àarnful
Ëqr qFe{ 16r fqqr q-iERàÊqfr g'ra rfr or+vcd r qF1 to want to
1Ìa eq Ío smofte cigareÍtes
ïrfr r'tffiqrwr{{fr ffi gÈaurç;lì, q{rdr 2 {a aweütÊ
Í*A to take out
rçrqr È. qkì çr*ì ràq I kqff{àí. qf.aì. {RrÈfr qrq. Èeqr ãiq €GriI{ to set lglìt Ío ecec craving
rKiììF qFq. vÌÌT qFnt<r 3Tfuqfê{. rrn qrqcfu qrq r àè -<rÈft wÌri,le clPr<Í tÍadiüon
qTiq ! T{mt dream cÍínÍd to naintain, foster
Íìrì decisior ÍÌqt drstncr
nÍà tíìg€ràRÊ{r fiqÍeíÍ arnbiüon FqrJ1 to bÍing
ËEdr g-drrqqloqr-eâ+erqrd a<fu<Rqfu5èa on +fr eru*rò qfr habit È4 to go wrug, tn cornpted
€;b, {r.RÌ lqrr+qqqflqr qÊ{qrd t+ r rà,qrüà r €r({c úealrh
ïrfr 3rÊ{ EreìtiÌfr rsfr rriìâ,
Grandson Did you smokeat any time, grandfaúer?
6*c+r vrì vÈfu à ìò sÈ eï€{ {È qr+len<rd Frfr recà I usedto smokebefore,now I don't. I quit smoking
+{rm Èr+F*qw{qrarõvrà +fr r.ccrrà rqre<+q sqàÈt Grandfather
about20 yearsago.
4{ïrq r6*dc-+d-{ï, e<+<-e@erc-<rrà ì q<qffi vçì
qqÊerffis-+c qfÍüE rïi{ rnfrrFiqtcÈr GÌandson Did you smokea lot?
Grandfather Yes, I smokedheaps.As soon as I got up in the
ïrfr ere-<r+qvlor +6iàì{d'rS fr, {E<qr! moming I would get out a cigaÍetteandlight it. Then
AgcETÈ, TÌãq|ìqrfr sreg:rcr€ qrfi-çnqorrì<eìêd,{|(qR 16ì I would úink tea.But evenwhile I wasdrinking the
t<,torgffis.eol ,qft s rr+ïrqrë s{rì Èâ tfiFq?ì qin€ tea I had to smokea cigaretteas well.
rqr-€Èfrqrrà 13rÈ +'nà graqtçfr 1çq€Ì +{r s{fi qrqrÈcfì Grandson In one day how many cigarettesdid you smoke,
q_drârn*rrf,srôffit{ï;Êqf qìEbÌ rrì{ | grandfather?
Grandfâther Well, I don't evenremembernow! I srnokedwhile I
{rfr +fr gèa er<ors*trrç+ì, Sr was walking, I smokedwhile I was sitting down, I
qg-ar AÌ,6r<'lq=qìÍì r+È f'òz qq\r+ì ç-qR AKMfuq-q;âà8 smokedwhile I was working in the field, I smoked
qh-r{flïrç{Ì qEr qrg I beforemeals,I smokedafter meals.I smokeda lot!
ïrfr +dçrr<n Grandson And what úout while you were sleeping?
rqÈcrq rrrd3rfr{-qqfà f{tì{ì qr<eÍilàfì TìEà Grandfather After I had gone to bed I would smokeone or two
eg<-qrrÈ*eì
but after you havefallen asleepit's a bit difficult to
qTl"q | il{ 1'rc EÈdÌ +Ê HìTã <à.yì+ ild-d-{-q,rà
qFT qT ]T{{Ì smokea cigaÍette,Kancha.PerhapsI smokedin rny
GT|ï qTq I
dreams? Well, I don't know!
ïrfà arr{erffiurg6t, frr Grandson And how did you decideto give up?
{srcqr q.ffisÍÈ{ rr@rÈ erq+ì F rqsfuqmrÌnttsqrÈiqd Grandfather Your father hadhad an ambition to becomea doctor
 ftom a very young age. He got a place at Calcutta
UniveÍsity andhe wentto study.To b€comea doctor
Grammar
he had to study for many yearstheÍê,but in the end 121 The habitual pasttense
he becamea doctor.Affer he camehomehe began!o
The habitual past tenseis used to describean €vent or acüon thât
tell me off saying 'Why does Father smoke
happenedÍepeat€dlyor as a matter of habit or customin the past: I
cigarettes?'
u&al to eat,he usedto &ink, they usedto snoke.
Grandson But after he becamea docúoÍhe had to saythat, you
know grandfather! Basês and endlngs
Grandfather Yes, he usedto sayagainandagainthat the habit of ïhe habi al pasttenseof a verbin theaffnnarive is formedin a similr
smoking cigarcttesis harmfrrl !o health.He use.dto way to üe húitual pÍ€s€nttÊnse,assêtout in Grammar 33. The verb
saythat I'd haveto quit someday.And within a very baseis exactly the sarneas it is in the habitualprcsent,but in the
few days after he retumedfrom CalcunaI caughta hóituâl pasttensethe endingis simply thefirà fonn of the veú €ï ro
coughandcold. And my lungsbeganto huÍt. At that ba minusits 'i' vow€l:
very time his motheralsobegânto tell me off, saying Habihral pastending
PÍonoun ffifotm
'Why do you wantto die soon?'' q .E
frE becomes
Grandson And you quit smoking,right?
Grandfather Yes, I hadto quil you know! And a few weeksafter €r*, Ar$-{s ffi becomes -str
I quit I realizedthat I hadhad somebenefit.
t fir{{ becomes -fu{
ffi. fdfi-ËF frqÌ becomes -qÌ
Grandson \ryhatsoÍt of benefit?
s (m.) firÈ becomes -d
Grsndfather My appetiteincreased.Before, I used to eat Íather
litúe rice becausewhile I waseatingI would cÍâve a
õ (f.) fut becomes -fr
sfr (-.) frS becomes -Ì
cigâÌette.But within a few daysof qútting cigaÍettes
rfr (f.) frqï becomes -Èã
that old cÍaying waslost andI begahto €at well. à
fr,fr,s+{F frq becomes
Grandmn But you don't drink alcohol,right?
Grandfatier I dont drink alcohol. I never have. It's mostly
Brahminswho live in the villagesof this distÍict. Up Aiõrnative formsln rÍ1
until a few yearsagothe peopleheremaintainedold Húitual pe.tent Habiital past
rT rTE Ido" |TrT I usedto do
trâditions.They didnl drink alcohol,they didnt ear
meateither, they didn't bring girls from outsidethe qfi,eÉ-{F ,rtr
qds
we do .r"qf we ased to do
( you do iTfiis you usedto do
disaict (asbrides),but... .Í6f' ,t"qf
Grandson
ffi,tdfl-ËF you do you usedto do
But üke you they also smokedcigarettes,no? {d {"d
s(m) he does he úsedto do
Grandfatler No, they didn't Only I and one úopkeepersmoted s( o rT6 shedoes .rf she usedto do
Apart ftoÍn us no-onesrnokedThe neighbourssaidI \ti | (mJ .Pr
.TFT
he does IT{T hê úsed to do
wascomroted! çfr<o
*
NoÍe \Vhen quoring what someoneactually said to them, Nepali- fr,fr,s-fi-{F 1161
sàê does
they do "tr
rÌ{T
she usedto do
they ased to do
speakerswill usually refer to themselvesusing the Low or Middle
pronoun(ã or fcfr;.
The negativeform of the habituaj past tense is very simply the úird The húitual pasttensemay often be translatedas usedto go, usedto
person singular negative form of üe habitual present t rrta. eat, usedto watch, üsedto say arldso on. It cannotexpressan action
6fr<,
3rÈà{ etc.) + the appropriate ending, taken from the üst above. The
or an eventthat hashappenedonly onceor is paÍt of â discreteseries,
one exception to úis rule is úe form that is used wiú rI I, which takes g
becausethis is úe function of úe simplepâsttense.For instance,
the_"ending on to the frst person form (that is, 3ïÈ1fi instead of fl-6qffi r1fr Ínsanshe went to Kaihmandu,wiú the sensethat this
3ÌTiK{).
wasa one-timeacüon,whereass iÍqrTtd qld meansüe usedÍo go
to Kathmandu,indicating that this was his regular routine at some
N€gatiYe fonns time in the past.
Habitual pÍesent
Habitualpast
q 3rÈRï I do Dot come {fsffi The following sentencesillustrate this differencefirther. Those on
I usednot to come
grfr,{rfr-{F
c-{rìiènÌ
we do aot cook q-rÈÈqìqï we usednot to cook theleft-handsiderefer to a specificeventor action,thoseon the right
( qT6Íq you do not eat cÌffis you usednot to eat describea regularhabit or truth:
frfr,fafr-{€ !s.
you don't sleepl €ïqÌ' you ud DottosltrQ
s(m) Bqí he is not àr"m
he usednot to be Èàqrffiqrqr{|dqrqr qqrffiT{qrrrnrardr
s(0 ITT<iÍ shedoesnot T-{qt sheusednot to do I ate at a fÍiend's house. I ugd to eat at a friend's house.
sqt (m) they do not go qÌèï* they usednot to go
çfrto sqà.ns.rq{ (ffi qr* t o inËrrç affi qr;sd t
shedoes not cry
sírQG rq qíi
ÈqI
the usednot to cÍy
they do notgive r<ìFTEI theyud nottogive He went to the village and He used to go to the village
drank raksì. and drinkraksi.

Aftêrnative negative forms Althoughthe habitualpastis obviously a pasttense,the subjectof a

The same endingsmay also be addedto úe alt€mative negaúve transitive verb need not take -ì in ttris tense unless it is being
forms of the habitualpresent(for which, seeGrammar 46): emphasized:this is the samerule that appliesto the hóituâl present
HabihtalpÍesent Habitualpast tense.
qqFí ldonotgo q ofqÈ - Iusednottogo rrffqrqfuFÌã{ïÈú"F{tqrd ? whercuÊdch neüto go to
cut gÍassduÍingüE sunmer?
frfrqìTôì you do nor come ffi {ì-r-ì!qÌ you usednotto come cftàülì:cr€ÊgfrqrFd{+d,qt{à we ú:dnt need elecniciry
High Íorms aÈ qrFÚE I before,now we needit all
of the üme.
The High forms of the habitualpasttenseare simply adâptedforms
of the habitualpresenttense: fr€qf qfu{qr<r$ÈdqràìqrèF Up untìl30 yens agomany
qÌõifq qq I Wie usedto üe ú malaÍia
o In úe affinnative, the habitual presentending -{.6 becomesthe in the TaÍai Íegion.
hóitual pastending-qa,:Ì. 5Eq5fiala1-6paqqrm o r Kathmandu's enviÍonment
. In the negative, úe habitual present ending -Fï becomesthe oA-*ttE*tA*arrÈ66i, hasbeenspoiled.Long ago
it usedto be verygod here,
habitualpastendilg -6qr$.
they say.
High forms EXERCISE66 Changethe following sentencesinto the habitual
Habibtalpwr Húitualpa* pasÌtense:
J:-L
íels61Ér? youwãclt dct5BGqr youtdbwúl
r {€rTrÍdrfï's|{{€qríìÈq r^s.ftë€q+ ì'o-q I
dcr€Ètff yottdont watà dcrçà&-qì youud nd b watch
q6lqf.rrq
I T|õqR'clEüftà {rl-5q {"{cÍì |
l, s/De @nles {ãffi3{gÌ gIE ud Ìo @rÌE qÈí{r qf{qr5€' 1
r frqrqgqfifrqrqÈqrÍ€,
{dÌ3Ìri!ÍËq s/ÌE&rüsnüClúr' {dqr3.$q4 glÊudMtb@rc
 s ftrfr rrradrrç{ì õrq.roïr q sÌffi rrq.d r oM ffir cn org cÈ1{q Don'tlet youÍ sonstoptaking
<ría€1qr+r {Tg-q,Èìqcr Eq6'6 r q-df{+ &{ t thendicine, orele he won't
'.
é rT€Tfi ãwt gqqrË qcer cr+ f+& ìçe r get well.

122 Finishing,stopping,quitting 18 While doing, immediately after doing

Nepali hasa numberof verbsthat meanto end,frnish, be completed, Every completeNepali sentencemust contâin â verb, whosenormal
stop,that can be usedonly with nouns: placeis ât the endof the sentence.This is úe mainverb of a sentence,
IntÍansiüve Transitive and it provides the sentencewith a tense (past,presentor future).
<krrÍË1 roend €-{qït n frnish Sentencesmay contain other words which are derived from a verb
Elfit to cometo a end gq{qNl to bring to a end but haveno tenseof their own. So far we havernet two of these:
(rÌTK fl Ío conc.lude ti +ff.í .11 b Dnng to aconclusion i thepasttensebaseof a veú plus-{t (or -Êor -È+q ):
Ç.c- ii the pastt€nsebaseof a verb plus -q{fu :
lí l,lirr to tE Ítrusned l+f€qtsí bn sh oÍÍ
tì{ to stop,prevent Two new words of úis type are inhoducedhere.
RÌfi1 to be frnished
s Presenttenseverb base+ -(Íàft wfuie...
rôôu{|qqr ÌÌqrr{€ô qnffi qTq trqì 1 In theyear 2A07the Ranas,
the suffix -EÈR is âddedto úe presenttensebaseof a vertt to mean
ìqriÍqr rqw-*qÈ eilq{r ìrà r regimàended and
that the rest of the sentencehappens/happened/will happenat the
sem(rcracywiìs
sametime as that verb. It can often b€ translatedas while doing,
estabüshedin Neoal
qrsrd vrqr.qr{qcrR rrà raqr€ìffi Thatis theend of whìlegoing, while eating,etc.
ìltq ç< ü€" I today'snews. you are The endingis addedto verb basesin exactly the sameway as the -è
listening to Radio Nepal ending is addedto basesto form úe continuouspresenttense(see
Grammar 64): it is addeddirecdy to the basesof C-verbs,but when
grf,4r I a baseendsin a vowel úat vowel must be nasalized:
many words,the Prime
MiüsEr's speechcame
Veíb Base Süffrx
to at end. rFT rt( * sràR = .r{Èft whiledoing
ìfirq{ Erì {q d ffiqr cÈc ìffi r Bú the BhakÍapü bus
_s_ -i- +(frEl. = Clqqlql< wntE spearung
_-_i!_--._ì.c:
desn't stopat mimí brotlgÍ! 3TTiT + + qì{g f? = 3i l É ql ql ' w U rc c oml ng
gFi + ErÈR = qì'{FàR while going
The veÍb Ereï to stop,leaveoff, qurr,is usedwith the infiniüve of a
verb to show thât the subjecthas stoppedperforming úat verb. In
pasttensesthe subjectof 6|g;I musttake -à if the verb is hansitive. ïRt{ qi?Ràftc idÈ s|{ü'r ÈË{r t On my way to BhaktapuÍI'11
3nd qre,q Èfu{ srìqì à{ q-{È Seeinghishealth declining, (gobably) meetyour elder
brother-
aÌa en arqrfr 1 Fathergave up smoking
*qr{€ qrfrqr ffiR q$ïd While the children are
cigarettes.
fiqr{rg q.ô êff{qr sqrs{qàì sfifu ú6 r playing in the field thereis
Becauseshehad to help
qÈfrwq qrï 6rô I peacein thehouse.
MotheÍ out at home,
|Tríat{rÈftrrs$iÜfi | It is not good to talk
Chameüstoppedgoing
while eating.
to schooL
This suffix can be added to the {- base of the verb úo be, and also to tênseforms qd I fu and the probable future tense form qci
its 6 form; there is a süght differcnce in meaning between úe two: rcspectively:
while becoming / being (in a defining sense)
EClsl{
ÈÈn qrff{r ffiÊ Èì q+, +ta r While I wasa solüer in the
ËilÈR while being (in a descibing or locaüng sense) qrìrfu
l'qÈ r ftn-ì oÊ BnüshAÍmy. I usedto
crfrT{F1aÌ {arlàft min-r l:r€r,i I When people are becoming lTfficr.rScfuafuàqt--{T{i ì have to eatwith loúfe, fork
old they begin to beüeve andspoon.After you
have enlistedyou will
.ààcrsfÈffiftqcôsï\iìrô r ,iÃíÏo#iÏ*, ** ,^* r, probably haveto eatin
father üed. exrctly thesane way.
lne -qtrEti suÌIlx ls often shortened to -fl, Before the electricity
with no chanse in . +qÌfu1-ôqrs-fiI<T$Trfs
meaning: kâqfu@rrfrfo-+ (supply) camehere,the
qRlg{ qÌ-{r... qFTr€q s$qr I young womenusedto have
While going to Bhaktapur...
+ | |r r r + r Q f c 6 r When people are becoming to go down to the river to
É (t...
old... fetrh wateÍ.
b The -ì participle + -frRrà assoonas
This suffix is addedto úe -ì participleof a verbto meanlhat something
125 Wishing,hopingand deciding
elsehappenedimmediatelyafter it. If the vertris transitive,its subject In English, you say úat someonewishes,hopes or decides Ío do
musttake{. something.In Nepali,desires,hopesor decisionsto do somethingâre
often expressedpassively,using the expressionqir {Ï{, or acúvely
c-{:flr
TTà{
lrÊffi As soonas I süd .pteaseeat', by using úe verb <rq Ío wart to (Grammar 110). However,there
Ìlìììf efFlqqT€g t.r{ qfq I everyone n eat
.began is oneotherway of exprcssingtheseideasin Nepâli, aÍÌdthis usesthe
-ì participle of a verb to describethe wish, hope,etc.:
ffiì wn Èkkàvàva1qÈ
, I!#lY*" *,*., o,"r"o qÈç"srd b wishto go ('to b zgoingwistì)
up the kulri, everyone
üç.Ë{ _ b havea d€{lireto w ( 'a seeingdesü€')
a<{flÊèdFdfr,àïírqÉstrqìÌqrqr #ÍÏ,i'Á *" ** *uo^, ÈfqÌÌq{ b fuiah to wite('aodo a writingdecision')
qrrqì r Muna fell in love with him.* aÈf*ta q n consi&r staying('todo â stayingthought')
* Muna and Madan rsì+rm.r! ohory to g*Cto do a geuinghope')
Note are the eponymoushero and heroineof a {àqr+furrq bha'le at anhitionbbesorÌre('ab€comingflnbition')
naÍrative poem by Lakshmi Prasad Devkota (1905-59), first
publishedin the 1930s,which is the mostpopulaÍ book ever written ÊTÈEr<rrr{€rÈft rftqsàfaqirrï vrale úey wereliving in ow
in Nepú. Íìfr il<+t fcC t housethey decidedto get
rmrÍied.
çrÈ sRfu ì Ìà 6r.6qrsÌqri 5;6;1 4r'"166o- a young ageI
124 Will have to, used to have to rÈ fqE, qÍfq{ q qtr;rqÍq t wantedto go to Kathmandu,
Combinationsof qdt È andq-ì r Èt with the dictionaryform of a eventuallyI managedto go.
verb to mean must, should, have to and had to re introduced in t@ÈtFr*scàfuâcrsÌ qnÍr I am hoping to receivea letteÍ
Grammar I and lfi). It is of coursesometimesnecessaryto talk q?€ t from him within a few daYs'
aboutwhat someoneusedto hâveto do in the pastor \ühat someone
wiú -qÈ:
Notealsotheconstruction
mighthaveto do in thefuture.In suchcasesriiakes thehabitualpast
cRcÈfrdtq a book one shwld rcad
 qE{T{ qF6 a ÍEÍson one shouldmeet
fifrfunF{{r'fr{ìilr{àq€qi IÍ you wantta leam Fnglish
frm*rfr{ r thisis the bookyou
shouldread.
arr€qTçqrtcriryfrqrttô ìTì If you needpermissionn go
ìIã{q-{ qf€ ìTcfff, ìFT.qrm Ë1 | to Mushng, thenan you
shoüdrMt is
LobsangNamgyal

EXERCISE67 Translateinto Nepali:

I used to üve with my motheÍ and father in a snnll town called
Panauti.Panautiis in the south-eâstcomerof the KathmanduValley.
I usedto studyin a small schoolúere. As soonasmy ager€ached11
yeâÍsI hadto quit thú small school.From that time on I hadto study
in a big schoolin a town called Bhaktapur.I usedto haveto take a
bus every moming at seveno' clock. Many of my ftiends usedto go
on that bus too. While we weÌ€ retuming in úe eveningu,e usedto
sing songsand whenwe reachedPaunatiwe were veÍy happy.
Below my housethere was a big river. In tle summermonths we
o
t+
o5
usedto swim in the river as soon as we got home. Sometimesmy
schoolclotheswere all wet andMotheÍ usedto be atrgÍy.Shewould 0) qt
haveto washthem assoonasI camehomeandit wasdiffrcút to dÍy rü I
(sükãunu) úem. But becauseSaturdâywas a hoüday sheusedto let I
me swim on Fridays.
While I was snrdying in the big school at BhaktapurI decidedto I
becomea tۉcherwhen I was big. BecauseI hoped to becomea
teacheÍ I studied well. As soon as I left that school I went to
Tribhuvan University and nowadaysI live itr Kathmandu.AfteÍ a
few days I will have to give my final exams(psrllf5). I am still
hoping to becomea teacber.If I am successfulin my examsI wiìl
3
ql
haveto seek(khojnu) a job (iãgir).

o ln üìi8 unit you will leam

. hoìÍrfto use the subiuÍìc'liv€
-
ÍoÍms of voíbs
. hry lo uso @mpoundvêÍôs
with f€d
. how to talk about tying aÍú
s€otching
 cr{fr qrs frSà *qrí qfuffiT{rrfr-{sfrc{ qrè?il{es t
Cl3Z Cancellingthe tea party qÉ sift-{Fs1srcaqqÈ f+ r q rrÌ qmq-+rtkj t
qrâfrqrqqlr+Rìï\ràà rrrà qrõàtrqssRorrn r+rg{al-Ìq ìTì<Èì
kcr-fu{rô ttrFr.Íràfi<qrslrrq-mg {ddrâ rt{ er.*-g6ef*
Ê**i66orrr<vkt rccrs{râcTÈscfrfr, ffi-qr;È+ìwa I
qrâ Èït rt{iiTfl{ÍÌ rõfrs{rqrtàq?
crìff Èì sfrër-+ÌqrFTeì-qrqr€ãr Èd{ ilà6Ì q rvfu aw{ wra+a
È!-{€Ê{ql€i<1.Èq rqrsrtfr ïcì{ rr<ftd 3ìlõqìrai-ãr<ì
6rt à
6 {l

vrâ q+q6 1ç5f6qqg ewrcw "*vi' Êqa frqe ffi' Èfi r

rÈÌwlsÌt
wÌfr {,sryri rwr€qfrs+rqr-tqrifrgü
tG {*q rqeqq{ ssrtrf,qFqr
w&fr{.b rç+ 'ret <ff r 16rsìfrÌórqrqF{ÈtÈ{ lr{s-d qr€{r{€qrÈ
q(frfi {&frqí ìq rnqr-Ècrqrúq t
vr€ gàâ-srvftfrcmÈSt
$ffi qâïffi 1q+qqq{slqql6qrÈffidT t
qÍq i{rà rcrfr crà rci'irq rrà t
cr&ôtt.Erïqrqàq I q 3Tfugcr .ÈrqtrÈ<qd rã{ {Ffrriï fr;a t rs
sfi-esqrq t+ aqrs,lqrfier€t q<firàEq-q-Sft t
Like many middle-classurban Nepali housewives,Parvaü has an
older woman to help heÍ wiú her chores. On this particular
Wednesdayúe weâtheris againstthem- ct{ì trrst afr lavatory
qEÍt sPoon ' í613ì+6T batfuoom
qrC qrq à +rq s r q8à kqr rdÉ ? mct as mucú as Possíhle
<<rs drawer
q\lqfi inconvenience
weft g.of<â,r+rq-ftq rk{r qrq{ q dcrldrà\{qr r ànto search,look for
<q to bum, scorch rÍrqÍ-+sr kiúcúen
iÍrq È{rqrfi{fi(çrnfuÈ$ t kqr-fum teaand snacfts gààat beúoom
qwz untidy
vrâfrç* qqr fu6 1aftì-dfr<ï <rfqttò{ r f{<qT€Tlo inv.íúe
qÊ r moúer! (an exclamation
qR sÍtecles,we
ffi ffi6'61qâ t Eiqï garden of alarm)
qawl to frt, be acconmodated F{ïrsr úsasÍer
criff <rrqÈïds1{q rvq'f61cÌir
tW nq. biscuitsand such üke T<rqla fo worry
vr{ 5+q...rq,Èqr +EÍ<rdràa-qm<rfiskãr
clifr s.6-flf{ r g eà +q-crqÍfE
à1-d dqft1fr{ r What work is theretodây?Shall I makeiea first?
Jai
qrl Ë+qrqrvàà.ff rqcr6rcrSt r Parvati OK sister, pleasedo make some.I'll tell you while we
dÍink tea.
 Jrl ShouldI put sugarandmilk in the tea?
Parvati Pleaseput one spoonfirlof sugarand a litúe milk
Grammar
Jai Wherehasthe sugargot to? 1ú May l?Ya{rs in the subiunctive
Parvati Searchin the drawer.It shouldbe there.
The subjunctiveform of a Nepali verb is usedin threecontexts:
Jai Very well... Now, where úall I put úe t€a?Shall I put it
on the table? to ask whetheÍor suggestthat you
Parvati Might tle tablebe marked?put it on that cloth over there. might do something:
Jai VeÍy well. What things do we have to do today?May I may I comein? let's washthese
know? clothes!
Parvati This aftemoon my husband is bringing some office to expressa wish that something
friends. might happen:may the weatherbe
Jat Will they stay until the evening?Shall I cook rice this good today! may you all be
evening? successfulin yow examinaüon!
Parvati Becauseit's Wednesdaytoday the cook won't come.For in phrasesalong úe lines of wáetàer
that reason,so that rvewouldn't haveto cook food, I have it doesoÍ it doesn't.
I NêpaliAlDswaming
told him to inüte them only for tea and snacks.*\Vhetìer
he will rcmemberor forget I cannotsay.you know, don,t
you sisteÍ,what mên arc like! Nepali gramrnar provides subjuncúve foms of the verb for all
'Well, possiblesubjects,but in practiceyou rarely needto know morethan
Jai let's see.Peúaps he won't forget. How many are
ürefour that are set out below.
coming?
Parvatl I haveput two tablesfor them in the garden.I-ater, please
Subjeet ending 4í ã4 qríí ÊE
arrângeeight chaiÍs. I hope it r4,on'train today. There
really isn't room in the housefoÍ eight pebple! tT -ü €rs crs Ès
Jai Certainly.In a momentI'll hâveto go to the müket to buy ú, çq ì, qt -o5 ,ft{ & qllì{ ÈsS
biscuitsand suchüke, no? Qt+j t -au .Rï Èqï
qFfi t<!fi
Parvati Yes, you will. I have to go that way too this aftemoon. ir€I q tú1 ê-
rqúr!
\t. QS -lül Qlv,'1
IÉt's go together.
Jai Of course.Now I'l1staÍt cleaningthe house.
Parvati Fine. Take a look in the lavatory andthe bathÌoomtoo. As lViú q land Ërfrwe the subjunctiveis very similar to the pÍobâble
far aspossiblelet thercbe no inconveniencefoÍ the suests. futuÍe tenseminus its -qTending(se€Grammar 96), exceptthat fl
I'U be in thekirchen. to bêkeepsthe baseÈ- in every instânce,evenwith rTf .
Jai Shall I tidy the bedroomtoo? q (qrtdiâ çsár T{rÈ Vfl-& icÊ May I tEIlyou of a complaint?
Pârvati It's not necessaÍysister. Everything's untidy. I'll tidy it RvregEq2 You won't be angry?
myself later. g
Jai Oh mother! It's Íaining. It's a disaster! ìqrfr{rieçq5d{Ed{, rirr:i."y_litentuÍernit
Parvati Don't u/orry. I'll phonethe offtce andtry to explain.Nolv,
nhether they comeor they don't, we haveto sit inside the qrËq-+Ìqr-dì c qlg sïdq í qrsà Á Braánan's boy shall
house. €rE wÌ( | eata noÍ
\ushÍMm
No6" * frqr-fu{r Ea arrd,snack.It is possibleto add a meaninsless l:iheÍ
úyming word to cenain words 0omeaí and nings associabarftttii. NoÍe *A pmveÍb. CeÍtâin Brúmans follow a strict dietaÍy code,and
avoid garlic, onions,nushroomsandmany otherfoods.
 EXERCISE68 Finishthefollowingsentences
with a subjunctive È_:ì---=--c- c--
l !Ôr 9l s 9órsrq'i 8.r9 r? ^I Will you sendtheÌefter
verb: hnmediatÊly?
r ffir{+Ì ÉÌ{r qtà tr+Ì (be). wfuwff rvr{rcrsìfafràr You might have to wait
ì *fu {rfi-üÃfirf{q if Èrqro1g4r ìfiÊ-q r
<cÍ€qÍt a while. As srnn asI frnd out
r qr{-6aovrifr rnrrorÊà 1say)? I wiL|teLlyou.

: 13rT1€(F)
Í q t q c n r q t | t 6 " || lr o Í De l. 128 Trying and seeking
( q ffrl6-ËÌ õFfr{ì (come)? The verb d\ hastwo meanings:
ôq means to search foÍ when it is associated wiú a noun oÍ
DÍOnOUn:
q{+ì qÌà {{r q-rfrr Ênïft Wherehasthehousekeygot m?
:--
--5-:
i gtq? --!-
9t.l ïÉts .t ---Ê--i,
$tq| .t I Despitesearchingall day I
could not frnd it.
crfi-{'€àT{qì-€F{Erefr I waslooking for their house.
q-{rçfr-{Frfr oqÌgq-ffiq|{-cì t Thenthey suddenlyurived
ÍheÍetoo.
an environmenlal
Ìnsssage
ÍÍomKa$manduMunicipal
Council íg t!í mearÌs to W to when it is associated with the infinitive of a
verb:
qàqt{qr<sTrrfrqrFx I tÍied againandagainto get
sts{fil(
Í27 Doing something Íor another person: <qt+r-f+ewrr(t a govemmentjob, but I was
compound vêrbs with ftT unsuccessfrtlevery time.
Any transitive verb may be combined with the verb kg ro gzve, qàdqfffisÌ{ïFitrm I tÍied to phoneyou but the
producingwhat is called a 'compoundverb,, when the action of úe q6aq-fiqffiffi1 line wasrealLybusy.
verb is beingreferredawayfrom the personwho performsúe action. An alternaúveto ôq is the verb dlqnr qt, which câiì be usedin
Often this meansúat the veÍb is beingperforrnedfor sorneoneelse's combinationwith üe infinitive of a verb in much üe sameway as
benefit, or on someoneelse's behalf. In this context, úe verb in q ts'!,or on rrsown:
quesüonmust take its 'i-stem', in which a shoÍ i vowel is attached
*a **t nfo nao +A* I did tÍy to leam Tibetan,butI
to its pasttensebase: "fA* Ê{E,d-{
ilrÌÈ \dì Eiii q",(.+ì failed because I didn't have
verb base i-stem compound. fiRvÈ qq5{ ìÌE I thetime to study.
veÍb
-: rR- .rR .rF<ffi to do foÍ someoneelse Arffi ïÌfu qrsï 3Tfrq'a-qrì ft might be a bit üÍfrcult for
q.t- rïÈ qÊÊï 6Ì<tr,a< àlvm nttr | üs Ío come tomom)w but
Tq b inform
:-j we will tÍy.
ìq- àfu ìfuÊï to write for
Becausethe meaningof a compoundverb focusesvery much on its
posiüveaspe€t,it mÌely occursin the negative.
enrtflQe+qrfrqrFrqmr The detoÍ wrüe out a
àtuÊTràr prcscripüon for us.
 D33 A deathin the neighbourhood
Oneof Sita's neighbourshasdied. Shetells Manju how it happened.

t @ cì ilr€{râ qe-arqqn crÈ Èà+Ìfr{, fr r ffi q56rof+

àÈr
n-drÈfi, q ffi çsa ffi tr=Èú{È.-{.rsdt fuErqk s{ô
oNrr e-sr(srìr€r sqà{r{Íâ ficFrí qç{ {s{rd EqìÌsà 6
r dr
rg e,fuFr< ffi t{ç+ÌQ6 dqri+Ìffiff r qíÈÈoÈ sì I
fi -crqsdn $ìÈfr à Èàv€-{Ét'iâ sr€<itï ÈÈ | il{ fffi{r gâs'-ar
qÈàqFlsffiÈt
rg q rdqni3{k qqìïqsì ìTqÈzËuÌÌ,ËfrT ,
+drÈ f{, m à,rf < r s eÊcË qdtà fir àà q-qfl qfr rìâ
firç{ rerqfrcEr rrc* qct q stè qfd È r{â sÌ<qríqì* ïq
A
3
II
Ëd rsq-+ìqr€rì qnfiïqrqÌ{ qAq'â, qsàrÈ< r
31.' {ì
rg wôeftgàQ"tr,wÈt

+o
{ Ir ú-cr1à vçâ vq a efr çcfr gt vfr {èaeÌ È rm qr.È+fr{ a'Sfrì
*q
J wì <Qor ere<d w+r*{den (ffi Èì qrd Ì ttffi lqre-fi
q CLo u
qffiqrcàqs e cs-frq-+ràqf à frsï fï t
T{ Ea-dw,RïríqÈ+ì6 ?

s,o CL
II
r'ì
$ïr qrqfdEriq{rqÍìrqr rgird fr r+fr sÌà qs6 I 3lfusqrõrqnrçà
II
{q ÌÌ ftqrl qr{qd rm fiq+{ rqì ìnrr vtrfi erctflÊ ìEï
{ i{FFìNÍT I

5 r+
oo
rg eMtrrÀiQo1frt
+dr6Hfc-{rì€sdqÈ roÌôqfqacfi rgqàqìs r{dt€<rd
{rÉ"{r€Èçd ôô-rr@ gn fircts-$'* r
rg e<v<n avçd sfi{r{ e1fi-ÈëdÊ rBÌiÌ 6-* q-Ésffi
o lrq
È6 t{. È8 F. ssì qrqmr€<ewfu6 r

5
- In üls unlt you wlll leam
. how to say that lhinç have @ to know, be acquainEdwith
rqqft-< jaundice
rnfu peace
g:EÍ sOIÍDlY
dr€ady happen6d
t+
Ir
. hor,yto constuct unrۉl
frfre gravely, seriously(i11)
\Ql to remain, be
WR accoÍdingto
q+là eady, untimely
condiüonalsonteíìces qÌ6- n exatnine <q-dtrr< crezaüon zfe
J . how to coíìlr€ylhs soíEe thd

o soírrüing has iust been

I€a[zod
 iz meeüng ar,ì how big?
ã-qïrqÌ Íoim4gine aú young woman
tà it woulil have beenall right v<n offspring
qrçqrsotd €qrsd Ío áelp
Manju I saw you going to the hospital yestedây, did I? Ate you
ill, oÍ what is it?
Sita No, I ÌÌÌent to seea man I know from the neighbourhood.
The other day whenI met his sonin úe markethe saidhis
father had contractedjaundice andhad goneto hospital.
ManJu Oh is he seriouslyill, your neighbour?How do they sayhe is
now?
Sitâ As soon as I reachedúe hospital I askedthe doctor who
exaÍninedhim. But the poor man had alreadydiedjust two
hourseadier.
Ma4iu Oh. If you had gone two days ago you'd have seenhim,
no?
Sitâ Thafs right, but \rhat to do, indeed?I had never even
imaginedthat he would die quickly like that. If I'd known
that I'd havegoneright away.It would haveb€enbetter if
he hadn't died at suchan age.We must say .may his soul
fiid peace',what else can we say, úer all?
Manju So the man wasn't so old, eh?
Sitâ If he'd been old then it wouldn't hâve been such a sad
affair eiúer, you know. But the man is only 35 yearsold!
According to úe doctor, he usedto drink a lot. If he had
taken his medicine and hadn't clrunkalcohol he wouldn,t
havedied suchan untimely death,you know.
Manju Has the funeral ceremonytakenplace?
Sitâ It took placeat Pashupaúearly this moming. How quickly
it hashappened!If therchadn't beenwork at the office my
husbandwould have gone.But it lvasn't convenient.This
eveningI'll haveto go and seehis wife.*
ManJu How big are the children?
Sitâ I Íhink the son's alreadymarried. The daughter'sa young
woman already too. NoÌv, poor thing, that woman has to
arrangeher dâughter'smarriagealone.
Ma4iu But if shedidn't havechildren it would be evenharderfor
her, you know. The son's grown up alreadyyou know, it
doesn'tmatter,he will help his mother.
Note * Among Nepali Hindus, it is unusualfor a womanto âttenda
funeral.
Grammar
129 Aheady done: compound verbs with {t
The verb {fq hâsbeenencounteredbefore,in combinationwith the
inÍinitive of a verb, whereit meanscanlbeable.However,úe same
verb has the secondmeaningof n frnishlbe complebd Its i-stem
form vf+1can thereforebe usedinterchangeablywith the verbivfr1
to meânúolïnisá:
srrw+Ì+rq qfõ-{fr r Today's work is Íinished
@crurrÈqfrfuMÈï t Yesterday'slessonis still not
frnished.
The i-stem fofm of any veÍb (seeGrammar 69), whethertransitive
or intransitive,may alsobe combinedwith sq to emphasizethat its
action has alreadybeencompleted.The compoundverb consistsof
úe i-stem of the veÍb + qq, ìvritten as a single word:
càcffir I havealreadyrcad.
Êcfrfls{ffiffit You had alreadycome.
He is alreadyasleep.
eqïqftaqì{ì r He hasalrcadydied.
Becauseit seÍvesto emphasizethat somethingis over anddonewith
when it is the secondpart of a compoundverb, the veÍb (q almost
alwaystakesa past tensein úis context- usually this is the simple
past oÍ the completedpast.For úe samereason,it is rarely usedin
the negative.The completedpresenttenseis also sometimesused,
but often its meaning (úas already...) is conveyedby the shorter
simplepasttense.
In Nepali, compoundverbswith Qq areusedmuch morecommonly
thanthe Englishtranslationa/readymight suggest.In a contextwhere
an Engüsh-speakermight say it's becomedark or he has left, a
Nepali-speakerwill often sayrÌìivrô v{e+à it's alreadybecomedark
ands rF{tfd áe's ateady 1€Í.
ìà a Êa-{rF{Td fï rÈ flfiI <-{â But I am alrcadymarried,you
Èqqií | know. You don't needto
seekfoÍ a bride Íiü me.
 qrÈÍq rqriÍq E€qërrr{sìi r3rdü I've abeadybeento the <-ò$+rüfi-{€g€{qrqï t we usedto eat grndÍr0,kin
T-f qÏt rcìq ! ministy twice today.Let that restaunnt-
ne not have to go a third aà ìq{Ìqr q\rà rq qrô-{€ {q-d If we hadgone into that
timenow! qr;gìÌ t rcstauÍantwe would have
ç-òer.!r{aqì ÈÌqfucffii r I Íead thatnovel a long gund.ok.
time ago. "ur",
In fact, úe final verb of an unrcal conditional sentenceis actually a
3ì erwnr1'+rr* vffiffi After Í haveread any novel
shortenedform of a tensethatconsistsof the -ì participle+ firò- The
trã+vqaqÌvnàr onceI Íeally don't wish to
secondof the two sentencesabovecould rcad asfollows:
readit a secondtime.
qÈ firqï | that lastawantover theÍe
130 Unrealconditionalsentencês t{d
we wouldhaveeatsnganúuú<
Unreal conditional sentencesstate that if somethinghad been tJre
casein úe pastsomethingelse would havehappned:X it hadnineit This tenseis âlsousedon its own to talk aboutintentionsin the past
I wouldn't havegone out: if it hadn't nined Í would have sone out. - usually intentionsthat v/erc not frrlfilled:
Suchsentencesare 'unreal' becauseanyonewho uners,heãn, rcads qqlr{qrqr ïõì fuq r I wasgoing m climb / would
or \ryritesthem knolvs that in fact the reality tumedout differcntly. have climbedEverest.
The 'if clausemustend with a combinationof the -Çd participleof This sentencedoesnot makeit cleaÍ whetherthe speâkeractuallygot
whicheververt is involved,followed by the úoÍt -e paÍticiple of the on to the mountainor not. When the samephrasebecomesúe second
veú Ël Ío be,i.e. -\rà ï(. If the verb is negativeit takestheprefix t-. half of an unrca1conditionalsentence.however.it becomesclearthat
Regl condition he did not:
Unreâl condifon
cftc-âì{ì... crfrcÈ:{q. ÈS qqì+ qq q $rrqr q-qìfE t x it hadnot snowedI would
If it nins... E it hadrained... haveclimbedEveÍest.
$ qrçq q|... s íqrç+ì ìïs... The meaningrcmainsexactly the sanrewhenthe shorterform of the
Ifhe doesn't come... If he hadn't conre.. verb (the habitualpast)is usedinstead:
In general,the forrn -gà vg is used no matter ìvho or what the I If it hadnot snowedI'd have
frtïqìqìqqqvrr<{rErrd
subjectis, rcgardlessof number,gender,or level of politeness.But climbd Evercst.
occasionally,if úe subjert is felt to deserveespecialdeferenceor
qftÈqr ìïçô ìïSqcffiinfiï tI'dhad any money on me
politeness,úe High form consistingof the dictionary fonn + rÌgô
rI{ is usedinstead: âÈfi-As f+-d t I'd havebatglttp*nt for
ttu funily.
ilr{qrTràqì... acÉ E T.Tçdì trS...
If you go-. If you had gorc... ilrtàeàWfi"fiqTravçÈvq If you had said that thing ia
ffirg qr{qqï rì... ilÉ i-qrdìrçd qC... vtà5dt Englishhewot ilhave
IÍ you don't 9o... If you hadn'tgone... mdentood-
The secondpart of an unrealconditionalsentenceusually endslÌ,ith qrq qrÈ riq qqrë€ *rfl6<ÈÈ t IÍ the sunhad shonethe
a veÍb úat is exactly the sameas the habitualpast tense.However, chil&en would have
üe meaning of this tense u,hen it is the conclusionof an unreal played outsi&.
condiüonalsentenceis very different: srfrflrqqrqàcStrÈÈgckd t IÍ you hdn't eaten stalerice
your stomachwouldn't
be hutìng.
EXERCISE @ Match up the beginningsand endsbelow to cÍeate
five unreal conditional sentences.Translatethe five sentencesinto Simple stetememts Reotizations
English. <qrtàqr <ràe r aqrãàT{<rfr Ès !
Yclurholirse
is nie. Wv. youÍ houwis nice!
r qqrlÈ+ ilÈ rïq... ...çqìqfêàffiRìqMl sràqrcrr+qr o r sq+Ì'Êrdqrs-{d {è6 !
r cffiícü rïc... ...üÈq-{qrÈSfrm I Tfue is a nn in hishand. Hey, he's got a gn in üs haDd!
ì q-{rsqiÈ(tEF ïrïçdÌ qq... ...qgïrg{tlT|-{{ÍËqr I acÉàffiq-ôq-í{dr dqÉ+ÌÈrrqÍôTíqÈàiÈE !
r Èqrfi ffirqrçô ì{s... ...cfrCsìrreqrt {rüì r YouÍ en hat fuotÌE tall Why,yott so.nhasfuow tall!
I sr*è fl-e ì{C... ... q qq|€Iq rÍr( qTd I Ììqfrqrtsràr If{T@<rqÍqqÍ ag-{6 !
'nç*
Thae is m ntaneyin my pket. Wlry,rfue'srr@Ìrt,/rËyinÍnyrpdf6!
131 Theshort completedprcsenttense
The completed pÍesênt tense is explained il Grammar 77. In
everydayspokenNepali, this tensemay takea shoÍtenedfoÍn, paÍtly
becauseit is rather longwinded.After all, why use five syllablesto
133 The verb Êãt to knowlrcagnize
say 'I've done' in Nepali when you needonly use three?The short This vert is usedexclusivelywith hurnannounsas indirect objects.
fomx of the completedprcsent tense are also used to imply úât In the habitual presenttense it means to reognin while in past
someúing happenedsuddenlyor unexpectedly. tensesit meansn be acqnaintedwith.
The shoÍ form of the completedpÍesenttenseis simply the full form aqÍâ g'€ fiaffi È'i{ff6 tqÈ, Do you rccognize that
minus the final -à of the -gâ participle that is the first word of úe ÈÈï | íAïqì qdü€ 't Iorson? No,I iton't.
paiÌ. The two words of the frrll form becomea single word in the Who is he?
shoÍt forÍr: If therehad tuen myone
Full form ShoÉ form {3ffiïÍqf
-tf+ôtììn1"*"** ihere ihatI knew,I'd. have
{iÍçâg qlTs€ mld hin/her.
efi-6s*I\rrr6{ dS"Sq q*ccr<, Èfcffi<rfrdrrffiq t Beware,I knowyou
ilr{ìrÊrq*o dqr$ï $Írrq6 very well!
EXERCISE70 Translateinto-Nepali:
:132Realization:usingiÈ6at the ênd oÍ Today somepeoplewe know are coming to ouÍ housefoÍ dinner at
aentenoes 6 o'clock. I rcturn home from the university at 4 o'clock, but the
QE is tle sÌrortfonn of <{ô 6, the compleledpÍesenttenseof tlrc houseis ernpty! And I look in my bag to seeif the key is there and
veÍb q b remairíconrrnuero be.<{o can be thoughtof as an add- the bag is empty too! Wherc might it have gone?I searchin every
on word-similarto fret (Grammar 92), althoughthereis a difference placebut I carmotfind the key.
in that {{F must takethe placeof anoúer verb, andcannotsimply be ïhe cook shouldhavecome at half past 3 but he has not come yet.
to any statement.ïi6 or its negativeform Qí6 may be Perüapshe has alrcady come to the house and then gone to the
usedinsteadof g, à, È or òfi at the end of a sentenceto indicate maÍket. If he had stayedin the houseuntil 4 o'clock this problem
that úe speakerhasjust realizedwhat s/he is saying.It has no Íeal would not haveoccurred.ShouldI brcaka window to get in? Or shall
equivalentin Engüsh,unlessit be the exclamationmark, or the old- I go backto the universityândseârchfoÍ úe key in my offrce?I don't
fashionedexclamation'why!' with which an observationcan begin know. s'hat shall I do?
in Eneüsh.
Oh, now the cook hasarrivedandhe hasthe key in his handl If I had
bmken(sìE ro ôrea&)a window my husbandwould havereâlly rold
me off!
It is alrcadya quarteÍpast4. He opensthe door for me. Shall I phone
my husbandand tell him to comehome soon?No, there's pmbably
no need.The cook has alreadybought all the food and now he will
cook it foÍ us.

+ É 1+
?l rl II
{ì

Ërr
i'a {r
J
I qr
I
t
t+U
o
Ir
J
o
= ln this unlt you will l€am
. some vèrsesoÍ a Nèpali
íolksong
. how to intensifythe action oÍ
a vèrb
. the long€rcontinuoustenses
. the shoÍt rêal condiüonal
sênt6nce
D3+ two portersand a folksong rrrFdilfl * rrrcEs$lÌ f@d fu( rfr6r c uffia< rrq6ï |çfi-{F+ìíÈ
Múila works as a porter in the hills. On his way home one day he
sïrc-ì, Rilà{drq-S rìqf t
meets anotherpoÍter, and they agreeto keep each other company rrRqrq,i{È rrsdcÉfr ( Èì EràqëÊfu\.sàrà rq-qiara ÈÌ qrfr t
along the way. qrÈdrúo,twËdÌú6 rffitõÌTrttEà QE tào ec({rr
:rRqrqsqlT{,à{ ( rrsr 6 ràs{rô-ôçsdrvr{+ ïÉ {à t
qrRitrqqrârr+rgcr.à r+çàq+ïerq{rÈ, qFÍr o.à ffi dz{È
q+ fuqrrrgqr<Ì r q
vR+rgo, ssÌ rerd Êceiqr'à Iq+rfu<qÊcÍl--6fr?
fifuor{fiq, u s{Ì aq-qre àãrfií{F s rq<cfEàÈ{r s{È rq
C-scr
dtt", {...q fl.or, ffi T{ fd ô ?
Èdr +ôì<o,qr{ rfd-{<t
qrRtqr.{òlrs c{ Ècr crfi.{rg{ F+oÌI s-d erq {rÈ s, ërffi
freier'ò r
Èr reqre fr <r*,q frç{ qrg6|
rqtsfiïffiì
Èr e, vrfr ft@q rcdqr{fr {rfr r{fil6qrïco t
qrÊe(ïrq, s{qrâsõrs-{q€Tfi-d-rns-{q-$ rfrffi fi-ornecqr$6r
+r qlto crs rrr|$er q.q-*i-àqÈc r
t{qfsftft,ì{cfFftR
qÈ{ErSfd eterqrìrõqrfr,ìsq fuftR
1g<rqÍâSârtSâ,ffigfr
ffiarÈqrqrfrFdMcrTq
tTRqrg rrí, qrs ffrrfr{ 2 ìsqfrftR,ìwtuRft
qÈ{qr$fs etsrqrqqrf, Ìsq fsRft
flQtrqrE E{ft-{ EÈ r
e-+aw*q+ gtrr eg f{qrâ íÌà+
r+Rqrsr{ÌÈ T{ r
qrÈfl@i-ffi,ìfirrõr
TrdÊ qàilà,Èrü{ï qrqmÍâsrìd
ÌirqfrRR,ìsqfsRfr
trf<qr q|-qr{k|ë@ r eÈ<qr$fq etsmrqõarf, ìsc fuRft
qrÈ-flcrq1ar+éqÌe@@r qrkqrsì srrgàcrfi oqEM a tÈàaqrq tffi sffi fs.qÌt qÈ
ìTRqrç+àfdqqnàF{
+È<< gofr rwfràr Èr
 Boy HeÍe, take the water.Oh, your friend hasgoneto sleep.
-crk on the far sideof 1qc ctubken
<r fear ffi IìÍahila Rigüt, we'll hâveto sing a songto wakehim up. Can you
caú
++ïAo4 úarp qrcr love, affecüon sing?
Tfi{qd to resÍ ( ito kill weariness') frf< love, affection Boy Yes I can,brother.Shall I sing úen? Right, listen to me.''
cü right heÍe ffi crossnraú Silk (handkerchie| rippling (in the breeze), SiI}
-ì< aear wtà s'ngle-harr.lred (hndke.rchieOriWlins (n the breeze),*2
ãtr jug, st*I cup' qTf gun Shall I go Ílying (over ihe) hills anil Passes? Silk
\m sik (hnilkerchief) <ffi double-baneüeil (hmdkerchieÍ)rippling (in the tueeze).
fnï<ft rippling (in the breeze) Tt deÊr (Sayind 'llrü lltü' to a chicken,(saying) 'mri' to a cat
s-{ úofly írq úoalrn Your love aful my love, waiting at the crosxoads.
eÍer hill, ridge sq to ca , invite
Silk (hanikerchiefl rippling...
cqrï Pass
One-barelleil gn, two-baneüedgw, aiming at a deeÍ,
It's not a fur that I sa aiming at, it,s love that I ant
Poúcr Oh broúeç whereare you going today? calling.
Mahila I'm going homeúoday. Sik (handkercüef)nWling...
Portar Where's home? Iì[shila Oh, this brother has brought some ìüal€Í. f have drunk
Mahila The oúer side of úe Trisuli river, Phedivillage. some.You weÍe sl€eping.Wiü you drink?
Porter Wheredid you staÍt ftom today? Nore*' ïhe boy singsa few versesof oneof the mostfamousNepali
ÌVlahita Early this moming I set out from Nuwakot. folksongs,ìw frRft. Like many folksongs,ìct fu'RR containsa
Porúer lt's a bit frightening when you walk alone, you know. lot of wordplay that is difficult to translate.
Have you no companions? *'It is an old tradiúon for young men and women to exchange
Mahih I setout with somefriends,but úey havegonoto Dhading.
handkeÍchiefsâslove tokens.
Their path wasin that direction,mine in this. What to do?
Porter Well, if that's how it is your path and mine are the same
from heÍe. Let's go togetherftom herc.
Ìì{ahlla OK, it will be pleasant.Your load is big. What is in it? Grammar
Porter There's salt, oil and cloth in this. This is a load for a
134 Gompoundveíbs with õq
businessmanin Deurali.
Mahlla I'm tired. How hot the sun is, don't you tbink? Let's rest Whenusedon its olvn, the veó üq meansto ineÍl Put in.llm y be
beneaththat pipal tree foÍ a moment. comparcdto the veÍb Tq to plaÊÊupou keep.In facq tt{ is felt by
Poúrr Yes, let's sit dow!. How thirsty I am! Can we get some someNepati-speakers to be a more polite way of sayingroPuÍ fu' so
water somewherehere? úat onewill hearsomespeakerssayingq fiilÍfi Fq-fieÌfrk$ c s/hal
Mahila Look, there's a boy coming from lower down. His house I ptt sugü in iheEa?andotherssayingt kqrqr ffi qfuk$ I
will be nearby. I'll ask... Hey Kanch4 where's your lVhen it is combinedwith the i-stem of a verb to form a compound
house? verb, however, qtq simply rcinforces and undeÍlinesthe senseof
Boy It's just nearhere.Why do you ask? that veÍü wiúout changingits essentialmeaning.
Mahila If that's so, can you bring a jug of wateÍ?The sun is hot, s{E{rtÌ he's gone
we are thiÍsty. away
Boy No problembroúer, I'll bring it. !rò it's hryend q!'€td it's over and
After five minutes: done with
 eqr€ìàqrrqì Jzousaw mr€tèÈ6rXrfr you have EXERCISE 71 Convert the tenseof the following sentencesftom
surcly seen an habitualtenseto a continuoustensewith <{{:
sÈìÈrsÈ{râ-{ffi6a He üdn't staylong. AftÊÍ Exanples
.re-(,Tdf{t thtE€dayshe wasgone,
q ci5{qr õrq rE I q sfusqrìFrqqfriÈà q I
you know.
q qfr{qr 6rq IFT qsfus{rflq.rftìEfrfr(r
avrÊàÈ@qr*n-{ÊaÊ<r You have seenveÍy weü that r sfi-{€EÌs-{ffiàtfrúìl
õÍiïÌ qrõ | thercis a [nn'et cut heÍe ì rÌq1q{içr 11gTftõrrÍffi |
every day I ÌÌ ìrÍí er6Íà Ssãr6-ffr qFE I
qccfuí T€rd f{
ft-ffarv<rC<q | After threeexamplesit's õr{creïcrÈtec+rfrqnfut
r €'rfi-qrc
over and done,you know, I qzrËtqrefrffiwsqff<<vrd r
135 Continuoustenses using 16{ 136 Short Íeal conditional sentences
When usedon its own, the verb ({t meansto rcmain, continue.It is ïhe -c participle consistsof a veÍb's pasttensebase+ the vowel e or
frequently combinedwith the i-stem of a verb to form a compound (anotherway of looking at it) the -ÇÈ participle minus its -fr.
veÍb that emphasizesthe continuousnatuÍe of an action. ïhe -qà
participle of such a compoundveó is used to form â continuous Grammar 91 explainedhow to constuct a Í€al conditionalsentence
by using the simple past tenseof a verb followed by vì for úe 'if
tense:
clause,and a presentor futuÍ€ t€nse(or an imperative)for the 'then'
a-e@q rrrcrrfrr+r*râ{rq q È Loo&ro4 ndayI n clause. A second quicker way of expressingúe sarne meaning
g*n ì@ô q ra€ ç*n writingthissuggÍx'üon
for rcplacesthe veú of the 'if clauseúth the shoÍt { paÍticiple of th€
veó, andleavesout the word ïì. For exanrple,compae the long and
+fr<.vn
vftrs àerìtrÈàÈ{ r "tíïïlfl;* **, úort versionsof the sentencesif it nins I wn't go ottt úd if it
iÍt ï{q qrq çrm thesamekind of suggesüon desn\ nin I will pmbably go out:
fqqÈtrôc1 t at exactlythistftre.
Longversion Shoú version
But no-oneis givin! this wfr Èraf6< uÍRat
srffq-ìqìcErÈ(sft-{ r
matteÍ any atbnüon.
cffr cì-{cì q EÍf{{EÍ+{Tr qfff nqì q ETÈ(qÍfrr r
v çsaffi wvr+ì cl6u g<-+ ìw I wastünking of writinga
Often, úe -e participle witi te followed W q, thatgh, but, ro
+Ì-frq lflqÌEaíãq textbookof the Nepati
underlinethe conditionalnatu€ of the sonteÍìce.
r tngrage.(My)friends
qEd$q B 5oggorr@
qFTqÌq{Q{Ì EI wercEuing me not to qFffifr rrd {ggT6 | A ütle Íice wiü be enoúgh('lÍ
write (it). EvensoI begar to thereis a licle rice it
wÍn I un still twitingÌt rcut will suffice').
!ÌÌ{ qÍì e qÍísÍs r {Í{ r If you"ê hungly just eat,
Becauseof úe greaÍerlengthof úese verbs,they are usedinsteadof
youngeÍ bother,
tbe other continuoustenses(rr€g, që ffi eft.) when theÍ€ is a need
ÈsÍiqs e fd{ õ{fr Êdfr But if theíeis no moneyhow
to stressthe continuousnatuÍeof an activiw.
wiII wepay theü11?
dì-fiÈàqfq6€,ìqrfiàòfi6-,o t ItisoK if you spak
English,andit's oK if you
s.['ÉakNf{,alitoo,
EXERCISE 72 Create one shoÍ real conditional sentence from
each pair of sentencesbelow: g
Examole
crft ciï tqfl|q<qrftr r = crfr rÈ q qilt{ qÉ{r r q)
r È+ qrràc tc qïEr nìGfiiqr I
I qryq qrfr lqqr{rcTrfur r
r +raqrgì EÈ{ ïrr q+ qiÈq r6rõfi++ {S{r r
ft
I ìqFfr Í-rff.nãr qr{n rÊ-Ít tg-m qfr'rrâ q|'È lflqrff foË{r I
tt
r rq+ffi{rÌ|{rqq-ilcrqÍìtrrqrÍIï

EXERCISE73 Translateinto Nepali:

tsròT|.{ €Ìiqr I-
o
ã
I went with elder bÍother to the airpoÍ yesterday.SomeguestsweÍe Gadinalnumbers
coming fÍom Delhi to stay with us. Early in the moming we had
phonedthe RNAC office and a womanhad saidthâr úe Delhi flight Tc
CL
o
IT
would arrive ât 3 o'clock in the aftemoon.'If thât's the casethen we ! çf n gql{ ìr gfit{$ ìt qdfr{ sÌ çd-qffrs
mustsetout from homeat2.30', saidelderbmther. ì sÊ n {rë rì {r€{ sRõrqffr{
As as we arrived at the aiÌport elder broúer askedan official
"soo^n
({I|itFì abourthe flight. Tbe official told him rhat it had left Delhi
onÌy recently becauseúe weatherhad been very bad. .In úat case
at.1

qÌir
R Ìë
ts *Ìr
TI( TëT
1ì È€€
ìs qÌfrs
1r q{r
ir dftv
rr qfrir
ei Ê-qffrq
w q4-frq
e!E frtr
s{ Errffrg
o
a
how long will we haveto wait here?', elderbrotherasked.'It is flying
t( *ë ì d(T iê 6frs
(udnu) towardsNepal now', the official said, 'it will anive within
l, {rkr tu vjt ìü {iTrt(I ìe dfr{ 8u {{.Effrt{
qt6 tq õ16r{ r< {ãã-5q ì< sd{ s< {óqtfr{
onehour.'
( rr sqrsir n g+qrfrq
'The aeroplaneis late and we will have to wait here', elder brother (q r. frs i. ftq &. q=ÍRI
said. 'But motherand father are waiting at horne', I told hirn, ,They
do not know that úe plane is coming late.' It \.{rsq a \-6{.ã& '8 q{{ff{ cr rrãrÊ sr \16r{À
k? q tg.í -_ Ì------â,
{< qt|côl ur '{{ff{
'You go andphonethem', elderbrother said. 'Tell úem úat we will kì t79rí "-l
E
c-:-â
tztl côl u{ rz Qn1 <1 ffi re Êdqr;rÀ
come straighthome after the planearives.' la qs.í rü c r.|qôl us +{fi 18 qÌ{r{â
qqTq er ffi rrk Tft-d{ .k cqrfr
l( Eq-I ê,{ fu..& t{qfi ç 6{ffr {E EiqFà
n.Ítg.-1 3u É tÍ.l col uu (iÍ{l{ qm{Ì ru €<r{à
"u
3fõI3Fr Àq {óìIèâ uq 3I5{-d{
k{ l Íé ôt E ( g.tE n. cq sfl{à ({ 3q1q{
t w& & {rt r.. wI
Above 100,thenumbersproceedastheydo in English,but omitringthe
English 'and':
Kinshipterms
r.r qr{q \rf
1Âì gâ(qàv'c:&
r.." \r;FQqRorQER
rsì1 ç{üqr{qr{sqàfu
ì!.r.q r+eËqRsfigqqrõ
í . .. . . |t.n qt(E qÌqt
gfrer ãrfl 1g srftqr
nqsìi ç+vre Ì6 5wr<
<n w àfrv ElCeÍparüclê YorÌrgerparürle PbÌ.ut Mat.uncle Mat. aunt
ìF-- ÈfrsFlrq
( . ...ô ô .l {cn ï1 |€
Fr qrrr {rfi rcrq qE{ qrìEr

If commasareusedto split up largenumbers,theplacingof the

commasreflertsthesystemof QqR, qrq, and õ-ès, mÍrer tlÌarì Èâ <q *frfr ws S5Fí ìerq mfr wô
lhousandsandmillions. For exarÌìple,thenumbeÍ31,350,226 u/ill Er.sis. EÍ.brc. YÍ sir. Yr. brc. Wìfeì Wìfe's wìfe's
appeaÍas: EÍ bío. Er. sìs. Yr. sis. Yr. bm.
ã,te *t gert
la,k.,ìì( fr{ fÌe È€iÌrq c-{r{ ËqR RÊ{q ds ""{ qãFTT
qfih{
sR<E üq!{Eqr{cr

qérFt 3fqtrvq <{t iÍ<

HüsbüdÌ H6b@d'sHüsbddÌ
Er sis. Yibo. Yr sis.
1J qrl"
E]!{' eff{Í
!Ír.ír ïfS qÊfqr qffi
NAh€w Niece N€drewNiece

bÌ<r. 6Ìô
Sor DâughtÊ.

t E r .r lqrE
D-inlaw S-inìaw

I morefonnally,qTH"{{"{
z moÍeronnally,í.q rlrt
r 2 {dtrflq

3 trôàâ
4 .rq I cDér
Íhüro kftãb

dhani keF
naya KeIa
,| {Tqf ÌFflrt{5
Ìãmr'ã
kitãbbarú
8 qmr àâ-Es sanakeparu
9 ït.d +âA€ gaúb ketãhaÈ

o 5 i r9r.rqrr

t $, +ra+rsÌa* o r
ranrroÌal a l0 iFII{rqr{€ dhau-Ìãjãharú

ho, kãfhnã{aú fhúto cha.

- I f<r,mXrn€frt,w6<$ r hoina, bhaktapuÌ gaú hoina,
íahar ho.
1+ ì $, +rardiwÈ o r ho, kâfhmã{aü rãmrai cha.

o fi.+rqn=Ì{r<È
ü, qR{{T{FTÌE
fqa, m5<a-lïrEt{rr,5rrì
I
r ho, kãÍhmãdaú Íàilo SúaÌ ho.
ho, bbaktapüÌ purãno cha,
noina,utaktapurnayãsahar

o I
2
frr+,tfuw5r5'frqa I
Èt,qffitì
hoina, ma Bimal Kumãr hoina.
ho, ma údyãÉhi hú.
Ìr{(È | hoina, puÌãno Saharho.

x
o
ft-t,rffifr-rr
{,rffi{r
oÌ
hoina, ma údyãrthi hoina.
ho, ma nepãli hü.
or
ìÌI{ qitlIr 6 |
bhãi skúÌmã úa.
<q qrqrFrf,.{r
Ëtü6 ì
f6,rffifgqr hoina, ma nepãli hoina. dãju dãrjiliirpã hunuhuncha.

o
-
I q3iÌqã |
z arfrtatffidr
ma ãgÌej hü.
fcfri6r6F*qm+qrügo

frf{ qrr11qfl qçqr €{q;6 I

r
didi mahendra mahavidyãlaymã hunuhuncha,

a
-t J^
c-_ ì.
-t.t+l^| l Q.q K l .l t
Qt I
hãmi vidyãrthi haú.
timi hindustãDi hau.
bholi amã Ìa buvã gharmã hunuhunúa,
qfuqrcqrEq-Trt <ÈâdÈfi-{€ àì q I

o
. c--â- L- --S- .I
4 t.t+ Qf rìïtí €t timiharú kisãn hau.
pariyãrmâ dãju-bhãi ra dtuli-búiniharú dheÌsi chan.
s aqÉfìrç+ {Tüs r tapãi sikçak hunuhuncha.

o 6 gÌ{reffi ü |
7 çfiÊrfrqF,òfl|
8 dI qT;trE.€
r{{f fl |
e r{t ìcrô q-€.8 |
ú óiktak ho.
uni dhãni mãnche hun.
d mãnúeharú pÌahari hun
7
I
1
ì
l-.
... t .t |
...úÍfq t
...flgq |
---clu nâ.
... hunuhunna"
... huDühunna.
vúã nepãli hunuhuncha.
19 q5l5x r1Ffi-qË1úE 1 yúãharü bhãraliya hunuhuncha. ...Ë€q ì ... hunuhutrna.
3 ... Èn1 t .., chainan
1 . . .8r5 í | ... hoina, Ò ...EtÉ.t I ... boina. E
2 ...Ér5rtI I ... boinaú. 7 ...ÈEìI | ... hoinan. Ì rqt*r{Irfu+Èr,+frraro r
3 . . .È-{rÌ | ... hoinau. 8 ...8rã.r1 | ,.. hoinan. prahari thõra n4iü chaina, ôli ÍãChã ch&
E r E . r |l ... hoinau. o l...hutruhunnâ. q. í!t.1 ctGt t9 |
Qt, É aÍtÌ
:' ...trÍÈËÍ| .,. hunuhunr& l0 ... l ...bunuhunna. ho, hulãk ghaÌ ali ÍãChã cha.
qçqreqqRfríffifr-( er6ro r
I {IqI lìF{tFI Ìãmro kisãn 6 tIfr fs{T{{F dhad lsjbãtabqiãrtitr Hlomr-fâr
tãChãcha,
kisãnharú
 {Era{r g-{frqÌ;Ír,qT{{.s,qi[F[ T{ r+{ 6 | qÍí{s1ìtef{ €{ | bhãihaÌú6ik{akhun" ìtI{{€q{qrq lHúih[
bqiãrmã prúaÌi thrnã, pasalharú, hulãk ghaÌ ra baik cha" gbümãírEn
lr{{Ì !T|{TqnïRqTE I srqlìEffi ë€ú Idãiyüóikrak ff {q{qreëõ l rl4iyú ebrnnã
pÌahaÌi thãnã bejãrmâ cha, hunuhunúa. huDuhurch&
qï€fr qk{ {Efadráfrc ffifi-ã{ ãrdro r qrqrftreï6egõ |ãroãSlrtak 3IFTrq{qrW I õ|lú gbarDâ
sarasyafi matrdiÌ bqiãrbãÍa üì kilomr-fsÌ fã{hã cha. hntlhda. ht[thD.ho.
qfrruFÈl mÍlsakhil rTEtqTgl ma8Èüdtu
M+srqr: nepãli kskçãmã:
t2
ç ç{rçarffi6e1 r dasjanã údyãúhihaÌii cha& IçF Qt ek haptã
r qt+tr;nfi-q*s a;r r pãcjanã ãgrcjhaÌii úan.
2qÊq{r {FÈ 6uÜaú mlnche
ì <ífiT ST{{F 6{ | dulianã jaÌmanharú chatr 3ft{õrcr ffiffd tinYatãkitâb
lÌiÌfr +srcr: ãgreji kalÍ{ãmã: qrcçtr àa carjannkeF
I
s üqr{ffi{T f{flct{€61 | untrãisjaú vidyãÍthihsÍii chan, qì's {Frcï pãcrupiyã
.It\,t. qÍ'atQe
s
, t9,t I naujaDi kelãharú chan. Fa Ìg chaYrlãmec
6
r qïqi I a'4r96 r91 | dqsjanã keFharu clra|!. 7ffirfir ff{qf€ sãtjsnãÃimãi
10 83TIerãT lõCÍTâthvalãk8k$ã
1 ffi q{{FrqÌ1q{ {ËrTèã6 | gqÌÊF'ànsu Hlo
masãgadas rupiyã ra ek baÍÍã curot cha. l0E{rs{r Êàfr thsjaú vide6i
ì Ërfi-{€fi-{ {Kràlq ìq|{{r 6ï r Ë€ffi-ôdúkilo
hãmiharú tih haptâdekhi nepãlmã cìrú 12 ftà qr( ffô sãdhesãtkito
ì €õnrrecr <vwn ffi-qFò, fi-i-q-{rqr{qrs { qt{s{r àcr 6ï | 13 fr{c|8 tu pãthi
hubk ghaÌnã dâ6jad logretnãnò€,lÍljaDã ãimai Ìa pfojürã 14 {6r€ qFtr 8dhãimãnã
IIeF.h'Í 15 ff{ ìfirqÌ r+en{ Ìtfr tin rupivã pacahatt{Ìpaisâ
e dqÉiiï õfr Èqr 6 ? to trÈ aÌ $ml sePe nau ruPiYã
tapúãgr kati paisâ cha?
13
k .È lrr.frqqrÈftrq{Ì à, a<ffi ffirÍ (s{ÍÌqÌE I r {di:fi-fr qrffiò-{ Èï |
tyo bhãrôtrJianã|t(he$gt pobãdrain& ha nqÉn keFúga das
ndâqiiko ãphtro moÍar chaiira.
npiyã{hâ. i <ròìia< ra+à â-cï l.r{àì flffi È|
 ?rfif{-qÍrõ{r({cr!fiqrq{r (qÊFdqr{s r rãto mo{ar Ratanko hoina. Ratânko sãthilo ho'
dhani kisãnsãgadas pãthi cãmal ra das kilo ãlu úa. v+r+ì 3ndÈ-(Ú-{ t
v- -8ìr-.:ì- r -c q n l + iI sE ït ^t.9 q t -ú |
Sub-rrkoãphno motar úaina'
harek tcbulmã dú kap ciyã úa" gffi<rqfrçeaÈrtot
q fprs-q'.-{rr
fõdr{ à { frqrfE€ftr õ{c à{ | Sub-rrkodãjt{ko eufã motâr cha.
óilqaksãga kiüib chaina rr vidyãrthihariiEãga kalâm úaha.
l4
ll t
t $c4{r$Êffi{Íg{-++rkâe1
ìÍrí ÍÌeT{ È | bhâi óikçak ho. ql-Ël|(rlÌ It I bhãi gharmã Dhan Bahãdurki Súnalikã du-Úarã didi châL
cha. È ç<r-+rmÈa t
Èfr frrer+6+ r dirf 6ikçakhun Èâ qrfl @ rodicharnã meÌo buvâ-ãmã chaiüa.
chin
 ffrflqffiTqr€{Íffi-ïrfrfr8( 1 f+'<r*qrfirm ïrq s r
men-ãnãtn cirJaDn nâti-nãtiDi chan, Hi5bnã GiÌiÉkonnn ú&
s@rMfràr
{nihÃÌÍko chorãchori (üalna. It
I qqÈr|-fT3íérir{qr
qQfdrït{drrÍâ q l
tyaskelãki duiP ghrÌ aìsn-
vúã&ãnauvaçõ gm"rrrn qqqfr ÍrS* cscrfqcrc{dqÌàe r
qmrt++aì-ardfrqr yu Ít ,ogãúkoeutõdyãposslnntrat cht
hãnÌã ÉcYriã moÍõ bbiisi ch'n
sffirqrõ'firEÌtqr
15 üskõãt\irnã úori chü.
I rcqrÌr{r gRr+r grcr €r,ËrEïr rccr ïrIÍ rt|-ff Ërr s+tr qrcqrreì<rq r
timi merocìorãkos5ahihau,hotur?dmÌonãmGautamho? ütrkã clqionã cloÉ chrn
ffi mffi X1à trr qÌqr qrt ò r qr{Tofrth r qqqrFÈr Èt wfi-{€q r
dmo sãtàiko bnvã&o nnm Gi[c6 Mõn ho? thiihã chr kl.ftâlna? yrs maDcüelÍi dheÌri sfthftNú úrn
<-{* trr eefrrm{ rcfrrcr€w6ror rsôqI*àt
vahãko nãm Lúçmi Nnü ho. tyo mdãi thõhn úr. tssko sllDi cüsinr?
Ìì v-<rqirraararÈr rffiw+'qÌor
t9
nero ghrr yrhãbits ÍÀChã.hdnr. úlmroghaÌ krhã ch.?
arridç*fr6q1q59;6 r<cÉ+qrq1qrÊ
srüa t
I <m6rfravnrÊrï rrr{r qdïfrcÌ cfr È{ |
tapfuo buÌâ bsihnã hunutuncna.Opúi ãmãtãithãbncür?
<rgì+rrrrdr e ìvn lg *+qr6rqftrsrs{+ìagvfr v{+rr rnir
sfi-{*-trqr€{r* Èdqrq rvftqscrâvr{rth t arr{r1Ì dq-í'6 t R{rq c õqr16ïqr ir€ |
a ecrifr rrs eãrffidrd qfuq qFE t Ët{{, g;RFIÍaìír;€i I
uDiharükã gai Uemm khetui chrn" rnihenÌlõi fhEh5 údnâ?
EffiË-{r qr@€ Èt qÈ {rcÌ ffi dtq I
ilm q-<frsìqÈr{rfrqrgËÌr
hãmÌo thü polhlret ho. hãmi bEhun haú N
frfafrqeafq{ rÈfrqrqràÈr I qAt{Êï Fr{qrsïErer
yo ftnro ghafi holna. mcri ãmãko ho. v-â-6ÈfwÈfrcrrrrEq r
fr*tÈç+mÌrecmffiffit
cr 6 |ÈfrqR{RqrËrfr...qcr€Ì:.........{ ...I
ÈÌ rrr... { rÈà e-<...
c €m-{€fr-ìqq ïrr* ckcr src.16ïr
meÌonãm"..ho. rero ghir... mã cìa. meÌo psÌiyãÍmã hími.. Jani
t s{QúqfrF-{qÌfi-fr#{l
d{FÈ qr Ë<nqfuqv€lTqr€' I
hrú:-..-... rr.-
ÌfrÈfficrc... { ta-qÍ...
4616;o r 2l
mcri rüdiko nãm.- ho. vúí.. mã hunuhunúâ. I <qr{qn sì q{sTqÍí ql1Ë€ r
Ìfrfrâ-àfficm...Èr d qFÈ àS{r dÈqqrfrqr qrqi r
meri didúo Érimãnko nirtr.- ho. €lEF f{t6<R r-{Af cÌà qo qrqË;o r
a firn6c ËSrâ g{ qz6qk{ qr€{ r
t7
r ààârrfu*nsffi Cqrfi+Ìq<{DsïÈ r
I qfnr ç+-wròv <ç+-wroÌfrq r
mryâkn e\,iaDíchornÌa e$Janãcìori cìan x2
ffffiÊ-crcrrqffrôfror r qÈgüSâ{ìÈfu s qì{qq(qrãkí r
Pritiko vicnrmnSüryakichoÌi úr. r arr{g${ÈÈrTr1rysqt*<rrflrçqrETdË{1
$*sMcrcÊÊsrÈr I sfi-{FTf,r{Rìt{ ÈÈ+r<srtrrq lr+í{ t
SÍÌïako chorSÌo nam GiÌÍ6 ho.
 s ffi qra{Èàfq{ÈEqsìRTq{rÈ{qÊiÌ I
t fufi-{sf<ÈüC"F+ìàfu9ÈqÈsEqcEÈT{
r t íYIEEè +ìl(t.l I c"lÉéd I

t1 ì frrì{ì ÈÊÌ àì ffi-d o qÊq<w€{rcrâqça.Ftú.6r

g,eÈÈ++rr+e,âÈqqr{s r I TÍr.FF{€àcÈ6ìqrilqqrT{q I
r
EI{ITIqr {a{Ì f|q IFrÈ€t ïTkÍqrïs1E;n I
ì ãqqreÌfiffiì-{,ffiídq I
àq-dT dqÉfr;n"bÌ qÈfr urrr ErÈ |
i Edrràft-+r*ra, 3r(firr{ïrrõ|
r #\.s-r€qrsàs, q<-qrcÈsr fd-{t{ì çfi-dF{dlÌõÌ qffr qFEq t
r o +ì +qrr.ràq. rra e-ifur 3Írgràq r 2E
â qqrs$qãFTí' 3v;frqïTT€Ì{ | I san ffis. qq +ÌorqrÈi.rfiìflì r
,r fr sqfursrçrÈ+qrrErêkà{ r eqÌ frEïì {àEF qq +eÌfqgra. qr* ff rfr qc +rç< r
. ìqrdqr{ò{r.TdffiâqâSr I qk e?rER õôqr{Ìr$ IqÈ{rEI-drfEq{ qfq q firì t
24 Ë{qr4r {Èiìr bìr Ívq rqõd{r+ì ilr {T f+È. r qrqqr+Ì rrq
r fr flrqrits RksR sQeàqF{{qRqr qr$àrí rr@ ar$olr r fr+q fttqÌ |qï È+?FftflTà il' Í{+q Èi ÍÉr* Ë1Ëd I
cfi-EsÈÌ qÈ qf.c-{rt qrÈq r iqì èrrdTq11q{E."ÈÈq.1qftq ïfr TfrË+-õT q{ËFcrffi-cfì fqqï r
ì ísàfrtr€ ila,cr+drc Tmr+rv 6+Ér*r*w q;6q 1ffiqr fr+ @ 0t mÊvet qnfc<nr+r qk{ rrq.fuiì[ì f€"irqFiqt ftrÈ r
qÈ Erqraffrcçq or€ic rff|4rã Tfi-€ÊTff|qFq 16gbqI
29
ì fr àÈ-qFÈ€Ifr qì ràffir qFbï I Fâ-{FqroEìfu<qr;q qfr
fi-q qrcrqfuçÊf,-oqr
I @ acrtì Èqr qfiì{cq t
q ìÌRRrEqqr+ìqr{qr *o rÈkfum vÈ <q {Èq ffi qFE r @ qà \'sãrfsíõrqf{ì t
aqqqÌ6 q q!-€ï iÍFE I
@üfi-q5;q1Ssrçfrt
rrfr qrõ q=rcf6qà qçE aq 6;6a 1qaqr€qìffi q|Ëì rqr qrq rq @ç@rrra erqq rçfi-{ç+ìq<qrqwq fuç{ t
@ ffià iH fu-{ g-{n t @ qq{ xlíà rÈ<.ne t
rryt{ 6161qq;5. g6 ? "nrfr
( @qrqrçérì{q{r{dffi€Tfl*l
trr {'r ilrrr +'õiq qsi r q aqFdÌ qn{r ffirr qF6. ã-b ?
IJ rfraffi 6gu4ogqffiTrfrrìaFn Trìjffi r+@ rrfr f*fr t0
wqg'o. or*"i+rfrqFrrq{rsTdõ| I qk qrFÍ{RÊìà |
s516fEaqa ïrro, gqÍq qro rr" rfi-{sà rnssÈ{ r +kEôvrfr rS t
gtÍà \rscrffdrd q-õà t
'ra
I qreq {rõqreÌT<r õdr o t ffiqçeqnftrfrt
I ffirrq qft(.fà r
qìfcsì-{€ Èì qÈ fiqEFì<r rfr 6;rrr r
( tq+{rrfi qrqrqk{qr1rrò r
ì 4r6,qreÌì{r+d-{rãÈdr<r ãraro I
ï{ < ql|rr ÌTrdE Elrqq (õ |
oqcrdììvrer*Feï-<ra-dlr{iÈ r
u ÈsrcÈs-ar<rrfuÈsr{ïà r ll
ffitncm-<rsffitncrdï r Ì qìqrqrrq{ffirldÉffiàcE t
q fq-qr<È{ffirffi q"E I
cfi-cqft;lrsÈififfiqrSq t
? qcercrâffi trr<wi r
ì ìri Ê<éM çrqÌ t'rr{ ciï r
frìâmqrrwdÌfrffit
q qfu(Tqq{dqfffi.FÌ{rr€ r
aqfffiõffitrr r-{qÌi r ( rd qrqr {q{ È EtEd qqr {qrfr |
sffir ïrgës-crtcü t r rc c€ï r
k sffiqrfrtrrcctil

t!q
a)
Ì ffi q<{g{.Frc m r qF@vrfrqrftru l
acÍ{ ìffi sì{ q{ slì-à( r qF@qrflqrfq€r
ffiaòafrçqrsr crr@stqfl(*Qèïr
8 aqr€*f+-crqqÈ<rrqrâÊ1sS r qrNfrrsrqtR-ot
frfrq.'<{ qìnTdaÍfls r qrÈr-qrt@qrFesr
ncÍâgTcT rrq{Ìà <rEâqcqrq€{àg r ftíMqrfiilÈ€r
33
$r@Arcrqrf6€t
I mr€^+eenqà6g6rt S@vÍ<vn<rfq€r
ïf{ ï{-d|-flrqs6 | SWÊrrrsrl€+{r
rï@@qrÍÈÈcr
rerfuruÊqr
sâ-tsffiflcÌNqr
srdsiq.6r-dqìffiÈe r I aqrtqÉfaciqr'à r
"t ÈffiqÌ+qrfrr
v nÌfreÈffig:eqrÈt
!\ t
! $r qq{r{ q€ ÉIËqr I r Èò <rsqrâÈm qn* r
ffi rÈ fr-crqq-eàfirqï t
q qmrfi qrqrfirÊfrE r r ltrcr{ wn 4rrÈ t
sfi-eeâ.fi.è€Èsr r fcffiqràqrrò r
g*r*rfrmà€66dt ç Ufiqrâ€rvrlà r
r cffi<ffiqrrà r
35 t q-Ëtrr€e<vrrà
s+t,rffixnrqrtr-qfirâÈr t. ffifr<rqrrà r
ÈfrqrqÈtrrdïqÈ+tÈeìqrô r ìfficfE{r.frr
ffiìrrmïqÊ{-{fia-âà@ï r tt reniÈfrcrà t
<Èàïre rcri{i{ fi{& M r
<Èfr Èâì Ìn cqÊdl fir& àfrt r
Èì ìTrdïqr+rt fi{& È r t T{râd fi-dffi qrìq I
s-í{r 6Ìff{€ rrd ïqÊfi qk(.rSr I <rÈ+ïqrqrdrâs{È qr5q-qtÀ{È{ r
Èô qrqr qrí ïqÈrl qk( qÌ$rà | I sfi€cqrâwcffi ,ï.sÌ r@ cÈr r
foft rrrcrerÈ+l qÊ<<.rdr t rcrdrâìTrcd{rÈ ilÈ r
<ràqrdïqÍt{-í qk{ rrò r i<Ì ìïËqÍêì,qrfrqrsrvffi cÈq r
rÈfrÈâqncqrirtqk{rrt1 |
c qÍ( íqÍt{a ck{ {q r mnÊffiqÈcr
36 I Èìqrqàçsëri{-drdffi r
I flE"6 rÈ{ d{rga+Ìq{mqríffrfr qr{€ r I EçcÍ€Èìq{ïÈilràr
<àwr-cd<rrffi+ratfriÍ$r t it qrqmrÊT{rq {rrà r
I qn@fi-e ltrlïr
È+lg-à<rcfr-+âorfriÍ{ r
s qì?ï rf<qq-{ cc{fi qrt crÈà{ r I stèEïftìËrdìrÍrdqrfr r
! qrc fiíqlìsfrfl -K{+ì
ql-{€ r t Ìtüqrâqr<dìÊd{ftÌ frqr qrre r
I qq€qri Èqa.nd qrrà t
I q=fuWifrqrfd*qr
 r qqrâ<ffi qÈr r 5
r" ErfràÈf{-€qrqÌ r r Ìô qrEàqrqcrfr râav+<g*rer€rd r
t d 3r.ôcFÈfffi tdÌe{f+rrì<rcrâôaì r
4l t mqÈffi flffi ì-{ {rfr fãTÌ{Ìfr f<ftriqÈrâ r
r ìò wrçse f€qrscìfu€ r t frmnà ftarqs *< ïr<:ï+{qqqt-dÊ {€rs-{f,È|
r rflR rïTcT
ffi{ Èftr;E r t
_
I ------!-5
írrq ïr q Q r---ci-i-
-tq ( ---l .
gr "r c í |
1lrì Ìfr tr16<rvro rì< 6rffi rwr{ ÊTrò r
r friÈ qrËç+ w-arqrqÊiÈqr
r qfr;Ei ià q-<qrffi r r t (tcÍ{ò ÈìfÈqì-{I qqtTqrÌàdqÍffi Èfi ilrqÌ |
r treqrffi rnqTfftì wô gfs's r r íTÉÌrnÈ(ffi{Ëf 6q qrqqq{ |
u fd<ÌìÊ@{È rq-s{r$skàgfrr.6 r | (ìTr€(, flIT ÍI(IIFT ËÍqI qrÍ€' itr<fT I
. asf$úffi,rÈ{Tdr{gfrqrò rrrdr{ Èi q-{r+àdriíd r Csürrl{*{ïvsrÌìqsàfis-â È{ r
qÌrìIT I t Pa-à;*rn ffi 6gtlç*à ç{dri gq qrd t
42
I <r1<ffcq vrçrçà o r ftfrflq+rvr6+r{€sàfi'E61 |
wsq marrsÌm*qlçd e r nÈ<qrfrqìàe rfrfrì.t\'+ì üilr{qrcqrffisrerfrq<qrs t
1 tcÉô q{{r àô {È r ffi rrn qrçô o, e<wÈd aì& ftfrìvrcgì+qÈíreflqAÌ,
qKtà Ìàq t q ìqrdï qK'd riÌ {€ï.rë-{ ü t
qrfrqÈì{qsffiÈ{r ,rqÍt{€EqìÌqdT{ Èìg<rìo r
ìàffi9mfi-ffiffiqr ÈèmrfÈìqrv-aÈffi qrçÈfq-{+r
rfu g*-*r<
sqìqf{crdÌíqÌfr-ff{ffi sr g crça{racrçôqf.ò Coòfi r
ÈffiàqrqrqÍ{Msr{rtàí{ r
43
I {, qr1tìâ r qË,q6rqu1 ec t
d. qrs-irò r *{, <rwwâa+ r ffiçqìssìersrÈìâÈfuTr
if, mâ r qË.qrç+ì q r tÌqÈtÍFflr+èi-{àeÌ rÈc.Íç* Cì r
a dqr( t +{,er\rÈ& t ft{ frï qfr-s€'ìs-{Ì{ÍÊ
q<trçô M r
rfugr+RààffiÈgÌacr\rôÈÈt
4 tÌqÈa"ilr+{lì q.rà@ qÌffi {ilq* |
qS + r qr gqr<;rçà r qks@fdfiqr-Êql,rsâàÈr
q E t . 1 . < + t ltG ( tí q sq t I
q-â+ i rÍr qïì qr6{.-È r
qg1q.1q1qÈE{{ffi à rgqrcqÈo r {ftftqrrqrffi b'rageòr
u-â+r*q*ffiÈ< rsÈfrc{ffis r {ì-fr{rffi:rÈdor'ntuïÈ |
{i*qràwqÈ obten È r
45 1
ffiqrtetrerq*ffi+qqrqr<$
t Èò çcrr@ sf{ Èà{rEfirq+ì fEç{ | ìn-frqr racet{H tq 3{T{Íffiãrc { 1
rtr:.cr q sÈqÌcãõ'ìqrc,TCdfrE r ikFftqrruozoìTffiqÈ{r à r
çfi-{€q{ ffifrqr {Èrr frq il{ ï( i{rq-ô&qí t
crfr cÈ Mil{ {rÈÈerdrqrçd fEç{ r
ss+ìãrcfrìgàïÌ fi{â m seàcMr vlsà frç{ r ftÈqn,r.q++frrtrr
sfi-{€Eqrr{raqrçtr fqqil{sfr{qìfqqrerqrrfrqr{ t ìa{ ffc ** r. ï}, qçq-{R
 ì qïgrqR. ìt iTÌ{Gr{ ttr( çtzrw-.utr ftqfcr rìqrcqr q qs5( ÍrEr{T6-qr+dre {srrr
1.8Ì ìTì.dslqof r {à, {ffiR sríìrrÌr !141rfiq v6r *;6 í{ qãi--" c.{ cÌ qf Íeq{rÍE rìçqq-rqÈ
:. ,: !
at
Eq4r Ur qFFË€ TsTg
^ qrí sRq. qrí ErëT
-À grë ErrF[ TlIqT tqnr iqT

Ì gì;<-+ì<n wffi rÍ\Íd gâ+i rà r

urïr+ìilf Tgìfdrrdf+fiqi-f+-+Èqq{-giq-{rffi aÌWq
gH <mÌ wrrrr*re çser<rfr ìH qargnìrà r rçô frE ravÉïrT{ Asr€s-üq-deqrTlà qì àt Èsrqr.Er<
erq w qrràqrïaq'ïÈ €É q{rq6.+ Ê*6nrv eì
<rtà Ê\rrr qÈ<r r ìH gàqrqr.rqrqÈrr Ë{ r.{à {Rur Ekqr {
rÌ.*o rr rff vrr Èft wgr rrqr+ 6*râr6rr+rcqr=o-ratmfir
I
{T{T 5{ | òqr r
@ar+rEr$frrc*rqrcôffi r It
$<crtçea++È<rmà*Fo r I erfrìffirqrr+ct,!r
q frdì{ì sìqà mrtÈ ffi qrÈtr çea qrffi ìà ot IRI SITSFT
.ì
F'[ TqiT<FT qKT qFÍqE I
I qT Eï ü: €qcTf,€ 3ÌÍt5$rfiì'r"flfE?ÍI
53
qÈ tqcr{{rÕemr{trr.Èrrì qrtrqrrfrq r 3-{r{F{ qlCrCrrer +w. rfi r
,r€-t
t . .
(ÌÌÍTiTq{ qrff rF IfiT ttrt frtII qsãt ítfa{ - Tnq6" |
? qf{ RcÉdÉ Íàqiqr"fr rrì fr rrfr @ r n
( qrq qnTrÌkr qìFrg?FÍ{{trì-{Ì qÏIÌriïT qsÌiErT6 |
ì 1Ê ë'srqiëïïat'q"É
È+ cr.ô 1Tìc {qr<{g( Ì6õFFIT
t iÍc+rfr
FF;6 I 19
qÈ iffi m'k qrc-iÌ qì qrqï si {È( qFE r I a-*gm€qrffiqF<{qrq.r+ |
l( qkqci? {q{Fc arfq'{qrqr{Ì ì{ì {qr€ qfi<rqr Èqïàq r q-stdfrì qFffiÍà Trd qr r
{ qR fr aw *+ì q-qrâfrâ qarç{ïçr ìTì q *5ffivrn +Ìrrc. r I q-qrr{Íâ qÍÈ (f,T+ r -rqq-S

54
I @+ìàì6È,Ttcìï|
c.--\----!-
t . tQq !tq tq cn t 9 q4ÊnQècttE qtítí 9r q | |
t @@ÈawvqrÈr
( ÊEÈqrqrdr€{qK qqcìï r
R. grffi reï qÈ ÌciqÊ<qãFrqiìÈ{ r
r. qrírrrr\rfr qrËfiffiç+ ffiÊrsà {rrqr ú0
I qrcrà'+{Ì (rri-{t-qr{ õÈ q<fl (ffi qrí È{Ëq r
55
sfi-{ëì OffiqF<Fta qrc ÊFq I
I rrp4 3{rsi qri-ffiF{rí qrfl{ q-fi ám 1
q-ËflErqrà
qTfmrcc-{d rË irvkÉ Esoffi T.e{rrr r l ilqq re-Ëlïá. {r. õ-íkSúE I
ì
{qrìãrffi +'r{r{rÈ{ qrq fu€q I
ì €T{rffirsì 3r|-tcrftÍrâ
ç+ Ên"ôfuià gmfcr r rTrqr{r ltfl qÌ{FTt<-{Ë;6 ?
dcrí $â4f{Fqrí
56
ól
I ÈÈ qïsqsÈ<rÈ òqr r (A)ÈSlffickrfr tÊr*ang'e t
*F{ ffi{rc flqrcÌ q.{ {€ q'ãr Efr qri{r r
frfr qrfi-es'àaqr 1s16 iq'ffi rk' fr rÈizen6oà gmfu r
Fc-ríÈ<n tefrqèd grnqr@ or-*r t
ÈÈ+cràq<trÈìh**n#, 11yÈàìgrrìrkr$t
t .Ì6 66q r1p6qrtrsfu{srÉÈ rfrsqq r rgr ò,ÈÈffià
,' ; ' .
È+ fecÊ{drtqrq{qffi TsrÉ
rqr.'ee* r
-:i -r-È -'^
ê rìíe q'cr c€{r{6 ìrçËÌor"rì r.ir6sqo mreml r { ) \t'||É tc||E É (ar rqÉ r'! I+'r 'ÍJ.$g) í
1R1arsìÈm qc+fe+TÉÌqrs1.rÈ.È crr{ì 6-+ Èr.rffi g*r
,ttlTl lsr ãrcr\rsérFrsi{IrT
{r I
q!-sfire ìqtq Erí qtq wÍ qrgrsqrÍ6 { $r6qrgïqr{ qerg!-.I Iïtr.F+rrfiqç{Ë.8
(A)rFÍqlrãrr{qs(?
qrre'rq fEqwg-qqrsÈ çs-crqtqfl fd-drqffi r@< vrc rUl <qrtì rrrrqmà<{fi{rrôffi, {rfr ìrô rqFqqftìflFr 3ÍfrffifrÈqr
ìqìr rr\r+ÌàTrcrqì çga È a.r;+rrr-qÌH qfr eòqa,cFari fi-{
frçSqt
eq q'dr {rà rqqrsìffq ÈRìcrqqFE +{r qfrqscrk qrÈ íA) q$qsfr qvrÈq ra-<<q $rqÌ ffi €-tt òfl t
(B) ú6. &fi E rq.3nrr-àq._ ffi ì{à tm rrfrqÉ qqrqfarÌrqk' fqc{ sË-{T<r qf6r Ì fr *e gfuàe vÈ È f{ ìÍ+{ {à qrdrqrâ
.
^?ì
ïFïrT6 |aqldã16rÈï rt*s< flqr qrërlrr qÊF6 | ÈÈ tvÈ $ vÌ< wà rd rgffiq rqÈ Tì Ëï frd',rì ird rr-m
(Ai cryta+f*<rr 1t arar+f1ar6o'r Èàes trÌ<sqà Fâ rgfuàcqreqi$qm+Ì {rFr as qfíT<r
6; ç+Efffinw6;o r vf6tr + và arrrs i*6rr+ì ur+r ;q{iurol wÈ ìrd rffi€qm
qrfr siqFà qf{ üfra {qftfi {Ê 6rËcrnÌ rìfr firdr qr*r
62 qnrqn và r
r q ìqffr *q $a6 t
1 qffiq141q{rsï€+b 1 óg
ì ITqÌTF{[;I{Fi{ÏE I I ffi{6iïr€ ffiqàq rl'Eï r
c sftffi+q(ftqr ì ffi , qr{ ( q-q ì qr{F
ìrsr{rü dï€ ÈiTr Ìffi , ìTìqgA,erq:fr
üfr ffi qfírr{rç{ {F{6{ l dfr;qr
á 3 ít q t l n ítq q 5- l q t.lt9í I r{É Èr+ìqfi-{ srqqfr wrô r ffi A-or
t, aqrqìflfit{-{üE'r
Tfr T:*È- rE5-Èdcr ffi , ,
TSf;crr'.Êrrq.qrqr6' rÉ q€r
aqr€ffi qrcr rfifs{ {q.úb r rTTã-4TTqTìTÌqÌT€ EÍFI"E;T I
I íttQ qr tïírq q líl tlfiE t9 | ìqrcqïTâ-{aaàÌr'rfifr, ì-ç* <+qfrq{ËI"i6ï |
( q<g'rqÉ Èì crd àcr@ Ès,ïcb'r
63
?. ssè @ vrr<srqlq-.d{qrà r 6
vsàHqÌc ÍFicrà r I qsrrÍ+rt+qrft€ ïr{ àfr tsfi€5 qà ì.Èr
ì. g (È l Ì6 ú |l .t.çoÌr q tí 9lq t I rrn qrqcfu{rfrì Ërd-rcl{1vqïr
3.fi{€{ rËErfircrrTr ï.õ{ crq I I k{rçs{qr fuqrqÈ qr{S, qràs-{Íqfr qríè-rÈ
1
---3-------:.C---:,
c i l E s e l I E s l ì --\- ili 9 lq .I
ï,li -.-s- frfr rrn-crrq{à qqqïrqqÌfu ãrqqi r
síìEsq l(sll .- l.q Ìì q l.l r lq I slcqsE<rqrsq-údd, àìqqr e-wffeâr
9. frfrèffiv,rt{rqrq6affi1 ( q È+ qwrsF{É \rrcrilÈ fuÌ ìGü |
ri[qtE rf,dt sfí rr{ qtqT I
qrqÌr í,
t. ffià@rq*qm q q-cìúTÈ (r€r qÍír w*<fi i(i ffii-flqRh qq rrcÌú õrõqrBï
g sq-ewì <iem-Tig+rqrqE rq sËffi \rsdrsrì 31+r ra-Èrr
SqeRrqfu Ìei f{ffi fe-6u* r*@ rqÍ gf{'àqrÌ {q6o r Aqr{ Eqqrr|6[rfl{ If;T
arTTqÌ{r6õ1 6rg{CqT I a{TÍ"FTT<TGI
c;r
gÈÈ{ qR q"è qs qrfi ef6r 6 r3Ìk qrec+n qrfi-qs trRT',+ qEc+T q-3aõdT.ïq+qac.ìà rrr6-+icqnvn+r
-F.flziqï cÊ'qT-{rqtìqï rr\-rr foq} 1t].ffiq q|ï 1ffiy
firìr;1 ' fdâ-+ì qqÈìq"ff r+.r È,iu+"qnnà-eq*icqraerq rqrsqr
ãr{ïr.ì qFirqq r'at qr+fl cfqqn EÈ {q Fmdlirr' ü{rÈF fK Trg{1 q1qríÌdr qrÉqrrqïEtr{ gsn ãpqÌ |
-q @
st*ìc-+ rSÍn àq cïsqlq -qrefiqÈ EIàqr qE r-o rr.Í gffi'e ç+r+rá ìì q<r<reqÈsrrë--à
TfrM Irffi qfurarqaèfu
q'J-r cs{fi ìqqqÌ rs-6Íq3qdr, ftq feq{ìTcsì ftrri1 1qffi që-6 {rfr êÌ rÌft{r qtâ Èq qra4Ì rõRà 6r{Ì ì,Í qt611qr ftffi
+,Èqìq-qr íiqr r-Èfo ow6r'fcrwi rg+rrrágn. ffi ' ar ír< qq qrqr|@ rq qr qrsÈHï+ {6Ì-qn ú gq*d
áT+acfi{cr qqq+ r+fuffiqnorffi qrqmrâ3ÌfuÈdr g+,rs{íÌrâ qd tfi {rÊ-{ri Èqr ìÌq-óì6RsràqrqrqqrâTrs5q"í.
em-qqItfr tqffi'q g.{ \r* $ra qrÌ qrrti ìrÈ 6'<rqrffi qrãr qtâ Èq ffi rvrg<*Eô qw qõ.eÌcftqà õ-ô rrqcfu
fuçq req{õ ç{ c{ qrãrsr ç6{ trÈ gtr qfì Offi q.r{r1Vç{ r ftrç+q-È Êfià È rfutr{ íÈ 3ÍÍqÈ ÍÍè {rrt qà rc+;erqreìÈfu*'
gsra3crÌ-{= t{Aì{qcÍE RFÍIüF{uÈ{ ìÈ q-qÈq qr-dt r q frìrfi ffi{qm{qr n6{.rq qÈ ffi3rrq qfiscr+qr fo r+â
qcarcqÌ ffi {s-+ì Ès{r sfir\r+Ì rrr"Èçiiqm qf{qn ìïÈ nqqì5 F{ q-.rqkc cFenfrì.d rq-âcfr {'r frìffi {à qisrÍs r
r<rcq qrà+ÌfirÈ rffir üÈ f-6ãÊd-{ qfuïrr vr-rvaì rg+rÈ+r cftfiÍfi ss-{ ìÌErrì çecrqrFn òqqqi r
68
I acri+ì6Ì<rsiàfráì& r r È+ a-cÈq qrqr ïqrÍ{r r
ì Fi frqa qrqÌr
Èfr Ar{-{FfuFdq r qrrqqÈ q qr{rq{kï r
qrfi-{FmÉfrwwrrtàmÌr l sr6qrsïE,È(qÍí rr ;rcrì orsqrdfÌ {-Èqrr
acr{+Ìffit6d:ìqr y ffi fufl rrEÌ flÌ { @ fufi qfr qÌdÌ {rÌ qrqffr f{-dqr I
qrq* qq ffi t ffi rqrÌ trô <reqrúqr r
ì1
òì{ r fff fi-àT{rÌ{eq<mrvÈ
q aqrt+eï+fr EÈqrd r
69 qkìffrËqfEqr;rq{ {g rffi{rã ãff +< ffi rrg+r6s
Ì qqr{ ïÌ+ flÈ rrs q qqrqc rnfl qrd r qrrÈrr fuq rf{{rÈAÍfi-{€àqR.ç{" q"fr. qfu{rqrs,}{{ìq'r
qrift dqìà:Tq s{-Ê€ rrm qrq qf$ì r firqÌ3rfrçsâ qçqrÈì ffi{ra ÈqrcÊúfr fi-r Eì qrg-qroqÌ<
ì F{r€qr q}fl€€ rÌç+Ì rrq {rà T{qr ÊSfr Èèïe* r ìTilfrfu{ rr+à vq üffi *{ mÈgÊ*ì *< oìE{q6riÈ<<r-rà
Ìdrcr ffiÌ qrçô ìTSeÌ qìrò ffiri qM I lrqlrà rt{qmerqqr qrìkfuà Eríì t{qrììì ilìTr iq-dH
qrfià iÈdÍnsà r{sqg{'rfi .crr-ô úd r q;r|-qr.Firrqftìì-{f tCFtrTìírrq rïq-+Tq lifqtr{ ìrÌqi q|:ã-f<RÍr{tã
I If I hadbeenhungry I would haveeatenvoÍaciously. rsì rrÌ{ ãriftà <ri-drâqrà t.{ô ïq Ërfi-€F-dÉ6fr à<grq
2 ff it had not rainedthey woúd havecomefor a meal. qli"il-,rf qàtr'<T5ì qlÌ{trÈ | Tq ìsmfr{ sfírÈsì o \r{ qrcrfrr*
3 If thercwereno streamsin úe hills therewouldnot be elechicityin *5rrJTr-{ià rc rrflâTËrqt6ô *'^1ffi uat
our house. q<Frq; ìììr ErE;ÌìlarrqÌ tarr qrqr qÌGF-6TTqfiE'ìfi'-
{+r_qrqr
If he had taken the medicineon time that man would rÌot have +Èrt. eqrÊwUrq fuiÌ vqrô'ú q€ÌË"'{Éq6rE{h rfirfrrrq.
died young. rqffisÌ{m:r+{a=àq=1rqâ r{rfi-{sqatÊq-üs3{EgÌcfu
If a ftiend had sunga songthe eveningwouldhavebeenevenmore qrfrÈ qrÈoÌrrìtsrRs r
enjoyable.

*rwàSR+rrrÈEs ArÈwtqr(fu o {ìtd{qï{r qrt fiSà ro-{

rqqn *ì ffi+qrqr+ra*q6.o e e-<ftÈ €E r3ÌfrrÈflcr
sÌ-ì e td rrÌ<üa eì"crrÊrfrè <i.ortlì rcÌ,rô Èqrr r q
qà õrtqr Èç6 õ-<crtÈ{ ìrrrÈ flà fi-{ qì qrg{qd a< qRqcq
qÌqfrì Èq |rrd< qïqr a +rçtffi {cr ar re-cÊÈ qà Èdr rì{qr
qr< +ìtsq {È iTgr â sqqr qrsì ÊT\r{ lEcrd sÌq{ frrn qré
f+ r ffi+qrccsr s+{ qfuqqrrq{ sÍ* dq f+ r È ì rË r q
ìrFÈqÍì 3{rE.qìEIsH f,€qì il{qr È6 | +ì çqrq sìèqì qq Èr
,nqìììqqÉrnfrrFir$ lqqrqrr EmE qsÈmrfirÈrr
dfrko rgfrqm{F.iqÌcrÈ{fufiHqi qrg-i-àqìrã fd r È. à
.r* r ÈÈqr rrrrqà si gq fstrr qrç+ì o qfr"ffi q;qr
qìFlíIE-.6 |

7l
I sfi-esqtg-.ffiÈìRnrfrs r
fiqrq rrcrffi tÈ( rrr*Èdr ffi r
ì q'r rrr* arard çsa En'flITrr{È+ì 6 |
ràìqÌqrã 6ro;qr+qr Èia-55i1 aç'S o r
q q-efqrësfi-AT.qEqte*r.rsrd W r
t*'l ÍiÌq(4ÍÈ{Õ sirth moúrhof
the Nepú year
qTTTT hope

z
ll rftÍ tu day bfore
ï€T wish, &sire
WtêÍday: last EFc-dq history
w@k

o Inlrdrq
tü
;tò
lpspital
,to
ïITr{

€{iTrff
weII
hqrout
Islamic

ttgt rfrÈsq
aìq'
Imw
yet
too eÌ. coúmaad Elql the Lord; Gotl

3TT
ilrr eye ttphill: step
II
- Words maÍked * aÌe tansitive veós. qq6 iütemte 'rttï çf{-T"lF'€ feling of

I 3$I(TE qime,offae
Itc naúEo suffocttion

m fi-fr
*qrè
yet
tuglish
Êadishlângpage
da*, <ltuqs
qqqrè
qfrs
3f.{
q+i
difrcult, awkvard
offica
iow, froD aow
Iab, latenesô
tït
hrì"*
tëztÍ,@aB
Sunday
to údve
woÌÌtu1
gqFT

s€
Wveú
hêiCht
píoaurciatiot
Ío get up
ã úatìtuly 3nTFf Iack, abç'n@

GT to conÊ to ÍIy
q!r( Ietterof ab,habt b pÍrctisc
arrbitiotl 3<n tà€,tt.,oveÌ theÊ
cqìaR newrypêÍ cÌft-{ï Atrcncan sÌr<
I north
c.ô tal, hiCh 3TE1T gtava "ky Ç{E$T
II example

o qÈ ia Íáe en{ afcraü

ago,beforc q+6.7 Amencatr frtE 5íl rzãe (Mi<ldle)
pickle 3Í({ Anbia: tu q+{F
mday túey (Middle)
qgrcf{ ye4 stin
Ir Middle East
aowúays $reFfT va ey
J q-Ft
që|!-d
.imínísrotivezo|te qp: oÍhc.t,frorc
eisht novel
to frt itto I6pNë {+ï aioúeÍ, Nxt
eightll . scÈfr usefir,

GI
rt6 tQ $,o a!1da half qd
sFFIT
reaúiag
soul scar{ gfr
oÍ sllFF[ untidy
to Ìes1ect 3qI4 meana
I q$r gnger 3TFd

o
qú8, rfLhet 3rÏI to be stat ding üp
hdf
Efu.{rÍ official qÊd-s $üghtly g{ìq * to boil
onesctÍ
cfu{rq Wdoú cFnçtc a sraall aúount of

o
*
oaeself(emphasized) age
and thea qftrcfu tftq a üttlerrhile
aie's own 3EE to c.rme to the boil
EÊ{rrm

o
farnine fift Awúhi QaÃg.tEe)
tuOther st|(l in that ma'/n,er
qTk{ inwfupiaE qiíllq certainly
{Rrì in go.i health sè it ürat fianneÍ

q) *{-fr
exlÊnence
penüs$oa
rc@rding to
úl(Ìrq
3RììT
aRIÌÈrI
u,,successrltl
of gd chal@tor
extett9ly, very
,rt, to 1€st
pwo
sQI seeqQl

.ì and
Potatoes g s/hc (Low)
fto E{IRCCÌSTd) thiÍd month of
"à" baúfu shoots
c-tr sÊange,odd the Nepâli yeâr
necesssy
qfdq friú last qgRÌlf iaconvenierce
 approximately FrtsÈ fouÍú eldest -+ì{rFr for
q hey, oh ten million h oÍ +ìfrRT,Tt. to tÍy
çsãr one, a F{f{ soundof ntnniig Íh'drd book ãÌ{ appÍoxituately
çd ole waef fu{ why? two miles
\r€c absolutely pen |+ïì{ì bêaause gift
ç{-iÈ single-barre ed Yormg, tendeÍ ffid shopping frÈ{r c,rmeÌa
çd-FtÌ one and only f{E college ftA. to buy I guess,I suppose
alone fd{FÍï rFí * to iúragine kilogt nme qqÍ forgiveness

*
poem, wty finÈFrc< kilon efre mr.ri. to forgive
whose? sÍic* Èi areL teglon
N Cuilt
õ{A fuçrc
+õ shelter ftofi nia
in what Ìnannef?
how? Êrfrq
falmeÍ
type, ki,.d
q
ffi dowlrhill; steep ccc.ri. tu stop
{R-? in what mant et? ftr tns@., wonl q{qfl to end
3IÌ
qì'dr
how? tq{r chicken q(. I qangef
frnge\ t@ Iike what? how? which?
f{ IFIT<ÍqqT{ * b gotble up
ffi malaria ã6--Ít wherc? !n-CTË which one? (Eq( news
m.rÊr úEdicirc _ï,Él at úe hofre of Tk I don't know
€.R tq * to ibfofiÌt
+|õ? wher? Tiú' chair qir{qR bewaíe!
ïqÍT ctasj {F{èt'É somefuÌj€s thiAe. tnatter. talk
- € (t . l bâd
conductor {Ê{qqf{ T{r,rt. to talk. converse isÊ<! | pocket
rfiiíT wheÍe? to whete? nEl soÌnewheÌe a meâsuÍeof
to dÍop, post
rFdT-ï-{iIÌ somewhere or other
ttnl cucumbr weight e{uâl to (a letteì
how many? +tár fork two Eânãs q€Ì gelded goat
how much? sÌtr shouldeÍ ifi'ìnalÌ heel
to fâll; d.ie
how many paple? tlgíl cauüÍlowet $ï to wait foÌ
to be eaten
how many things? 'FFFI yoLtget patemal well "|q1
qFF ash
frÌÍ aaywhere uncle elbo'x qTgT snack, light Ìúeal
6F]ÌT paPer IfiTTT kindtess, favouÍ
how big? qFïT food
rXTï story ïÍ.rdÌ li/'',e what? qE- to eat, ddnk,
ãq cuP mrR* to cut, to kill ìFq cente
consume
q n r r íí IFãï
rficsr cloth tq n llíÍ,Ì sevenm montl | ot boy
f@d
rfirfliÍ haft (of the head) the Nepali yeâr È& gi lír{Ì' empty, only
ãfr affee FFï ear {{T banana qRT special, paÍticülaÍ
qiq Íarcly, Iess,few youngest giÍl È8 some, somethìng
fiq.q * to pull, take
FFqfuf, jaundice {rcì youngest boy ìE r-í-oÌì81 soÌneihing oÍ otheÍ
a photogaph
slqq shiÍt {F{ work who?
ktkÍi knife
at least çrq,q * to ÍyoÍk coat
rfir{{ iF|{g[
teason Íoorn
cgr leg, fint
watst qqifr chilli peppeÍ
F{TiFT to shout,make a {Fì]Fq PÍOgÍAlmne -+ìsiÈqr compaÍed with qrT to open
[oüd noise {rd black ni et lCÌ.|g{ * to feed
Rrfr happy, happiness Kd a traditional dish silvêt FrqÌ shadeftom the sun
q.Í very, thoxrughly made ftom dÍied qTiT{ small change 6IìíT skin
ìnigable freld vegetables qTqtÍ uncookeddce ffil neiübouthúú
Èfr faÍming,agÍicü|tüÍe lF gtÌ|lt, teachet qR four ffiâ neighboür
dffi fanhing, agÍiculhtÍe W Gumng (ür srt foutÍh quickly
game eümic gÌoup) qTF;I * to wantto Ë quiclç fast
€q* to play .Èft prcket 3r81 to be wantel, fuï moútent
well! what about? È{ìÌgf tomato needed qk to spüt, bifrtÍcate
ofirwn .t tÌ ( cow pz8arÍe cntn qÉl time off wotk
ôË 'r,ell! what about? pat\:hea tÊaÊn nce @n side
coug)t qã{t incident, event
ffi Iettêr àÌ sixth
ff search q5l watch, clock
tunqd adlüalnannce r9rél shoÍt, hief
qÌq * to seèk:lry to Chinese E,Ì{r so'l
iTrãI hottÍ, be
ìcÌ{r nveÍ, stÍeam q{ ffi sugaÍ úrí rt ríl sonsand dauüters
house,home
dcr-Tmr ÌiveÍs and steams qlgfr landloÍd
fs-<r.rt. to worry trr(l daughter
dq. to open
sfâ thÍoat, aeck
ÈA. to recognize, be
gTé acauainted with jungle;
stepsbesideiveÍ ' qrtq
slippety
rl!ì.I wondet, amazement qlq grass uninhabited land
toplay a gane gFI sunshine
È{r tea q lcí1 cotnpücated,
gree (claÍified
fqqrrw teashop
with pebbles fug üfficDIt
rr&rï tnathefiatics butter)
Ècr-fuqr tea ald snacks
everys,herc
day oÌ a monm knee
R cold. damo
' sl t(| appÍoximately,
tsl
qqlg(l Chitia
m me õlKram indiÍect as much as
câlendar CC to fitm, travel Tà. deírÌene
- sÍí-({gql population
.rq,Ì{ * stove, hearth
to chat, corverse btudl
tri-{ +dcs-d) twelfth monú of
to b borrl
IrooÍ sT knife
qf,* the NeDali yeaÍ
to do birthplace
to cümb, mount owe. unsúüed
rI|TT heat ' qìtí Iand
qiTT chickw
rr{-{r jewellery tum, time
qE.qT all togetheL in total
moon watchman.suard
tr$ haary - q++l | 6í to gathe\ assemble
qFÍT
r t5 guide
ffi one auatteÍ
- ---:-
ül +tí
'"
GerÌnan
T{r3d ' to take to gÍaze qÌit mushrcom
Íríì minstÍel
hot, Ioud
sqTq * to bum
qrg village sì{Ts ftply, answet
qqr lavatory
rrrcd* qiTTiFT*
q{fr in a similar
aocúútl€to Ìttuve,
qrfi wateÌ pitcheÍ 6+f q;T to be srydsed manner to
üve
rn-â caÍ, wheêIed vehicle wií ckêarly qÈ in I similar
ffi to move, go,
,Trft,rt. to tell off EEl to leave, qút manneÍ to
function -
r
Qil difficult, hard 6TiTT umÌrnea qt(l similaÍ to
SÊ qúckly,
ít{ song 6rfr DIeAllt, chest q l\í exaúination
immediately,
1t+ complaìnt 6tET '* to feEI with the hand qÍA * to exao\ne
early
qÍs-(RÌ alcoholic dÍiik â.fr. TV dcr€ you (High)
qTFR salariedjob ËFf,1 to come to an end i Ìrt reúy tiÌedÌress
qrà g$qr€ï *
cold, coldness to bring to an end ean.ri. to prepare to add, Íefrll
.ÍRT specr'et 4'?e, carÍe ZF{Iàõ s\ddenly, oút etr{
but tamily naúe
ql l.l.l
to be knos/n of nowheÍe vegetables STTqï tofuúEtitd
gl;T to qo efiq tormst ( !E the Tami region ETr{ TDarÌ(anedmic
tokÌtov aq. to stand, set down, young wofian goup)
fife rcst úpon õ1 to cross qIËÍ * to begin, staÍt to
ffi tangue ìfd tâbÌe lÈlov downwatds sTü knowledge,
distÍict ât. to bìte dìktìT cmwng information
nononnc sumx ctql hat iÍiTr and qr€rcrgT* to frnd out
added to names Ì{{ towft quaneÍ drq* totakeüÍn firfr
life a-drffi taxl ilrò hot ïÈ lots of, heaps of
fi-fi-qq üanhoearcmedy F inck dÌcrs Tamang (at ++' thiag, mattet
shoe, shoes etbnic group)
impuÍe, sulliet daY of a monú
to joke - <IëÍgT south
polluted in úe Wesl,em
place e,ql( palace
that which calenoar
fine, OK {t|ìÌ dtawer
s-6 (GSrõ) secondmonth of door l@k
big EqT class
the Nepú yeaÌ .
addrcss dTst caÍaç
EqFT sight, vision
eldest,elder fd-fr szãe(Middle)
wife <{tÌ decade
fdft vou íMiddle l
({
paiÍ s6T to scoÍch, lrum ten
ffi vot t
çIIrqI mope íeaÍ <T Dasain festival
towaìds. DeaÍ-
honorific suffrx 3q{ dollar . ETÌT tetth
at at out
added to na$es hi Íidge yoghút
ffi lhiÊt
qt(
eÍÈ monal pheasarrt Rt. tooth
to Pay
BFET doctoÍ elder brcther
q ol they, those
SFFI * to summoh, call foÍ <ì\RT frrev@d
almost fi-{ ti ee
one and a haif eldeÍ brothet
eI even moÍe ffc"eì-d olace of DilsÍimase
s{r tented - ?Ts-{I elder btuther
st to descend
accommodaüon
g'"í, 1a'í immediatelv
- EIõI baÍd
fsd * to take out, extact ct(l vouÍ
<Ìc pnce
ffi very eaÍly rnoming Èd o . ruel
... EFT lentils
EÈqÍ bag slow, late, slack M
EFNTTiÍ Ientils and Íice
grE window àtl dooÍ, gate iqÊd that much
<r€-ú6rt fir^eral ceÊmony
dntn F{sfr in that úanner
q ||Éí neht
rqà in that maaner
ãÍ!-+ì head ÈJÈ aftemoon, daytime
rqd üke that
erõT ã yoü (Lnw) Èâ elder sister
distant,fâÍ
e-Ér therc
ticket, postage stamp d but, though, day
r{€t that very
Ê8. to pick up however
d
fu{rrft
that
Ê1 - to glve trqfrTdffi Íeügious adhercnt very, extÍemely scholar
È{r dianh@a ìÌI{ $owìng Íice Ê'+t- to press,squeeze
q{r flTsd *
qeqrq *
to frnd out
qTtÌ to lèlteve
S{er two (with tron- rq q t\!rl to fall asleap
human watefsottce ffir sl€f,.p,sleepiness cFdd'r Ìnagazine
nouns) to wash ÊÌfr{t. to decide cfr also,even
tt/to FqIÌrï sÌnoking leúoD cc {fi-d pop music
S€inà double-baftelled !ì-sÌ $noke fr.fr invitation
q( beyond, on thê
súness, pain, {qqrq PomP, splendonÍ f4çqrcï * to inuite other side of
ttottble very, many Êfiq rule c{st{t tadition
(:ú sad,sufrering ÈÌ qÈ usually, mostly t+<rqr without hope cfc{R family
{ET to hutt *fr waslrcnnan Ê{qfr'r NiÍvana cql to wait
S'11 thin s"rÌr{È{ * to pay attention Êr-sq,Ìt. to decide --a to fall
bidegtam r4fi souúd to emtge, ame out fu tottrTst
5'1El bnde ffi blue ciT festival
both iÍÈtsT to bathe -.cS
Y In úe day afrer
ï negative paÍticle
<u mik bathÍoom i'rnofrow
ú frngemail
{i<srï Indiân teleüsio0 rRtl frútheÍ
+RTT map F salt
qnd ^ext,
servrce ìqr{ rT|cT NewaÌr (language) htm, tfune
R qrÊ{fir municipality,
{fII view ffi Nepuli c€{ to üe down
tow coúncil
{qf€ìr * to show ìcrfrtnfi Nepati-sryaker cl anìnd
close, neatby
-àtu from, since
Tï otheÍwise
neâÍto cr[qq west
to b seen,Lre È{R Nertar(an qqcÍ shop
Íivet
visible ethnicgroup) cq ro en@f
wod of g̀eting
c€T * to see seúdnt T{rc hin
T{È woÌd of gÌeeting
left
íqt +é note T{fS of the hill Íegion
È|{ husband's ;TT nine cqì' landsüde
í{qríd utlpleasant
younget bÍotheÍ
ìTfÈ bad
rÌfr butter cF{{r peuiatsly, bef<m,
*f{T god, deity ;qrì waÍm ago
ninth qÈ{ì
goddess tust
rïFF nose
@únty . cqà yellow
ïrrÍfç{ citizei csTsl * to cooK
ffi crosjlDad.s I t rt ãve
ffi second
írr( grandson qÌFFT Íipe, frnn, propeÍ qÊÌ frfth
sïí{ to Íün
gatddaughter cfu after,lateÍ
Yr sÍ to be acquiÍed,
-É t ( l by
ïrà(R Íelative -cfu -
be available
il+ snall child ceF tuÍn, time ql-qlrë pìlot
qrsrqt * to make a profìt not even a üttle
wÍ{f footstep, footpint
Ërfr Íich ïTIT name qõIìr{ * to sencl
to take a step
q<Ì qrq * to wotry fr you ktow; ccT€T* to reacn
. !" - !

9t l u5 pound
trãF{r< thank you v'hat about? È-M educated gÌ\Fr * to get, acquire,
trq Íeügìon, ffirq. to take out, extract c€. to Íead, study
be able to,
Íighteousness well, lÊalthy qÈsd PaÍidiÍ; a traditional
manage to
srFrRrfi Pakistani q-qr.Fi * to woÍship smTq * to causeto Íetr/Í't {€ to tacêase,
IIFFT to ipen, becooked whole FfSï to leaún advance
W
TITTIT hillside cürqr fii -noon day r6qÌ pumpnn qnl laÌnp, üght,
qrg{r uppet atm f{ east 5q-5d fruit electicity
IIT6 ,esso, ninth month of SFT to lloweÍ à!
ïq GÌq) fiì-sï to make, mend
qr6 |FÍ * lo ,eate the Nepali yeaÌ 5rí{T benefrt {< shút
qrõ-rc<r+ ICXIDOOK IC stomach Ef-fi (FfdrjqD ebventh monih 4<44 * to shut
c|fr measuÍeoI qu:úDty '{.r I nmney; otÊ of úe Nepali year 4< 6ï to be closed
oÌ volume equal to hundtedth Eq!* to smash, +<rdfr cabbage
eight mãnãs ofone W bÍeak open aÊangeÌÌEnas
cffr waler,ft n 9ll husbaDd F6RR dppling ir<5 gún
gI{ |Ft * to cfoss +q . to bum frdifu" to give back to become
-crR on thefaÍ sideof +ü Iastyear ffilÈ-r* to tske back *n;t accoutt, des$iption
qFFT{q * to naintain, foster ct+ ìàit . to swrm 'fÈlqq flÍT Bútfra
qrrTT Deyatay,lttÍn,dme 9rí Iessone qüarteÍ F.fTç.T* IO Unúe, tâxe oIÍ crqql 8trcng
to Éar, keep cqFF $Í ìt to pek íootball q<T eventually, at last
cqr!T onton
oivestock) 5(< spare tiÌr@ eventüally, at last
c|{+t passpoÍt qffi pWle IfiT egg qtt óut
cE{r güest c|ríà pÍogless E;d
qìd
-
to lay an egg 4{TTõiI to board a bus
Ê-€-{. to drink q!flÌì-T democncy sõÍ to noweL DtootÌl qqt9
----J í1 to move horr]@
ft-+|T{ piciic cà{r state !fiiT oweÍ qt(|l settlement, village
firõ{ back qqTí 1Íâ pÍime minìster s-{*ìfr câutfitoweÍ qtí to rcside, sit
penston çiiiFT lecfirÍe, swch to be fotnd down, stay
fiÈ spicy CIITRT plentiful sR tung qrQíl yoúngeÍ sister
frc-{ pipal iee c{it qtl€stion sÈ pno@gÍapn q|lr Ieft over,
flïd. to woÍry, be r{fr poüce, poüce ofrcer $Ì{.Ít - to make a phone call Êmaìning
troübÌed c-{frqFTr IDüce station ÈÈR otÌty qrq. monkey
c{-í-q{ almost sr*{ andent itT fatheÍ
cfir1 to be Íeached cr;d pmvince iIT<IT goat
to be enough, s|cqÈ mostly, usually iFR nvetDanK qtq Ager
suffice Ír.llT üI to coúlmence {fi-{r gaÍten q I r!ì âtm, time
c{ to arÍive frq dear iF;T ro ow qtq granüather
q-qrfr pmest ftr+q-{ dearpeople aqt cnlla -q té from, by
C"q ÌeÌigious meit fifr love dqr€ï * ,o pny a mustcit! q rél tuad, path, way
wrA oId love lnsÍtunent q tôt cleveÍ, smaft
qqT aÌlcestor ìfurr girlíriend {qR bazaar,Dtatketpla.ê 4T<4 cloud
5d tuidge aL.. o ctocK qtq Iittle boy
rfkffi book q-"Ì gÍandmother rcpeabdly
ütuary diffeÍeúce
{ár packet {ft dry freld
rtkÍT geneÍation dô ÌnoÍe saad
SIõ;T aoÍeatm
 childhood +fr valley fl<nr .ìTF{ tfuoughout,frllìng ìTÌd hunger
4RI Io.lCinC e=. to sell qftqr poÌter ffi hMgÍy
tolodgeforanigtu ã< time qì ìddÍ thiseveling dffiT{ geographical
qrfr sÍate qç1| time, occasion ìTRi ÉcrltiiÍlent, rìq.Irt AáoJpuÍi (language)
qÍt{i outside ìqmd BÍitain, Endand entotmenr ìtc Tibet
{16r BÍahmin ag* evening ìrT. to fr|| Èc.s{m Tibeto-BuÍman
dr{d exceptfor, apart +q bette\ good !Ìtsr pot, vessel ÈÈqr Tibetai
ftoÌn +{ baú qr{ yotnget Dromef ìrrnl tomorÍow
m.
Êdr-{
to spoil
to be spoiled,
iRTF{C+qfq) fiÌst monú of
úe Nepali yeaÌ
lT|.ãâfrT â special day on ìÌqq totr
which wonen q
go to the bad ÈfiIiFr * to causeto caft / and giÍls aloint q I
unfoÌtunate d{. to carryl úeir broúers .r!Ìì m,uze, com
ffi busy {ìe tee qls"{
".* "': " wife
elder brother's "- q-frqqr{
- Tuesday
electÍicity +(|q bottle qTIT SlrllÍê. DOIAOí ^----%-3
cT{f' fqFIsIÍ$ eighth monlh of
Ê+trgq * to sperd(time) dïÍrgf . to call, inuite CIÍ1 to run away.
-
' úe Nepa.li yeaÍ
Êd<r hoüday,timeotr dÊ1 to be spÚ,ke.n escape
{ôàq keÍosene
work,leave dq to speak ìTRÍ cooked Ìice; a úreal
- qÌïFI4 meaúng
Êd+t beer +d Buddhist |Tìl;sr-*õr kitchen
Grrr.r I
{{d lrf, * to help
mÌery, setooú b^ftery crì cook qìs TaÍai (region)
ffi sick, ill qt-{õ Inüa qË.lf{RI
T útidnight
mrrr+ ìrrcâq Indian
M tuid-
unwelt qaqf.I soybean {rfr load
ft.qFr midday
ffi* rc lotget
rfrc{rq
rmn latguage .TTàg
iÌn among
to be forsonen --i ,-
'|I{Í írTffl ìTF{!T speech,Iertute
fifth moúth of qiT heaí fiind
'-r
Dtscult
úe NePali Year firE to become wet q-{ cÌIgI *
- . slowtY, catefullv firdr iateioÍ wall
to üke
. :. .' ll.l 19 statement,utterance - --9 to b liked
rc a l we.Knng' nafiÂge
rÌft bb said,
firì-Tô wall clock qq qrt to want to
Ê8,*{. rc úarry firí within, iiside
be calted IFïììFT * to celebnte
moming
col
Pass'
tu{. to stap on
minislÍy
f{ÈqR YE
_at-qr Êr€r visa
'i,uoai, han ministeÍ
qï6 crowd
-r{<f firÈ beÍoÊ, in ftont of
fl-q-drà{r oD the way, en ÍouE -_L qïET
_lÍ<I 'tr gloutd
' befoÊ qrt to die
q I F{.1 to be ünderstood
- tFÈq g@gaphy qfgsf
-ìI<.I d;Ì below touchiag, mouing
{q . to understand
-rI.<I rI. tÊyond TIr{ Bhutaa qanl expensive
qtFIR Wednesday
{d ghost
FËRqgT unpofiaat
w raaet
-ç<r qrFq allove
rTqIT heaven on eaÍh
T{{ palacê
{6I old man, husband È{ arca, üstict
.t= ' to say. tell His Majesty the
ora womân,' wúe qqfr È m@ing, encounteÍ
Cusloms KitC
{â+{r thúmb
rccenay. Just now
rr< to meet +tQlrcqtqq couege
old, aged to frnd, I@ate
T<Ff as fat as possible Ètld. cÊtil úonth
-gT fi qGT main, principal fi they, these awtte
qÌ q
qr{d
nodteÍ
qõT
heatt {{fr youtg womaÌl to cry
womaú's natal hofie WÍ bunch T{r yourrg man {ftcÌ fuw
qEïi mile fir measul€ of weight {òc Botupe hee
qrq . to askfoÍ oÌ quaÍtify equâl to * this handkeÍchief
qTq tedth moÍth of 20 pnthis d-d{r pIân { particle indicating
tlle Nepali yoaÌ {Ê-rq difficül\ difficulty that the
qï6t frsh r&f fool infonDâtion
qT{ * { a^d
to scaldb,scotr Tdr Íúish irnparted by the
ft colouÍ
ct-"dcFn tnotlld'r tongue {sr mouse (ffi speakeÌcomes
üqwÍ
qrí, qri only rrÍ deeÌ fiom ânother
{|kÍ bIú
crfu alxrve, up tkT deÂt deceased (ITríd oleâsanLeniovable
source
qrr a measuÌe:0.7 penon -^ -
{qÌíô 'rf . K' enlov oDeseü
ndio
litres or 20 ounccs Ì{ chaiÍ (çl tan
crF{€ penon q(l tuy, múe
€{ saÌo'e oelitfie
'ì'' nestattiltt
Ìai (eÚmic FouD)
crrÈ penoo qrqall Marftuti (lângüage) (|q* {grT sr'It
IO put, Keeo
aoagr@, accepl, +lârI ditty rTËFÍ * to stop
a male buffalo :é
believe ìE salvation, (t!lrlÌ+ cE\.at
{reÌ
- bread
qrs tr{ * to forgive deliveranca àr, the planting of a
political
c|úfq1. IO IOfStVe .llCl fiotarÍcaÍ (FFTFT cÍop
qTITT national hishwav
tove, anecdon .||al fat aÌq * to plstlt
qrcrrd * {TNïT king
to tove + q value pÍice
{reT kingdom
qrqrq1 * aorcfgeaa mena .ÍrQr. +rr8r( a half-mw (MT Rana iT úere!
qT{ Ìneat qïw weaúEt (ft at night a[tkr{FT exhâttsted
qTg{ schoolmastat (rò têd qqrq{ * to pua on
cr@ saaond eldest
<rfr queen iI!Í IúCe
fu-{ ÌÌEtte q( | heÌe, in this
{rq-àRcl okÍa q{{ garüc
firot-i sweets diÍection
<r* gqto, Nce olrsí ütrc, queue
fud hiend qk this much
{rÈ must2tÍtl -n I t to, foÍ, at
ffiã rmnltÍe qc I Yetì
<rY nation qTeT * aa,wean
fir<fqì very etÍly 1nme .r+r9rrçl this tinte (|:sFd pìeslalenÌ qlq arc hu!0dred
thomtng q(r I it this manner . rQqr.rl passpott thoúsand
frarq * Ìoafiange, q(l in this fran^er
ft-+qn ncKsÌtaw hundÊds of
qd "ttql
asseÌnble, üke this
qEl
ffi'ï tesofvaãon thoúsands
acltrst, onng hetu
ftï ('eDr qtrí to k felt, atrect,
togetheÍ, sort d)t {ô ight herc
to beanw seem,apply,
frS to come together, ìIRIFIIÌT tranq'o.n
to stop bgtn, cost,
o'actt,Dl,gauong qtltl tâveller, pilgÌim
qì-< ëIT headcold take time be
!Ìr5Ì god-tâsting úrcmory
cold andcough imposeL heÂdfoÍ,
It{Í f&e, fiouth firfi .vle Mddle)
setin
 embaÍassmeit, fdìTm departúEnt ïl"ilrT€l * to setüght to
shaúte f{qm nisht -$r wid, Tqr{ advice
qrà satpid Ê+qr+qc aiÍport togethet sfT plusonequaÌÍeÍ
qFl* to take away r qlQ Ioneliness tnusic iilí f^fl wlle s pate,ltlt home
{rfr long Rq spedal, panicalar s{€!T conservation rfr(f cDeap
ft. ta âke f*r* gd wodd v'aÍ calenddcâl etu +f-(ff.f I cneapry
frq Ltr|áu (etlmic ffirrqq utiveÍsity vorld qlÌrrrf, * b help
gtoup) fusïsqt*. to büew, to frnish (l f 9 t tnÉ
iT{T clothing, clothes 4Ìt{tTrr @cüpaaon'ust to b able to sì+ ky
iTrTT-Ì5rëI clothes qT{R behauiour $r{qÌqt Mount EveÊst í fE{ ousK
by, becauseof, AIFF{IT
SntDntar
qsÌ€1 * to help, to assist +ff cÌlín cuntat
due to ATNI( tÍade easy bicycle
àq. to u,/nte qrcft tadq Ìrsfi sieet, mad lTrg{(èìrq!r) foudh month of
ffi husband {:I always the Nepali yeâr
man in good healü {nt gftens
century
{Ìãr ÍEtal watet pot
SafitÍday
s<Ífï offsping {r< * fo excÌraÌUre(money)
thde! you s@! dÍean plus one half
woÍd
EIÌiFT * to btil1g JaccejsfuÌ ITIÌÍ Seven
srt-r Utdy
srõ city, town
SIã'T clean srdÌ seventh
fi foÊst {T{r{rt vegetadan
<sFri. to clesl {rfi friend, companion
4q year sÍrd peaceful
aq all srì small
qqRr qnk level, Í|at soap
monsoa, tatn peace
(FI€IT prcbÌem *.ì- luggage
q€l s/ãe (IIiú) sÍFr{ ptúaps
ltqFíT{ aews flcfi Nepali uiolin
cQl Íight üEÍe {ÍRFÌ nrle, Ìegime
i{Frq sentence frìÌffi teehet
wtFlt< çr newspaper sÊ saÍr; a womaÍ's
gTTTRT frnìshed dress
i{kíFr{lT alúospherc, ÊìHT edwation
enviÍonment Êrq{ peak
{F{;ÍI memory - srq yeaÍ
.{I{ day of the week ffi
''Jountzin
Shivarati festival
sTsl* to ÍemefibeÍ {rô wife's yoüiger
to remhd, JrsÍer
{ì[ë wallet frrErdq Shiva tefiple
qÍ<Frqr Ìealy, actüa y {n€ shìeld
coürsel í||Qql thiÍd eldest

opinion qJF{r{ Ftiday

lfsTr+F editaÍ {rÈs üteraturc
{r3ìlI{{T qK
f+sr,rf, * to considq, E||-ffr{Í gpod wishes
ptxsibility nÊÍchant; business
up to, as far as, propriemt
think alrout ITïFTTq givea name
üntiI telm us€d to
scieace sÍdrr * b sân
fl€4
hoaow, Íeswt ad&€ss a
fqÈqÍ abÍoad, t foÌeign lei to bgin
WI hundted professional
coúníÌy IFIT Súe.pa (ethnic
ÊÈfiÌT to go abroad
govennÊnt €rË ettÍetuely
CÌoup)
rcfttga. tuÊtgtw àrqíl wife
(Icd'rfr govemmenâl futtsq * to terch
,,frqr{ Jatátswad(goooess) t(|rt.í gravely
ffi student husband
{ii;rsr disasteÍ frÊtrq Srklcm
fq-qìifc school
frt. to leaú €FT t14 * to bathe to walk, set out A(r üafioíd
with RÌiI Me fË'àS' well-wisher €qrs q{ post office
frÈï to ead (.f( volce l8'qì Hitdi ã{ to b
frãalld * to frnish gfT
q€T
heaven @tcTfr Hindi-speakeÍ Èt* to look
f (í{l -q ( ctDem a healthy lÈERtfr Indian E rrl shott-statuÍed
frclÊ soldier €T{ taste,ÍIavout Hindu Qrc q hotel
ftl 1rr*f.r llrrlr ügat n& RrR bsry ÊqTq the Himalayas Èsrrt,. to be careful
frqtïr bordet €rFÍ healÍh ffi HituaIayan Ë do you heat?, OK?
I(.f I Ezn ltft wÌe @ mud úir choleÍa
fór(rfíqr sênes,scquence tqftíf-q í( woman Èflq,r{ to add up
-
€-e seat
6
€TÜ dúectly, stÍaight
ËFT Íight?, isn't that so?
{frr{ Ptg B!ÍR thousand
fu*. to snifr. súieu
thousandsof
Q!ì lí |
sí-sã -
üe sound ol the
6q( 9tr,yes
wind
liq (7
Wdon?
w a quüEr ntDe
Éq ( q tr t I graadÌrbtlreÍ
{6 happv J*.' gandfaíher
gsrE sueeestion ìl
stike
qFT rc Jeep: üe dowa S::
Q('í huÍt ,
w+ì6r a"*oo
6( lt( hürry
Íen oE, very distant
à<l w*k
,üìq. to Elate. tell -]
6(l{t'1 to b lost
beautiÂrl
+.È" gÍeet
ç<fr óeautiful lwoman)
ài- every
{f{d to be heard- :r-
Qqli
slQr q aeroplane
N auúDle
ËÌq - Ío d.!ve (a vehicle)
{ddr ofaÌtae
-:
.. €lq tu $nile,laügh
w* aotÊt Í, a en
õr ttq DoJs
$tur seaure.Dro,t€{ted
:
l
Qls atone
gÊc-Tr c(mvemence-
, .. Ërí hand, arm
à wtutê
ÉI{.Iq lrards and face
to c-ooldown
ÉFlFFr'ã hannfrtl
ü=. to think i::
. gr qt .gt . €È we
RC. u, aaK
OUr, OUIS
QìCt
ÈsÍ -
soIál
õ l^ lq q ' D ew s
òr*r< Mondav
- l
wind, air
,-- ,- ËfCÍ
scnoot
t6\! snow
*ìrrr estabüshment À=
It{r yesteday
. .
Íìcfil sltuaaon.
fËí.ïFT to go oú foot
citcmstances
@l bÍidgc 5d pul cr!' ST rutru
L_J bring õqÌqf lyãutru cup 6rT krp

m
5
bmther,eldeÌ qì-g
brotheryoungerqfí
buffalo
bus
rìfr
4{T
dãi
bhãi
bhaiÁi
bos
daughter
day
daybefoÍe
bÌfr
tqÍ
chori
dln

i{fia
GI
I
bu8station

buy
{ffI{gFÍf

ftf
bes
blsa||ni'
kinnu
yeÁterdây
decide tdlìqi
aíi
ni(üo
grrou
II

a çrpitâl (rqtlrfr ÌqjiirhÃni deiry devatã

crrdj d tr
about(time) -ffi -frrr q{rd,;r(IÈ kh|rãb, ccn[al qËìT madhya diarúoea fffr rüsõ
I.
J aDouÍ(quurory, Ì{q krrra nôtimÌo chrir Èq mec difficult .||Qir. gâ||ro,

I abroad Êà{Í vides bag sìfi Jhorã c|Ëap q(d| s03to qgõqrè apFyãro

z acque cl31 põunu bangle cüÌã úilúen qqEF boocãhaÉ dlty R Eailo
T<r
âdvic€ qwr{ sallÍü bank +{ boik Chineee tq riqt cuuya otsanr erõr tsdhã
twr{fu qa

o
âdüs€ 6e[ãh becoDe bannu cholera Qo nqra oooÍ àfi dhokÃ
dhu befoE -tr<rqfu .bh&dã olgat€tt€ Tò. c|rml dowúil q t!Ê oÌoto
afrer -cfu -pochi aChl clty sr{{ íobaÌ dÍink eq,1ìq nanra
ttq) aftemoon
age
ago
Ìq\ít|r
gÈ{
qÈ, qttõ
tul|li('
umer
De$o
*-l
1!.r1. tuÌu
gaÌDu,
óuÌ|l
clsss
clcan
olçveÍ
Fqr
qÍ6I
qìmõ
ksksã
ssphã dÍiver
calãk dry(vb)
gríT(
g{ïgd
piu[u
{rãibhar
erkãunu
$fl
"eU
pahile
I hunu cümb(vb) sR câChnu
airporr flaqr;Íefq ridtrúd q1]ï, qiq hgnu, clos€ {<qt boÍla each hanek
õT
-t alcohol T{fr rakli Íh5ltru gaÌnu easily qÊqfr*t sajilo$õcr

GI
I
all
allow
F{,qÈ
Êt
sab,sâbâi beüef
dinü below
lqvql(

iìïÍ
vütYgs

tala
cloth
clothes ipÌÌ
kapoCa
luCa
eãit
easy
Tf
(|qà
porvs
ssiilo

o
@
always
angry, to be
anyone
apple
{È
fts]'lT
{Ìô
çqfg
sadhqi
risõunu
kohi
syãu
biC
blâck
blue
board(vb)
6-à
{rÈ
ffi
T€
thiito
kjilo
nib
cadhnu
çold
coldnçss
coÌouÌ
CTTNC
ffi

t{
qr\FI
ciso
jãdo
Ìãg
ãunu
eat

empty
English
€E
embarrâssmêll;ÍÌlI
fì=ïT
,ìÌ-q
ldrãnu
lãj
Ìiío
õgFej

a
q)
amve

ask
ITr{,3{rÉt{ pugnu,

{Ì{
ãipugDu
sodhnu
boil (vb)
book
bom,to be
gRt
ffdlq
q.q1
ulr atru
kitãb
jâlrmaDu
cook(n)
cook(vb)
corner
cr<I
CFÌgT
bhã||se
pôkâutru
kuna
evening
Evercst
exam
àg-q"-,
(|RqFIÍ
qf{
belulã
qrdÈ
jãc

q at home sf, q{rIf Chani,

ghaÌfDã
boy
Brúmin
breaÌ
+cr

lq{
sì.fl
keÍã
bãhur
phodnu
cough
country
cow
ffi
<sT
trÉ
khoki
de6
gA
expensive
eye
l(iÈ
qÍqr
rnahãgo
ãkhã
 tq, sr{{t{ muÌb gl€eo QPqì Dtnyo Indian lTt(frq bhãrstlJa Monday tl tïq t( somvâÌ

aDuhãi guest q-ú{r pãhunã Inside -fìrã .bhitra money 9*|| po|sa
faoily Yríq rr p a n vâ Ì InteÍ€súng qTqïíFà rãLÌlõgdo mo h .t rÉi I nmrlllâ
family name q{ morflng fqrï bthiina
farmer tã{r{ Ìdsnn happiness q.fr khúi Japânese {rel.!r molner qrqT,qT ãmi, mã
Japafl
fal {È moÍo he (Hish) {ËÌ vahã lob {llrlr Jâg|Ì motoÍr.'âr r 4i motrÌ
qfi{T q(ì
father T{r. EI buvã.bã beo-.ow) S ü joumey yãtra my mem
fear Car he Mddle) TIÌ üi
field 1à, dit khet' bãn- head ãlìd Kathmaodu mõCf€Ì kã0m{ú name ;Ín nãm
Íauko
6nd CÌ3d pnü|lu headcold {qï ntghã xcy Hrrt I ssco neaÍDy .||q.n nqlrra
finish ftEsT:s-t Cdüánr heaÍ4to be {fu suninu ldlogrâfime ffi ko úever s@ cfr kah yat
fiÍst cF{df pahilo heat ---s
rrqr gaÌrD Kng r lql roJa Pani
lÌrght FtrTI;Í vietD help q<dd mad|t knowledge crü thiih new rrqr Dtya
food qÌìff,ìTfd khãnã, gsÌru newspaper 3fqrÍR akhbãÌ
bhãt here s-ÉÌ yahã hnguage lÌFIÍ bhã|â next day *f{c-.z bholipotlâ
foreigneÍ fcà{fr v €S Himataya Êqlqq h||||5hya h8t (pr€vious nice (t+iI rì nro
forger Êfr biÌssnu holidây Èfl,€ bidõ, wc!k) 3ì{q asd night (t t( tìÈtr
Friday 6u}r!vãr úuÍ$ ltll o/eaÍ) pol|or norür gÌ|t uttar
Tf{r{ '{r8rr
fiiend qffr sãthi home tf{ ghrÌ hst (fiml) qÈ{q antim novel 3çqRI upânyas
from -èfu, -srë dethi, hopê fislr ãóã hr! R Chilo now tF6à,eì-+ atrite,abâ
-bôta hot rrì, (|rír g8Ìm, qì< ah€r nowadays f5Ìrflq lqio{â
ftüir sFrÏd phstphút tãto htt!Í ffi ctÍhi
cdresh .rÈ$ Ca[é horel €È{Í hoFl llquor affi rolsi o'clock {ì b6je
German qfï jârúan houÍ qqëT llvê Eq barnu office étt!D*t aptrls
ShaSts
get CISE pôunu house tl.{ ghâÌ lodge õ{.t lqi official qfrIfrft atlhikâd
gbee fu6 ghiu howmüch? sifrt k ü? tondon iI!-ST laSCâÍ old r(rír puÌltlo
elft 3F{r', upahãr, how,Iike whar?fr5à ? krsto lo{. Ë<rgt hsÌãunu open (adj) Cqr khulã
+ÌÈfr koceli how,in what open (vb) dq kholnu
gúl nél keg rnamer? ã(t? krsaÌi müD -t t.í-q r.t9 logDe- opúuon tqqt( vlctÌ

grve 161 dinu huager ìTÌ{ bhok Dimhe orânge T€df suÍtrlã
go qE jãnu huÍ dukhnu müny àÌ dherai ondeÌ T€rgd úrãünu
€q
god à{dr devetã husband ,frqÍ{, ffi $nntq mürkct qqR bqiãÌ ouÌ Qr{r l|a|l|Ìo
good tÍ* ÌõmÌo logDe nüry fu{r,Ì{ biha outside nttt bãhira
granddaughteríIfàfr nftiDi gemu owl rfl9ír aplltro
gÍadfatheÌ ËSC4Í hqiuÌM I q mr Ibut ITRT mãsu
gÍaídmother ËT-{rqr hqiürãni ir -.1| -mA toot rt6T bhetsu packet {Ër boÍã
gÌandson qTkÍ n5Íi IrÌdiâ tÌr(fl bhãÌat ||Ir0 qrËõr mãil passport crs+t pôçpoÌt
pen lfinFI Ìdrm Íice (cookeo rn-{ bhna |olt|o(thing) àô kehi tenth Esï r|saú
p€oPle qt-È<J Ísr{È ric€(utrcookeoq[{q, cõtDrf tonrbody +€Ì kobi rhâr ià qo
hrl dch {'fr dhrri tofirti!!Ês rfË+ãrô krbilc rherE ileÌ tyúã
Pe$oÍl
q l.Ì, qÌfi, íâ kholi, kãhi rhey sírQe lll||||tru
phone \Òlí l||x)tr n&tr tor 6tr choÌi thiFt frqf ftrhõ
pick up s6lv{ ühõürü road qrà bõts fong fiï sit rtis qr yo
plâce org pt|| noom ãÌ5r koÈõ touh ek"r &l$ rhousands Qqr(r D4,|rrou
plâlê Qcri qQrq [wü ruIree at\. nDryt lpo* ìq bobü ThuÌsday f{È{rt btbtvãÌ
*tÊr 6 6ç ÈR1 boliou Tibet Èë bhot
play ll|y sq bosru ticket È€ ür.l
Polàara ftight frEr sidhn tim€ ìqT,qcq be4
polic€ a[rnge q-dÈ aDa4ho s8rtrry
policest tion f6t fftf pralrrl $ay ll-T il+F sstak tü€drc,ss rFõR thakit
thlnõ school qq shf ffi ynyartm--today qr.( qtr
POOÍ
lrfl-d goI|A seárch SÌq khoÍlu hostel 6lÌfF{ïg chilbôvâs tomcÍow *fr bhori
post o'ffce Ëqrfiq{ hulã& soc <q C-€ pâ0htru touÍist c{ã{ porystsk
gbü s€e!,to be sfu{ rtclüinu (rFt saphtl towaÍds -fd{ -drs
potato qlg ilü s€rd C6|q pqhftmu 3Ffg16 .k sÍit ltuesday cFqR nxng|rÈ
poünd poupd úe (ÌIidr) {d Yahã trtr grrti TV â.S. F üüi'
pËent tssü{, upohõr, úeorw) s ü qtE(|qt( atll!9tt twrce <âcfi rturpotsr
frÌÈ-ô kcctr sbe(Middle) sfr ütri f-5ì |rrÈo
Foblem ÌFteTt roDrEyE Shiva Ffq Sya firõÍâ nfrfi umbrEllâ 6kIT rüãtã
puÌpìe qrfr pyqF shoes ç{r juúã cÌâ.Èõt pu"È undersÌand gq bqihtru
shop (RÌìT pr6ol lihdru unAasmo4o*gfel bqibhü
que$ror prafoe since -èfu de*hi udveGity ÊFÊ-flqq vffvaü-
-
quit Er*! chi4nu sing rnq giuntr ubb Èg< çtür yõlryr
qúte qR rli sist€(elder Èâ d|ú hkc ft üru until -{[sT .eutrmt
sister,lounger aF6fr bohltrI blÊ otr FfrlCÍ phuliltru up to -ìÍET fl|trnrr
Íarn gtil
Prtr| $sÍer-ú-raw rfl\rc, tEr{ l'|utuu, bll qrà sgb üphill s{rd ukãto
Íeached,to be gfir{ Fgltru buì5ri h8ty *à niÈo usually Èiqô .ücrsi
re3d r{d po{hnü sleep ffiÍ Didrn trxi aqrffi jaro
rc@lve Crq Dôün|l deep KJ ruhr G. r9.,|| aq/t
'Jmi
Í€cendy rÍ<(í{ bhrrthrr slo!Ã,ly È<tì uEtiÌrl bach€r fsltrr ÉlL{ak valley s\çqìr ql&Íyaxa
r€st qRrcqf &{n smol(e cura bü lrd lüsnnu veçtables irqd'ffr torf,rn._
Aèa<q
gatrru khlnu bll off r||qrrr'! gax very àt dh€rrt
tEsE[lta w ÌçFtÌt $oâ(€{L to De rrl\ bhiitru
bryle {FE{
geÌru village .ll\í

sRfl
gAU

s5lrry-
rEtum
"fr plllÌnnu soÍre ur€oprc, nrÉl koDr- mandir úolin
visit Erd jõr|t whoce? s,{à küüo?
vorce fl,ar wife àtri(r, flürrq,
(qtçfl ltv8ll
wall qsT prdÍhsnü witrdow çqïq Jhr|.I
wash qiÍ dhüru útch ++fr botsr-
waúeÍman sÌfr üúi worrun qrËqr€ itud
wsf.h {& g|trü wolt ìt.t xtm
walcr crfi ptul {rrrr;f tim
õrfr hirDr- 8lr[u
wear qrq hDu woEy È<rqt cno
we{ú€( qÌqc rru!ün glrür
gF{R hdbvú wotship fqÍ pqF
w€ek {KT hrEtl wdte +q hlhtru
well {nr0 ÉnÍüí
weí l|trrì lllqm yêar úq, cf sd, vü{a
w€t fi{ffi hqaro yellov qÈô poHo
whât? ìf kd yestrday rQqr 4p
wheo? çfrèl krh[ef yer ERèsq rme.
wü€r€? ffr krhi? A.|IttrTI
wtib Èè súo you(HiSh) wt€ t"85fi
whole f{r,ft ptu5, youo-ow) if 6
púIri you(Mtufdb) ftfr tui'